YEAR ROOK

A 'T OF          A..

JEHOVAH'S WITNESSES

FOR 1930

Year BooK

of

Jehovah’s witnesses for 1936

CONTAINING REPORT OF ACTIVITIES FOR THE YEAR 1935, TOGETHER WITH DAILY TEXTS AND COMMENTS FOR 1936

Corporate Publishers:

Watch Tower Bible & Tract SocietyPeoples Pulpit Association International Bible Students Association

Brooklyn, New York, U. S. A.

Branch offices appear on last page

Copyright 1935

Made in the United States of America

WATCH TOWER BIBLE & TRACT SOCIETY

OFFICERS:

J. F. Rutherford President

C. A. Wise

Vice-President

W. E. Van Amburgh Secretary and Treasurer

PEOPLES PULPIT ASSOCIATION

OFFICERS:

J. F. Rutherford President

N. H. Knorr Vice-President

A. R. Goux Secretary and Treasurer

INTERNATIONAL BIBLE STUDENTS ASSOCIATION

OFFICERS:

J. F. Rutherford

President

Jesse Hemery

Vice-President

E. C. Chitty Secretary

W. E. Van Amburgh Xss’t Secretary and Treasurer

YEAR BOOK of

Jehovah’s witnesses for 1936

Report of Activities for 1935

JEHOVAH GOD is the King of Eternity, the true and living God. Everything with him is orderly and done in order. Being diligent to do the will of the Most High, his witnesses earnestly endeavor to work in harmony and in complete unity. Being of God’s organization, they keep their accounts accurately and report annually, that each one may be advised of the forward movement of the witness work committed into the hands of those who love and serve God. Because the fiscal year is made to end with September 30, the annual report is made at that time. As each one studies the year’s report he will rejoice and give thanks to God that he has been permitted to have a part therein, and will earnestly and prayerfully consider how he may increase his efficiency for the service of the King.

When Christ Jesus ascended to heaven and there appeared in the presence of God he received his instructions from Jehovah, which he faithfully carries out. He was then the rightful Ruler of the world, but Jehovah’s time had not then arrived for him to begin his reign and therefore the instructions he received from Jehovah were: “Jehovah saith unto my Lord [Christ Jesus], Sit thou at my right hand, until I make thine enemies thy footstool.” (Ps. 110:1,

A.R.P.) The enemies consist of Satan the Devil and all his -willing agents and supporters. Since Adam was expelled from Eden the Devil has held sway over wicked angels and wicked men. Since the dethronement of Zedekiah, Israel’s last king, which occurred in the year 606 B.C., Satan the chief enemy has been the god or invisible ruler of the whole world, occupying that position because Jehovah has permitted or suffered Satan to remain and to put forth his best endeavors to make good his boastful challenge to turn away men from Jehovah God. (Ex. 9:16, Looser) In his own due time Jehovah would, as he declared, cause his name to be made known to the nations and peoples of the earth and would exercise his power against the enemy to the vindication of God’s holy name. Christ Jesus the Lord is the one appointed and commissioned to carry out Jehovah’s purpose. It is the will of God that must be done, and for that reason Jesus could not begin his reign until the due time appointed had arrived. He must wait until the time appointed for Satan and for full opportunity to carry out his boastful challenge, and then His reign should begin, and that when the enemy was still active. Because Satan the Devil has been in control for so many centuries crime and gross wickedness hold sway. “The end of the world” means the end of Satan’s rule without interruption. That end must come in due time, and the time is when God sends forth his beloved Son to reign. Until then, of course, Jesus Christ, the rightful Ruler, must wait. When that time of waiting ends Jehovah sends forth his anointed King to rule; as it is written: “Jehovah will send forth the rod of thy strength out of Zion [saying] : Rule thou in the midst of thine enemies. ’ '-Ps. 110: 2, A.'R.V.

That long period of waiting came to an end in the autumn of 1914, and then were fulfilled the words of Jehovah: “I have set my king upon my holy hill of Zion.” (Ps. 2:6, R.V.) Zion is the name of Jehovah’s organization. The “hill” represents the highest part; and the prophecy therefore means that Jehovah placed at the highest part, or capital, of his organization Christ Jesus the King of the world. It was in 1914 that Jehovah sent forth out of Zion Christ Jesus to rule and installed him as the Head and Ruler of his capital organization and his rule began. That marks the fulfillment of the prophecy as written: “Thou hast taken thy great power, and didst reign, and the nations were wroth, and thy wrath came.” (Rev. 11:17,18, R.V.') The wicked and rebellious Satan refused to vacate, and war in heaven immediately followed, in which war Christ Jesus and his angels, expressing Jehovah’s wrath, fought against the Devil and his angels and the Devil and his angels were defeated and cast out of heaven and down to the earth, as stated in the Divine Record at Revelation 12:7-9. Long prior thereto it was authoritatively written in God’s Word that the proof to all watchful persons on earth that the end of Satan’s world had come would be the World War, in which nation would rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom. (Matt. 24:7,8) That war came in due time, in 1914. The Devil caused that war among the nations for the purpose of destroying all mankind and to thus prevent men from having the benefit of the blessings of the Almighty God. Jehovah stopped the war and held back the expression of his own wrath for a season in order that the witnesses of Jehovah might carry the message concerning him and his kingdom to the people and nations of earth, informing them that the kingdom of Christ is here and that the Kingdom is the only hope of mankind, and that all salvation proceeds from Jehovah the Almighty God. It is then that Jehovah’s witnesses must begin to carry out the commandment written, to wit: “This gospel of the kingdom shall he preached in all the world for a witness unto all nations: and then shall the end come. ’ ’ (Matt. 24:14) Clearly this means that for a season immediately following the end of the World War, and until a fixed period of time, the Lord would cause the testimony concerning the Most High and the Kingdom to be given far and wide among the peoples and nations of the earth, and when that testimony work is done, says the Lord, “then shall be great tribulation, such as was not since the beginning of the world to this time, no, nor ever shall be.” (Matt. 24:21) That great tribulation is the battle of the great day of God Almighty, otherwise called “Armageddon”.—Rev. 16:14,16.

It was in the year 1918 that the Lord Jesus Christ, the Messenger of Jehovah, in obedience to the will of God, came straightway to build up Zion, the capital organization, and which is called “the temple” or dwelling place of God, and through which Jehovah God deals with his creatures. “When the Lord shall build up Zion, he shall appear in his glory.” (Ps. 102:16) “For the Lord hath chosen Zion: he hath desired it for his habitation. This is my rest for ever: here will I dwell.; for I have desired it.” (Ps. 132: 13,14) “When the Son of man shall come in his glory, and all the holy angels with him, then shall he sit upon the throne of his glory. ’ ’ (Matt. 25: 31) Christ Jesus appears at the temple for judgment, which means that he takes account with all those who have agreed to do the will of God. (Mal. 3:1-3) That judgment “must begin at the house of God”, meaning those who are in line for the Kingdom. (1 Pet. 4:17) That judgment resulted in gathering out and casting aside the “evil servant”, that is, a class of persons who had agreed to do the will of God and had been moved to action by reason of selfishness, and had not faithfully kept their agreement with God. That judgment also brought forth the “faithful and wise servant’’, meaning those who had agreed to do the will of God and who earnestly and faithfully endeavored to keep their covenant. “Who then is the faithful and wise servant, whom his lord hath set over his household, to give them their food in due season? Blessed is that servant, whom his lord when he cometh shall find so doing. Verily I say unto you, that he will set him over all that he hath.” —Matt. 24:45-47, R. V. .

It is the ''faithful and wise servant” class the Lord Jesus brings into the temple of God, that is to say, into God’s organization, and anoints and commissions them to be the witnesses of Jehovah and then sends them forth through the land to give testimony before the nations of the earth. Such testimony must be given between the coming of the Lord to the temple and the day of the battle of God Almighty, or Armageddon. When such witness work is completed, according to the will of God, then the wrath of God will be expressed against all nations and peoples that have turned away from and against Jehovah and his King. Before that day of God’s wrath is expressed in the great tribulation the peoples of the nations must be informed in order that those of good will toward God may seek the Lord and his kingdom by taking their stand entirely on the side of God and serving him.—Zeph. 2:2-4.

THE WITNESSES

Upon whom is the obligation laid to carry the information concerning Jehovah and his kingdom to the people? Upon the company of persons whom God has taken out from the world as a people for his name. (Acts 15:14) It is that company of persons who are called out of darkness of this world, which is Satan’s organization, into the light of God’s kingdom and who must then show forth the praises of the Most High. It is the "faithful and wise servant" class, chosen of God and made into a nation or company of people wholly devoted to the Most High. To them the scripture is addressed, to wit: "But ye are a chosen generation, a royal priesthood, an holy nation, a peculiar people; that ye should shew forth the praises of him who hath called you out of darkness into his marvellous light."—1 Pet. 2:9.

Must the servant class, which is composed of God’s people, be compelled to engage in the service? No; compulsion is repugnant to Jehovah. Those who serve him acceptably must do so in the spirit of willingness prompted by unselfishness. Particularly is this true in the day of the expression of Jehovah’s power against the enemy organization, as it is written: ‘ ‘ Thy people offer themselves willingly in the day of thy power, in holy array: out of the womb of the morning thou hast the dew of thy youth.” (Ps. 110:3, R.V.) The words "the womb of the morning" here used mean the beginning of the Kingdom, that is, the birth of the Kingdom, when Christ Jesus is sent forth to reign and all those who have fully consecrated themselves to do the will of God, and who are faithful, offer themselves willingly in the service of the King. Their service is to do injury to no one, but to proclaim the truth of Jehovah’s purpose.

The name of Jehovah God must now be made known before he exercises his power in wrath to the destruction of Satan and his organization. The Lord Jesus Christ at the temple for judgment brings the nations before him by bringing to the attention of the nations the message of God’s truth. The people have been made blind by the fraudulent working of Satan and his agents, and now Jehovah will use his faithful witnesses whom he has taken out of the world for his name’s sake to inform the people of the truth, that they may have their eyes of understanding opened. Jehovah foretold this very day when he caused to be written these words: “Bring forth the blind people that have eyes, and the deaf that have ears. Let all the nations be gathered together, and let the peoples be assembled: who among them can declare this, and show us former things ? let them bring their witnesses, that they may be justified; or let them hear, and say, It is truth. Ye are my witnesses, saith Jehovah, and my servant whom I have chosen; that ye may know and believe me, and understand that I am he: before me there was no God formed, neither shall there be after me. I, even I, am Jehovah; and besides me there is no saviour. I have declared, and I have saved, and I have showed; and there was no strange god among you: therefore ye are my witnesses, saith Jehovah, and I am God. Yea, since the day was I am he; and there is none that can deliver out of my hand: I will work, and who can hinder it ? ’ ’—fisa. 43: 8-13, A.B.V.

What is the purpose of giving the testimony among the peoples and nations of earth? Not for the benefit of Jehovah, to be sure, because no creature can bring benefit to him. Not for the purpose of converting the World, because God makes no attempt to convert the world. The purpose is, as the Scriptures state, to inform the people that Jehovah is God, the Supreme One, from whom all blessings proceed, and that he will now give all persons of good will the opportunity of intelligently taking their stand on the side of Jehovah and receiving his blessings. All who do align themselves on the side of Jehovah God and his kingdom must do so willingly, and not by compulsion. Without some knowledge of Jehovah and his purpose it would not be possible for the people to take their stand on the side of the Most High and therefore receive the benefits from his kingdom. Those who hear the testimony and give heed to it are the ones who receive the blessings. Such are the ones whom Jesus described as the “sheep” class, sheep being used as a symbol of harmless and obedient ones.

It is only those who know and obey Jehovah God that will get life everlasting; as it is written: “This is life eternal, that they might know thee the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom thou hast sent.” (John 17:3) For that reason Jehovah now affords the people who desire to live the opportunity to learn the way to life. To his witnesses, the faithful servant class, Jehovah now says: “I have made thee a watchman . . . therefore hear the word at my mouth, and give them [the people] warning from me.” (Ezek. 3:17) The Lord tells his witnesses to give the warning, that those to whom the warning is given may make their choice, and upon them the responsibility rests when they hear the warning. Then says the Lord that if, when they are warned by the testimony, sueh refuse to hear, then they shall themselves bear the responsibility for their own death. But if the witnesses of Jehovah fail to give the warning testimony and men die because of such failure, then, says the Lord concerning the one who thus dies, "his blood will I require at thine hand,” that is, the responsibility will be upon the unfaithful witnesses. (Ezek. 3:17-21) God lays upon his witnesses the obligation to give that testimony as commanded. Is not this the same as compelling the servant to serve him by giving testimony? No. The punishment comes upon the unfaithful servant who fails to obey because that servant has made a solemn covenant or agreement to do the will of Jehovah God and then fails or refuses to carry out his agreement, and thus shows himself a covenant-breaker and not worthy of life; and it is written in God's law that such covenant-breaker is worthy of death. (Rom. 1: 31, 32) The punishment is inflicted upon the witness because of his disobedience to the commandments of the Lord. He was not compelled to enter into the covenant, but having voluntarily entered into it he must keep it by faithfully performing. The same rule is announced in Acts 3: 23 to the effect that all who do not obey the Lord Jesus Christ, Jehovah’s great Prophet, shall be destroyed from amongst the people. Those willingly and voluntarily undertaking to follow Christ are in line for the kingdom of God and must fully comply with the law of the Kingdom if they would receive the blessings thereof. “And Jesus said unto him, No man, having put his hand to the plough, and looking back, is fit for the kingdom of God.” (Luke 9:62) This illustration shows that one is not compelled to start to follow Christ Jesus, but, having once started, he must continue faithful in the performance of his agreement.

ORGANIZATION

Jehovah has budded up his capital organization, which must do his will. That organization is designated under the title “Zion”, the budding up of which begins at the second coming of Christ Jesus, as afore stated. That organization is now built up, and Christ is the Head thereof and is designated under the symbol of Chief Corner Stone. His faithful apostles, now resurrected and with the Lord in heaven, are the twelve foundation pidars of that organization. He having now come to the temple and gathered the faithful unto himself, those on the earth who are. wholly devoted to Jehovah, and who have been anointed and given a place in the temple, are members and earthly representatives of God’s organization. The entire organization is at unity, or one, that is to say, in complete harmony, acting always under the direction of the Head, Christ Jesus. It is written concerning Christ Jesus, the Head, that he says: “I delight to do thy will, 0 my God: yea, thy law is within my heart.” (Ps. 40: 8) His faithful followers must be -of the same mind. All those of the temple must delight to do the will of God and pursue the same course that Jesus pursued. (1 Pet. 2: 21) The time has now come for the fulfillment of the words that Jesus uttered concerning those who have been taken out of the world as witnesses for Jehovah, to wit: ‘‘That they all may be one 3 as thou, Father, art in me, and I in thee, that they also may be one in' us: that the world may believe that thou hast sent me.” (John 17:21) They are all one, having one objective, and that is to magnify the name of the Most High.

To the end that the people may be informed and have an opportunity to believe on the Lord and his kingdom Jehovah’s witnesses in obedience to his commandments carry forward the testimony and present it before the people. For this purpose the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society, the Peoples Pulpit Association, and the International Bible Students Association were and are incorporated to meet the requirements of the law of the land in carrying forward the witness work in which the united company of Jehovah’s witnesses are engaged. The witnesses of Jehovah preach this good news of the Kingdom by public and private speech, by the use of the radio, transcription machines, sound cars, phonographs, printed magazines, books and booklets, and by carrying these from house to house and using them to publish to the people the truth, that they might hear and have an opportunity to believe and take their stand on the right side. These witnesses are not trying to increase the number in any so-called “church” organization, but are merely obeying God’s commandment to bring these truths to the attention of the people, and that for the benefit of the people.

GOOD WILL

At the time of the birth of Jesus Christ, the “man child”, the messengers sent from heaven announced in the presence of watching witnesses these words: “Glory in the highest unto God! and on earth peace, among men of good will.” (Luke 2:14, Roth.) This does not mean peace amongst the nations of the earth, nor peace amongst individuals of the world in general. The nations are not of good will toward God, and not very many men are of good will toward him: Manifestly this message from heaven means the peace which God gives to those who devote themselves to him. It is written: ‘' Therefore being justified by faith, we have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ.” (Rom. 5:1) This text applies to the spiritual class, who enter the race for a place in the Kingdom. All men, by reason of original sin, are at enmity with God, and it is only when a man exercises faith in the shed blood of Christ Jesus and consecrates himself fully, agreeing to do the will of God, that he then receives the peace of God. (Phil. 4:7) When one by faith and consecration devotes himself to God and his organization, and the enmity of God toward that person is removed, he is then at peace with God. Such are the persons of good will, but are not in line for membership in the royal house. The announcement by the angelic host at the birth of Jesus, therefore, means peace on earth from God toward those who are of good will toward Jehovah.              ’

The prophetic drama which clearly foreshadowed this class of persons of good will is recorded at 2 Kings 10:15-23. Jehu was devoted to Jehovah God. He was a type of the Lord Jesus Christ, the executioner of Jehovah. During the performance of his official duties he found Jonadab, and Jehu said to Jonadab: “Is thine heart right?” And Jonadab answered, "It is.” That meant that as Jehu was on the side of Jehovah God, such was the heart desire of Jonadab also. Then Jehu invited Jonadab to ride with him in his chariot that he might observe Jehu’s zeal for Jehovah, meaning his unselfish devotion to Jehovah. In brief, this man Jonadab pictured the class of persons who come in contact with Christ Jesus, the Greater Jehu, and who is represented on the earth by the anointed witnesses of Jehovah. From such they hear the message of the Kingdom, and believe it, and desire to obey the Lord and King. Because their heart is right toward him they seek the Lord. Therefore the Lord Jesus Christ, the Greater Jehu, invites such persons of good will to join themselves to Jehovah’s witnesses and be their companions in service. Those who do so thus show good will toward God and Christ Jesus, and they then receive and have peace with God. They become the companions of the anointed class, that is to say, the companions of the “virgins” class, and are described in the Scriptures as “the virgins her companions that follow her”.—Ps. 45:14.

During the year just passed Jehovah, by Christ Jesus at the temple, has made known to those devoted to him that the “great multitude” is not a company of spirit creatures that will have their eternal habitation in heaven; but that the “great multitude” and the Jonadabs are one and the same class. The description of the “great multitude” and the attitude thereof is stated in this language: “After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands; and cried with a loud voice, saying, Salvation to our God which sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb.” (Rev. 7: 9,10) The place of the great' multitude is on the earth, and their standing is before the throne of Christ Jesus, and there they are approved, and this is shown by the faet that they are clothed with white robes, a symbol of approval, and they hail the King, who is the Redeemer of man, and ascribe salvation to God and his King.

The great multitude is that same class which Jesus describes as his “other sheep”. “And other sheep I have, which are not of this fold: them also I must bring, and they shall hear my voice; and there shall be one fold, and one shepherd.” (John 10:16) When Jesus Christ appeared at the temple in 1918 for judgment, that judgment began with those in line for the kingdom; and then he devotes himself to the other sheep: “And before him shall be gathered all nations; and he shall separate them one from another, as a shepherd divideth his sheep from the goats: and he shall set the sheep on his right hand, but the goats on the left. Then shall the King say unto them on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.” (Matt. 25: 32-34) The work of separating the sheep from the goats is now in progress, and that work during the year 1935 has progressed to the glory of Jehovah God.

Jehovah’s witnesses are assigned a certain duty to be performed by them while the Lord is thus separating the sheep from the goats. The assigned duty of Jehovah’s witnesses is to publish the message concerning Jehovah God and his kingdom and to proclaim that Jehovah is God, and this work they do with great joy. The Lord foretold this work through his prophet, to wit: “How beautiful upon the mountains are the feet of him that bringeth good tidings, that publish-eth peace; that bringeth good tidings of good, that publisheth salvation; that saith unto Zion, Thy God reigneth! Thy watchmen shall lift up the voice; with the voice together shall they sing; for they shall see eye to eye, when the Lord shall bring again Zion.” —Isa. 52: 7, 8.

The time has now begun during which time “all the ends of the earth shall see the salvation of our God”. (Isa. 52:10) Jehovah’s witnesses must bear the message of the Kingdom before the nations before the final end, which comes in the expression of Jehovah’s wrath. This they must do, because God has taken them out of the world for that very purpose. Their salvation now depends upon their faithfulness in doing what God has commanded them to do. That is the reason why the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society and its associate organizations now carry forward the work that is being done. Jehovah’s witnesses, anointed and sent forward by the Lord, constitute the visible part of God’s organization on earth, and the Jonadabs, or “great multitude”, have joined themselves to God’s organization by participating with the-anointed in doing the work.

The Jonadab company must be obedient to the Lord. To those who are of his organization the Lord now says: “And the Spirit and the bride say, Come. And let him that heareth say, Come. And let him that is athirst come: and whosoever will, let him take the water of life freely.” (Rev. 22:17) The bride here mentioned is made up of those who compose the royal house of the Lord, and these are the ones that proclaim the message of truth before the Jonadabs, and the Jonadabs are the ones who hear that message; and when they hear, the commandment is given to them in these words: “Let him that heareth say, Come.” Thus the Jonadabs join with Jehovah’s witnesses in informing the people that the water of life, which flows from the throne of God, is free to all who will conform themselves to the rules of the Lord’s kingdom. To the Jonadabs, or great multitude, the promise of the Lord is that if they continue faithful they may be hid during the time of Armageddon and pass through that time of great tribulation, and live for ever on earth, and never die. That is the reason why it can now be truthfully said that ' 'millions now living will never die”. They will live on the earth, and God will make the earth a fit and beautiful place in which to live.

OPPOSING ORGANIZATION

For many centuries Satan the Devil has been the invisible god or ruler of this world. ‘The whole world lieth in the wicked one.’ (1 John 5:19) Satan’s organization is extremely wicked and always aets in opposition to Jehovah. It was Satan who raised the question of supremacy as between himself and Jehovah, and now that question must be settled finally. Satan declared his ability to turn all men away from God, and now the final test is on to show that Satan is a liar and God is true. The success of Jehovah’s ■organization under Christ means the complete annihilation of Satan’s organization. There is a deadly conflict between the two organizations. All reasonable and thinking persons will discern at once that everything done by Jehovah’s organization under Christ is and will be opposed by Satan and his organization. Getting this truth fixed well in mind, it is easy to see why Jehovah’s witnesses are persecuted. The organization of Satan the Devil is made up as follows: The Devil is the head thereof, and associated with him is a host of wicked angels, all invisible to human eyes. On the earth the organization of men into governments is controlled and operated contrary to the will of Jehovah God, and therefore they are under the influence and control of Satan and do his bidding, whether men are aware of that fact or not. The three controlling elements of the visible or earthly part of Satan’s organization are these: Religion, led by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, with which are associated the so-called “Protestant” preachers, Jewish rabbis, and the principal of their respective flocks, and the simple ones that follow them. Supporting the religious element is that element which controls commerce, the chief men of whom employ religion as a camouflage to carry on their selfish business; and the third element is the political office-holders, who do the bidding of the commercial giants and hence are allies of the religionists. These three elements of Satan’s visible organization employ and control the public press so that their propaganda may be carried on according to their own ideas. For this reason the newspapers publish only one side of any controversy and refuse to publish the other side, and particularly any part thereof that discloses the truth of God’s Word. By this means the public press is a great instrument to keep the people blind to the truth. Every part of that organization is fighting against God and his people.

The Roman Catholic Hierarchy operates particularly through its secret order of Jesuits and has seized control of many nations, including Italy, Austria, Germany and other countries, and for years has desperately attempted to get complete control of the United States of America. The Roman Catholic Hierarchy is in fact a political organization, and employs religious ceremonies and sails under a religious name in order to blind the people concerning its real purpose. That organization is extremely selfish, cruel and grossly wicked. Pretending to represent God and his kingdom on earth the Roman Catholic Hierarchy in fact represents the Devil and is therefore the greatest hypocritical organization on earth. It follows the course of its father the Devil in deceiving the people and blinding them to the truth. The best evidence that the Roman Catholic Hierarchy is the chief instrument of the Devil on earth is the fact that it constantly engages in the persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses, because those witnesses bear the message of the truth of God’s kingdom to the people. The chief men in the commercial and political part of the organizations on earth have been made the principal men of the religious flocks. (Jer. 25: 34, 35) The Roman Catholic Hierarchy, by sly and subtle schemes, induces the political and commercial elements to do injury to Jehovah’s witnesses and to this end induces the political element to make laws to carry out selfish schemes for the persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses and opposition to the kingdom of God.

During the year 1935 the Roman Catholic Hierarchy induced the legislative bodies of some of the states, including Massachusetts, to enact a law requiring school teachers and pupils to salute the flag of the United States at regular intervals. All sensible persons will see that there is no necessity for such a procedure. Honest persons do not have to be required to swear their allegiance to the law of the land. They obey the law willingly. The purpose of the modern flag-saluting business is to single out those who are devoted to Jehovah God and his kingdom and to bring them into disrepute by persecuting them because of their faithfulness. The Roman Catholic Hierarchy know that Jehovah’s witnesses are lawabiding persons and that they can find no occasion against them except by reason of their devotion to God. The Devil is the father of that scheme, and the Roman Catholic Hierarchy is the chief instrument of the Devil to put the scheme into operation. The Roman Catholic Hierarchy, by this means, expects and intends to plant fear in the minds of the people and cause the people to remain quiet while the Hierarchy grabs control of the United States government and rules it by the hand of a vicious dictator, exactly as it now rules the German people. This is a part of the Devil’s scheme to cause all men to curse God and turn away from him.

Those who are devoted to Jehovah God have no objection, of course, to any person’s saluting any flag that such person desires to salute. Jehovah’s witnesses insist that this is a personal privilege of each and every one. The saluting of or salutation to a flag means this: “I depend upon what that flag represents for my salvation. ’ ’ Those who know and serve God in spirit and in truth look to Jehovah God for salvation, and not to any man or any man-made organization. It therefore follows that the saluting of any flag by those who are in a covenant with Jehovah God to do his will constitutes the breaking of that covenant with God, and such covenant-breakers are guilty of death.—Rom. 1: 31,32.

Recently a schoolboy of eight years, a son of one of Jehovah’s witnesses, was singled out to be used as a means of persecution upon Jehovah’s witnesses and to thereby put fear into the minds of other people. That young boy was directed to salute the flag. He declined to do so, stating that he served Jehovah God and Christ Jesus, and therefore could not salute any flag. The public press, which is the tool and publicity arm of the Devil’s visible organization, published throughout the land the fact that the young boy had refused to salute the flag; that he is a son of one of Jehovah’s witnesses; and that the Department of Justice of the United States is investigating the attitude of Jehovah’s witnesses. A like announcement was made public over the radio by those under the influence of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. Thus The Associated Press and the other means of propaganda by the Hierarchy published throughout the land just enough, and no more, to bring Jehovah’s witnesses into the limelight in an undesirable attitude. Then The Associated Press requested the president of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society to issue a statement of the attitude of Jehovah’s witnesses and the reason therefor. That statement was furnished, getting forth the position of the followers of Christ Jesus, but the press declined publication of the same because it stated the truth and exposed the fact that the Roman Catholic Hierarchy is back of the flagsaluting scheme, and that its purpose is to mislead the people and to withhold from the people its cruel purpose of seizing the United States government. In order that the position of Jehovah’s witnesses might be plainly stated the president of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society, on the 6th day of October, 1935, broadcast its position over a chain of fourteen .radio stations, to which radio stations the commercial rate was paid, in order to get this truth before the people. Thus Jehovah’s witnesses, at a money sacrifice to themselves, attempted to aid the people in hearing the truth, and the public press throughout the country not only attempted to prejudice all the people against Jehovah’s witnesses but refused to publish the statement showing the side of Jehovah’s witnesses. This shows their unfairness and that they do not desire the people to know the truth, and that Satan’s entire organization, as above described, follows his own course of resorting to lies, fraud and misrepresentation to keep the people in ignorance.

That a record may be kept of the position Jehovah’s witnesses occupy, as defined in the Scriptures, that radio broadcast is set forth as a part of this report, to wit:

SALUTING a flag

[Broadcast over chain October 6, 1935, by Judge Rutherford]

Recently much publicity has been given to the ease of Carleton B. Nichols, Jr., a schoolboy of tender years, who declined to salute the American flag and sing “America”. He is the son of one of Jehovah’s 'witnesses. The Associated Press has requested me to express my view of the matter. This I do from the standpoint of a true follower of Christ Jesus. To many persons the saluting of the flag is merely a formalism and has little or no significance. To those who sincerely consider it from the Scriptural standpoint, it means much.

The flag representatively stands for the visible ruling powers. To attempt by law to compel a citizen or child of a citizen to salute any object or thing, or to sing so-called “patriotic songs”, is entirely unfair and wrong. Laws are made and enforced to prevent the commission of overt acts that result in injury to another, and are not made for the purpose of compelling a person to violate his conscience, and particularly when that conscience is directed in harmony with Jehovah God’s Word.

The refusal to salute the flag, and to stand mute, as this boy did, could injure no one. If one sincerely believes that God’s commandment is against the saluting of flags, then to compel that person to salute a flag contrary to the Word of God, and contrary to his conscience, works a great injury to that person. The State has no right by law or otherwise to work injury to the people.

For many centuries Satan the Devil has been the invisible ruler of the nations of the earth. God has suffered or permitted him to so act in order to put a test upon the human race to determine how many will serve God willingly and how many will serve the Devil. For that reason Jehovah God gives this commandment to those who will receive His favor (Ex. 20:3, 5): “Thou shalt have no other gods before me. . . . Thou shalt not bow down thyself to them, nor serve them.”

At the third chapter of Daniel the Divine Record states that in violation of God’s law the government of Babylon made a law commanding all persons, when the national hymn was played, to fall down and worship before a certain image and that those who refused would be put to death in a fiery furnace. Three Hebrews who had covenanted to serve Jehovah God refused to obey that commandment and said to the king: ‘We have no need to obey you in this matter; and if it be that you cast us into the fire, our God, whom we serve, is able to deliver us from the fiery furnace; and he will deliver us.’ The test was on. The three Hebrews were cast into the furnace; and because of their faithfulness God delivered them, and thus put his disapproval upon the emblem-saluting law of Babylon.

The present-day attempt to compel school children and others who believe in and serve Jehovah God to salute any flag or sing any song is exactly in line with the Babylonish law just mentioned. To salute a flag means, in effect, that the person saluting ascribes salvation to what that flag represents, whereas salvation is of Jehovah God. The Hitler government, a stench in the nostrils of all honest people, requires all persons of Germany to give a certain salute and to cry out, “Heil Hitler!” and those who refuse to do so are severely punished. At the present time more than twelve hundred of Jehovah’s witnesses are in prison in Germany because of the commission of the ‘grave offense’ of declining to shout, “Heil Hitler!” They trust in Jehovah God and in Christ Jesus, and not in man.

Jehovah’s witnesses are men and women who have fully pledged themselves to obey the commandments of Jehovah God and Christ Jesus. They fully comply with the commandment of Jesus, who said: "Render therefore unto Cesar the things which be Cesar’s, and unto God the things which be God’s?’ (Luke 20:25) The meaning of that declaration of Jesus is this: Jehovah God is supreme, and his law is above all human laws. “Csesar” stands for the state or human law. All laws of the state or government that are not in conflict with God’s law should be gladly obeyed by all who are devoted to Jehovah God. When the law of man is in conflict with the law of Jehovah, then the Christian cannot obey that law of man. The apostles of Christ Jesus placed this exact construction upon the words of Jesus. In answer to charges of violating the law of the province or state they said to the high court: “Whether it be right in the sight of God [for us] to hearken unto you more than unto God, judge ye. ... We ought to obey God rather than men.” (Acts 4:19; 5:29) Jehovah’s witnesses take that same stand. They gladly obey every law of the land that is not in conflict with God’s law. But when the law of man is in direct conflict with God’s law, they cannot and will not comply therewith.

It is written, at Romans 13:1: “Let every soul be subject unto the higher powers”; and many wrongfully hold that “the higher powers” are the visible rulers of the nations of earth. This scripture is addressed to the followers of Christ Jesus, and to no others, and “the higher powers” are Jehovah God and Christ Jesus, and every true follower of Christ Jesus must obey God in preference to man.

The flag of the United States is not the flag of Jehovah God and Christ Jesus. It is the emblem of the power that rules the nation; and no one can truthfully say that God and Christ Jesus rule a government where crime is rampant. Men have organized governments, and Satan the Devil overreaches men and rules them because of their refusal to obey God, and hence the nations of the world are under the control of Satan the Devil, as stated at 1 John 5:19: “We know that we are children of God, and that the whole world lies in the power of the Evil one.’’ (Weym.) In proof of this, mark the words of Jesus. That the Devil is the invisible ruler of the world, note this from the Bible: Satan took Jesus up on a high mountain, and, being the god of this world, he showed Him all the kingdoms of the world and offered to give them to Jesus upon condition that Jesus would fall down and worship the Devil. Jesus refused and said (Matt. 4:10): “Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve.”

In further proof, Jesus, at John 12:31, stated that Satan is the prince or invisible ruler of this world. At John 18: 36, he said: “My kingdom is not of this world.” Jesus directed his followers to pray to God saying (Matt. 6: 9-12): ‘Thy kingdom come; thy will be done on earth as in heaven. ’ At 2 Corinthians four it is written that Satan is the god of this world and deceives and blinds the people to the truth.

Jehovah’s witnesses are true followers of Christ Jesus and must obey his commandments. To them the Lord says (John 15:19): “Because ye are not of the world, but I have chosen you out of •the world, therefore the world hateth you.” At John 8:23: “I am not of this world.” At John 14: 21: “He that hath my commandments and keepeth them, he it is that loveth me.” Concerning his followers it is written in the Scriptures (Phil. 3:20): ‘For our citizenship is in heaven.’ (Roth.) At 1 John 5: 21: “Little children, keep yourselves from idols.” At 1 Corinthians 10:14: ‘Wherefore, my beloved brethren, flee from idolatry.’ This commandment is based upon the commandment at Exodus 20; 4, 5.

FATE

Jehovah’s witnesses are in a solemn covenant or agreement to obey God and Christ Jesus, and for them to break that covenant means their destruction, as it is written, in Romans 1: 31, 32, that “covenant breakers . . . are worthy of death”. At Acts 3:23 they are told that every one who does not obey Christ shall be destroyed. "When Jesus was about to be put to death the Roman governor pointed to Jesus and said to the Jews, “Behold your King”; and the Jews answered, “We have no king but Cassar. ” (John 19: 14,15) They were in a covenant to obey God. Their repudiation of their covenant resulted in their destruction. The question to each of Jehovah’s witnesses therefore is: “Shall I obey every command of man and die, or shall I obey Jehovah God and live?”

Jehovah’s witnesses are not a sect or cult. They are true followers of Christ Jesus. The Bible is their only creed. God has given them a banner or flag, and that is his message of truth, as stated in Psalm 20: 5. Jehovah commands his witnesses to “lift up a standard for the people” (Isa. 62:10), meaning that his witnesses must raise God’s standard of truth and point to that as the only salvation of man. Every nation has a different standard; and therefore none of these are God’s standard.

The Pilgrim fathers left the oppressive nations in Europe, and landed in New England, because of their sincere desire to be free to worship God according to the dictates of their own conscience. It now appears that in Massachusetts, the very cradle of American liberty, an oppressive rule is attempted to be enforced that takes away the liberty of the citizen to worship God as God has commanded that man shall worship. The government or state is wholly inconsistent and unfair in compelling citizens to salute the flag. No one is injured by a man conscientiously serving God as he is commanded by the Lord. Jehovah’s witnesses are thoroughly devoted to God and Christ Jesus, and they will obey the laws of God always, and will obey the laws of the state or nation that are not contrary to God’s law. No government has a right to compel a man to violate God’s law in which he conscientiously and implicitly trusts.

The Supreme Court of the United States, in Church vs. United States, 143 U. S. 457, authoritatively ruled that the American government is a Christian nation. If the nation is standing by that ruling of the Supreme Court, then the nation must recognize the law of God as superior to the law of man, and where the two are in conflict the Christian must obey the law of God.

On the ships that ply the sea the Roman Catholic service is held. At that service the flag of the pope is displayed above the flag of the United States. The United States Senate went on record, in February, 1929, as favoring the right of the flag of the pope to be thus displayed, and this appears in the Congressional Record No. 47, page 2851. In that instance the senator from Massachusetts took the position that the flag of the pope is the flag of God. I wholly disagree with him in that regard; but giving him credit for believing that the flag of the Catholic church is the flag of God his words are appropriate. He said: “I for one refuse to depart from the time-honored American custom of placing the emblem of God above every other emblem of the world. I will not run down the pennant of God for any other emblem.” The Senate, by a vote of 68 to 10, sustained the senator in that position. The United States government is therefore estopped from saying that the flag of the United States should be honored above Jehovah God.

The most important question before the peoples of earth now is, Whom do you choose to serve, Jehovah or Satan the Devil? The crisis is here because the end of the Devil’s reign is at hand. Soon Christ Jesus tvill destroy all of the Devil's organization visible and invisible, and that includes all who take their stand on the side of the Devil. Each person must choose for himself. There can he no compulsion on either side. As for Jehovah’s witnesses, they will serve and obey Jehovah God.

It is a great pity for the people who attend the churches that their clergymen fail to teach them the truth of God’s Word. For their neglect the clergymen are doubly responsible. Today the combined church organization celebrates “loyalty day”. Do they mean loyalty only to man? If entirely loyal to God they do harm to no one. To compel the saluting of the Hag, thereby saying in symbol, “We look to the flag for salvation,” is doing great harm to man and reproaching the name of Jehovah God.—Gal. 6:10.

The Baltimore Evening Sun editorially expresses the true American sentiment in these words:

"For our part, we glory in Carleton’s spunk. Any statute requiring that the flag be saluted by school children is an insult to the Stars and Stripes, and ought to be resented by all patriots. Is our national ensign a swastika flag, to be respected only by forced salutes? Since when has the Star-Spangled Banner so lost the respect of the people over whom it flies that laws are necessary to make them pretend to honor it? What a disgraceful thing it is to assume that the flag would not be saluted if people were not afraid to refuse the tribute of respect I ... It is supposed to float because its people have raised it of their own free will and uphold it out of preference—not because they fear it, but because they love it. If the time has come when they must be compelled to pay it a formal and forced tribute, then the time has come to-haul it down and hoist in its place some red or black banner of dictatorship of force and fear.”—Baltimore Evening Sun of September 28, 1935.

The Nichols lad has been taught by his parents to serve and obey Jehovah. He has made a wise choice, declaring himself for Jehovah God and his kingdom of righteousness. All who act wisely will do the same thing. The great multitude that serves God is revealed as saying: “Salvation [salutation] to our God, which sitteth upon the throne, and unto the [Christ].”— Rev. 7 : 9, 10.

Real American citizens who love the principles of the Bill of Rights and the fundamental law of the land, who believe in freedom of thought and freedom of speech, and, above all, in the right of man to worship God. according to the dictates of his own conscience, will commend the lad, Carleton B. Nichols, Jr., for the bold stand he has taken for Jehovah. It is foolish to attempt to make good citizens by compelling them to act as hypocrites.

For more than 150 years honest Americans have obeyed the law without being compelled to salute the flag. Why the burning zeal to now compel flag-saluting ? The reason is this, and once again I warn the American people, that the same power that caused Fascism and Hitlerism to seize governments in Europe is moving to seize control of the American institutions, and the policy of compulsory flag-saluting is but a part in that program to put fear into the minds of the people and compel submission to an arbitrary dictator. One mighty religio-political organization is back of the entire program. That organization is not the honest Catholic population, but it is the Roman Catholic .Hierarchy, operating from Rome, in its determination to rule the whole earth. It has its political ambassadors in almost all countries. On March 8, 1934, a special cable dispatch from Rome to the New York Sun states that a definite agreement has been reached by President Roosevelt and the Vatican and that diplomatic relations shall be established between the United States and the “Holy See” as soon as public opinion in America can be brought around to the idea. Compulsory saluting of the flag is in line with Hitlerism and a part of the studied, diabolical effort to bring the people around to the Roman idea. It is high time that the loyal and faithful American people realized this great peril. True and honest men of America, in which class Jehovah’s witnesses are included, do not need shotgun methods or prisons to compel them to do what is right.

The public press is a part of Satan’s visible organization and does the bidding of that organization. It is the desire of the Devil and his agents to prevent the people from knowing the following salient facts, to wit:

That the United States Supreme Court has officially decided that the law of God is higher than the law of the nation because God is supreme, and that the American government assumes to be a Christian nation; and that in harmony therewith Jehovah’s witnesses have properly construed and applied the law of man and God, that is to say, the Christian must obey God’s law first, and must refuse to obey any law of man that is in conflict with God’s law.

That the United States Senate by an overwhelming vote has decided that the flag of the Catholic church is superior to the flag of the United States, and therefore that during the papal service the flag of the pope should be displayed on the American battleships above the American flag and given preference thereto.

That President Roosevelt has assured the pope, the head of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, that the United States government will enter into diplomatic relations with the Hierarchy as soon as the American people can be brought around to see it that way; that the flag-saluting is a part of the scheme of the Devil and the Hierarchy to put fear into the minds of the people and bring them around to the point of agreeing that diplomatic relationship with the Vatican is the proper thing.

That the position taken by Jehovah’s witnesses concerning flag-saluting is the proper and Scriptural one find in harmony with the law of the land.

If the people could come to know and understand these things it would interfere with the scheme of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy to seize control of the American government.

As further proof that the public press does not publish the truth but willingly resorts to lies in an attempt to strengthen the position of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, mark the following: After the broadcast aforesaid, setting forth the position of Jehovah’s witnesses concerning flag-saluting, and after the press had been furnished, at its request, with a complete copy of that speech, it refused to publish the speech, but in its very next issue did publish the untrue statement that the president of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society had ordered a strike in the vicinity of Boston concerning flag-saluting. Not only is that published statement untrue, but it is a deliberate lie published for the purpose of bringing reproach upon Jehovah’s witnesses and furnishing further excuse for their persecution. The president of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society has no power to call a strike concerning flag-saluting, has not done so, and will not do so. On the contrary, the position of Jehovah’s witnesses is plainly stated in his speech to the effect that saluting the flag is an individual matter that each one must decide for himself, and that the true follower of Christ Jesus cannot consistently salute any flag, because by doing so he attributes salvation to what the flag represents, whereas salvation proceeds from God alone.

During the fiscal year the Roman Catholic Hierarchy has induced and caused the persecution, the arrest and imprisonment of many of Jehovah’s wit-

nesges, and continues to do so. In New Jersey and other, states many of Jehovah’s witnesses have been imprisoned on the charge of distributing literature without a permit from the police, the issuance of which permit rests within the discretion of police officers. One who has covenanted to do the will of Jehovah must obey his commandments and therefore could not ask a permit of some earthly creature to do what Almighty God has commanded shall be done. The duty of the Christian is to obey God’s commandments. It is also his duty to obey the laws of the land as long as such laws do not conflict with God’s law. The law of the land is that men shall ask a permit to go from house to house with literature, and the law of God is directly in conflict therewith, which means that those in a covenant with him shall go from house to house with the message or gospel of the Kingdom and tell it to others and present it to them in printed form. The question is not one to be debated by the followers of Christ Jesus, because they must obey God first and all the time. The apostles of Jesus Christ were arrested because they went about the city from place to place preaching the gospel, and when arrested they construed God’s law exactly as here stated. A court before whom they appeared instructed the apostles that they must not teach in the name of Jesus Christ: “But Peter and John answered and said unto them, Whether it be right in the sight of God to hearken unto you more than unto God, judge ye.’’ (Acts 4:15-19) “We ought to obey God rather than men.” (Acts 5:29) Such is the correct position that must be taken by all followers of Christ Jesus. For this reason they could not ask a permit of an imperfect man to do what God has commanded them they must do.

The Lord Jesus Christ is Jehovah’s great Prophet, of whom Moses was a type. Jesus utters the commandment of Jehovah God with absolute authority. To those in a covenant with God Jesus commands: "This gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in all the world for a witness unto all nations; and then shall the end come.” (Matt. 24:14) The true followers of Christ Jesus will not stop to ask the question as to whether they shall preach this gospel of the Kingdom, but will gladly obey the commandment at the risk of their earthly lives. It is far better to puffer indignities and punishment at the hands of men than to disobey God and be destroyed. Those who do refuse to obey the commandments of the Lord shall suffer destruction, as stated: "It shall come to pass, that every soul, which will not hear that prophet, shall be destroyed from among the people.” (Acts 3:23) The opposition of Satan’s organization, therefore, cannot be permitted to deter faithful men and women who follow Christ Jesus in doing their duty as commanded by the Lord.

In Quebec, which is ruled and ridden by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, Jehovah’s witnesses during the year have been arrested, tried, and convicted of the "crime of seditious conspiracy”. The facts upon which such conviction was obtained are these: That Jehovah’s witnesses went throughout the city of Quebec and distributed freely to the people without charge booklets containing the message of God’s kingdom, and which message, including the words of the prophets and Christ Jesus, exposed the wickedness of Satan’s organization. Those truths angered the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, and in order to give vent to their cruel hatred they caused the arrest, prosecution and conviction of those faithful witnesses of the Lord. Thus the Hierarchy has kept the people of Quebec in ignorance of the truth and continues to prevent them from understanding the truth. If the Lord Jesus Christ were in Quebec today he would be imprisoned and would be crucified, because he would continue to proclaim the message of Jehovah God.

In Germany the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society work has been completely destroyed, although individuals of Jehovah’s witnesses still continue to tell the truth. In that land hundreds of Jehovah’s witnesses are imprisoned, and some brutally killed, because they attempt to follow in the footsteps of Jesus and the apostles and proclaim the Kingdom, which is the only hope of mankind. Furthermore, for meeting together in their own houses for the study of the Bible these witnesses of Jehovah are arrested and thrown into prison, and this is done at the instance of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. There is not one of Jehovah’s witnesses in Germany that is harmful. His only offense is being faithful to the Lord. The Roman Catholic Hierarchy organized in Germany the Communists and used that organization as a scarecrow to put fear into the minds of the people, and then the Roman Catholic Hierarchy brought into existence the Nazis and with that organization seized control of Germany and put one Hitler up as absolute dictator. The real power behind Hitler is the Jesuit organization of the Hierarchy. In Germany it is now a high crime to refuse to salute the swastika and cry out “Heil, Hitler!’’ To be sure, no one who is in a covenant with Jehovah God will give that salute and cry out “Heil, Hitler!” because it means “Salvation by Hitler”, whereas salvation is of God through Christ Jesus, and there is no other way whereby men might be saved.—Acts 4:12.

It is easy to be seen that the peoples of this world are under the Devil’s control and the persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses continues solely because they are proclaiming the message of God’s kingdom that is in opposition to the Devil’s organization. But persecution has not deterred and will not deter the faithful witnesses of Jehovah. They are not at all surprised or alarmed by reason of such persecution. Long ago Jesus foretold this very time. He said to his faithful followers: "If the world hate you, ye know that it hated me before it hated you. If ye were of the world, the world would love his own; but because ye are not of the world, but I have chosen you out of the world, therefore the world hateth you. Remember the word that I said unto you, The servant is not greater than his lord. If they have persecuted me, they will also persecute you; if they have kept my saying, they will keep yours also.”—John 15:18-20.

During the fiscal year of 1935 the Lord has graciously made known to his people the meaning of many of the prophecies, including that of Habakkuk, which show the reason why much persecution is now in progress against Jehovah’s witnesses, and also exactly what shall be the result. This persecution gives Jehovah’s witnesses an opportunity to prove their faithful devotion to God and to maintain their integrity, and permits those of the Devil’s organization to don their vestments and so identify themselves for destruction at the hand of the Lord. In all this time of stress Jehovah God, true to his promise, feeds his people upon the food convenient for them. (Prov. 30:8) Amidst this cruel persecution Jehovah has abundantly sustained his people and has blessed them richly. Endeavors to make known his name and his kingdom have been faithfully carried on by his witnesses and their efforts have been greatly blessed, and this will appear from the examination of the facts and figures set forth herein. Jehovah’s witnesses delight to be on his side and rejoice that they are privileged to bear some of the taunts and jeers and persecution and sufferings that came upon Christ Jesus and which to them is an assurance that if they continue faithful they shall for ever rejoice and be with the Lord in carrying out the purposes of the Most High.

AMERICA

It has pleased Jehovah to permit his servants in the United States of America to direct the witness work throughout the nations of the earth in giving publication to this gospel of the kingdom. The place is not so important, but whatsoever the Lord does and directs is important. At 124 Columbia Heights, Brooklyn, New York, is the chief executive office of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society; and at 117 Adams street is the operating office and place for the manufacture of the literature and other instruments for the publication of the Kingdom message. Branch offices are established in various countries of the earth, and these report at regular intervals of thirty days to the main office, and at the end of the fiscal year furnish a comprehensive report of the activities in those respective countries. It is the duty and privilege of the president of the Society to receive these reports and then to make a general report to all the witnesses throughout the land.

It will be observed that in this report those who direct the work at the various branch offices are no longer called “managers”, but it is deemed advisable to designate them “directors of service”. There is one manager of the campaign, and that is the Lord himself. All others in the organization merely repeat organization instructions.

Engaged in the Society’s work at its American headquarters are 195 persons. Living accommodations and food must be furnished to each and every one of these, together with a small allowance of cash for personal expenses, all of which goes for their actual tnaintenanfee. The service of each one is donated and gladly performed; each one counts it a great privilege to be permitted to have any part in the service of the Lord in making known his kingdom. The amount received by each and every one is the same, so that there is no respect of persons shown, all in the Lord’s organization being on a common level.

MONEY STATEMENT

Those who are in opposition to the truth and therefore in opposition to the Society’s work are more deeply concerned and disturbed about the money that is necessary to carry on the Society’s work than are those who are actually engaged in the service. The Society and its servants receive money only in the capacity of trustees for the use and benefit of the work of the Lord’s kingdom. The money is paid out to carry on the work of forwarding the message of the Lord’s kingdom and is used in the most economical way possible. The money that is received belongs to the Lord, and his servants at headquarters must use the best means known to accomplish the greatest amount of possible good in the most economical use of such money. The books, booklets and other literature of the Society are placed in the hands of the people solely for the purpose of imparting to the people the information concerning Jehovah God and his kingdom, and therefore all money received by those placing the literature in the hands of the people is received as a donation to be used, and is used, to further the publication of the Kingdom message. No one of the Society engaged in its work makes any pecuniary or money profit. Only actual expenses are paid by the Society to those engaged in the service, and often many of those engaged in the service pay their own expenses, of which we have no account. Below is given a statement of the amount of money received during the fiscal year ending September’ 30, 1935, and the amounts expended.

At the end of the fiscal year of 1934 there was a deficit of $149,955.42. At the beginning of the fiscal year of 1935 this deficit was wiped off by voluntary contributions, and the fiscal year of 1935 began with a cash balance of $35,108.42. Therefore the following statement in brief of the money transactions of the Society during the fiscal year of 1935:

Cash balance on hand                 $35,108.42

Received as donations for Bibles, books, booklets and other literature, and sound equipment           510,387.44

Estates and voluntary contributions    103,306.18

Total                                  648,802.04

EXPENDITURES

Operation of factory	$283,469.38
Radio	197,652.23
Advertising	15,551.07
Sound equipment	58,241.53
Maintenance, Bethel home and family	40,530.07
Foreign branches	35,455.58
Legal and miscellaneous	4,714.47
Free literature	21,609.37
Interest on mortgage	11,609.37
Total receipts	648,802.04
Total expenditures	730,473.80
Deficit	92,671.76

Those who oppose the promulgation of the message of Jehovah’s kingdom insist that the work of the Society is commercial. Such is entirely contrary to the facts. Commerce is the carrying on of traffic or trade for the purpose of making a pecuniary or money profit to those engaged in -the business. There is no person in the Society of Jehovah’s witnesses that makes any pecuniary profit. The service of each and every one is voluntary and is given and rendered as a privilege to those who serve God. As long as money or coin is used as a measure of value in the world and the Lord’s people are in the world, although not of it, all raw materials and other necessities used by the Society must-be bought and paid for in this medium of exchange, and for that purpose money is had by contributions, as above stated. Those who have a keen interest in and love for Jehovah’s kingdom contribute their money as the Lord prospers them. There is no thought of money gain to anyone. All those engaged in the service of the Society do so at a money sacrifice to themselves rather than a profit. In order to provide, at the least possible cost, the food necessary for the Bethel family, who do the work at the Society’s headquarters, gardens are cultivated and thus a food supply is produced. None of such food is sold to the public, but all that is produced is consumed by those who are engaged in the Lord’s service. Those doing the work in the gardens or fields do so on the same terms and according to the same arrangement as those at the factory and the Bethel home. All is voluntary service. This clearly appears to be the will of the Lord; and since it is his way, his people delight to follow in that way.

The Society has always followed the rule of contracting no debts, and therefore purchasing nothing necessary to carry on its work until it is apparent there is some way of paying the bill. For this reason it pays its bills promptly, proceeding upon the Scriptural admonition to “owe no man any thing”. The deficit that appears this year it is hoped will be made up at an early date.

FACTORY

The Society maintains its own building and factory at 117 Adams street, Brooklyn, not for the purpose of making money, but for the purpose of producing at the-least possible cost the literature that is so necessary to go into the hands of the people to inform them concerning God’s kingdom. Were this not true the cost of the books and booklets ■would be so great that many of the poor could not have them and the Society would not be able to give the literature to them. The management diligently considers how the literature can be put into the hands of the people at the least possible cost. Books of the size of those manufactured by the Society, if manufactured and sold in a commercial transaction, would be retailed at approximately $2.50 per book. The contribution accepted for one of these books never exceeds thirty cents, and often is much less than that.

During the fiscal year the factory at Brooklyn has produced books, booklets, magazines, tracts, phonographs, transcription machines, and sound equipment, all for the purpose of carrying the message of the Kingdom to the people. There has been an average of 138 persons engaged in the work at this factory during the year. The phonographs, transcription machines, and sound equipment are produced and placed in the hands of the brethren at never above what it costs, and often at less than cost, and these sound equipments are used for the purpose of promulgating the message of the Kingdom. The factory is scheduled to work eight and one-half hours per day, five and one-half days per week. Saturday afternoon and Sunday are devoted to work of visiting the people and instructing them concerning the Lord’s message. During the year the demand for literature has so increased that it was found necessary to work additional hours, and often a shift is run at night; so the working days during the year aggregate a total of 300 days of operating time of the factory.

PRODUCTION

The work accomplished during the twelve months far surpasses that of any previous year. The total production of books and booklets reached the high mark of 28,117,523. This makes the average production of books and booklets 2,343,000 per month. In addition, there were millions of copies of The Golden Age and The Watchtower printed, both of these magazines showing an increase over the previous year. Due to the tremendous demand in the field for literature, the booklets manufactured made a gain over the previous year of 2,800,366. The production of bound books decreased for two reasons: (1) the publishers were using their surplus supply, which was in storage throughout the country, and (2) we did not have the time to print more bound books, because of the additional work on sound equipment. Shipments of bound books .from the factory exceeded the production, thus depleting our surplus in store.

In addition to books, booklets and magazines, this factory also produced calendars, placards, radio folders, etc., to the number of 44,784,289 pieces. We manufactured also transcription machines, phonographs and special sound equipment. Below is set out for comparison the production for 1934 and that for 1935:

	1935	1934
Bound books	1,519,277	1,942,152
Booklets	26,598,246	23,797,880
The Watchtower	1,425,425	1,330,145
The Golden Age	2,659,800	2,408,400
Calendars	23,399	17,254
Radio folders	37,252,000	30,317,000
Transcription folders	1,866,000	11,697,000
Other punting	5,642,810	13,149,867
Portable transcription machines	135	258
Sound car equipment No. 3	44	■ ■
Microphone attachments	55	100
Phonographs Special sound equipments	1,458	1,245
(Sound boats and aero-masts)	4	—

The books and booklets produced at the factory 'were printed in 37 different languages. There was a total of 203 different publications issued. During the year there was manuscript furnished by the president of the Society for seven new publications. They were the bound book Jehovah and the booklets GovernmentHiding the Truth: Why? Universal War Near, Favored People, Who Shall Rule the World? His Vengeance, and Supremacy. The booklet Who Shall-Rule the World? has already been published in 21 different languages. During the year it was necessary to print 1,006,599 of the book Jehovah. This publication has been well received by the public.

Below appear the names of the books and booklets printed in the various languages published during the past year. In addition to this list there were published the Watchtower magazine in ten languages, and The Golden Age in two, at the Brooklyn factory.

The Harp of God—Chinyanja, Italian.

Creation—Swedish.

Reconciliation—Bohemian.

Government—Bohemian, Danish, Russian, Spanish.

Life—Portuguese.

Prophecy—English, Spanish.

Light, Book One—French, Polish.

Light, Book Two—French, Polish. Vindication, Book One—Spanish. Vindication, Book Two—Greek, Italian. Preservation—Arabic, Danish, Finnish, Japanese, Lithuanian, Swedish.

Preparation—English, Afrikaans, Chinese, Danish, German, Swedish.

Jehovah—English.

Year Book—English.

Government (booklet)—English, Spanish.

Universal War-Near—English, Croatian, French, German, Greek, Italian, Japanese, Norwegian, Polish, Spanish, Swedish.

Who Shall Bule the World?—English, Albanian, Arabic, Chinese, Croatian, Fnnish, Finnish, French, German, Grech, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Lithuanian, Norwegian,

Polish, Russian, Slovak, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian.

Favored People—English.

Sup remacy—English.

Jhs Vengeance—English.

Tmthr Shall It Be Suppressed?—English.

Angels—English, Afrikaans, Arabic, Bohemian, Chinese, Croatian, Danish, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Norwegian, Polish, Russian, Slovak, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, Yoruba.

Prosperity-Famine—English.

Righteous Ruler—English, Bohemian, Chinese, Croatian, Danish, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Norwegian, Polish, Slovak, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, Yiddish, Yoruba.

World Recovery—English, Finnish, French, Italian, Norwegian, Russian, Spanish, Swedish.

Beyond the Grave—English, Tagalog.

His Works—English.

Intolerance—Finnish, French, German, Polish, Tagalog.

Dividing the People—Armenian, Chinyanja, Hungarian, Itsekiri, Sesuto, Xosa, Yoruba.

Escape to the Kingdom—Chinyanja, Hungarian, Malay, Sesuto.

The Crisis—Chinyanja, Rarotongan, Spanish, Tagalog.

The Kingdom, the Hope of the World—Zulu.

Who Is God^!—English, Chiwemba, Greek, Italian, Norwegian, Russian, Spanish, Swedish.

What Is Truth?—Greek, Hungarian, Hocano, Spanish.

Cause of Death—English, Afrikaans, Greek.

Hereafter—Greek, Itsekiri, Russian.

Good News—Bohemian, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Norwegian, Polish, Swedish.

Liberty—Afrikaans, Bohemian, Greek, Polish.

The Final War—English, Bohemian, Russian.

Health and Life—Bohemian, Polish.

Home and Happiness—Finnish, German, Norwegian, Spanish, Swedish.

Keys of Heaven—German, Tagalog.

Where Are the Dead?—Afrikaans, Chinyanja, Malay, Portuguese, Xosa.

Crimes and Calamities—Spanish.

Judgment—Portuguese, Spanish.

Prosperity Sure—Portuguese, Spanish.

The Last Days—Portuguese, Spanish.

Hell—Xosa.

Our Lord’s Return—Spanish.

Standard for the People—Chinyanja.

The purchase of all materials is done in the most economical way. Requisitions are issued for material, and these are used to check against the quantity received, and the greatest of care is exercised in the handling of the raw material. During the year the factory purchased and used paper to the amount of 1,948 tons. Other material purchased and used during the year included cardboard, cloth, glue, and paste, all of which is necessary in the manufacture of books and booklets. Ink produced and used during the year to the amount of 34,997 pounds; paint produced and used by the factory to the amount of 452 gallons.

PREACHING BY MACHINERY

Without a doubt the Lord has put it in the minds of men to produce machinery in these days and to use at least some of this to his own glory. In times past preaching was done by word of mouth, and that to comparatively small audiences. In these modern times mechanical devices are used, which are designated under the term “sound equipment”, and this includes phonographs, transcription machines, automobiles and trucks equipped with the necessary mechanical device to reproduce the speech on phonograph records or transcription records. These are used throughout the earth in proclaiming the message of the Kingdom. This is not the message of any man, but the truth taken from God’s Word and put in such a way that the people may hear it without cost to themselves. There is a constant increase in the demand for this sound equipment, and the speeches are reproduced in the English and in several other languages. These speeches are reproduced by discs or records employed by the above-mentioned mechanical devices. Some of these cars are equipped with living quarters, so that the publishers may travel through the country and engage daily in preaching' the gospel message by means of sound equipment and then by producing the message in printed form that the people who are interested may study the same. Many of the publishers throughout the country equip their own private automobiles for reproducing the speech in this manner, so that they can preach the gospel as they drive through the country.

SHIPMENTS

The publication manufactured at the Brooklyn factory supplies not only the United States, but all English-speaking countries on the earth. In addition to the English books produced, books in 48 different languages were dispatched to different countries and to isles of the sea, during the fiscal year. The total shipments during the year 1935 were, to wit, 26,118,875 pieces. That was a healthy increase over the previous year. The Society maintains depots or storage houses in different parts of the United States, to which places carload lots are shipped and then are distributed from there to the companies. The book published for the year 1935 is entitled Jelwvah, and the shipments from this office during the year amounted to 894,201 volumes. During the fiscal year there were sent out from this factory 21,621 Bibles, which is a healthy increase over the previous year.

Below is a comparison of shipments of English and foreign books and booklets for 1935 with those of 1934:

1935     1934

Books Booklets Total    Total

English language:

To branches 439,598 7,372,932 7,812,530 7,379,444 To publishers

in B. 8. A. 1,189,568 14,651,882 15,841,450 13,680,466 To public direct

by maU          51,861    65,873   117,734   170,609

Eoreign languages:

To branches       123,560 1,520,557 1,644,117 1,170,737

			1935	1934
	Books	Booklets	Total	Total
To publishers in U. S. A. To public direct	41,623	651,713	693,336	639,318
by mail	2,436	7,272	9,708	12,552
Grand Total	1,848,646	24,270,229	26,118,875	23,053,126

In addition to the above shipment of books and booklets this factory shipped out during the year the Watchtower and Golden Age magazines, calendars, catalogues, placards, also phonograph records, transcription records, and sound equipment. The cost of shipping alone during the year amounted to approximately $110,000. Below is a table showing the literature published in the various languages and shipped. This includes both foreign and English.

SHIPMENTS OF FOREIGN LITERATURE DURING 1935

Language	Branches	Publishers	Total
Afrikaans	52,049	14	52,063
Albanian	14,912	564	15,476
Arabic	20,008	5,729	25,737
Armenian	10,191	3,813	14,004
Bohemian	4,173	9,969	14,142
Bulgarian	2,197	532	2,729
Chinese	23,464	3,248	26,712
Chinyanja	59,128		59,128
Chiwemba	5,400		5,400
Croatian	1,710	8,577	10,287
Danish	9,565	2,673	12,238
Estonian	25	104	129
Finnish.	19,819	9,083	28,902
French	67,394	15,329	82,723
German	99,795	59,704	159,499
Greek	79,643	35,828	115,471
Hebrew	2	184	186
Hollandish	6,677	2,935	9,612
Hungarian	29,823	27,392	57,215
Icelandic		103	103
Hoeano	14,941	241	15,182
Italian	59,046	156,396	215.442
Itsekiri	5,530		5'530

Language	Branches	Publishers	Total
Japanese	14,425	4,607	19,032
Korean.	231	58	289
Lettish	6	33	39
Lithuanian	897	12,476	13,373
Malay	8,692		8,692
Norwegian.	19,428	4,704	24,132
Polish	31,516	74,542	106,058
Portuguese	46,773	6,250	53,023
Rarotongan	2,520		2,520
Rumanian	618	4,414	5,032
Russian	52,076	12,590	64,666
Serbian	200	2,048	2,248
Sesuto	16.316		16,316
Slovak	41,102	19,097	60,199
Slovenian	120	3,533	3,653
Spanish	611,669	182,766	794,435
Swedish	22,816	8,888	31,704
Tagalog	26,821	278	27,099
Turkish.	5,500	66	5,566
Turko-Armenian	100		100
Ukrainian	81,102	10,277	91,379
Xosa	10,837		10,837
Yiddish	6,580	13,998	20,578
Yoruba	47,169		47,169
Zulu	11,111	1	11,112
Total	1,644,117	703,044	2,347,161

SHIPMENTS OF ENGLISH PUBLICATIONS, FISCAL YEAH 1935

	Branch	Publishers	Public	Total
The Harp of God	4,712	120,744	948	126,404
Delvuei ance	4,005	91,035	970	96,010
Creation	5,006	23,866	879	29,751
Reconciliation	2,002	79,541	777	82,320
Government	3,516	46,698	977	51,191
Life	777	19,681	688	21,146
Prophecy	44,943	14,422	699	60,064
Light, Book One	1,156	49,818	788	51,762
Light, Book Two	766	47,585	761	49,112
Vindication, Book	One 3,220	4,890	508	8,618
Vindication, Book	Two 3,213	3,675	470	7,358
Vindication, Book	Three 3,136	3,040	458	6,634
Preservation	16,026	37,308	464	53,798

	Branch	Publishers	Public	Total
Preparation	5,554	78,512	887	84,953
Jehovah	326,665	545,528	22,008	894,201
Total (jr)	424,697	1,166,343	32,282	1,623,322
Miscellaneous books	12,517	5,005	19,074	36,596
Total Books	437,214	1,171,348	51,356	1,659,918
Gov’t-Hiding Truth 1	,537,817	2,434,398	2,593	3,974,808
Universal fWar Near	723,058	1,268,336	4,979	1,991,373
Favored People	536,632	922,588	3,725	1,462,945
Who Shall Pule World? 1	,944,615	2,164,971	3,778	4,113,364
His Vengeance	689,631	858,339	2,756	1,550,726
Supremacy	715,327	860,912	2,865	1,579,104
Angels	907,546	1,149,140	8,386	2,065,072
Truth: Shall It De S’d?	348	2,888,667	608	2,889,623
Righteous Euler	4,452	387,589	11,685	403,726
Prosperity-Famine	5,000	598,065		603,065
Beyond the Grave	81,294	148,978	1,559	231,831
His Works	92,197	120,773	1,196	214,166
World Recovery	1,018	115,438	1,256	117,712
Intolerance	82	28,737	868	29,687
Dividing the People	224	61,585	972	62,781
Escape to the Kingdom	85	27,686	946	28,717
The Crisis	53	28,975	987	30,015
The Kingdom	513	22,137	1,093	23,743
Who Is God?	80,131	48,923	1,079	130,133
What Is Truth?	1,952	44,525	1,375	47,852
Cause of Death	13,833	28,434	1,112	43,379
Hereafter	3,033	54,097	1,855	58,985
Good News	1,652	21,958	956	24,566
Liberty	512	27,600	967	29,079
The Final War	17,073	41,037	1,269	59,379
What You Need	512	55,397	1,179	57,088
Health and Life	1,234	53,490	1,167	55,891
Home and Happiness	2,264	52,213	1,127	55,604
Heys of Heaven	2,753	31,843	1,090	35,686
Where Are the Dead?	7,335	57,747	1,838	66,920
Miscellaneous booklets	756	52,304	607	53,667
Total                7j	,372,932	14,651,882	65,873	22,090,687
Bibles	2,384	18,220	505	21,109

Total English 7,812,530 15,841,450 117,734 23,771,714

PUBLICATION

Those who are on the side of Jehovah God and his King more keenly appreciate today than at any time past that Jehovah has taken out from the world a people to publish his name and his kingdom. These publishers are designated in the Scriptures under the title of ‘Jehovah’s witnesses’, the anointed temple class; and the ‘Jonadabs’, who are those that associate themselves with the temple class; all of whom are termed "publishers”. This is being done in obedience to the commandment, of the Lord that this gospel of the Kingdom must be preached to all the world as a witness and that all who hear the message are privileged to invite others to hear and come and partake of God’s gracious provision for the blessing of humankind and, above all, for the vindication of his own name.

From an examination of the figures compiled from the reports it will be seen that the work of the Lord on the earth does not depend upon numbers. Often a smaller company, exhibiting greater zeal for the Lord, will accomplish more than larger numbers who manifest less zeal. During the fiscal year there were 5,000 less hours put in by the publishers in the field than in the previous year. The sound equipment, of course, assisted much in the publication. The brethren have gone from house to house amongst the people in obedience to the Lord’s commandment, exhibiting the books and booklets to the people and telling them of the Kingdom. In doing this they have talked less than in previous years. They carry with them a small card upon which is printed the introduction testimony, and this, when read by the person, quickly furnishes an opportunity to determine whether or not he wishes to avail himself of some reading matter that will help him to understand God’s purpose.

America, as above used, means the United States and islands that are near by the United States and under the jurisdiction of the Brooklyn office. During the fiscal year the field workers within this jurisdiction, and which field workers are designated as “publishers” of the Kingdom message, have placed in the hands of the people books and booklets to the total number of 14,663,284 volumes. This is an increase of 3,300,000 over the previous year. Thus at a glance it will be seen that the year 1935 has resulted in the greatest publication of the Kingdom message during any like period of time since the second coming of the Lord. This is exactly as we should expect it to be. God’s purpose is that the people shall have an opportunity to know the truth and he has laid this obligation upon the publishers, and they delight to obey his commandments.

What is here meant by outlying countries and islands that operate under the jurisdiction of the Brooklyn office direct is those countries where the publishers are so few in number that it is.not deemed best to maintain a branch office. It is often found very difficult to get the literature into some of these islands, because of technicalities and other obstacles put in the way by those who are opposed to the truth. This is particularly the case where these officers are dominated by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy.

Those devoted to the Lord will find keen interest in carefully considering the field service report as set forth in the following table:

FIELD SEBVICE BEPOBT

FOR Year (September 29, 1934, to September 22, 1935) UNITED STATES

Companies and 1935 Pioneers Auxiliaries Sharpshooters Total

Books               873,449   116,691   480,497   1,470,637

Booklets           4,844,775  1,169,303  6,932,142  12,946,220

Total literature 5,718,224  1,285,994  7,412,639  14,416,857

Companies and

Pioneers Auxiliaries Sharpshooters Total

Workers Hours Obtainers	1,829 2,127,394 3,092,996	855 465,574 816,017	18,102 2,404,641 4,974,837	20,786 4,997,609 8,883,850
Sound machines	856	110	1,071	2,037
Meetings	154,252	11,593	88,092	253,937
Attendance	1,229,257	155,547	3,892,030	5,276,834

SUMMARY OF ALL WORK REPORTED TO BROOKLYN OFFICE

Rooks Booklets	Total United States 1,470,637 12,946,220	Other Outlying Countries 17,602 101,383	Public by Mail 54,297 73,145	Grand Total 1,542,536 13,120,748
Total literature 14,416,857		118,985	127,442	14,663,284
Workers	20,786	155*		20,941
Hours	4,997,609	53,369		5,050,978
Obtainers	8,883,850	80,614		8,964,464
Sound machines	2,037	22		2,059
Meetings	253,937	3,735		257,672
Attendance	5,276,834	78,048		5,354,882
Memorial
Attending	32,495	300		32,795
Partaking	26,826	180		27,006

* Of these foreign publishers 42 were foreign pioneers and auxiliaries.

RADIO

. One of the divinely provided means of promulgating ot publishing the Kingdom message is that by means of radio. The enemy, led in America by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, has been diligent during the year past to prevent the preaching of the gospel by radio. Their papers have frequently published the statement that Jehovah’s witnesses are fast passing out of the picture. Surely the Lord must laugh at them as he sees these hypocritical agents of the adversary assuming to represent God, while representing the Devil and thus deceiving the people. Under these circumstances it is interesting to note that during the fiscal year upward of 295 radio stations were used approximately once a week in broadcasting the Kingdom message. The chief part of this broadcasting was by electrical transcription, to be sure, but the message went out just the same. In addition to this the radio’ has been used in a number of foreign countries, as will be shown in this report, and which have broadcast the Kingdom message by electrical transcription and otherwise. The total number of radio stations thus used during the year was 344.

During the year radio programs broadcasting in English by transcription records totaled 18,287. In addition thereto the message was broadcast in 21 different foreign languages to the number of 1,064 programs.

A series of special programs was broadcast during the year as follows:

March 10	105 stations	30 minutes
April 14-21	182 stations	60 minutes
April 28	105 stations	30 minutes
May 5	105 stations	30 minutes
May 12	105 stations	60 minutes
May 19	105 stations	30 minutes
May 26	105 stations	30 minutes
September 29	101 stations	60 minutes

During the year the president of the Society delivered, in person, lectures by radio, and which were sent out over a chain of radio stations, as follows, to wit:

From New York (WBBE), November 18, 1934, "Shall the Truth Be Suppressed?" 6 stations

From Atlanta (City Auditorium), November 25, 1934, "Who Shall Bule the World?"____21 stations

From Los Angeles (Shrine Auditorium), January 13, 1935, "Universal War Near"_____    104 stations

From Washington, D. C. (Washington Auditorium), May 31, 1935,

' ‘ The Great Multitude ’ ’2 stations

From Washington, D. C. (Washington Auditorium), June 2, 1935,

"Government” _    , _ _____ „ 137 stations

From New York (WBBE), June 9, 1935, "Government”  _____________ ___5 stations

From New York (WBBE), June 23, 1935, "Hiding the Truth”_______3 stations

It is worthy of note here that the broadcast from Washington, D. C., on June 2, by the Lord’s grace, surpassed any yet ever made in the transmission of human speech to different parts of the earth. The speech was delivered to an audience of upward of 20,000 persons at Washington Auditorium, whereas simultaneously throughout the city of Washington and at different points sound ears rebroadcast the message to others gathered in different parts of the city. It may therefore be reasonably said that the visible audience within the city of Washington amounted to 120,000 persons. By means of telegraph wires, wireless communication facilities, public-address system, and suchlike appliances, the speech was simultaneously transmitted to Europe, Asia, Africa, and the isles of the sea. While the speech was being delivered in Washington it was simultaneously recorded at Hollywood, California, and has since been rebroadcast by radio and transcription machines in various parts of the earth. The Golden Age magazine gives a detailed report of this radio program.

Again on Sunday, June 9, this same lecture was broadcast at six o’clock in the morning especially for the benefit of Australia, and was there picked up and rebroadcast over a number of radio stations as will appear from the Australian report. At Bogota, Colombia, South America, station HKF picked up and rebroadcast this message as a public service. Reports of the various countries are to the effect that both of these broadcasts were clearly and well received.

RADIO HEARING

At the beginning of the fiscal year the Federal Communications Commission at Washington afforded an opportunity for those interested in radio to appear before the Commission and submit their views relative to the use of radio. On October 4, 1934, the beginning of the fiscal year of 1935, the president of the Society appeared before the Federal Communications Commission at Washington and presented some strong and convincing facts setting forth the activities of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy in wrongfully interfering with the broadcasting by Jehovah’s witnesses. On that occasion the Hierarchy, although scheduled to make reply, made no answer whatsoever to the facts submitted except to deny that one of its agents had mutilated the public record. Its general and wicked opposition to the broadcasting the Kingdom message was not denied, and no attempt was made to explain the reason for its activities. The protest by the Society’s president on that occasion, together with argument, was filed with the Commission and is a matter of public record.

In December of the same year Jehovah’s witnesses circulated amongst the people a petition addressed to the Congress of the United States. This petition contained a request for the publication of the testimony-taken by the Federal Communications Commission at the hearing above mentioned in order that the people might generally understand the situation. This petition, with 2,284,128 signatures of American citizens, was presented to the Congress in January, 1935, but was ignored, and nothing done concerning the same.

Later the Federal Communications Commission invited the various broadcasters to appear before it and submit testimony or briefs. On June 3 the Society, by its president, filed a brief before the Commission, the full text of which appears in The Golden Age of June 19, 1935.

PUBLISHERS

By the term publishers, as used herein, are meant those who go from place to place, house to house, or otherwise engaged in making known to the people this gospel of the Kingdom as commanded by the Lord. During the year just closed the publishers in the United States have largely increased. This is due chiefly to the fact that many persons of good will, otherwise called "Jonadabs”, have joyfully united themselves with Jehovah’s witnesses in carrying the message of truth to the people. The publishers, therefore, may be divided into the following groups: pioneers, auxiliaries, sharpshooters and company workers.

Among the publishers are those of the Bethel family. Arrangement is made for the closing of the factory and home on certain dates so that all members of the family may engage in the field service. Each Saturday afternoon and Sunday the members of the family engage in this service. The reports for the year show that 189 members of the Bethel family is the largest number that engaged at any one time in this witness work, but during the year all the members had some part in this branch of the service. The family alone placed books and booklets to the number of 93,284 in the hands of the people.

DIVISIONAL CAMPAIGNS

The divisional campaigns were not so many during the year, due to the fact that the service periods had increased in number and each community has a campaign oftener than in previous years. These divisional campaigns are a great stimulus to the brethren. They travel from their homes to a stated point within the divisional territory and there organize into companies and engage actively in the service, resulting in carrying the witness to thousands of persons and distributing a great quantity of literature. The Lord has greatly blessed this effort during the year. The following table setting forth the divisional campaigns during the year will be of interest:

Divisional Campaigns 1935

	Jan. 5, 6, 1935	Aug. 31 to Sept. 2,1935	1935
Divisions No. of ears No. of publishers No. of hours	73 2,408 10,477 39,843	74 3,135 14,124 58,828	98,671
Boohs	8,095	14,763	22,858
Booklets	101,036	173,163	274,199
Total literature	109,131	187,926	297,057
Obtainers	96,623	121,709	218,332
Petition signers Sound meetings Sound attendance	132,125	1,450 132,125

Note: There were 37 special divisional campaigns, held in 15 different states, as the result of opposition from local authorities.

INTERNATIONAL CAMPAIGNS

During the year Jehovah’s witnesses throughout the earth engaged in a general campaign on two specific occasions. On these two occasions, in eighteen days, there were placed 4,149,371 pieces of literature. In the first period 77 countries participated, and in the second, 79 countries. The following table pertaining to these two campaigns will be studied with interest:

	September 29-Oetober 7	April 13-21	Total
Countries reporting	77	79
Pioneers	3,046	3,126
Auxiliaries	1,360	1,361
Company publishers	35,515	41,486
Total publishers	39,921	45,973
Hours	451,005	528,476	979,481
Obtainers	1,268,623	1,449,609	2,718,232
Books	31,067	30,685	61,752
Booklets	1,546,281	2,541,338	4,087,619
Total literature	1,577,348	2,572,023	4,149,371
Sound meetings	5,956	10,822	16,778
Attendance	103,320	218,201	321,521

SPECIAL SERVICE PERIODS

During the year there were sis special service periods, including two international service periods above mentioned. These service periods show an increased number of publishers and a decidedly increased number of books and booklets placed in the hands of the people over the previous year. The sound equipment employed on these occasions greatly aided the service.

REGIONAL DIRECTORS

During the year the Society had in the field eleven English-speaking regional service directors, besides some that employed other languages. These service directors served 1,845 company organizations, co-operating with the publishers in the various vicinities. This required them to travel a total of 162,564 miles, at an expense to the Society of $4,597.76.

To facilitate service activities in ■ the larger and more thickly populated centers the Society has placed for an indefinite period service directors in the following towns, to wit: Greater New York, Chicago, Philadelphia, Pittsburgh, Atlanta, Cincinnati, Youngstown, Portland, and Denver. Here all the field publishers are under the immediate direction of the director of service, who is under the immediate direction of the Brooklyn office.

There are times that men sent out by the Society assume more authority than they should and cause much uneasiness and disturbance amongst some companies. The fixed policy of the Society is this: That all direction in regard to service comes from the Brooklyn office, and this is sent to the various companies in writing, either by special letter or by publication in the Director or in The Watchtower. Any orders or instructions that come from any person contrary to what appears in these publications should not be followed by the local companies, but the Society at 117 Adams street should be immediately notified. We are aware of the fact that the adversary is everywhere attempting to disturb the Lord’s work. This is the time of unity of those who are really of the temple class, and every one should strive to maintain that unity. Those who are really devoted to the Lord and anointed will dwell together in unity and work together in full unity and co-operation.

At stated times brethren from the Bethel family are sent out to serve companies within the vicinity of Greater New York and within a radius of 200 miles from the headquarters. Below are set forth the names of the various men who are ordained and authorized as representatives of the Society, and who engaged in preaching the gospel as divinely ordained, as set forth in the Scriptures:

ORDAINED REPRESENTATIVES

CONVENTIONS

One means of publishing the Kingdom message is that of conventions or assemblies of the Lord’s people at stated times. These assemblies or conventions are held in various parts of the country. Of the three outstanding conventions of the fiscal year was one held at Atlanta, Georgia, in November, at which time there was broadcast the lecture "Who Shall Rule the World?” That convention was attended by a large number of the brethren from different parts of the country, practically all of whom engaged in the service. They placed in the hands of the people in Atlanta and vicinity more than 23,000 pieces of literature.

The next convention of outstanding importance was that held at Los Angeles, California, in January. At that time the lecture "Universal War Near” was broadcast over a nation-wide chain of radio stations and created a tremendous interest.

The chief convention of the year was that at Washington, D.C., May 31 to June 5, and upward of 20,000 of the Lord’s people attended this convention. There the radio and sound equipment were extensively used. It was at this convention that the Lord made known to his people the correct understanding of the "great multitude” as described in the seventh chapter of The Revelation. This revelation stirred the brethren and stimulated them to renewed activities, and everywhere throughout the earth come the reports exhibiting joy in the fact that the remnant now have the privilege of carrying the message to the great multitude, and these together working to the honor of the Lord’s name. Space will not permit us here to set forth a detailed report of the Washington convention, but all who attended, and all who listened to the programs by radio, will find much joy in the contemplation of what took place on that occasion. The lecture “Government” broadcast on that occasion, together with the subsequent lecture “Hiding the Truth”, was put in booklet form, and up to this time more than five million copies have been issued.

THE WATCHTOWER

The Watchtower magazine, issued twice each month, is the channel used by the Lord for transmitting the unfolding of his prophecies to those who are devoted to him and his kingdom. No human creature is entitled to any credit for what appears in The Watchtower. AU honor and credit is due to the Lord. Jehovah God and Christ Jesus are our teachers, and every one who reads The Watchtower rejoices in the fact that the Lord is pleased to use that magazine to aid his people in understanding the truth. During the year The Watchtower subscriptions have had a healthy increase, thus indicating the increased interest of those who have turned to the Lord. Every Jonadab should subscribe for and carefully study The Watchtower. Many of The Watchtower are furnished to the poor free of charge; and since it takes no advertising whatever, the cost must be sustained entirely by the Society.

THE GOLDEN AGE

The Golden Age magazine, another of the Society’s publications, is used to transmit matters of general interest to those who are watching the development of the Lord’s kingdom. The circulation of The Golden Age has had a healthy increase during the year, and many persons have come to realize that it is about the only magazine on earth publishing general news that in^- fact publishes the truth. The honest endeavor of The Golden Age is to set forth things as they are, that the people may see the clear distinction between Jehovah’s organization and that which opposes.

ENEMY ACTIVITIES

Jehovah’s witnesses and their companions are the only ones on earth making known to the people that all the trouble and distress to which the human race has fallen heir is properly chargeable to the Devil and his agents. This is the time mentioned in Revelation 12:12, when Satan is desperately attempting to plunge the whole human race into destruction. The Devil hates the truth, and he plants in the mind and heart of his various agents on earth a wicked desire to oppose God’s kingdom and incites them to oppose the Kingdom. Throughout the United States during the year the Roman Catholic Hierarchy and their associates in hypocrisy, that is, the once so-called “Protestant” clergymen, have engaged in a subtle campaign in opposition to the kingdom of the Lord. These have induced the lawmaking bodies of many parts of the country to enact laws looking to the interruption of the Lord’s work. They have caused many of the Lord’s people to be charged with association and co-operation with the Communists, whereas they well know that those devoted to the Lord have no interest whatsoever and do not participate in any manner with political agitators. Upon this false pretext the Roman Catholic Hierarchy and their allies have caused legislative bodies to enact laws looking to the prevention of the proclamation of the message of the Kingdom by word of mouth, in public halls, by means of radio, sound cars and other mechanical devices. They have caused police officials to arrest and throw into prison many inoffensive men and women, and that without any evidence of any wrongdoing whatsoever. Many of these police officers are put in fear of losing their jobs, and it is with great reluctance that they interfere with Jehovah’s witnesses at all.

During the year the Society has defended 478 persons who have been arrested and thrown into prison on the charge of going from house to house preaching the gospel without first obtaining a permit from the police. As hereinbefore set forth, it would be an insult to the Lord to ask permission of man to do what God has commanded must be done, and even though the Lord’s people are subjected to arrest and imprisonment, and much physical suffering, this is far to be preferred to disobedience to God’s commandment. The publishers at the present time remember the difficulties encountered by the Lord Jesus and the apostles of the early days; and since the Lord told them that all faithful men would suffer in this manner, they receive this persecution at the hands of the enemy as an evidence that they are privileged to participate in the sufferings of Christ to the end that they might maintain their integrity and show their devotion to Jehovah. For this reason they rejoice in the sufferings of Christ that are left behind for the body’s sake. For their comfort and aid the Lord reveals to them the fact that long ago he foreknew and foretold these very conditions and that by this knowledge, together with the other blessings from the Lord, these faithful brethren are able to withstand a continuous assault upon them. They know of the danger in their pathway, and their life on earth is not dear when compared with life eternal forever with the Lord. Therefore they delight to go on with the work amidst great

opposition; and when they see at the end of the year that the Lord has greatly blessed their efforts, this is an occasion for additional joy.

RETROSPECTIVE

It is interesting to look back through the records since the beginning of the Elisha work, as compared with what was done in the Elijah period, and see how greatly the Lord has blessed those who have faithfully to the best of their ability carried out their covenant. These records show that the distribution of books and booklets began actively in 1893 and from that time until and including 1918 there was placed in the hands of the people in the United States a total of 9,737,224 books and booklets. From 1918 to 1919 there was practically nothing done, because of the restraint of the Lord’s people by reason of the activities of the enemy.

From 1919 on the work began to get in shape to be carried forward, and from that date until 1935 inclusive the distribution of books and booklets in the United States alone has reached a total of approximately seventy-five million. There has been a gradual and healthy increase, particularly since 1923.

These figures corroborate what has heretofore been published in The Watchtower, that since the release of the Lord’s people from prison following the World War and the reorganization of the work thereafter, and particularly since the anointing in 1922, there has been a forward movement in the publishing of the message of the Kingdom to the glory of Jehovah. A climax has been reached during the fiscal year of 1935 in the distribution of more than fourteen and one-half million books and booklets within the United States and the territory under the direct jurisdiction of this office. When -we observe this -tremendous increase and have in mind the smaller number of those who claim to be in the truth in the latter period, we ean but call to mind the words of the psalmist: “This is the Lord’s doing; it is marvellous in our eyes. This is the day which the Lord hath made; we will rejoice and be glad in it. ’ ’—Ps. 118; 23, 24.

On every hand the activities of the enemy increase. We see the enemy gradually surrounding God’s people throughout the earth. We know that salvation proceeds alone from Jehovah God, that the prosperity of his kingdom is absolute and certain, that soon the triumph of the Lord will be made manifest; and therefore those on Jehovah’s side with joy continue to pray: “Save now, we beseech thee, 0 Jehovah: 0 Jehovah, we beseech thee, send now prosperity. Blessed be he that cometh in the name of Jehovah.”—Ps, 118:25,26, A.R.V.

AFRICA (South, Central and East)

The territory here mentioned is far flung and requires a tremendous effort to be put forth by the brethren in order to carry this message to all people who desire to hear. Jehovah’s witnesses meet this condition with joyful hearts, and no burden, by the Lord’s grace, is too great for them to undertake. The Lord has greatly blessed their efforts during the year. There has been a substantial increase of the publishing of the message of the Kingdom throughout this territory. After twelve months of the fiscal year end, it is found that the total distribution of the books and booklets is, to wit, 375,281, which is an increase of more than 115,000 over the previous year. Quite a cosmopolitan population inhabits this territory. The Kingdom message has been distributed in 23 different languages, to wit: English, Afrikaans, German, Sol-landish, French, Greek, Swedish, Portuguese, Italian, Chinyanja, Xosa, Sesuto, Zulu, Chiwemba, Arabic, Gujerati, Urdu, Tamil, Telugu, Yiddish, Chinese and Japanese. The opposition grows in Africa. Like everywhere else, the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, directed from its seat of operation at Vatican City, Rome, sees to it that every possible effort is put forth to hinder the proclamation of the truth. The increase of the work is sufficient answer to that opposition.

The following is quoted from the report of the local director of service in that vicinity:

House-to-House Witness Work

Our experiences in Jehovah’s chariot have been thrilling. The Greater Jehu is driving furiously, and as the pace becomes faster our joy and enthusiasm increase. In South Africa the bulk of the work has again been done in the Union, which comprises the four provinces of The Cape, Transvaal, Natal and Orange Free State. In addition, however, the good news of the Kingdom was carried by pioneers into the various British native protectorates of Basutoland, Swaziland, and Beehuana-land, and the mandated territory of South-West Africa. SouthWest Africa, which prior to the great war was a German colony, is a territory vast in size but comparatively thinly populated. The European population consists of Germans and South Africans of British and Dutch descent. Two pioneers covered the whole of that territory in live months, placing 13,000 books and booklets, and took 70 subscriptions for The Golden Age. A. brief summary of the house-to-house witness work in the Union, The Protectorates and South-West Africa follows:

Publishers (Monthly average) Hours	Obtain-ers	Volumes	Booklets	Total Literature
Pioneers       19 25,367	54,379	33,065	98,744	131,809
Auxiliaries      5   3,530	9,467	2,054	12,715	14,769
Companies and Isolated 226 32,826	85,592	11,253	113,400	124,653
Totals 250 61,723	149,438	46,372	224,859	271,231

Approximately fifty percent of the Eterature has been distributed by the pioneers, who have averaged 111 hours each per month throughout the year. These brethren have worked hard, for in addition to the time actually spent in the above manner considerable time has been given to the work with the Bound machines. Much time too has been spent in traveling. Several, pioneers have weak physical frames, but the joy of the Lord is their strength. Of hardships and opposition there has been plenty, but as good soldiers they have learned to endure hardness and they consider it an honor second to none to be privileged to be right in the thick of the fray. The auxiliaries have also done well, and with a monthly average of 59 hours are on the right side of their quota. A considerable number of the company publishers regularly exceed the suggested quota of 15 hours per month, but those living on farms with little or no territory for miles around can, in some cases, participate only in the special campaigns, and in consequence the average all over is brought down to 12.

Special Campaign Periods

About two-fifths of the total literature placed in the witness work in the Union went out during the five special campaigns. These special occasions of giving praise to Jehovah are greatly appreciated by the publishers in this country, and all of Jehovah’s witnesses have some share therein. Enthusiasm reached a great height during the April campaign, when the booklets Who Shall Eule the World? His Vengeance, and Supremacy were widely distributed. A considerable number of Jonadabs co-operated, and those brethren who by reason of age or infirmity were unable to participate in the field work had a part also by posting booklets to friends and relatives, and to those living in isolation. It was easily the most widespread witness to date. The figures for the five campaigns which come into our service year are given below:

Bound

The Kingdom    Publishers Hours Obtalners Books				Booklets Total
Praise Period, Sept. 29-Oct 7 •       290	4,160	16,290	1,009
				20,135	21,144
The Servant’s Testimony Period, Nov. 24-Dec. 2 :      262	3,438	11,702	1,027	15,127	16,154
The Kingdom Herald’s Testimony Period, Peb. 2-10            234	3,365	6,185	3,317	5,945	9,202
The Anolnted’s Thanksgiving Period, April 13-21:        360	5,803	30,831	345	54,613	54,958
Testimony for Jehovah and for Gideon, June 1-9;             241	3,217	8,945	2,063	14,529	16,592
1,387	19,983	73,953	7,761	110,340	118,110

Bound

Publishers Hours Obtainers Books Booklets Total Five periods 1933-34  1,169 18,432  S6.653  5,541  68,487  74,028

Increase               218  1,551  17,300  2,220  41,862  44,082

Average per period

this year            277  3,996  14,791  1,552  22,070  23,622

Sound Machines

The work with the sound machines shows a healthy increase. Twelve months ago we had 18 transcription machines in action. Now we have 21 machines and 48 phonographs. After being let down by an Afrikaans professor in New York who undertook to do the recording of Afrikaans transcription records a brother at Brooklyn headquarters applied himself to the job with such good success that Brother Rutherford’s lectures will be clearly followed in that language and a much wider witness given to the Kingdom message. Phonograph records in English to the number of 905 have been placed with those who have the Society’s phonographs and to others who have machines of their own. While in recent months the number of machines reported in action is close to 60, the monthly average over the whole year was 35. There have been 3,138 meetings, with a total attendance of 85,883, or an average of 27 per meeting. To advertise these meetings upward of 300,000 leaflets, each containing a pointed testimony, and other advertising matter were used. With the opening up of the Scriptures relating to the “great multitude’’ we appreciate the fact that there is much work yet to be done for and by this company, and the witness with the sound machines in conjunction with the house-to-house work is just the ideal method of establishing contact with the Jonadabs. Publishers who have worked within hearing of the machines have been much encouraged themselves, and they all report that more interest in the message is aroused when a machine is operating than when there is none. The work with the sound machines is not confined to the Union, for phonographs and records have found their way to the Rhodesias, Nyasaland, Portuguese East Africa, St. Helena, Mauritius and East Africa. And now for the Sound Car Equipment! We hope it will come soon!

Nyasaland

The Lord’s blessing has rested upon the arrangement of opening a depot in this part of Central Africa. The work in that land has gone ahead during the past twelve months. That, of course, has not pleased everyone, and there has been gome opposition. Some of the missionaries have endeavored to incite government officials to interfere with the activities of the brethren and to prevent them from spreading the message of God ’a kingdom. In this they have failed, although the booklet The Cnsis in English and Chmyanja was banned by the governor in council in November, 1934, and now, in addition to The Golden Age, can no longer be imported into that country. The few Europeans in Nyasaland display little appreciation of the Kingdom message, but many of the natives manifest a keen and intelligent interest therein. It seems clear that thousands of natives in Central Africa will form part of the great multitude who will take their stand on Jehovah’s Bide. Those who have the intelligence to grasp the message not only do so with alacrity but just as promptly see and appreciate the responsibility of passing it on to others. During the year there has been a monthly average of 340 publishers. These have Spent 76,547 hours in the Kingdom service. There were 14,357 obtamers, in whose hands 16,078 pieces of literature were placed.

The Rhodesias

European witnesses resident in the Tthodesias are few in number, and, while frequently treated with contempt by snobs and others who do not know any better, have been permitted to engage in the witness work unhindered, and they have done bo with regularity throughout the year. In certain parts of both countries our native brethren have had a square deal from government officials who have upheld the law of the land and given the brethren freedom to worship God in a manner agreeable to their own conscience. The Koman Catholic Hierarchy, however, is strongly represented in these lands and much willful and wicked persecution has been meted out to humble men and women whose only ‘ ‘ crime ’ ’ has been distributing the good news of and concerning the kingdom of God. Much of the trouble has arisen in the villages, which appear to have been, until the arrival of Jehovah’s witnesses, the special preserve of the Hierarchy or one or other of the denominational missions. Ab soon as a humble bearer of the glad tidings of Jehovah’s kingdom arrives on the scene events that took place in the early days of the church’b history (Acts 5: 14; 6: 7) are re-enacted. The hireling shepherd, faced with the prospect of losing his flock overnight, immediately goes to the native thief with the false accusation that Jehovah’s witnesses are disturbers of the peace and are undermining his (the chief’s) authority and that unless he takes immediate action he will lose his job. The native chief is thus incited to lay a charge against the brethren. The district r.nmmi.qsinnAT who hears the case frequently forgets all about the law guaranteeing religious liberty and makes an effort to get the J.w. to change his religion by reminding him that there are the Boman Catholic, Dutch Beformed, African Methodist Episcopal, and other churches, any one of which he ought to join, and in some instances the witness is offered his liberty there and then if he will follow this suggestion. Needless to say there is nothing doing in that line I If the district commissinnar decides to inflict punishment for some alleged infringement of the law, such as preaching the gospel without a permit, a fine with the alternative of imprisonment is imposed. The fine is never paid, and the witnesses on the conclusion of their sentence leave jail ‘rejoicing that they have been counted worthy to Buffer shame for His name’. Sometimes the district commissioner follows Pilate’s example. He knows that Jehovah’s witnesses have committed no crime and he can find no fault in them except concerning the law of their God. Put to satisfy the clamor of the missionaries and the native chief the prisoner is handed over to the native chief, who is given a free hand to impose whatever punishment he sees fit, and the witness is thus ‘thrown to the lions’. Witnesses have been beaten and imprisoned, and on one occasion recently it was reported that a brother while still serving a jail sentence had his home broken down. The most violent opposers have been the Awemba Christian (!) people of the Catholic church and the Christian (?) people of the African Methodist Episcopal church. Following a vigorous protest that such things could happen in a British colony the law of which guarantees religious liberty the government of Northern Bhodesia at length intimated that they would no longer raise any obstacle to our establishing European control within the borders of that country. ‘(This has been denied to us for some years.) Following our protest and prior to receipt of the government’s invitation a strike of native mine workers broke out on the Copper Belt. The government increased the native poll tax and tried to enforce it without adequate notice to the natives. An attempt was made to break the strike, and in the resulting riot firearms were used by the police and 14 natives were killed. Members of the Hierarchy and other enemies of Jehovah’s kingdom immediately saw to it that the charge was made that “agitators connected with the Watchtower movement were behind the strikers’’. Of course, not one of Jehovah’s witnesses had any share either in instigating the strike or in the actual disturbances which followed. Our native brethren in many parts of both the Bhodesias were arrested and closely questioned, but in every instance were released without any charge having been brought against them. A Commission of Inquiry has been Bet up and, not having a jot of evidence against any of our brethren, government officials, still anxious to shift the responsibility, from themselves and to make us the "scapegoat”, have been dwelling at considerable length on the "subversive tendency of our literature”. The commissioner of police has gone so far as to describe certain passages as ‘positively indecent’. The plea is that our literature brings Europeans and those in authority into contempt. No evidence has been forthcoming, however, that any of those responsible for the strike were influenced in any way by the reading of our literature. On the other hand, the very opposite is true: those under the influence of our literature remained quietly in their huts and did not even form part of the alleged riotous mob into which the police found it necessary to shoot. The chief ringleaders were the Awembas, a tribe whose spiritual interests are catered for almost entirely by the Catholic ‘white fathers'. A European representative of the Society and several of the native service directors have given evidence before the Commission, and their evidence establishes the fact that we had no responsibility in the matter whatsoever. Independent witnesses, such as the general manager of the Roan Antelope Copper Mine, at which mine in Luanshya the rioting took place, have gone on record before the Commission that the strike was due to a combination of two things, namely, the increase of the poll tax and its enforcement without notice. And this is the general consensus of opinion amongst Europeans outside of governmental and missionary circles living in that country. At the time of writing this report the Commission has not concluded its hearings, but we are hoping that their findings wiR be just and that the door will be kept wide open for the further proclamation of the good news of God’s kingdom. It is an interesting fact that although natives belonging to the various denominational churches were mixed up in the strike, not a single charge has been made by government officials against one of these organizations. The press run by "big business” has also had a share in this conspiracy to work injury to Jehovah’s witnesses and to bring reproach upon the name of Jehovah; for while they gave much publicity to the evidence of government officials, they almost entirely suppressed our evidence. This conspiracy, part of the general conspiracy against Jehovah’s witnesses, will soon be fully exposed. In face of all the persecution Jehovah’s native witnesses have given an excellent account of themselves, and we are confident that there will be some amongst those humble and much despised (by some) people who will maintain their integrity to the end and thns have a share in proving Satan a liar and in the vindication of Jehovah’s name. During the past twelve months there has been a monthly average of 350 publishers. These have spent 52,131 hours publishing the good news of the Kingdom. There have been 16,383 obtainers of literature, who have received in all 18,402 books and booklets. These figures are considerably in excess of those for the previous twelve months.

East Africa

Two pioneers from the Union visited Portuguese East Africa during the year and a good witness has been given at Lourenco Marques and other places by these brethren and also by European and native witnesses resident in that country. Close on 3,000 pieces of literature have been distributed. Recently four pioneer brethren trekked by car from the Union to Tanganyika, Kenya and Uganda. The long journey was accomplished without mishap. They report that the literature is going out freely and in the first month’s work they have taken close on 40 subscriptions for The Golden Age.

Islands

In St. Helena, as the result of work accomplished by means of one of the Society’s phonographs, a little company of six has been organized. A second phonograph has been brought into action, and the witnesses there are pressing the battle to the gate. Whenever there is a show, exhibition or public function of any kind, one of the phonographs is taken along, lectures are put over and literature placed with the interested. The phonographs are placed near by an open window at some home in the evening, and neighbors and passers-by frequently stop to listen. Recorded 41-minute lectures dealing with various aspects of the Kingdom message may now be heard in the island of Mauritius. The brethren living there have been greatly encouraged by the talks and continue to do what they can to interest others in them and in the literature which covers the subjects in greater detail.

"The Watchtower” and “The Golden Age”

The number of persons subscribing for these journals shows a further increase. The number of subscribers for The Watchtower now stands at 411, to compare with 390 a year ago, and for The Golden Age, 653, to compare with 420 twelve months ago.

Office

The brethren in the office and store continue to appreciate the privilege of service. The volume of work has increased considerably. Letters coming in numbered 7,135, and going out, 7,773. Ln addition, 7,000 circular letters and 5,000 bulletins were sent out. An ever-increasing number of people of good will in all coiners of the country write to the office for information about the literature and the work. Their expression of gratitude for the light received from the Lord through the literature does one’s heart good, and it is a real joy to serve such. Rail packages dispatched numbered 2,126, and postal packets, 4,776. The printing machine has again rendered useful service in the preparation of advertising matter and office stationery. Many happy days at the week-ends and on public holidays are spent in the field service. We averaged six hours each per week throughout the year, placed 1,055 bound volumes and 5,561 booklets. The total distribution of 6,616 exceeds the previous year’s figure by 1,868 pieces.

The past year has been full of happy experiences, and the Lord has crowned the year for us with the report of the doings of Jehovah’s Government at Washington. Your bold and stirring lecture on “Government” was greatly appreciated, and we look forward to distributing it far and wide during the next campaign. The prophecy of Habakkuk as opened up in recent Towers has given us a clearer vision of “Jehovah’s Battle” than anything we have yet read, and now the articles on “The Great Multitude” are clarifying a subject that has been shrouded in mystery for many years. We render praise to Jehovah for the flood-lighting of his Word, which we know is due to the fact that the Lord is now at the temple. The realization of the fact that we have now been gathered together at Armageddon and that absolute devotion to the Lord is required of all, whether anointed or Jonadab, will be an incentive to each one to seize eagerly every opportunity for service that comes along. Ab in every other part of the earth, so it is here: those who are wholly devoted to Jehovah appreciate the fact that love for the Lord finds expression in bearing the fruits of the Kingdom to the people, and love for one’s brethren finds expression, not in the old-time fellowship of gossip, grumbles and criticism over the teacups, but in partnership in the work and thus strengthening one another's hands in the Lord. It is a pleasure to report that the Greater Gideon’s little band down here are standing “every man in his place round about the camp” and we will, by the Lord’s grace, continue to shout our battle-cry until the enemy host has been put to flight and Jehovah’s great and illustrious name is completely vindicated.

AFRICA (West)

Working under a great disadvantage, a few brethren in West Africa, and who work out of Lagos, Nigeria, British West Africa, have carried the message to that and surrounding territory. The placing of literature in the hands of the people has exceeded that of previous years. There have been some lawless ones who profess to be the Lord’s children, but these have not succeeded in impeding the work. The truly devoted ones have pushed on in the publishing of the Kingdom message. The distribution of books and booklets in that country during the year totals "98,434: volumes. Says the report of the local director:

The common people hail for the kingdom of Jehovah which will rule the world in righteousness; the higher-ups pay little or no heed to the message of truth. Many of them are satisfied with devil worship, as is performed in the Roman Catholic and so-called "Protestant” churches. If it were not for the depression, and oppressive measures of the government in the collection of the head tax in the country places, the people would have secured much more of our literature.

Conventions, Transcriptions

We had two conventions during our fiscal year, one in the capital, and the other in Warri, a distance of over 920 miles from the capital. Both conventions were very stimulating to the publishers; they are realizing more and more the necessity of obeying organization instructions, that they may be amongst those that will be hid during the battle of Armageddon. (Zeph. 2: 1-3) Quite a number of books and booklets were placed in the homes of the people during the convention.

The transcription machines offer good opportunities among those that can understand the English language. The difficulty at present is in the outdoor witnessing. The majority that attend cannot follow, nor understand the lectures, because of a big humming noise that follows, and the voice of the lecturer is drowned. If the records were in the different dialects, perhaps the result would be better in the outdoor transcription lectures. Some of the pioneers are touring the country places with the phonograph lectures, and the results are gratifying. Many orders are coming in for phonographs and records.

The Watchtowers are eagerly looked for by the Jonadabs, and keenly read too, but from the issue of August 1, on the “great multitude”, there is a rush for Towers as soon as the boat arrives. Tower subscriptions are also on the increase.

The translation of the booklet Dividing the People in the Itsekiri language was much appreciated by the people.

Summary Report for Year Ending September 30, 1935

Pioneers in the field number 30, auxiliaries, 23, company workers, 81; hours reported on the monthly report cards, 33,495. Transcription lectures, 171; attendance, 18,846. Company meetings, 469; attendance, 5,271. Letters received, 475; dispatched, 510. Number of English books from Harp to Jehovah sent out, 9,341; other books, 426; booklets, 68,675. Yoruba books, 2,969; booklets, 11,922. Arabic books, 264; booklets, 1,050. Itsekiri booklets, 3,787. Total books, 13,000; booklets, 85,434. Grand total of books and booklets, 98,434. Also over 50,000 handbills were distributed for advertising transcription lectures, also illustrated lectures by lantern slides.

ALSACE

While this country is a part of France, because of the peculiar conditions it is found advantageous to have a director of service within that territory. Alsace has nearly two million inhabitants. The people are Catholic generally, but some of these ardent and faithful ones have broken away from the enemy’s institutions and have taken their stand firmly on the side of Jehovah and his kingdom. Within the territory there are 14 companies organized for service and who are actively engaged in the service. And there is an average of 204 publishers regularly in the field giving witness to the truth. During the year they have engaged in the service 23,467 hours and have placed 4,022 books, 84,065 booklets, and Golden Age magazines to the number of 30,843. The largest company is at Strasbourg, and the publishers there are active and zealous in the vindication of Jehovah’s name. The local director of service, in his report, amongst other things says:

The past service year received a special stimulus through the convention, in Basle and the presence of Brother Rutherford. All the brethren returned with renewed determination and hearts full of joy, which naturally influenced the result of the work. Thus Thanksgiving Week resulted in the greatest success ever attained, in that 5,970 publications were put into the hands of the people. The clergy, of course, by their insidious actions tried to keep the people from receiving the truth. This was particularly noticeable in the Breusch valley, although it had previously always been our best territory. This time we could leave hardly any literature. Nevertheless the result of our work is very gratifying: the brethren of the Strasbourg company put in 500 more working hfiurs than last year. The blessing of the Lord rested upon these efforts so that the result was also a better one.

As regards the activity with the electrical transcription machine, there were 33 lectures given, with an attendance of 962. To advertise these lectures 30,500 leaflets were distributed, in addition to a number of advertisements in the newspapers.

ARGENTINA

The Society’s office is located at Buenos Aires, the Argentine Republic, and from there the message is carried, not only into Argentina, but into Uruguay, Chile, and Paraguay. The publishers have been few, but they have the zeal peculiar to the Lord’s house and have joyfully carried the message from place to place and have put in the hands of the people a total of 138,523 books and booklets of the Society’s publications, besides a large number of Bibles. In addition thereto The Golden Age has had a good circulation, many copies being given away freely.

Radio

The transcription records are broadcast by radio in each of the four countries above mentioned from time to time. During the year 266 radio programs of this nature have been put on. In addition thereto the phonograph meetings have been well attended, and it is hoped that much good has resulted therefrom.

AUSTRALIA

The territory covered from the Australian branch office, at Strathfield, includes Australia, New Zealand, and the near-by islands of the sea. While the Roman Catholic Hierarchy puts forth its strongest efforts there to hinder the work, God’s people continue to push forward. The unity of Jehovah’s witnesses and their companions is manifest everywhere. Every now and again an “elective elder’’ bobs up and interferes with the Jonadabs. This is really a deplorable condition so far as he is concerned. He not only fails to show an appreciation of the truth concerning the Kingdom, but is doing positive injury to those of the great multitude who must know the truth. The evidence is always conclusive that the one who shows a bossy spirit, such as “elective elders”, is not of the temple and should not, under any circumstances, be permitted to be the leader of a class study. Where no suitable person of the anointed is had, then let the Jonadabs organize their own meetings and let their studies be conducted under the direction of the office at headquarters. Jonadabs can be assigned their separate territory and work independently. It would be better, of course, if some of Jehovah’s witnesses would take the lead; but if anyone wants to act as a dog in the manger, then those who have the spirit of the Lord will ignore him and go on with the work. The faithful ones throughout the territory here mentioned are rejoicing greatly in their privilege of doing what the Lord has graciously permitted them to do.

The report coming from the director of service at the Australian headquarters sets out in detail the work, and from it we quote as follows:

Distribution of Literature

At the commencement of the year the branch made a quota of 1,100,000 pieces of literature, or 100,000 more than the pre-viouB year. During the year we received word through the American Bulletin that henceforth the aim should be to express quotas in terms of hours in the field rather than in an amount of literature to be placed. We are glad to say that not only has our quota of 400,000 hours been exceeded by 3,776, but also our original quota for literature has been exceeded by 188,254 pieces, the total placed for the year being 1,288,254 pieces. There has been a marked decrease in the output of bound books, due to the fact that the people are still suffering from the depression and many are receiving the bare necessities from employment under the government relief schemes. In spite of the fact that Satan’s crazy organization is tottering, many continue to hope against hope that it will right itself, and thus reconcile themselves to the present conditions.

The splendid totals for The Anointed’s Thanksgiving Period, in which 173,812 pieces of literature were placed, contributed largely to the results attained for the year. Australia and New Zealand together have an area about equal to that of the United States, and with about one-fifteenth of your population. It is therefore seen that a tremendous witness has been given by the Lord’s grace and to the honor of his name.

As our service year commences August 1 and ends July 31, only five special testimony periods have been included in our report, whereas six will be reported from other parts of the field. The literature placed during these five testimony periods amounts to 413,312 pieces, representing more than one-third of the year’s total in 45 days’ work. Without doubt the special periods are a wonderful stimulus to the work, and the united action of the remnant strikes terror into the heart of the enemy.

Our printing press has been kept exceedingly busy printing radio leaflets, transcription leaflets, Bulletins, circulars, stationery, service material, etc. The total output of the printing press, including the 'Hell Hot’ leaflets, is 1,354,792 pieces.

The regular visits of The Watchtower with its highly nutritive contents is a continual source of strength and encouragement to Jehovah’s people. True to his promise, the Lord has set a table before us in the presence of the enemy. A good increase is shown in the number of subscribers, amounting to 598, and the renewals are also keeping up to the mark.

The Golden Age is becoming increasingly popular, and the demand for some of the numbers exceeds the supply. We are making a special effort with The Golden Age during the year 1935-36, when we hope to see our subscription list doubled. New subscriptions for the year amounted to 958, and only a few. of the existing subscribers failed to renew.

At the present time we have 2,019 subscribers for The Watchtower, and 2,528 for The Golden Age.

Work Done by the Various Divisions of the Service

Pioneers: The year has seen a further decline in the average number Of pioneers reporting each month, the figures being 34 less than during the previous year. In spite of this, however, nearly half of the total literature placed (567,038 pieces) was due to the untiring efforts of the pioneers, and notwithstanding the reduction in their numbers, they have placed nearly 7,000 more pieces of literature than during the previous year. Although the average hours worked throughout the year is 100 monthly, many of the pioneers consistently work long hours under trying conditions, singing forth the praises of Jehovah as they go and reaching the people with the Kingdom message in the remote corners of this land as well as in the more thickly populated centers. Long distances, rough roads and indifferent transport facilities do not deter them. The Continent has been combed from end to end, and only on rare occasions do we now meet those who have never heard of the message of the Kingdom.

There are at present 172 pioneers on our list. Some with families who were previously in the service have been compelled to take relief work to support their dependents. Others have been transferred to other branches of the service, and still others have left the pioneer work because of the cares of this life. Faithfulness on the part of those who remain will more than compensate for any loss due to the thinning out of the ranks.

Auxiliaries : The number of auxiliaries now enrolled is 115, and during the year their placements totaled 157,898 pieces of literature and each worked an average of 45 hours per month.

Company publishers and RnAnv.qwormr.Rq; We are glad to advise an increase in the number of company publishers and sharpshooters reporting, and this is to be expected as the great multitude continue to come forth. The monthly average of publishers reporting in this division of the service is 891, and the main rm rm number in the field was during April, when 1,476 lined up for service. The average hours worked throughout the year by the companies and sharpshooters were 12 monthly, and the total literature placed was 419,274 pieces.

While the report shows that on the average each division of the service failed to reach the required hours monthly, many individuals put forth noble efforts, and with such sacrifices the Lord is well pleased. Much sickness and bad weather interfered with the work. No doubt the enemy is using this weapon here, while elsewhere he is working through the Roman Catholic Hierarchy and the strong-arm squad to suppress the work.

The following table presents the details of the work done by the various classes of publishers!

Summary Average number of publishers Hours Obtainers	of the Work Pioneers 175 209,842 293,952	Done by Various Publishers Co. Pub'rs, Sharps’rs Auxiliaries and Mise.      Total 115        891        1,181 62,340    131,594     403,776 95,708    241,325      630,985
Books Booklets Miscellaneous	74,104 505,242	11,452 147,009	25,817 394,130	111,373 1,046,381 130,500
Total	579,346	158,461	419,947	1,288,254

Sound Equipment

In the old days a few public lectures were held at great expense and with little result. More has been done during the year just closed than would be possible in five years before the transcription machines were introduced. Cur objective was 150,000 in attendance at the transcription meetings, but the completed figures show that a total of 251,817 attended the lectures during the year and 14,947 meetings were held, making an average attendance of nearly 17 to each meeting. The machines are used in a variety of ways, and there seems to be no end to the possibilities of this equipment. Parties witnessing from door to door work in conjunction with a machine, using a piece of music to draw attention and then a 4J-mmute lecture record. This method always increases the interest of the people, so that they are more easily approached. In several cities there are regular stands where lectures are given weekly. Hundreds of people attend these meetings. Workers in remote parts often come in contact with people who hear the lectures on the Sydney Domain. The total attendance at the Domain lectures for the year was 27,303, and 2,427 pieces of literature were placed at these meetings. At the same park many speakers expound their views, among them being representatives of the Catholics. One of their number complained to the police that our lectures are abusive and requested them to stop us. The police who are somewhat friendly to the truth refused their request and said that our lectures are not half as abusive as the Catholic speakers. Lectures are often held, at factories during the midday meal hour, and the attendance ranges from a handful to hundreds. At the government railway workshops in Queensland the employees’ committee invited us to use their rostrum to present a lunch-hour program. When the engineer in charge learned of it he would not .permit Jehovah’s witnesses to enter the premises. However, the program was given outside the gates before an audience of 400 men and the men were told what had occurred. At the conclusion the men passed a resolution of protest against the action of their chief.

■On two occasions arrangements were made with the promoters of a surf carnival to announce through the microphone their various events in return for which we- were allowed to put on some of the lectures interspersed with musical items. Tins was a great witness, as large crowds weie in attendance.

The phonographs are being used extensively both in the house-to-house work and in special evening work which has for its object the arrangement of transcription meetings in the homes of the people. In tins latter work parties work two by two and call upon the people usually between 6: 30 and 8: 30 p m., when the man of the house is usually at home. Those interested are directed to the transcription lectures and introduced to The Golden Age and other publications.

For some months one company had the use of a cinema each Sunday. The hall was situated on a busy thoroughfare, and the people just walked in and there was no expense in advertising. The lectures were reproduced through the theater sound system with excellent results. The hall was also used for the company studies. We are sure that other companies would find that a wonderful witness would be given by regularly using a cinema situated in a busy locality. Such buildings are far superior to ordinary halls for transcription lectures. The theater above referred to has now been sold, but it is hoped that another will be available at an early date. Several special transcription lectures have been held and advertised mainly by microphone. The attendance at such meetings has been as high as 1,000.

Up to date there has not been much interference with the open air transcription work. Sometimes a householder complains and along comes a police officer. If he is handled tactfully and the work explained to him he usually goes away quite satisfied and sometimes he remarks, “Well, I don’t see why anyone should complain at your work.” That some pressure is being exercised, there is no doubt, as municipal authorities are now talking of framing laws to abate what is railed “the sound nuisance”.

The sound machine figures are as follows:

Sound Equipment Report

Under 4 In Machines Meetings Attendance Attend'ce

Port. Transcription 70

Phonographs          193     14,947     247,079     4,738

Total attendance for year: 251,817.

Island Service

The conditions in the islands are strenuous, due to the climate and tropical diseases. Europeans can exist there only by having frequent changes to a cooler climate. During the year it was necessary for some of the pioneers to come to Australia for a while, as constantly recurring sickness made it impossible for them to work. A boat has now been provided by the Lord’s grace, and it is hoped'that, by arranging for frequent changes so that some of the boat party can work on shore and those on shore can take their places on the boat, the health of the pioneers in these regions will be better and the work benefited generally. With the enmi-ng of the boat to the East Indies, seven additional pioneers have been brought into the field in this area. In addition to this, two brethren in Java have entered the pioneer service, and it is expected that with these additional workers a great witness will be given. The boat has been named the “Lightbearer'and its journey from Sydney, Australia, with a crew of seven young men has given the truth a great deal of press publicity. In all the ports where the vessel has called reporters came aboard and gave a good write-up concerning the Society’s work and published photographs of the boat. Transcription lectures were given at various ports from the vessel’s sound equipment with good effect. A trail of literature was left behind them, some places being reached with the Kingdom message for the first time. The navigation of the boat from Sydney to the East Indies, via New Guinea, was a formidable undertaking, and the Lord sent along the right men for the job in due time. Only the captain and one of the crew had experience with boats. The intention was to sail from Sydney 400 miles to Lord Howe island, "but a fierce storm arose against which the 52-foot craft with its precious cargo battled for days. Owing to the contrary winds they could not make Lord Howe island, and two weeks after sailing from Sydney the boat put in at Brisbane. Another incident which shows Jehovah’s watchcare over his people was experienced in the Coral sea between New Guinea and Australia. The boat was becalmed with engine broken down and drifting onto a reef when suddenly a breeze came up and they were able to Bad to safety.

A pioneer has been faithfully bearing the Kingdom message in the Fiji islands, finding many hearing ears among the Indians and Fijians, whereas the Europeans usually treat the message with contempt. Religionists, particularly the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, have become angered because those humble people are hearing the truth, and our pioneer brother was recently arrested and charged with acting in a manner prejudicial to the pubhe safety, etc. Natives were brought into the court who swore falsely that this brother had advised them not to pay their taxes. He was convicted and fined £25 and three months’ jail. An appeal has been lodged, and the result is not at present known.

By the Lord’s grace another boat has been provided for the Islands, and it is hoped that this craft will soon be in active service.

Radio

The outstanding event of the year was unquestionably the Washington broadcast of June 2. This speech was received in Australia by means of overseas beam telephone and was rebroadcast from twenty Australian stations. The receiving times were 6 a.m., 5: 30 a.m., and 4 a.m., in the various parts of the country. These, unfortunately, are not good times to expect a large listening audience. We were hampered considerably in that the postmaster general would give no decision as to whether the lecture could be rebroadcast. Finally an appeal was made to the acting prime minister, who took action to force a decision in our favor a few days prior to the broadcast. The same difficulty was experienced in connection with the repeat broadcast on June 9 given specially for Australian listeners. On this occasion Brother Rutherford’s lecture “Government” was picked up from shortwave station W2XAF, Schenectady, and rebroadcast by twelve Australian stations. The transmission was exceptionally clear, the hour of reception being 9 to 10 p.m. in eastern Australia and 7 to 8 p.m. in western Aus^: tralia. Everyone who heard these lectures was thrilled with the message, as evidenced by the letters and telegrams received from all parts. New Zealand friends had to rely on picking up the lecture either from the Australian rebroadcast or by shortwave direct from U. S. A Reports indicate that quite a number in New Zealand heard the message. It is hoped that Australia will be enabled to participate in many more worldwide programs. Rebroadcasts of programs originating from foreign countries are prohibited in Australia unless they are first submitted for censorship. We anticipate no difficulty, however, if the program comes via Britain as did the June 2 broadcast.

The year opened with 25 stations broadcasting the lectures, a total of stations being used throughout the year. At the close of the year there were 23 stations broadcasting. It was found that one or two dishonestly took the money for our programs and through fear of men faded out portions of the lectures which they thought would give offense. These have been definitely dropped from the list.

Conventions

Conventions have been held at three points during the year, namely, Auckland, New Zealand, and Melbourne and Brisbane. Service was the keynote of each convention, and everyone enjoyed the discussions to promote greater efficiency in the work with the sound equipment. At each of these cities a public transcription lecture was held in a cinema and advertised extensively. Microphone announcements through the transcription machines were found to be most effective. The numbers attending the lectures were, Auckland and Melbourne, 1,000 each, and Brisbane, 450.

Opposition

The enemy has shown his hand on several occasions, but most of his activities have been quiet and underhand. The clergy go to the homes of the people and advise them to have nothing to do with the books and to burn them. They succeed in influencing some, who show goathke disposition when Jehovah’s witnesses call. The broadcasting of the “Universal War Near’’ lecture at Bendigo angered the clergy bo that they threatened to protest to the director of posts and telegraphs. A special campaign was organized and the town given a thorough witness from door to door. At the same time a petition protesting against the action of the clergy was circulated, and invitations were issued by leaflet to the lecture “Universal War Near” to be presented in a local cinema. About 500 people attended the lecture, the advertising for which had been done mainly by microphone announcements.

While the Bendigo campaign was in progress, news was received that the police had ordered a party of pioneers to leave the town of Horsham, 150 miles from Bendigo. A detachment of pioneers immediately left Bendigo for Horsham and, after giving a list of their names to the police and informing them Of their intention to preach the gospel in Horsham, they completely worked the town without further interference. Thus by putting on a bold front the Devil was defeated.

Tn each instance where trouble arises the hand of the clergy is seen. A spokesman of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy who regularly broadcasts answers to questions by radio has occasionally attacked the truth, and without doubt he is being well supplied with information from the Hierarchy's propaganda bureau. Now that Australia’s Catholic prime minister has returned from paying his respects to the pope, we may expect Gog to combine his political and religious representatives in an effort to prevent the message from going forth. Whatever man or devil may do, the brethren in this territory are determined by the Lord's grace to faithfully press on in the fight until the whole of the Devil’s crowd is smitten to the dust by Jehovah’s Executioner at Armageddon.

In conclusion, we desire to express appreciation of the manner in which our activities have been assisted by the brethren at headquarters. It must be a tremendous undertaking to supply the literature for each country, and even though we are in the remotest part of the earth, our needs are always catered for and received in good time.

AUSTRIA

It has been under the greatest difficulties and opposition encountered from the Roman Catholic Hierarchy that Jehovah’s witnesses have prosecuted the work in Austria. The brethren in Austria have shown zeal and a keen determination to represent the Lord and his kingdom amidst, all the trials and persecutions that have come upon them. The following excerpt is taken from the report of the director of service in that country:

The difficulties have increased more and more in this land, but even so we rejoice greatly to have a share in the vindication of Jehovah’s name, and give the Lord thanks that he continually provides us with strengthening food by which we are encouraged to work for the Kingdom. Some become discouraged, but we must expect this as shown by the Gideon picture, while others go courageously forward in the strength and joy of the Lord.

About a year ago this office was advised that the Society was dissolved and our activity forbidden; that, before previously being heard. We protested against this, and the American ambassador, who was informed by Brother Harbeck, also intervened for the Society, and after a few months this decision was withdrawn. Meanwhile The Watchtower and The Golden Age were forbidden and some booklets were confiscated. Immediately following the withdrawal of the prohibition against the Society by the Federal chancellor, a large quantity of books and booklets were seized. These booklets had, as prescribed by the Austrian Press Law, been presented to the authorities, several already many years ago, without the slightest difficulty resulting. The confiscation in practically every case took place, as the accompanying proceedings proved, at the instigation of the Catholic clergy.

Soon after the Federal Chancellery had withdrawn the order of dissolution, there appeared a number of very similar Catholic newspaper articles, almost at the same time, in which the authorities were requested to do something against us, or else the people were called upon to defend themselves. A little later, on the 6th of July, the decree by the “ Sicherheitsdirek-tor” was again communicated, that our Society was instantly dissolved. Here again no preliminary hearing was given, which is contrary to law. Without receiving an opportunity for our defense, the office was sealed before the inventory list could be finished. At the same time, under threat of a term of imprisonment from six months up and a fine from S2,500 up, every activity was forbidden. We have appealed to the “Sicher-heitsdirektor ’ ’ on account of the dissolution of the Society and to the Police with regard to the confiscation of the property. Later the Police seizure of the property was repealed, the key returned to us, and it is again at our disposal, even though all activity remains prohibited.

Immediately after the Catholic government was installed our brethren were sorely persecuted, and although the Federal chancellor continually emphasizes that there is complete freedom of faith and conscience in Austria, which is also incorporated in the Constitution, the difficulties in every way have increased. Without cause or excuse the Bible lectures were forbidden. Many brethren were arrested and sentenced because they published the good hews of God's kingdom. In Salzburg and Tyrol a large number of brethren were instantly Sentenced to ten days’ arrest. A Jonadab has been now for three months in custody in Salzburg under examination, and at last the trial has been fixed; he is accused of blasphemy and religious disturbance, because he distributed the booklets which contain the good news of the Kingdom.

Likewise in Salzburg and in the neighborhood there were two funerals arranged by our friends. As the relatives of the deeeased and the friends arrived at the cemetery, they were prevented from entering by the Constabulary and the Fire Brigade—it was forbidden that even a few words of comfort be given. In the one ease even the relatives were not allowed to enter the cemetery and the coffin was just buried by the gravedigger. The priest at this place had taken his stand at the entrance to the cemetery, and he was surrounded by police constables. The brother was also hindered when he desired to give at least a short prayer outside the cemetery. When the priest saw that his arrangements did not receive general approval and that the feeling was against him, he quickly left the place.

Formerly we had but little difficulty in Salzburg, as also the political authorities in Austria were on the whole friendly toward us. Since the new bishop is in Salzburg high prison sentences are imposed on our brethren there. It is a joy to report, however, that the true witnesses do not allow themselves to become discouraged, but they rejoice to prove their integrity also under difficulties.

A sister notified her withdrawal from the Catholic church, and after a while she was invited to appear and was questioned as to her reasons (which is not aceoiding to law). She gave a witness and after a time was notified that her withdrawal was not recognized, the reason being that she did not believe in an immortal soul, etc., and from this it could be seen that she was confused and obviously under the influence of others.

We rejoice to report, however, that in spite of these difficulties 207,699 books and booklets, 736 Bibles, and 102,549 copies of The Golden Age could be distributed by 476 publishers in 62,206 hours, while during the previous year 626 publishers in 82,378 hours had placed 266,854 books and booklets, 99,876 copies of The Golden Age, and 802 Bibles.

Considering the difficulties encountered, the brethren in Austria have done splendidly. This year they placed even more bound books than last.

Lately there were also 30 phonographs and transcription machines put into activity, but so far we can give no report on these.

As regards the pioneer work, only one sister has been able to continue in this work in Austria, and she must work very cautiously, but is very persevering and reports interesting experiences. Many people tell her that only since this work has been forbidden have they really taken notice of it, and now gladly take the literature. Others say: "A year ago we laughed over this matter, but now see quite differently and are glad to be able to obtain Some of this reading matter.' ’

We thank Jehovah for his grace and for the protection which he provides for us, and are happy to know that he himself will vindicate his great name in that he will destroy all his enemies. We rejoice that we are permitted to serve him, and desire to be used further and forever in his service.

BELGIUM

The country of Belgium has a population of only about seven million persons, and a greater number of these are designated "Catholic population” and are under the oppressive thumb of the Hierarchy, The people are humble and doubtless would quickly take to the truth were it not for their self-assumed bosses, who through the priests of the Roman Catholic organization have long kept them in subjection. Only a small number of Jehovah’s witnesses reside in that land. There are 13 companies, the largest of which is at Brussels. Only 92 persons partook of the Memorial. During the fiscal year they served in the field 7,811 hours, and distributed literature as follows: Books, 635; booklets, 31,294; Bibles, 80; copies of The Golden Age, 3,220. The local director of service reports, and the following is extracted from his report:

At the close of the financial year 1934 we looked joyfully and with courage to the future, and yet we could not prevent one anxiety about the progress of the work here, for, as you know, the residence of the pioneers here was endangered. It was ungrounded, however, for while at the end of 1934 only 6 pioneers remained here in the service, now there are again 15, of whom 14 are of foreign nationality. We give Jehovah the praise for this provision, and through the whole year his care has never failed us.

At the beginning of the year the pioneer work in Belgium Buffered a relapse, as several foreign brethren were expelled. With the beginning of the Brussels Exhibition, however, the circumstances changed a little for their good, so that now a larger number are active again. On the average, there were 10 pioneers engaged in the field, but now we have a total of 14.

The hours attained by the pioneers and auxiliaries amount to 16,597; literature distributed: 1,334 books and 61,262 booklets, together with 7,074 Golden Age copies, 53 new subscriptions, and 76 Bibles.

Orders for Eterature received in this office from interested persons have been more than in any previous year. In all, we sent 495 bound books, 9,005 booklets, 1,644 Golden Age copies (apart from subscriptions), and 59 Bibles.

The total amount of hterature distributed in Belgium in the 24,408 hours attained is:

1,969 books                 10,294 Golden Age copies

92,556 booklets                  53 subscriptions

156 Bibles

The Jonadab class now begins to show itself. We receive constantly very pleasing letters—the people of good will have had enough of this old world. The unhappy death of - the queen of the Belgians has given many renewed proof that all the blessing of the CathoEe Hierarchy is of no avail. Spurred on by the report of the Washington convention, we will give the isolated Jonadabs still more attention. Of those who join the companies it is difficult to say where they belong, as they immediately manifest the same zeal as the witnesses themselves, if not more. Some show a greater appreciation than those who have been in the fighters’ ranks for some time already. The Brussels company has decided to consider the question whether one is a Jonadab or an anointed witness as quite a secondary matter, but to direct its whole attention to the vindication of the name of our God. The place to which Jehovah appoints us is apparently the very best for us, as Brother Rutherford pointed out in Washington. Some have withdrawn themselves from the service. These are forming two classes, one opposing the work and joining the “evil servant’’ class, and the other withdrawing because of indifference.

The special service weeks have always been an occasion for extraordinary efforts, so that the result of one such period was practicaUy always equal to the result of a regular month’s work. As an example, we mention the case of a 60-year-old sister who during the service period has never time to make her bed; in the evening she is too tired to do so and sleeps very well, and in the morning she has other duties to perform before she can go out in the service. The total result reached by the companies in the six special service periods of this year is as follows: 3,004 hours, 142 bound books, 13,664 booklets, 645 Golden Age copies, and 21 Bibles.

On the 1st of September there was a service convention arranged in Brussels, and to this We were happy to have the visit of Brother Harbeck. There 110 friends participated in the service, while pioneers and service directors remained in the hall for an important conference. The total result in literature was: 750 booklets, 180 Golden Age copies, 35 books, and 9 Bibles. In the afternoon there came many more interested friends, so that altogether 500 people listened to the explanations regarding the prophecy of Habakkuk. This day was one of great encouragement for us. Without one exception the pioneers were present, and it was a great refreshment' to them. Some came on their bicycles from distances of over 100 miles so as to save traveling expenses. Unfortunately, none of them can afford a car, which would help to lighten their service. They rent a room, making this their center, and work within a radius of 15 miles, and, where circumstances make it necessary, even within 25 miles.

In Belgium there are two electrical transcription machines in use. Begarding one of these we receive very encouraging reports. Jonadabs are working with this machine; they are sons of a Mordecai who already before the war was proclaiming the Kingdom in Belgium. They spent 27 days of 10 hours each in this service, and with an attendance of 3,595 they placed 369 booklets, 79 Golden Age copies, 7 books and 1 Bible. The machine is mounted on a tneyele. Without knowing with whom he was speaking, a man told a brother how beautifully the Kingdom was being proclaimed in the market place in Liege by means of a transcription machine.

There are also some phonographs in use here, and we have received reports of 45 such meetings with an attendance of 345.

The most thrilling thing that I have ever experienced was when the message of the Kingdom was heard in Brussels direct from Washington. It was with difficulty that we controlled our nerves as we heard first the announcement, followed by the song of praise and then the clear voice of Brother Buther-ford. The Brussels brethren do not understand English, but at no cost would they miss this great event. The powerful voice as well as the continual applause of the attendance at Washington made them to understand that an important message was being broadcast to the ends of the earth. Immediately following we confirmed the good reception by cablegram. The lecture had been relayed by telephone lines from London to Brussels.

At present there is a World Exhibition in Brussels. By your permission we there rented a stand for supplying our books as well as two show-windows for exhibiting the same. A large shield with the inscription "Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society, editors of Jehovah’s witnesses’’ advertises our stand. Experiences of every kind are had there, and up to now 1,500 publications have been placed on contribution. Many returned to get more, while others came to the office to obtain the whole series of books. Thousands of catalogues are given free to the passers-by. Some said: “This is truly the best we have found in the Exhibition.” Many “crows” pass by! One after having looked at the books asked in a fierce voice: “Are you allowed to sell these books here?” We replied: “And for what reason should it not be permitted to sell these books here?” and thereupon he went. Another one was more tolerant and said kindly: “I know these books from Judge Euth-erford; I brought them from America and read them”; he preferred, however, not to express an opinion about them. Still another one, as he held the books in his hand looking them over, suddenly let them fall as though smitten by a stroke, when he saw what books they were, saying: “I am not allowed to read these books . . . no, I may not do this ...” He looked as anxious as a child who awaits a drubbing from his mether. In the windows there are placards pointing to the establishment of the Kingdom; these are often read with great attention. It would really take too much time and space to recount all the happy experiences we have had with people of good will.

Our books are also exhibited in 35 languages in two showwindows in the Pavilion of “Graphic Arts”. Here we were awarded the Silver Medal. We do not wish to obtain rewards for selfish purposes, as is the case with other exhibitors; however, these are a help in our fight for the right to preach the gospel.                              -

This year we have had less difficulty with the police. A parcel of literature forwarded by rail had to be fetched by the receiver from the police office. The police having been informed about this, it had been confiscated. In the presence of the police commissioner this then had to be opened. The official first asked certain questions, which gave the brother an opportunity of telling him about the Kingdom. Thereupon the brother was dismissed. He wanted to leave the official some literature, but to his astonishment the man replied: “I know quite weU what this is, for I have read Life, and various other booklets. I wish that all shall come to pass as these books indicate; just continue the work, and I will give order that you be no more molested. ’ ’

One pioneer had to appear before a judge because he went from house to house without a permit. The Catholic mayor of that place demanded of the judge that he be punished. A discussion ensued between the judge and the mayor; finally the former banged the table With his fist saying: “I am the judge; this man is free; he does a good work. Perhaps you would hke that all the Catholic hubs be denounced, for they go from house to house I ’ ’

With particular satisfaction the witnesses of Jehovah in Belgium, acting in complete harmony with those of the whole world, on October 7, 1934, sent a telegram to the Hitler Government, to help our brethren who are being persecuted in that country. A few post offices refused to accept the same; where refused, the telegram was immediately forwarded per express letter.

In Ypres, which town was completely brought to ruins in the World War, and which is now rebuilt, there is a company of 10 Jonadabs; they were baptized in the sea. The house in Which they meet to study in this completely Catholic town is now known as the “Bible House”.

Total literature dispatched: 2,758 books, 114,521 booklets, 13,286 Golden Age copies, 214 Bibles.

Letters: 1,451 received; 1,637 dispatched.

We are determined to further serve the Lord faithfully. The explanations in The Watchtower are highly appreciated here. After studying an article we are always inclined to say, “This is the best ever.” AH the companies study The Watchtower zealously, and for months past I do not remember having heard a single critic, but only joy and wonderment about the logic of Jehovah’s truth. We give Jehovah all honor for the food provided.

THE BLIND

The Society endeavors to get the Kingdom message to those who are blind in their natural eyes and who desire to know about God and his provision for humankind. To this end the branch is maintained at 1210 Spear street, Logansport, Indiana, where printing is done in the Braille. This work is necessarily limited, because not so many of the blind persons are interested. The 'Watchtower is published in the Braille and loaned to the blind by the Society’s office above mentioned, and in addition thereto the following booklets: Comfort for the People, Dividing the People, Angels, Desirable Government, The Kingdom the Hope of the World, and Where Are the Dead? The pioneers, auxiliaries and company publishers everywhere coming in contact with blind persons who are interested in the Kingdom should put them in communication with the Society’s branch office at the above address and inform them that they can get assistance in Bible study by writing this office, and also by taking their subscription for the circulating library for the blind.

Some of the companies are putting forth a greater effort to reach the blind. In Los Angeles a library for the benefit of the blind is kept, in which the publications are circulated amongst those who are blind. During the year this company at Los Angeles has loaned the literature to 65 blind people. Three of these are subscribers for the Braille Watchtower. The company at Los Angeles sends out visitors to call on the blind to encourage them in their studies. The phonograph records are being used to splendid effect in this work. In this connection we urge the companies in various places to look after the blind people and encourage them in studying the message of God’s kingdom.

The Society’s branch at Logansport has furnished The Watchtower in Braille during the year to 30 readers. In addition thereto The Watchtower is sent in Braille to Australia, South Africa, Canada, and other places. Recently the requests' from the Chicago Library have been more than could be met in furnishing reading matter for the blind. We are glad of the increased interest in this behalf.

BRAZIL

Publishing the Kingdom message in Brazil is progressing. There are now 9 pioneers, 2 auxiliaries and 50 company publishers regularly engaged in the service. This is a small number compared with the greatness of the territory; yet with these there has been a good advertisement of the Kingdom. During the year there were placed in the hands of the people 40,863 books and booklets. The work has been handicapped somewhat, due to the faet that a proper translator could not he obtained to translate the literature as rapidly as it could be used. We hope this can be improved shortly.

Like every other part of the field, Satan, through his instruments, the clergy, has interfered in every way possible to prevent the work. Some of these clergymen issue papers naming all the publications of the Kingdom message and speak against them, but that in truth and in fact advertises the books and many people inquire about them and in this way more are placed. Thus the Lord makes their wrath work to his own praise. The population of Brazil is largely Portuguese, and there is not so much literature in the Portuguese language as we should like. We are looking for some good translator to increase this part of the work.

BRITAIN

Jehovah has blessed the English-speaking people with far greater opportunities of service than any other people on the earth. Just why, we cannot surely say, but it seems that more of the English-speaking people than others desire to know Jehovah and his kingdom. The message of the Kingdom has had a wider publication in the English-speaking countries than any other part of the earth. According to population the United States stands at the head, and Britain is next. That must have a deep significance. Jehovah has commanded the remnant of his earthly organization to carry the message of warning to the people, and, this being done, there rests upon the people who do hear a greater responsibility. The English-speaking people have been more favored than any other with a knowledge of the truth. They have been students of the Bible, and others have not. The truth places before everyone who hears it the issue of life and death, and each one must assume the responsibility of choosing which course he will take. Each one therefore has much to do with fixing his own destiny.

A people that thinks less of self, of course, will think more of the Lord and the opportunity of serving him. A people that is much concerned about its selfish interests will give little heed to things pertaining to God’s purpose. It is those who love righteousness and hate iniquity who want to know Jehovah and do his will, and such he has taken out of the world as a people for his name. The number thus taken out is small, as compared with the whole population. The witnesses who are ehosen must bear the responsibility of getting the message to the people. It is a real joy to see how the brethren are responding to the opportunities of service. Each year they see more clearly that God’s purpose has been and is to select from amongst men certain ones who are commissioned to be his witnesses and each one commissioned must perform his duty by bringing the message of truth before others.

The time was when many of the brethren in Britain understood that their chief objective was to shine before their brethren and exhibit their own understanding of the Scriptures and teach others. Now the ones really devoted to the Lord see that the chief purpose of their being on earth and possessing a knowledge of the truth is to bear testimony before others that Jehovah is God, and that his kingdom is the only hope of the world. Those who thus do and continue faithful will participate in the vindication of Jehovah’s name, and the vindication of his name is the all-important question. Those who do prove their integrity toward God by faithfully serving him now will be the ones who shall be forever in his glorious presence and share the blessings that the Most High will bestow upon his royal house.

It is always a real pleasure to visit the British brethren and to participate with them in the service.

It was not the privilege of the president during this fiscal year to make the usual journey to Europe, but the Lord provided opportunity to speak to the European brethren by the modern means of transmitting speech. Now it is a happy task to be permitted to report the activities of those who are devoted to Jehovah and his kingdom in that part of the earth.

The territory covered by Britain is small, and this somewhat handicaps the brethren, because not all can find sufficient territory for the pioneer service. The zeal of the remnant and their companions has been shown as never before in that land, and now comes the report at the end of the fiscal year showing a wider witness even than heretofore. The witness work for the Kingdom during the fiscal year was blessed by the Lord, and the publishers in Britain placed in the hands of the people books and booklets published by the Society to the total number of 3,060,667 volumes. In joyfully doing this the brethren went from house to house and spoke to the people, using phonograph, transcription and sound cars to reproduce the speech that had been made and recorded in America.

The work at London is well organized, and the brethren in charge have been working in complete unity. The directors of service at London have filed their usual annual report, and the following is quoted therefrom:

The continued activity of the British friends and the manifest blessing of Jehovah on his kingdom work in this portion of his field is cause for deep gratitude to him and joy of heart to all who are privileged to share in the work. The evidences of Jehovah’s assisting grace during the twelve months closing the 30th of September 1935 are so numerous that it is. impractical to record them all. One outstanding example, however, we must record, namely, the marvelous results following the effort made in this country to relay your now world-famous lecture “Government” from Washington on' June 2; 1935. In spite of the refusal of the' press to¹ carry the Society’s advertisement and the refusal of the British Broadcasting Corporation to relay reception from Washington, we were, by divine grace, able to arrange for large audiences in London, Birmingham, Manchester, Newcastle, Glasgow, and Belfast, to hear perfectly every word delivered by you on that important occasion. Without doubt the brethren and Jonadabs throughout the British field were thrilled and stimulated to a remarkable degree by the evidence of divine favor afforded through the reception of that lecture, and the increased activity and results obtained are proof thereof. The interest created in the minds of the British public is also manifest through the fact that for the first time the output from this office has exceeded three million volumes. Fortunately your foresight provided that we should have ample stocks in hand, but the demand was such that the stock distributed amongst the companies has been greatly reduced during the twelve months.

The output of literature reveals a total of 3,060,667 volumes, which is an increase of 128,762 over last year’s figure. A significant fact to be noted is that the increase referred to is almost entirely due to bound volumes, for of the increase of 128,762 volumes, 126,535 were clothbound books. The evidence available proves conclusively that the increase of bound volumes in the limited territory of the British Isles is due to the fact of the transcription lectures given by transcription machines and phonographs working regularly in the public streets with the brethren as they witness from door to door, and, in addition, to the sound cars working in the outlying territory which is not served by companies or sharpshooters. Not only docs the lecture thus broadcast stimulate the public, but it tlnills and cheers the publisher, and the increase of 22,427 hours is at least to some extent due to the stimulating effect of the lectures. In addition to the hours reported, a good many thousand hours are spent by the brethren operating the transcription machines and phonographs, which time is not included in the total given above. If this time were included the total hours spent would show an enormous increase over last year. The book Jehovah has also to be taken into account, for the output of this volume, namely, 88,155 in ten months, exceeds by over 22,000, in twelve months, that of the bound volume previously issued.

The condition in the country during this year is very similar to our previous report. The possibility of a European war hangs like a heavy black cloud over the people. The politicians are administering oxygen in an effort to keep the League of Nations alive. The people as a whole appear to have little hope of the patient’s survival. The clergy are like rats deserting a finking shipj they have -very little to nay about it.

There is some evidence of the police authorities’ beginning to take a little more notice of the Kingdom work. So far we have had no interference at all, and the constables in the street have, in the majority of cases, proved friendly towards us. The transcription work, however, has caused the clergy class to bring a little more pressure to bear on the officers of the law, but during the twelve months only one case has been actually taken into court, and this was dismissed on the payment of ten shillings. The British friends appreciate the favorable conditions which at present prevail, and, united as never before, they are pressing the battle to the gate in no uncertain manner.

Service: There has been no general assembly of the brethren during the year, but 25 service assemblies have been held in convenient centers of the British field. One of the principal purposes of the meetings is that the brethren may unite together in publishing the good news of the Kingdom. All the assemblies were well supported by the local brethren, and 7,603 publishers went forth and in 15,836 hours placed 53,249 volumes with 31,305 members of the public. Time is always provided on the program for a meeting of the publishers to discuss organization methods and instructions. These meetings are very much appreciated by all who have the interests of the work at heart.

There are 368 company and sharpshooter units equipped for service. These contain 5,496 publishers holding the Society’s certificate. Of these, 76 percent have taken a regular part in the service, to compare with 70 percent last year. The other 24 percent are engaged in the transcription work. So the result is then that the British friends are practically 100 percent active publishers. The total of 575,945 hours devoted by the company and sharpshooter publishers to advise the King and the Kingdom is 966 over last year’s figure. There is a decrease in the total obtainers, the figure being 1,203,661, to compare with 1,509,566 last year. This is due to the fact that the British friends now offer either a combination of three bound books or three booklets instead of a single volume or a single booklet. This method is one of the reasons why 179,573 bound volumes were placed, to compare with 76,608 in the preceding twelve months: the total literature placed by the service publishers being 1,578,951.

Transcription: The service of the sound cars has undoubtedly received Jehovah’s approval and blessing. Of the three which were built and equipped to your instructions, two have been operating continuously for twelve months, and the third for ten months. The fourth was equipped by a brother and placed at the disposal of the Society, and this has been in active service for only one month. They have traveled a total of 14,857 miles, three working in England, and one in Scotland. During 8,605 hours they have given 5,015 lectures, to an attendance of 56,274. With the interested who heard these lectures they placed 16,128 bound volumes, 17,856 booklets and 172 Bibles; a total of 34,156 volumes, to compare with 14,210 in the previous twelve months, In the highlands of Scotland No. 3 sound car placed 54 bound volumes jn one day; and 241 bound volumes and 83 booklets in the week. In a small village on the east coast of England No. 4 sound car placed 209 bound volumes and 286 booklets in one week. The figures we have available show conclusively that one pioneer in a sound car is 200 percent more efficient in placing the literature, per hour, than one pioneer without the advantage of the transcription lecture. In addition, the public have the testimony of the lecture.

The company and sharpshooter groups are gradually equipping themselves with the latest transcription machines and horn projectors or else with a phonograph. There are now 192 groups operating either one or more machines, to compare with 103 last year. The total of machines in the country in active operating has increased from 227 to 269 during the year. These machines are equipped with 4,813 16-inch lecture records, to compare with 3,969 in the previous year. A total of 346 brethren have equipped themselves with a phonograph, and 9,650 phonograph discs are in active service, to compare with 900 last year. The number of meetings recorded is 44,675, an increase of 31,506 as compared with last year, and the attend¹ anee of 938,312 shows an increase of 437,765 interested persons. Letters received not only from interested listeners, but from the publishers operating the machines, prove what a joy this part of the Kingdom service is bringing, both to the operator and to those who receive the message of truth.

On the 29th of September throughout the British Isles over 1,000 lectures were given with the "Government” record in the open air. The full reports are not yet to hand, but there is evidence that the attendance at these lectures will surpass anything we have obtained for lectures arranged previously in halls. Schedules were arranged and, in spite of a wet day, 'every man stood in his place.’

The Bethel family with one heart and one voice continue to use time and opportunity in every part of the Kingdom service. Fully equipped with the latest transcription apparatus they visit regular pitches on Wednesdays, Saturdays and Sundays, in addition to their week-end service in the field.

The office staff are never so happy as when serving the interests of the Kingdom.

The correspondence this year shows a decrease both in the number of letters dispatched and in that received; nevertheless we received 40,848 and posted 52,868. There is an increase in the number of small parcels packed and dispatched, the figure this year being 29,178, to compare with 27,011. There has been an additional demand on the printing department, the items printed having so far reached the record figure of 4,385,795, an increase of 591,989 items. In preparing for the radio folders for the 29th of September referred to above we printed 949,360 items, which is over 100,000 more than we have done in any month before.

Pioneers: We continue to have more applicants for the pioneer service than it is possible -for us to place on the limited area of the British Isles. We have an average of 204 full-time pioneers, and these placed a total of 727,501 pieces of literature, which is an increase of 20,027 over last year, the increase being entirely bound books. As one would expect, there is a Blight decrease in the booklets placed. Last year there was a small decrease in the number of hours, but this year we are happy to report a small increase. In addition to the pioneers we have an average of 100 auxiliaries, and these placed 185,970 bound volumes in 62,264 hours. This is a decrease on the literature placed last year, but at that time we had 120 auxiliaries in the field.

The Watchtower file shows that 744 additional subscribers have been added during the year and, in addition, 27,408 copies have been supplied to Jonadabs and others who do not subscribe annually. Without exception the remnant people of God eagerly look for the regular supply of life-sustaining food. As each new issue is received one is reminded of the words of Jesus, "Man shall not live by bread alone, but by every word that proceedeth out of the mouth of God.”

The circulation of The Golden Age shows a slight increase over last year. The single copies supplied show a very large increase, having reached the number of 43,799. The reason of this remarkable increase is undoubtedly due to the appreciation of the brethren and the Jonadabs of the article containing an account of the great convention at Washington and of all that took place there, as well as many inspiring articles showing how the Lord as protecting,-guiding and directing his people.

For the benefit of those who desire to study and consider the details of the operation of the -service publishers the following tables are published:

Summary Report for Year Ending September 30, 1935

Pioneers:

Highest number: Pioneers

Auxiliaries

Average monthly: Pioneers

Auxiliaries

Total hours: Pioneers                             250,412

Auxiliaries                              62,264

Grand total hours                               312,676

Grand total obtainers                              589,216

Grand total literature placed                      913,470

Companies:

Number of service units

Number of certificate holders

Average publishers monthly

Total hours                                     422,126

Total obtainers                                  1,059,325

Total literature                                    1,385,153

Sharpshooters:

Number of sharpshooter units

Number of certificate holders

Average publishers monthly

Total hours                                         53,819

Total obtainers                                    144,336

Total literature                                    193,798

Service assemblies:

Number held                                    25

Attendance on campaigns                          7,603

Hours on campaigns                              15,836

Obtainers                                           31,305

Literature placed                                   53,249

Transcription:

Number of transcription machines

Companies operating machines

Number of 16-ineh discs with companies

Meetings held                                    44,677

Attendance                                      838,312

Number of phonographs sold

Number of 12-inch phonograph discs sold Number of sound cars	9,650 4
Literature placed: Books	16,128
Booklets	17,859
Bibles	172
Total literature	34,159
Milea traveled	14,857
Lectures given	5,015
Attendance	56,274

Miscellaneous:

Parcels packed and dispatched	29,178
Circular letters	17,500
Letters printed on Miehle	14,575
Service Directors	91,000
Transcription lecture slips	2,560,850
Transcription window cards	4,170
Total items printed	4,385,795

Literature output:

English edition: Bound hooks                    387,417

Booklets                        2,673,139

Total                           3,060,556

Foreign editions: Bound books and booklets                    111

Total output of all literature                      3,060,667

Correspondence:

Letters received

Letters dispatched

Letters redirected to publishers

Bethel service party:

Service workers	23
Average out per month	20
Total hours	4,015
Total obtainers	7,095
Total bound books	2,943
Total booklets	8,879

Grand total of literature                           11,822

Regional directors:

Number engaged	2
Companies visited	305
Meetings held	598
Attendance at meetings	3,796
Publishers on campaigns	4,742
Hours in service	1,618
Obtainers	4,664
Literature placed	6,997
Miles traveled	10,801

Bethel service visits:

Number engaged Meetings held Attendance at meetings Attendance on service campaigns

16 240 4,018 1,114

London leaders’ visits:

Number engaged Meetings held Attendance at meetings Attendance on service campaigns

10 88 1,290 412

P.T.M. Sound Cars — Comparison Report

October 1, 1934, to September 30, 1935

	1935	1934	Increase
Cars in use	4*	2	2
Miles traveled	14,857	6,493	8,364
Hours	8,605	4,185	4,420
Lectures given	5,015	2,347	2,668
Attendance	56,274	16,227	40,047
Books placed	16,128	3,099	13,029
Booklets placed	17,859	11,064	6,795
Bibles placed	172	47	125
Total literature	34,159	14,210	19,949
Phonograph discs placed	58	—	58

October 1, 1934, to September 30, 1935

Machines in use:	1935	1934	Increase
England	218	185	33
Ireland	1	1	—
Scotland	32	27	5'
Wales	15	12	3
Channel Islands	2	1	1
Isle of Man	1	1	—
Total	269	227	42
Companies operating machines	192	173	19
Phonograph machines sold	346	24	322
Phonograph discs sold Transcription discs in	9,650	900	8,750
circulation	4,813	3,969	844
Regal hymn records sold	1,015 3,247	—	1,015
Reports received		1,461	1,786
Number of meetings	44,675	13,169	31,506
Total attendance	838,312	400,547	437,765
Total Literature	Placed by	Pioneers
October 1934 to Septemb		er 1935
1935	1934	Comparison
Total books         176,302	131,518	44,784 (Increase)
Total booklets       551,199	575,956	24,757 (Decrease)
Total literature 727,501	707,474	20,027 (Net increase)

Highest number publishers In any one month:

England and Wales

Ireland

Scotland

Averages:

Average publishers monthly

Total hours

Hours per publisher monthly Total obtainers

Monthly Summary of Items Printed on Press Year Ending September 30, 1935

1934 October November December

1935	1935
January	266,590	August	44,800
February	301,510	September	949,360
March.	325,545		■ ■
April	350,170	Total	4,385,795
fey	816,610	Total for year
June	106,350	ending Septem-
July	283,035	ber 30, 1934	3,786,706

BRITISH GUIANA

The work in British Guiana has made some progress during the year, and for this we are grateful to the Lord. There are only 28 workers in the field and not all of these put in any great length of time. During the year there were placed in the hands of the people books and booklets to the number of 14,758; 145 public meetings were held, the attendance being 7,268; 156 company meetings were held. The sound equipment has aided much in the work in that country as well as in other places.

CANADA

The Society’s branch office at Toronto, Canada, is in better shape than at any time in the past. It is better equipped to do the work, and there is an increased zeal in the service. Heretofore the workers have been required to live in different places, but during this fiscal year quarters have been prepared for the entire working staff to live as one family; and therefore there is now established in Toronto a regular Bethel home. Thus the brethren who work there are enabled to begin the day by the morning service similar to that at the Brooklyn Bethel. Each one feels more encouraged than ever to bend his or her endeavors toward the magnifying of Jehovah’s name.

The zeal for the Lord has been steadily maintained and in fact stronger throughout the various provinces of Canada during the year than in the past. The brethren appreciate the fact that the Kingdom is here, that Jehovah and Christ Jesus, their Teachers, provide now the food convenient for them, that they can see what is quickly coming to pass and the obligation is laid upon every one to bear testimony to the truth. Seeing this, they gird up the loins of their mind and press forward in the work.

Persecution

Again we are reminded that the "uneireumcised Philistines”, that is to say, the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, exercise a tremendous power in Canada, and particularly in the province of Quebec. Fully 90 percent of the population of that province are under the direct control of the Hierarchy, and hence are called Catholics. They are Catholics because they have had no opportunity to know anything different. The Hierarchy has kept them in darkness and desperately fights to prevent them from hearing the truth, because the truth would open their eyes and cause the people to take their stand on the side of Jehovah God and forsake the Devil’s organization. Fear has been planted in the minds of the people in that province, and they know literally nothing except to bow before the hypocritical gangsters that rule through the Catholic Hierarchy. The political and judicial officers are largely influenced by the Hierarchy, and therefore little or no justice may be expected where the issue is between the truth and the Hierarchy. The people are instructed that they must show their devotion to the "church”; otherwise they will suffer materially and spiritually and their duration in purgatory will probably not end. A vast amount of money is invested in church property, convents and such institutions, while the people are compelled to reside in humble homes, often living in poverty, and so reduced to this condition by reason of the constant contributions that are forced from them to the church. Not only has the proclamation of the truth in that province met with opposition, but it has been almost impossible to communicate the message of the Kingdom to the people. Many of the brethren have, at the risk of their liberty and even their lives, gone into the territory in obedience to the Lord’s command to serve the message of warning upon the people. The priests of the Hierarchy denounce Jehovah’s witnesses as Communists and enemies of the government, and they are constantly publishing lies against God’s witnesses. The priests organize school children into mobs and follow Jehovah’s witnesses about, shouting and inciting men to assault them. In spite of these conditions many of the younger people are getting their eyes open to the hypocrisy and tyranny of the Roman Catholic system. The Lord will see to it that they have an opportunity to break away and serve him.

During the year there have been eleven prosecutions of Jehovah’s witnesses in the courts, and these cases have been stubbornly fought by the representatives of the state. Brethren have been charged with seditious conspiracy, this charge being based upon the fact of their distribution of the Society’s publications announcing Jehovah as the true God, Christ as King, and the Kingdom as the only hope of suffering humanity. The punishment inflicted upon the brethren that have been convicted has been from two weeks to two months in prison. The prisons of Quebec are unsanitary, filthy and infested with vermin. The arrest included young women, who were thrown into these filthy prisons. On one occasion two sisters were arrested, immediately taken to the private residence of the magistrate, and, without even knowing that they were on trial, they were sentenced to eight days in jail. As an instance showing how the Catholic-Hierarchy priests influence public officials the following is related: The brethren were tried before a magistrate.

Insufficient evidence caused the dismissal of the case. The cost bill of $91 was against the town. The council refused to pay it, but demanded that the mayor do so because the mayor had directed the driving of Jehovah’s witnesses out of town. The mayor replied that the priest had told him to do what he had done and thus the priest should pay the bill. The man who had committed the assault upon Jehovah’s witnesses said that the next time the priests wanted any dirty work done they would have to do it themselves so far as he Was concerned. Two brethren convicted in the local courts of Quebec of the “crime of seditious conspiracy’’ appealed their case to the Supreme Court of the province. An ardent Catholic of the Supreme Bench rendered the opinion, and his quotation from the literature, taking isolated sentences out of their setting and misapplying them, and his final finding upon the law and the facts, is really a disgrace to the legal profession. The conviction was affirmed. The cases then were appealed to the Dominion Supreme Court of Canada, where they are now pending. Regardless of what should be the final result of these cases, it affords an opportunity for the brethren to maintain their integrity under stress and at the same time to bear witness to the name of Jehovah God and his kingdom.

Persecutions of Jehovah’s witnesses in the provinces of Alberta and Saskatchewan have been carried on vigorously by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy in those places, particularly amongst the Ukrainians. These hypocritical priests have incited the ignorant to assault the brethren. On one occasion their camp was destroyed. On another occasion the priests broke up the meeting and threw decayed eggs at Jehovah’s witnesses. On another occasion they organized a mob, who disguised themselves by painting their faces and putting on old clothes and, armed with tin pans, fiddles and like noise-making instruments, met Jehovah’s witnesses at the railway station and endeavored to put them to shame and ridicule by following them about and making unearthly noises. The tires on the automobiles of the brethren had been cut and other damage done to their property. Many persons are aware of the fact that the Catholic Hierarchy are back of these persecutions and have told their hearers that they may kill Jehovah’s witnesses 'without fear of sin. It is manifest that these goats have taken their firm stand on the side of the Devil and will not be moved. Their end is certain.

Jehovah’s witnesses, regardless of the place, have the spirit of the Lord, and therefore are all of the same spirit. They know that they must submit to persecution from Satan and his agents and that they must maintain their integrity under such stress. For this reason they go joyfully on, singing the praises of the Most High and proclaiming his kingdom, giving warning to the people. The director of service from the Canadian branch office has well summed up the matter as follows:

Despite the tremendous opposition of Satan and his forces against the proclamation of the Kingdom message in these lands, the total number of books and booklets placed during the year was 1,539,173, to compare with 1,537,572 last year. Of this number 116,394 were bound books, as against 107,924 last year. This literature was distributed amongst 812,949 ob-tainers, an increase of 49,519 over last year, and in 40 different languages.

The number of publishers in the field averaged 2,218 per month, an increase of 258 as compared with 1,960 in 1934. To accomplish the splendid witness that was given these brethren spent 438,926 hours in the witnessing work.

Witness Periods

The policy of having special witness periods manifestly is one greatly blessed of the Lord as reflected in the results obtained and in the enthusiasm of the publishers in such service, an average of 90 percent having engaged in each of the special periods during the past year. The results were as follows:

The Kingdom Praise Period, Sept. 29-Oct. 7, 1934	Books 1,867	Booklets 106,642
The Servant’s Testimony Period, Nov. 24-Dec. 2, 1934	2,151	63,597
Kingdom Heralds’ Testimony Period, Feb. 2-10, 1935	8,924	22,467
The Anointed’s Thanksgiving Period, April 13-21, 1935	1,261	97,956
Testimony for Jehovah and for Gideon, June 1-9, 1935	2,308	36,456
The Unselfish One’s Fruit-Bearers’ Period, August 3-11, 1935	6,466	34,346

Publishers

The pioneers in the field during the year averaged 159, to compare with 179 last year, while the greatest number in the service during any one month was 203. This faithful army has with characteristic zeal proclaimed the message all the way from Newfoundland to the Yukon and from Nova Scotia to British Columbia, averaging 112.4 hours each per month in the service. Not alone have they been active in placing the hterature, but they have effectively used the various kinds of sound equipment, the sound cars, transcription machines and phonographs, and it is interesting indeed to note the experiences they have had in connection with their work and how manifestly the Lord’s blessing is upon them and guiding them in all their ways. A field publisher reports:

“We wish we could find words to express our appreciation of the wonderful provision of the phonograph. The more we use it and see the effect, the more we like it. Though poor as regards material things, we are surely wonderfully equipped for the Lord’s service, and all praise and thanks -we know are due to Him. ’ ’

“The other day while we were in B----R--- an old man

came up to our house-car to see if we had hot dogs. We asked him inside and played some of the phonograph lectures. He said, ‘I hate religion, but those are the very best Bible talks I ever heard. Got all the preachers beat 1 ’ Then when we showed him the books and told him he could take some to his cabin he was delighted to take Government, Jehovah and some booklets. He had never heard of Brother Rutherford and had never been called on. He lives away in the hills and had come to B----R----to get his mail. Another time we played

the records ‘Keys’ and ‘Trinity’ for a Catholic lady whoso husband has been reading the books and has had many arguments with her. She said right away, 'That is the truth. My husband has tried to tell me dozens of times, and I could not see it. I can now, and I want that record to show my Catholic friends, and as soon as we can get some money we will get all those records. ’ ’

“I believe that northern British Columbia will see great developments in the near future so far as the truth is concerned, because there are many of the 'great multitude’ who have taken their stand and others are coming along, among both the white people and the Indians. The latter especially showed greater confidence in our. visit this year than last, knowing that J. w’s come to help them and do not try to put anything over them.’’

The pioneer results for 1935 as compared with, 1934 were as follows:

The auxiliaries in the field, for some unaccountable reason, have never been great in numbers in this country. This year they averaged only 25.6 per month, but the hours spent totaled 15,582, an average of 50.7 each per month. Their placements totaled 56,061 books and booklets, of which number 4,233 were bound, to compare with 51,897 dunng 1934, of which number 3,939 were bound—a largw result this year despite the fact that there were on the average 8 fewer auxiliaries in the field per month.

As the statement shows, the results for the companies and sharpshooters have been very gratifying, but, unlike the pioneers and auxiliaries, it is regrettable to note that their hours are much below the quota for this branch of the service. During 1935 they averaged but 8.5 hours each per month, spending a total of 208,799 hours in the field. The literature placed, however, totaled 852,169 books and booklets, to compare with 574,885 last year, of which number 34,833 were bound, to compare with 28,520. Great indeed has been the witness, but how much greater it would have been had the quota of hours been properly maintained! It is interesting to compare the results obtained by the companies and sharpshooters with those of the pioneers and auxiliaries. This comparison is as follows:

	Companies and Sharpshooters	Pioneers and Auxiliaries
Bound books	34,833	71,650
Booklets	817,336	518,218
Total literature	852,169	589,868
Average monthly publishers	2,033	185
Hours	208;799	230,127
Obtainers	495,150	317,799

Companies and Pioneers and Sharpshooters Auxiliaries 214            81

19,295         10,739

354,635          58,462

Prom the above figures it will be seen that the number of bound volumes placed by the pioneers and auxiliaries is more than twice that of the number placed by the companies and sharpshooters.

Bethel

Ton will be pleased to know that the field results of the Bethel family during the past year have been very gratifying and greatly exceed the results of 1934. The comparison is as follows:

Bound books

Booklets

Total literature Publishers Hours Obtainers

Radio

The whole of Canada and Newfoundland is fairly well covered by the American stations broadcasting the Kingdom message, and in addition thereto we are using seven stations in Canada. The outstanding witness during the past year was, of course, that delivered by yourself upon the occasion of the Washington convention. That bold and telling message was heard distinctly throughout this entire country and Newfoundland.

The stations at present being used in Canada, over which lectures from the Society’s publications are being read by local brethren, are as follows:

Sydney, N. S.                Hamilton, Ont.

Moncton, N. B.                 (English and Polish)

Cobalt, Ont.                    Calgary, Alta.

Kirkland Lake, Ont.          Kelowna, B. C.

Proclamation by Sound Equipment

It is really wonderful, the way in which this work is spreading throughout the country and how rapidly the friends svery-where are becoming “sound-equipment—minded”. Sixteen sound cars are heralding forth the testimony with no uncertain tone, more than 115 transcription machines are consistently in operation, and hundreds of phonographs and records are being used by the individual publishers in the field work. There are now 295 machines in operation each month, to compare with but 126 last year, an increase of 169. During 1935 no less than 30,437 meetings were held, an increase of 24,987 over the past year, with a total audience of 433,280, to compare with 142,949 during 1934.

In Newfoundland, where a very large proportion of the people can neither read nor write, the sound car is especially effective; for in no other way is it possible to get the message to a large percentage of the people than by an oral lecture in some form. A field publisher reports:

“Newfoundland is a country that particularly needs God’s kingdom. The educational system is almost entirely under church supervision, and as a consequence the people are not given an education. In many places as we go from door to door we meet three or four in succession who cannot even read the testimony card. The sound car is therefore the greatest aid we could possibly have, and since receiving it we have held two meetings each day. After the meeting today five people came up to the machine and asked for a booklet for one or two cents—all they can afford, for they are very, very poor. They coaxed us to pnt on a second meeting, and all the village listened. One old man stood at the side of the car and nodded his approval as each point was made. One lady said her husband came home from work at noon and said he had heard the lecture in the morning a mile away as plainly as if he were right up by the machine. In witnessing from door to door after the meeting we placed 115 booklets. On Tuesday we put on a meeting at S---- C----at 10: 00 a.m. and then

witnessed in the village. Nearly all told ub they had heard the lecture, and invited us in. We placed 75 booklets as a result. At practically every call we made they begged us to have another meeting, and we agreed to broadcast again at five o ’clock. When we got back to the car at that time there were over one hundred people standing around waiting for us, and as soon as we started the program the roads around were just lined with people sitting on logs or boats, listening. On another occasion a man donated $1.00 to help the work along. At B----

and P---- the same keen interest was shown and the lecture

was heard one and a half miles away. Last night during the meeting at C---- the streets were crowded and all paid very

close attention. The sound car is surely the proper thing for this country, and everyone talks about anything new. So when that new thing is the Kingdom message and the means whereby it is spread abroad it makes us rejoice indeed.”

Everywhere throughout Canada and Newfoundland this means of testifying is being felt, on the one hand arousing great interest and pointing the way of escape to those of good will, and on the other causing consternation among the ranks of the enemy. Other publishers report:

"Since we have been using the sound car regularly in our town people are telling us they are reading the literature that has been lying on the shelf; and we think it true, judging by their more intelligent conversations.”

"The transcription work is being carried on enthusiastically here. The publishers are going out with the sound car and find it a great encouragement, and they are able to place more literature. ’ ’

"We thank our dear God for this great opportunity to have a part in the vindication of his name. The machine works first-class, and it sure opens the people’s eyes out here. We will be on the road every chance we have from now on.”

"An old sister passed away recently, and for the funeral service we used the phonograph records ‘The Dead’ and 'Bes-urrection’. Neighbors who will not even accept free booklets were there and listened spellbound. A wonderful witness was given to the 70 people present, including the United Church preacher and his wife. We thank Jehovah for the phonograph records to enlighten the great multitude still in Satan’s organization. ’ ’

Conventions

In all there were 138 conventions held, with an average of 57 publishers at each. These placed a total of 55,803 books and booklets, of which number 1,967 were bound books. The obtainera numbered 31,085, and the hours in the field, 19,575.

Foreign

Publishing the message is carried on in fourteen languages in this land. Of the lahguages other than English there were 189.6 (average) monthly publishers active in the field, spending 48,240 hours and placing 104,876 pieces of literature, of which number 9,298 were bound books. This is much in excess of 1934, when there were but 141.8 (average) monthly workers, 30,764 hours spent in the field, and 56,638 books and booklets placed, of which 5,453 were bound. An increase has been shown in the number of French brethren active in the Kingdom woik, and their -efforts have been greatly blessed of the Lord. The average number of French publishers monthly was 21.6, and they placed 58,146 pieces of literature. It is good to note the number of Ukrainian brethren in the service. However, their zeal for the Kingdom is somewhat disappointing, for while they among the foreign nationalities have by far the largest number of publishers, namely, 117.7, their placements number only 29,702. What is true of the Ukrainian brethren is to a lesser degree true of the Polish also, who averaged 22 workers monthly and placed 7,455 pieces of literature. The publishers of other nationalities, while much fewer in number, gave a good testimony to Jehovah's praise.

Washington Convention

Many of the Canadian friends attended the Washington convention and were richly blessed as a result. They came back greatly enthused and thrilled indeed by your message ‘' Government", and, in some respects, even more so by the light upon the subject of the "great multitude", and spread the spint of the convention far and wide in this country, and thus in turn it became a great strength to the Lord’s people everywhere throughout this land. Those messages, the Watchtower articles, and the book Jehovah beyond question have been the source of tremendous strength to the Lord’s people and have had much to do with the result that has been accomplished by the friends in proclaiming the message of the Kingdom.

The economic conditions in Canada, like other parts of the earth, continue to grow worse. Millions of people there as elsewhere, will continue to pin their faith to earthly leaders, only to be sorely disappointed in the end. There is only one hope for the peoples of the earth, and that is God’s kingdom under Christ Jesus.

CENTRAL EUROPEAN BRANCH

To facilitate the publishing work of the Kingdom in Central Europe an office is maintained at Berne, Switzerland, and designated the Central European branch. This branch office has immediate direction of the work over the following countries; Austria, Belgium, Danzig, France, Italy, Luxemburg, Poland, Rumania, Saar Basin, .Switzerland, The Netherlands, Yugoslavia. The director of service is in immediate communication with these countries, receives from each director a report every thirty days and transmits that to the president’s office at Brooklyn, whose privilege it is,to check over the reports every thirty days, including the financial condition, and to generally direct the work in these countries as the Lord provides the means. At the Berne office is maintained a printing plant, where books, booklets, The Watchtower, The Golden Age, and other literature of the Society are published and distributed throughout the countries under the immediate jurisdiction of the Central European office. At this point we set out the facts applying generally to the territory embraced in the Central European office, and a Separate report for each of the countries will be found in their regular alphabetic order. The director of service at the Central European branch has well summed up the matter, and the following excerpts are taken from his report:

The past year’s work was especially marked with signs of incieasing difficulty along the entire battle front. In almost every land under the jurisdiction of this office the Roman Catholic Hierarchy has made itself manifest. This power of Rome has ever fought institutions standing for freedom, has constantly persecuted and destroyed truly devoted and God-fearing men, and this always under the cloak of a religious name. In truth, the tactics of this great ecclesiastical institution have remained the same as in the Middle Ages, and their thirst for blood has not been stilled. (Details to be found in reports from various lands ) Often it may seem that the influence of this power is on the increase, for it has apparently succeeded in different lands in crushing and hindering the witness work.

However, the difficulties of the brethren brought about by this organization of darkness have not in any way dampened their courage and joy. An ardor and zeal has been kindled in the hearts of the hearers of the message, which no earthly power is able to extinguish. The millions of pieces of literature in Central Europe as well as the literature placed again this past year witness to a living and fearless activity on the part of this insignificantly smaD number of people, in comparison with the millions of inhabitants in these lands.

With great thankfulness and deep joy it is our privilege to report that the witness work in the territory of the Central European branch has gone forward, even though the strong arm of the state in some lands has forbidden the message of the Kingdom. In Austria during the last half year not as much could be done owing to the dissolution of the Society decreed in July. This occurred also in Danzig three months ago, and the Saar Basin was returned to Germany last March. Then in France, where the pioneers formerly numbered 100, many were chased out of the country; and Belgium, to which some have fled, gives foreign mission-workers only a few months ’ permission to remain in the country. In Rumania the witness work has also been hindered, the literature having been confiscated at various times.

However, it is with great joy that we report the result of the combined activity:

669,200 hours                 681,489 Golden Age copies

119,566 books                   3,479 Golden Age subs.

1,741,749 booklets                 5,711 Bibles

The entire territory numbers 417 organized companies; 10,537 attended the Memorial celebration, 8,258 partaking of the emblems. During The Anointed's Thanksgiving Period, 5,388 took part in the service; 500 Jonadabs are included in this number, as well as pioneers and auxiliaries. The highest number of pioneers active during the year was 163; this number sank to 132 toward the end' of the year. Auxiliaries number from 34 to 59.

Companies

The spiritual condition of the companies in all these lands is maiked as being healthy. The 'Elders Epoch' has disappeared, and nearly all recognize that the greatest of their privileges is an active part in the witness work. We can hardly expect a larger number of hours, because in the previous year, when every land was active, the total was only 90,000. In spite of the curtailment of the work in Austria for the past three months, that in the Saar Basin for six months, and in Danzig for two months, the number of hours reached a total of 421,135, making an increase of 21,404 over last year, or 111,673 more than that of two years ago. There were 63,666 books placed, an increase of 13,000 over last year; 1,134,749 booklets, an increase of 56,106. Aside from this, 538,000 Golden Age copies were distributed and 1,632 new subscriptions obtained.

Annual Report of the Central European Office

regarding the activity of companies and pioneers in

Austria	Italy	Saar Basin
Belgium	Luxemburg	Switzerland
Danzig	Poland	The Netherlands
France	Rumania	Yugoslavia

from September 16, 1934, to September 15, 1935:

417 organized companies 3,691 company publishers

147 pioneers (average)                (average)

42 auxiliary pioneers        5,388 highest number of

(average)                     publishers

834 Jonadabs (occasional    10,537 Memorial attendants

workers)              8,258 Memorial participants

Country     Publishers Hours			Books	Booklets	Golden	Age Bibles
(average)					Copies	Sub's
AUSTRIA
Companies	<67	54,877	14,418	169,463	100,823	1	699
Pioneers	3	3.328	1,298	12,637	507	4	24
Auxiliaries BELGIUM	6	4,001	841	9,042	1,219	2	13
Companies	55	7,811	635	31,294	3,220		80
Pioneers Auxiliaries	n	16,597	1,334	61,262	7,074	53	76
DANZIG Companies FRANCE	191	20,658	2,856	85,437	7,613	109	78
French comp's	133	15,089	1,145	37,600	22,686	65	99
Polish comp's	508	61,245	4,070	139,994	114,034	823	466
German comp's	204	23,467	4,022	84,065	30,343	151	62
Pioneers	41	60,371	26,324	190,374	48,403	176	334
Auxiliaries	3	2,028	565	5,624	2,103	10	11
Shop in Paris ITALY			2,010	17,577	3,628	1,097	244
Forwarded to
individuals			59	233
LUXEMBURG Companies POLAND	12	1,652	602	5,040	1,742	4	57
Companies	714	86,943	8,353	96,452	128,692		1,586
Pioneers Auxiliaries	34 > 12 /	51,380	7,887	61,560	34,691		512
RUMANIA
Companies	518	44,477	499	94,829			946
Pioneers Auxiliaries	n	13,718	483	46,913			269
SAAR BASIN Companies SWITZERLAND	83	10,964	2,465	26,941	11,265	23	19
Companies	684	76,322	21,121	305,043	103,041	744	63
Pioneers Auxiliaries	7 }	9,908	4,156	33,492	' 7,694	31	8

Total, companies 3,691 421,227 63,686 1,134,969 538,340 3,136 4,419

?Stal' auxiliaries Hz } ²⁴⁷>^{993 55}«⁸⁸⁰ 606,780 143,149 343 1,292

Grand Total 3,880  669,220 119,566 1,741,749 681,489 3,479 5,711

Recapitulation :                Leaflets :

Books Booklets Golden Age copies	119,566 1,741,749 681,489	* * Jehovah's witn 'es3 3 220,500 Invitation slips
		for tianscription meetings	497,000
Total	2,542,804
		Total	717,500

Pioneer Work

The pioneer work is directed from Berne, except in the case of Poland and Rumania; this because of language differences.

The number of pioneers has decreased from an average of 170 to 147; the auxiliaries, from 70 to 42. The reason for this is the continued expulsion of the foreign brethren, as already stated. Some of these we could send to Belgium, but the most chose to go to Spain, and others back to the home country. In spite of this hindrance in the pioneer force, the number of hours spent in the service, and the placement of literature, is marvelous. The average of 147 pioneers and 42 auxiliaries accomplished the following:

248,010 hours                 607,000 booklets

55,900 books                 143,009 Golden Age copies

The average time per pioneer and month is 126 hours (minimum 110), but in some countries the pioneers have put in over 200 hours a month. In connection with this, we call attention to the great distances covered by foot or on bicycles and over very bad roads in such countries as Yugoslavia, Poland and Prance. Keeping this in mind, next year we will compile statistics of mileage covered by pioneers in their service.

Service Week Activity

The time spent in the service during the Special Service Period program represents 34 percent of the year’s total, and 35.5 percent of the total literature placement was made in these special service periods. The -following is the result of the six special service periods:

	1934-35	Percent of year’s total	1933-34
Hours	227,332	34.0	202,543
Books	26,700	22.3	26,442
Booklets	806,289	46.2	648,813
Golden Age copies	148,514	21.7	131,684

This increase is especially refreshing, considering that the work in Austria, in the Saar Basin and in Danzig has been crippled and in Bum am a the brethren could be active in only three of these service periods.

Service with Transcription Machines

We are glad to report that this branch of the Lord’s work, in spite of many hindrances, has made progress. Beports show that 1,431 meetings have been held, with an attendance of 34,296, who heard the message of the Kingdom. 497,000 leaflets as invitations to these meetings were used, whereby a witness also was given. The lectures were heard with interest and joy by the majority, and the brethren greatly appreciate this new means of witnessing, making use of it as opportunity offers. At the present time m our territory there are 40 large loudspeakers and 240 phonographs in use. Most of the records used are made in our own studio in Berne. The technician in the factory where copies are made for us pronounces the originals as very good, showing that the Lord blesses the efforts of his children even though they are only amateurs. We hope tp obtain increasing success with this means of service in the coming year, giving more attention to this branch of the Lord's work.

Jehovah's Youth

As reported last year, a number of young people ranging in age from 15 to 25 years organized, calling themselves “Jehovah's Youth’’, and although they have taken their stand on Jehovah’s side, like others of their age, they have natural desires and longings, but the chief purpose of their ramtng together is for the study of God’s Word with the help of the Society’s literature. They, however, are not only hearers of the Word, but take a part in the witness work. In the past year 114 have served, working 2,223 hours, placing 124 books, 7,473 booklets and 5,700 Golden Age copies with the people.

The drama "Daniel” was presented by the group at Berne this last summer with an attendance of 600.

Radio Network of June 2

We had great joy in making preparations for the greatest of all radio lectures to be given also in Europe. In all the radio journals and daily papers of all lands, with the exception of Germany, and in the European editions of English and American papers, notice was given of this lecture. Cards announcing it were sent to the diplomats and officials of tho League of Nations. Halls were secured in Berne, Geneva, Paris, Brussels and Amsterdam, where the message was received by telephone. We received word from many that the lecture was well heard. Even in Belgrade, the capital of Yugoslavia, the message was heard.

Production

We are glad to report the production of the Berne factory as a unit in the organization which Jehovah is using to make known his holy name amongst the people.

The people increasingly demand the message of Jehovah’s kingdom. During the past year the same amount of literature was produced as last year, and this in spite of such difficulties as in a big country like America are less likely to happen than on this continent. By the confusion of national boundaries, free trade amongst the nations is greatly handicapped, and this difficulty is now made worse by embargo laws and high-tariff walls. A magazine entitled Technical Review gives a good picture of this when it writes: "Disintegration and cutting off great districts of the world market, lessening of purchase power, overdrawn nationalism, heavy debt burdens, instability of currencies, unreasonable elevation of tariff walls to the extent of shutting off import entirely, these are the greatest difficulties in the way of increasing exports.”

Do not these things serve one purpose: to hinder the dissemination of the message of the Kingdom and to curtail the distribution thereof? The enemy does not favor the more democratic countries, because in other lands it is easier to make emergency laws which are used to hinder the import of our literature. Then, if literature is printed in such countries, the enemy tries to control the output. Thus it became necessary to print Grennan, French, Croatian, Polish, Russian, Rumanian, Serbian, Slovenian, Hungarian and Ukrainian literature in Worldly printing plants in various countries.

With fewer workers we were able to accomplish as much as last year. In 11 languages, to wit, German, Danish, Es-thonian, French, Finnish, Hollandish, Norwegian, Polish, Hungarian, Swedish, and Czech, we printed the following:

	1934	1935
Hooks	111,082	143,551
Booklets	3,229,499	3,149,601
The Golden Age	1,047,155	814,493
The Watchtower	148,730	204,542
Bulletin	51,450	58,195
Catalogues	—	10,000
Invitation slips for lectures	274,970	440,066
Leaflets	1,104,200	275,800
Records	—	600
Miscellaneous	413,593	480,546

The director of the Central European office, M. C. Harbeek, is an American citizen. As the difficulties in Germany increased, and when Brother Balzereit was arrested and imprisoned, Brother Harbeek was sent to Germany to look after the Society’s property. He made no attempt to carry on the witness work there, because he was sent on a different mission. On arriving at Berlin, and when he began to check up on the property belonging to the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society, and before he had barely got started on this work, he was arrested by the secret police and imprisoned, and the charges against him were ‘attempting to remove money out of the country and attempting to carry on the witness work and publishing The Golden Age in Switzerland in criticism of the German government’. On the first two charges there Was absolutely no evidence whatsoever and none could be obtained. The Golden Age magazine, for which Brother Harbeek is not responsible, had published some facts against Germany. Brother Harheek was kept in prison for several days, and no one was permitted to communicate with him. Although efforts were made from the home office in America to get m communication with him, this could not be done. Then Brother Burton was sent from London to Magdeburg and, after considerable trouble with the police officers, he got in communication with the higher-ups of the German officials, who agreed to release Brother Har-beek from prison upon condition that he would leave the country. He had no alternative, as the German courts give no one who is a foreigner even the semblance of a just trial; and hence Brother Harbeek was required to withdraw from the country. He was released, and he returned to his post in Switzerland. For further facts concerning conditions in Germany, notice the subheading “Germany” hereinafter set forth.

CHINA

It appears to be the will of Jehovah that some testimony must be delivered in the country of China, although few hear the message. In the Chinese language there are now twelve of the Society’s publications distributed amongst the people. During the year pioneers have worked in ten different towns in China, and considerable interest has been shown. One radio station at Shanghai has been broadcasting the lectures by electrical transcription every Sunday during the year. The lecture delivered at Washington on June 2 was picked up by the radio station in China. Says the local director:

After the occasion two students called on me and asked if the Society would start a Bible class in their school, advising me that there are a number of Chinese who desire to join in the study of the Bible. I found that this college was not m harmony with professional missionaries. These Chinese can speak English very well and are familiar with the Bible text.

During the year there have been in operation two transcription machines and three phonographs, regularly proclaiming the message of the Kingdom, and this has helped to interest others in the Lord’s will. The Catholics and Adventists do the best they can to prevent the proclamation of the message, but still it goes on. The exact number of books and booklets distributed in China during the year is: Bound books placed 1,010; booklets, 3,084; total, 4,094.

CZECHOSLOVAKIA

The work in Czechoslovakia has made progress during the year. Some of the brethren who were formerly in Germany have been able to reside in Czechoslovakia and work there. Brother Balzereit was managing the work there until he was seized in Germany and imprisoned. The brethren, with brave hearts, have pushed on with the work. During the year they have increased the output of literature more than in previous years. Books and booklets placed in the hands of the people in the various languages in Czechoslovakia during the year total 543,385. The Society has some printing presses in that country and manufactures some of the literature there. From the report of the local director the following is taken:

The work in Czechoslovakia is carried through in eight languages, to wit: Bohemian, Slovak, German, Hungarian, Russian, Ukrainian, Rumanian and Polish. In the past year efforts were made to increase the work in the Bohemian-speaking parts of the country, because in these parts till now was proportionally the smallest number of companies, and it is our joy that we can report that about 25 new companies of interested were founded, and of these some have already shown their willingness to enter in the car of Jehu and to take an active part in the service of Jehovah. In the Slovak-speaking territory always were yet some 'Russellites'’, who had not a real enthusiasm for the present truth. But it can be seen that the-real faithful ones go on with zeal, although the ethers go away. In- the Russian part- a number of new companies were founded. and therefore greater attention must be given to the work among the Russians. These men generally are very primitive, yet they begin to see the hypocrisy of the clergy. In some parts of the Hungarian-speaking territory are many companies, so that we have there very little territory, and it can be witnessed very often. Now we began the publishing of the Hungarian Golden Age, and thereby these brethren will have new occasions of service. The German-speaking people in this country are very irritated by the events in Germany itself, and it must be said that many of them have already taken their position definitely against God’s kingdom, but, of course, there are yet many people of good will, who stand in sympathy with the message of the truth. Of course, the carrying on of the work in the different languages makes it somewhat difficult, but the Lord always gives his people all that is necessary for his work.

Pioneers

Two years ago 75 percent of all pioneers active in Czechoslovakia were foreign citizens, but now only six pioneers are active who are foreign citizens; all others are citizens of this country. By the new immigration laws it would now be impossible for a greater number of foreigners to continue the work, but the Lord directed things that now thereby there is no handicap for the work. The average number of pioneers this year was 88. The highest number we had in December, with 100; the lowest, in August, with 67. The reason is that in the summer some pioneers take up some worldly employment, because financial conditions are very bad. Yet always the greatest part of the work is done by the pioneers. The number of pieces of literature distributed by the pioneers was 320,811. In some territories the pioneers were very much persecuted by the clergy and their crowd. But they joyfully took their burdens, and they continue in the service for Jehovah and for Gideon.

Companies and Sharpshooters

It is remarkable to see that the number of company workers and sharpshooters has further increased. It is also joyful to see that the part which the company workers had in the distribution of literature has increased. In the foregoing fiscal year this part was about 25 percent; in this year now it was 36 percent. This shows also that the truth has gained further footing. The average number of company workers in the last

year was 600; the highest was 898. In this year now the average number was 708; the highest number was 965. The truth is on the march, and Jehovah’s witnesses rejoice that they can have a part in this glorious service.

Factory and Production

With deep thankfulness to Jehovah God we have the joy to report that m this fiscal year, in the capital town of this country, at Prague, with the approval of the president of the Society a printery was installed, and that it is now possible to manufacture the booklets and magazines, needed in Czechoslovakia, at Prague. We print literature in Bohemian, Hungarian and the Slovak language. The first booklet manufactured at Prague was the Bohemian booklet Who Shall Rule the World? which was distributed during Thanksgiving Period. It seems to be a sign of the approval of the Lord, that even in the Thanksgiving Period all records were broken, and that a witness was given as it was never before. All together, there were manufactured in the Prague printery in the course of about half a year 150,000 booklets, 15,000 copies of The Golden Age, 10,000 copies of The Watchtower, and a great number of handbills, Bulletin, etc. We thank Jehovah God that he has better equipped his people in this country, and we are convinced that the printery will work further to the glorification of Jehovah’s name.

Creation Drama

The "Creation” Drama, which contains for the most part extracts from the book Creation, supported by pictures and films, has shown itself as a good means for the proclamation of the truth in this country. In this year a great campaign was carried on with the "Creation” Drama, and it can be said that it was a tremendous witness for Jehovah’s name; 81 towns were visited, with a total attendance of 66,718, and 1,888 books and 9,583 booklets were placed in the hands of the people; 6,285 men of good will gave their addresses, desiring to hear more about the truth.

One time in the TnonH-ng, when the drama should be given, the clergy arranged a demonstration of their crowd before the magistrate with the effect that the drama was forbidden 'because of endangering public security’. Really the clergy had endangered the security. A second time, shortly after the beginning, this crowd was bawling and making noise under the guidance of their clergyman, who took the lead, that the present policeman dissolved the meeting. The public press gave these events a wide publication, and the whole town was witnessed to with the booklet Intolerance, and very many booklets were distributed, thus showing the hypocrisy of these 'men of black cloth’. By these events indeed the attention of the whole pub-hc was drawn to the work of Jehovah’s witnesses, and the anger of the enemy was working for Jehovah’s praise.

Transcription and Phonograph Work

For the first time in this year we can report re the work with the records. And at the end of the fiscal year we must say that Jehovah has blessed his people very much also in this part of the work. A number of brethren at first showed a certain prejudice against the work with the records; but when Jehovah gives his people the order to do a thing, the true and faithful ones will go on with enthusiasm, and they will overcome With Jehovah’s help all difficulties which are laid in the way. The attendance at the transcription meetings has continually increased. The total attendance during the fiscal year was 95,818. Herewith we give a survey of the work done with the transcription machines and phonographs.

Trans, meetings Attendance

Pioneers                2,050               53,828

Auxiliaries                  8                  348

Company workers       1,110              41,642

Total                 3,168               95,818

The brethren had wonderful experiences in this work, and it can be seen that by this work a real dividing of the people Will be apparent. In many places brethren were received very friendly, and it happened that the mayor of a place invited the brethren to place their loud-speaker on the balcony of the town hall. In some places brethren got rooms in the hotels without any contribution, but at other places the clergy brought a crowd and sometimes it was only Jehovah's power that kept the transcription machines from being wrecked. Once some brethren were besieged by an incited crowd until twelve o ’clock at night. But always there were men of good will, who supported the brethren, and Jehovah's protection was always with them. The transcription work was carried on in the Bohemian, German, Slovak, Hungarian, Ukrainian, Bussian and Pohsh languages.

Of course, this work has challenged the enemy, and the clergy have begun a great campaign against the activity of Jehovah’s witnesses, but this fact has even more stirred up the zeal of the brethren.

In August the first loud-speaker—car began its work in Czechoslovakia, and this, of course, is by far the best means that we have. Already in one month the brethren who serve with the car report that they had 21,000 hearers. We hope that there can be a further increase in this work in the next fiscal year. Now we make preparations for the great transcription witness on September 29 with the great message '' Government ’

Opposition

The opposition against the truth and the persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses are different according to the districts and the influence which the Catholic Hierarchy has in these distucts.

At the beginning of the fiscal year 200 actions were pending; in the course of the year 115 were finished (of these, in 112 cases the defendants were dismissed; in 3 eases, sentenced), 98 new ones were begun, and at the end of this fiscal year there are 183 actions pending. That means 17 less than last year.

Now preparations are made to send the grand message “Government” to all parts of the country, and beginning with the World-wide Praise Period this message will be proclaimed in this whole country, and it will sound like Gideon’s battle-cry “Por Jehovah and his Vindicator”. The facts and the Scriptures show that Armageddon is near, and this knowledge is stirring up all faithful ones and all Jonadabs to be really in the first hne of the battle, and we ask the Lord to bless us further, that next year we may give even a better report.

Convention at Uzhorod

On September 8 a convention at Uzhorod, Carpathorussia, of Slovak, Hungarian and Russian-speaking brethren, adopted the following resolution:

“350 witnesses of Jehovah and Jonadabs of Slovak, Hungarian and Russian language at Uzhorod assembled manifest their absolute faithfulness and devotion to Jehovah and his kingdom and their willingness to stand under all circumstances on the side of Jehovah and his King, taking active part in. his work. They express their joy and appreciation of the truths which the Lord has revealed to his people, and of the privilege of working together in his glorious work.”

In the morning of this convention nineteen brethren, going from house to house, were arrested and held in prison four days. They were accused for ‘shocking the religious sensibilities'. But the Lord protected and released them, and at the trial they were all dismissed. The public press gave these events a wide publication, and by this the name of Jehovah God was glorified.

DANZIG

In the country of Danzig there is a constant agitation by the Nazis from Germany. These, under the direction of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, resort to all manner of misrepresentation to involve Jehovah’s witnesses in difficulties and prevent them from testifying to the truth. From the local director’s report the following is taken:

Realizing that the National Socialistic influence was reaching out over the borders into the Free City, the brethren in Danzig put forth special effort to give a thorough witness, with the result that in the first half-year about as much was done as in the whole year previously. In the beginning of April a vote of the people was taken to express their attitude toward National Socialism. This resulted in a -minority for the Nazis who, disappointed, began their nasty work. Action was taken against the Communists, many of whom were arrested, and the false accusation was made and announced over radio that the Bible Students’ organization was used to carry on the forbidden activity of the Communists. A Mr. Wegener, sculptor and a Communist, was said to be the leader of the Bible Students. He, and 19 accomplices, who were also said to be members of the Bible Students ’ movement, were arrested. The whole matter was a falsity as far as we are concerned. The “Danziger Volksstimme” (The Danzig Voice of the People), No. 89, made the following statement: “ . . . The evidence of the Court Director, Dr. Grosskopf, was much to the point. First of all it is to be said that in the court proceedings not the slightest evidence was brought forth that the forbidden Communist party was carried on through the Bible Students’ organization and that not one of the accused Communists was a member of the Bible Students' movement, not even Mr. Wegener. ’'

Other papers thereafter brought a truthful statement of facts. Thus the structure of lies and false accusations which had gone out to the world fell to pieces, but the injustice done to innocent people through the far-reaching influence of the Danzig press and the radio has not been expiated. In spite of their being proved innocent, the work of the brethren was forbidden, and the property of the Society, literature, furniture, etc., was seized and the director of the Danzig office sent from the country.

There were a number of cases where brethren were ill-treated in Danzig, but for a good reason we omit giving the details here.

The results of the work in this small section, in spite of these disorders, are to be much appreciated:

1934-35         1933-34

Hours	20,658	11,154
Books	2,856	1,739
Booklets	85,437	56,269
Golden Age copies	7,613	21,389

The average number participating in the service was 191, and now, though the work has been very much hindeicd, the brethren are using every opportunity of giving a witness.

DENMARK

The report from. Denmark this year is pleasing, because it marks an increase in the Kingdom interests. The brethren in that land have been very zealous, and the Lord has blessed their efforts. From the local director’s report the following is extracted:

Our quota for the year was 300 out each week, 110,000 hours, 22,000 books and 300,000 booklets. We managed 295 out regularly, 23,412 books and 355,863 booklets, a record total of 379,275, and an increase of 4,104 books and 29,814 booklets over last year’s record.

The message sent to the Hitler government at the end of last October's Kingdom Praise Period gave the brethren everywhere to feel that gieat events were toward and conduced to greater unity and efficiency in the presentation of our message. This was further emphasized by your speech broadcast worldwide from Washington on June 2. It was heard in Copenhagen by an audience of 300 persons, and the reception was excellent.

Additionally the news of your discourse to the brethren at Washington on the “great multitude” thrilled us and gave a great impetus to the work already pointedly drawn, to our attention in the "cities of refuge” articles last year. The results of that work were apparent at Copenhagen service convention in August, when an average of 600 was in attendance and the highest was 715. At that time 94 symbolized their consecration io do the will of Jehovah. There we were seeing the fulfillment of the prophecies of which you had given the explanation at Washington. At that convention 433 friends were out in the field, and spread 7,086, while we all rejoiced in the goodness of our God. Apart from that convention 14 others were arranged up and down the country, with an average attendance of 90. At each the brethren were out in the field and Watchtower articles were considered to the end that we might be helped the more effectively to pei form our covenant.

The "Great Multitude”

During the year we have Bought more and more to come into touch with the members of this class. To that end 109 public meetings have been held, with an average attendance of 116. To these were invited all the interested ones whose names appear in the card indexes of the service directors, whether found through spreading the books or in the Golden Age work. Follow-up meetings were then held for all who were interested, and, in aD, 108 of such Jonadab meetings were held, at which an average of 25 was present. For the first time too, in September, we have been able to hold three open-air meetings with the aid of an electrical transcription machine and records we have made ourselves. The attendances averaged 102, and 11 books and 60 booklets were spread there. We hope that next year this part of the work will be much expanded. It promises to be as effective here as elsewhere. Certainly the clearer light we are constantly receiving gives greater point to all our witnessing work at this time.

By reason of the new friends coming along the circulation of The Watchtower has increased by 179, to 1,727 (for Denmark and Norway). It continually brings refreshment and encouragement as well as giving us a clearer vision and more courage for the fight. The "Great Multitude” articles appear this month in Danish, and all are eagerly looking forward to the studies thereon. It is indeed strengthening to our faith to see the beginning of the fulfillment of Bevelation 7: 10. The Golden Age magazine, with an average circulation of 11,000, apart from single copies, continues to act as a powerful auxiliary of the field service work. Frequently subscribers write in for the literature mentioned in it, and in one campaign a small company spread 81 bound books to G A. readers who weic interested.

Economic conditions are probably better in Scandinavia than anywhere else on earth, but m “Denmark the restrictions imposed by the working of the Valuta Commission are severely bumpering trade and working hardship to many people. To ■enable Denmark to compete in the English market it is needful to artificially depreciate the value of the krone, and this is done by allowing no imports without permits from the Commission. Realizing the altruistic nature of our work they have allowed us to import books pretty freely, especially as it was not needful to pay for them. Since eaily this year, however, they have given us no more permits. In the result we have bad to print Umvei sal War Near locally, as well as Government. Some of Preparation we shall be able to import, and then further supplies of bound books must also be printed here, too, unless it could be done m England. However, we have good supplies of bound books at the moment, thanks to your foresight. Apart from these restrictions Denmark is a democratic, liberty-loving land, and we are glad of the freedom that is ouis in proclaiming the Kingdom message.

Faroe Isles

Some years ago a brother who went up here was expelled. They refused to allow the spread of our message. This summer two sisters went up and spent a holiday there at their own expense. Thev were forbidden to work as before, but, claiming that the Supreme Court case, which we won a couple of years ago, was operative also in the Faroe isles, they went on with the job and spread 833 books and 1,767 booklets, to our great joy.

ESTONIA

In Estonia, amidst great difficulties and much persecution, the workers have accomplished more than in ■the previous year. The total distribution of books and booklets in the hands of the people in that country during the year was 67,754. In addition thereto, however, there have been a large number of tracts and Golden Age magazines distributed. The local director reports:

The increasing desire on the part of the common people to hear the message of the Kingdom is further demonstrated by the fact that 2,605 more persons attended the 31 public meetings held throughout the year than were present at a greater number of similar gatherings the previous year. Two regional service directors were engaged in arranging and addressing these public assemblies. Never before had any such meetings been held in the territory covered, but pioneers had gone over it with literature. The meetings everywhere were well attended ■and caused considerable interest in all directions, and among all classes of people. In order to hear the message many people walked several miles in the dark. At the close of each meeting literature was distributed and Bible questions were answered. The two brothers have had many evidences of the Lord’s care and guidance. As they traveled from place to place, covering, in all, 1,715 miles, they were obliged to bear occasional sickness caused by improper food and aluminum poisoning, and to suffer the inconveniences common to very poor rural districts. The results, however, are worth all the trials; for several of those who attended the meetings have become active workers. During his vacation, one brother who has recently become interested spread over a thousand books and booklets in virgin territory. He has purchased a few of the five-minute-talk phonograph records and does some witnessing with them also.

The total number of pioneers in the work during the year was seventeen, and the average number in the field month by month was eleven. Hive of these regular pioneers are foreigners, and therefore required to obtain permission to engage in any kind of work. Their permits to work expired about three months ago, and although applications for renewals were promptly made the permits have not been granted. The reduction in the number of whole-time publishers of the gospel has greatly affected the extent and effectiveness of the witness given in this little country. Some Estonian pioneers, together with the company workers, are, of course, doing all they can. There is a rich field here, and we pray that the other publishers may be restored to activity therein.

Dor several years a translation of the leading article of The Watchtower has been made. This Estonian translation was multiplied by means of a small portable hand apparatus; foi ty to sixty copies were made. Because this Watchtower was intended for brethren and friends only, and not for indiscriminate distribution, no application to have it registered was made. Last September, however, certain regulations governing the publishing of all kinds of printed and duplicated matters were issued by the government and it was deemed advisable to seek registration, of the journal. A request to have the journal registered was lodged with the authorities, but it was refused and indications were given by the authorities that they had the Society and its activities under observation. Efforts were made to clear away the misunderstandings and prejudice of the authorities concerned and to get the magazine registered. Some success in this direction was attained, but owing to unforeseen difficulties the fortnightly tract has not yet been registered.

A consignment of the booklet Righteous Euler was received last September. Distribution of it was at once begun and continued until February 4, when, by order of the minister of the Interior, the booklet was confiscated. Exception was taken to this publication because, it was claimed, “it contains objectionable expressions and expressions of ridicule concerning the League of Nations, which may be detrimental to the interests of the foreign politics of the Estonian Republic. ’ ’ On 17th July the booklets Who Shall Eule the World? and Universal War Near were hkewise confiscated. The additional reasons given for this action were, “that the booklets speak in the manner of a demagogue about the activity of governmental leaders, church leaders, authorities and courts, which may provoke enmity of the people against the said leaders, and that they prophesy the coming of a terrible universal war in the near future, which no power will be able to resist, that may cause disturbance among the less educated classes.”

The peoples’ greatest enemy was behind this move to hide the truth, but he did not completely succeed. Probably without realizing what they were doing, the two leading dailies, with a combined circulation of about 100,000, published the information that the Society’s booklets contain the prediction that universal war is near, which no power is able to avert. This important truth was therefore widely broadcast to a greater number of persons than would have received a copy of the booklet in question.

A few days after this occurred the local Estonian society, that was registered about two years ago, was dissolved by order of the minister of the Interior. The indictment issued by the authorities claims, among other things, that the said society “has been developing political propaganda detrimental to the Estonian Republic and that it has by reason thereof deviated from its registered statutes”. On the basis of the indictment powers were conferred on the police to arrest the property of the association. The society in question never at any time possessed any property or stock of literature, and because of ■some irregularity or obscure reason, the police n<rt only have closed the Society’s branch office by sealing the door, but have put under arrest circa 76,000 pieces of literature and have placed a lien on furniture and other household effects, all of which are the property of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society of Brooklyn. The book Government has beai confiscated, and about a week ago the book Deliverance and several booklets were also confiscated. Every effort is being made to overcome all the afore-mentioned hindrances, and formidable as they are, they are not too great for the Lord to remove.'

A review of the woik done in this country during the past twelve months gives cause for gratitude and joy. There has been greater interest shown by the people for the Kingdom; there has been greater opposition from the enemy and his visible agents, and there has been and is a greater devotion, determination and j’oy among those who advertise the King and the Kingdom. All of these factors bear eloquent testimony to the fact that in Estonia the command to preach the gospel of the Kingdom has been and is now being earned out. They show that the Lord's approval is upon his faithful people here and that he is blessing their efforts to serve and honor him.

FINLAND

Finland makes a good report for the year. The publishers have been earnest and zealous, as the results clearly indicate. The total number of books and booklets distributed, as shown by the report, is 333,331. This is an increase over the previous year. The following quotation is from the report of the local director:

The publishers have more and more realized their privileges, and an increasing number of Jonadabs have joined the work, and although the number of them that have taken part in the ^Memorial has gone a good lot down, yet we have Been a nice increase of the workers. The number of permit-holders has been 702. The highest number of company workers including the Jonadabs has been 638, and they have placed 11,495 books, 228,682 booklets, 13,358 subscriptions, and 39,558 papers, or, together, 293,093 pieces of literature.

Pioneers’ work in our country, with small cities and long ways between the houses, is heavy and difficult, yet our dear pioneers show great zeal and patience carrying the message even to the most far-away -corners of our country. The number of the pioneers an3 auxiliaries has been 64, and they have spread 93,154 books and 27,551 papers, or, together, 120,705.

Begional service directors are doing in our country a very important work. As the bulk of our classes are- very small and weak, they need a good lot of help and encouragement. Bor that reason our regional service directors have to do a manifold work when they visit classes. They make a full investigation of the conditions in the class, examining the accounts of the class and the bookstore and how the books are kept. Then they with, words and example are helping the friends to take part in the service work. Many times it happens also that the friends in a small class have not had enough time to take part in a general push, and for that reason the books which have been sent to them have been lying. Then the regional service director takes as many as possible of such books to some other place after he has first tried with the friends to spread what has been possible. The regional service directors are indeed doing a big and important work, and they send always a report to the office of all that they have observed and done during their visits. Begional service directors are generally doing not only a very important work in the classes, but often they have spread books as much as our best pioneers, and sometimes even more.

International testimony periods have, as even earlier, been times of great blessings. Last spring we received such a number of publishers, which we had not earlier been able to dream of. The biggest number of publishers has been 722, and the whole amount of literature during the periods was 159,872, which, compared with the work done last year, 117,907, means an increase of 41,965, or 35.5 percent.

Washington convention. It was very wonderful that even we here in Finland had the great privilege and pleasure to bo present at that great event. We could very weH hear not only the interesting lecture ' ‘ Government ’^r, but also the applauses and the mighty "Aye” in the end of the lecture, in which we joined with our whole heart. It was indeed very encouraging to hear the lecture and realize the unity of all the remnant in the whole earth.

Conventions in our country are special times of refreshing and encouragement for the friends to take part in the service work. Especially encouraging was our main convention in Helsinki. The biggest attendance was 545; 279 took part in the work, and 6,268 pieces of literature were spread. We have had, together, 55 conventions, with an attendance of 2,514, and the whole amount of literature spiead has been 32,110. At the conventions 75 have symbolized their consecration.

Public lectures have been an instrument to fix the attention of the public on the message. Especially encouraging was the big meeting held in Helsinki last spring. Our biggest halls have been so far constructed for about only 1,000 people, but now we have got a hall which can take about 7,000. To our great joy we succeeded to get that hall, which quickly was overcrowded with an estimated attendance of 7,500, while thousands could not come in. The interest was very great, and in the end our little company of 240 publishers in a few minutes spread over 6,000 books. The whole number of lectures has been 115, with an attendance of 21,991, at which 8,079 pieces of literature have been placed in hands of the public.

Office staff has also this year with zeal and energy fulfilled their duties not only at the office, but also in the field service, and to our great joy, we have been able to spread 19,174 copies of literature.

Our printing plant has well helped the work and given us 665,445 pieces of printed matter.

FRANCE

The publishing work of the kingdom of Jehovah under Christ Jesus has been done under considerable handicap in France during the fiscal year. The French people have never manifested a great amount of interest in the Kingdom. The Polish people who migrated there after the war and English brethren who have gone into France and done work have accomplished more in the publication of the Kingdom than the natives of France. There are, however, some really zealous French brethren, and these all work together with the others. Many of the Poles have been expelled during the year, likewise British brethren, and this has hindered the work. From the report of the local director of service the following is quoted:

Although we have 42,448 publications less to report than, in 1934, the following statistics show that Jehovah’s witnesses, comparatively speaking, have put in more hours in 1935 and distributed more literature than during the previous year. The decline is merely on account of the departure of many Polish brethren, and accordingly we have fewer workers. Here is a comparison:

There were 361 fewer brethren and 114 fewer workers. Out of the 361 brethren, about 280 were Poles, who returned to their home country. The remainder are those who became discouraged through the difficulties encountered. It is, however, very gratifying to see that of those who remain nearly all are workers. This refers more to our Polish cowitnesses than to the French. Here a proof:

Memorial participants: 770 witnesses; whereof there are 543 Poles and 227 French.

The Polish brethren are nearly all workers. Here are the statistics:

Breth-Work-        Book-Bi- GA GA. GA. GA.

ren ers Hours Books lets bles Fr'ch Ger Pol. Sub's

Poles     609 508 61,245 4,070 130,994 466  81,740 1,421 30,873

French   221 133 15,089 1,145  37,600  99  22,680           6

Office                      2,010  17,577 244   3,628

Totals 730 641 76,334 7,225 195,171 809 108,048 1,421 30,879 1,985

According to this report a publisher reached, on an average, 117 hours and 495 booklets.

During the year under consideration there were over 900 more books distributed than in the previous year, but there is a decline in the placements of booklets and periodicals, especially as regards the Polish Golden Age, which is accounted for in the return of many Poles to their home country.

That our Polish brethren appear even more zealous than the French is very gratifying, because in spite of the ever present danger of expulsion they do not refrain from working, but obeying the year’s text they shout, "For Jehovah and for Gideon. ’ ’

Thanks to this determination, 616 workers in 71,704 hours were able to distribute 340,010 publications and to obtain 1,176 new subscriptions.

The six Special Periods were also great opportunities of service, as the following figures show:

The Golden Age

French         28,680

Polish            7,752

German          279

It is pitiable that in this great land there can be little done by the pioneers at the present time, but the work accomplished by these from 1930 to 1934 was a sowing which has borne fruit. From all parts of France letters are continually received —expressions of joy that Jehovah’s witnesses have visited them and that they have learned something of the truth. A service director is making his first trip through France organizing the Jonadab work, so there are good prospects that the work formerly carried on by the pioneers will be continued by the Jonadabs.                      ,

Much literature has been placed by the pioneers among the people of northern Africa. The section from Tunis to Morocco is under French rule. We are sorry to say, however, that recently the last of the pioneers working there, Enghsh brethren, have been sent out of the country. The radio had much to do with the success of the work there. Lectures from French stations were well heard in northern Africa. Many letters testify to this fact. For instance, a young man belonging to the French Sahara regiment writes to his mother in northern France: "I know, mother, that you now have a radio and hear the lectures as I do. Here I am able to hear without disturbance; at home I never heard so well. Please continue to send me The Golden Age.”

General observations and experience show that people who, two years ago, were indifferent to the truth, are now responding and taking pains to examine the literature. Also the past year has shown again that the radio is the best means of reaching all classes. Thousands of letters from all classes of people and from ten different countries prove how necessary it is to continue in this way, even at the cost of considerable sacrifice. During the past year we were able to give 335 radio lectures over three stations. According to letters received the message was heard in ten different countries.

We have also again participated in Exhibitions and were granted two more awards for our publications, among which a Hots Concents. In this and in other countries these diplomas have been a great help to us with the authorities. The work of Jehovah’s witnesses is more widely known than we beheve, and although the clergy endeavor to slander us, the truth triumphs more and more.

Quite a number of Jonadab friends have stated their willingness to co-operate as publishers, and we have now begun to organize them as companies for service.

We have only one electrical transcription machine, with which 23 lectures were given, with an attendance of 10,000. However, we have about 100 phonographs, and with these 522 lectures were given in homes, whereby about 1,350 people received the witness.

Letters received, 8,974 (2,000 more than in 1934); and 6,813 letters and cards were dispatched. The increase in letters received is evidence of the interest shown by the people; who daily write us asking many questions regarding the truth.

Two special campaigns with the French Golden Age were Carried out, whereby 23,888 copies of this periodical were distributed. These campaigns also resulted in obtaining 707 new regular readers and 245 subscriptions.

There were only two regional service conventions held. The friends attending received a great blessing, and on these occasions 147 Jonadabs testified through baptism their devotion to Jehovah and his service.

OTHER PUBLISHERS

In the early days of Rome, when true Christians were being hanged or otherwise slaughtered because of their devotion to God and Christ Jesus, and when true followers of Jesus were forbidden to meet together to worship God, the real ones devoted to God and Christ, in spite of such wicked persecution, did meet together and study the Word of the Lord. Likewise today in some portions of the earth, where honest men are forbidden to worship God and Christ Jesus as commanded by Jehovah and who are cruelly persecuted because they do so, in spite of such cruel persecution some of the courageous ones have gone quietly about and told others about the blessings that are coming through God’s kingdom, which is at hand. During the first six months of the fiscal year these true and faithful ones in this manner placed in the hands of the people 284,662 books and booklets. During the latter half of the fiscal year no information has been received from them as to how they get on. God will not forget these faithful ones. He is always mindful of those who serve him. We may be sure that he will encourage and strengthen them in every way that is deemed necessary for them to maintain their integrity toward him.

GREECE

In Greece the work has not progressed, so far as the distribution of the literature is concerned, during the fiscal year. This has been due to the repeated interference by the so-called “Orthodox Church”, the Greek Catholic, which is another wing of the Devil’s organization. The distribution of books and booklets totals 117,219. The clergy are constantly interfering, to prevent the message of God’s kingdom from being proclaimed. From the report of the local director the following is taken:

The clergy try now to take advantage of the revision of the Constitution, in order to insert an amendment to the effect that "proselytism is absolutely forbidden, as well as every intervention against the Orthodox Church". The justification of this measure, among others, is to suppress the spreading of our literature, as it is stated in the statement submitted to the committee for revision of the Constitution.

Notwithstanding this the witnesses of Jehovah, being fully aware of their responsibility and privilege, are decided to go on with the work of the Lord, giving boldly the testimony to the name of Jehovah and his kingdom.

We also are thankful to the Lord for the increasing light which he gives us through The Watchtower in these days, which we appreciate most heartily. As we see the time nearing for the vindication of his holy name our hearts swell in song and our earnest prayer is to destroy the enemy and all his organization, that all creation may Bee that He is the only Almighty God, and that his Christ is the great King, and so His name may take the proper place in the minds and hearts of all his creatures.

In Albania the Greek language is used chiefly and the work is carried on in connection with the Athens office. In Albania during the year there have been distributed books and booklets to the number of 6,688. Including this in the Greek report, therefore, makes total literature distributed 123,907.

HAWAIIAN ISLANDS

The Society’s branch office established in Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands, is making progress. Only a small number of workers are there, the publishers numbering 12 in all. During the year property was purchased and a suitable hall and living quarters were erected. This building fronts on a boulevard and also abuts on a side street. Signs are placed on the building, advertising the hall and the books. These are illuminated by electricity, so that everyone passing must see the signs. The work has progressed there during the year, and the total number of books and booklets placed is, to wit, 19,170. From the local director’s report the following is taken:

The real high point of the year’s witness, Brother Rutherford, was the public address delivered by you here in Honolulu at McKinley auditorium last April, and which was earned by radio to the other islands. At that meeting 591 pieces of literature were placed with the audience. Since then many placements of literature have been made in house-to-house witnessing because the one called on attended the meeting at McKinlay auditorium. And, too, your visit was of the greatest inspiration and encouragement to Jehovah’s witnesses here in their work. Added to this are the great provisions made by Jehovah through you while here, for extending the witness in these islands. First, the sending of a fully equipped sound car with which to carry Jehovah’s message to the people. This has proved a very great blessing, affording many privileges of service. As shown on the report, many meetings have been held, and over 17,000 persons have heard the name of Jehovah honored by means of the sound equipment. TmTne.dia.te1y at the close of each lecture calls are made from house to house over the neighborhood with the message in printed form. In the few months since the arrival of the sound car, 2,390 pieces of literature have been placed by means of it, several hundred of this total being bound books. In Jehovah’s providence it arrived in time for use on June 2, for the world-wide broadcast. And Jehovah’s blessing has been very manifestly upon its use ever since.

And then came to us Kingdom Hall, for use in honoring his name at transcription lectures and study meetings, also as a headquarters for Jehovah’s literature and publishers at this place. In addition to the meetings held in it, Kingdom Hall, with its signs and books on display, brings the name and word of Jehovah prominently before the people. At each meeting, and, in fact, daily, ail here give thanks to Jehovah for his loving-kindness in making such wonderful piovision. The Lord has done so much for his work that the publishers here feel an additional weight of responsibility to faithfully carry out the work the Lord has given them. Meetings in Kingdom Hall are held in English, Spanish and Japanese.

During the construction of Kingdom Hall many things occurred which demonstrated clearly the providences of Jehovah. It has been the means of greater co-operation amongst Jehovah’s witnesses at this place.

Another effect of your visit was the stirring up of the enemy, so that, among other things, they coerced radio station KGMB into quitting the broadcast of your transcription lectures. But since the sound car was already on the job, it is believed that a greater number of people have been reached by this means than previously with the local radio.

Tebritoby: During the year the city of Honolulu has been gone over several times with the Kingdom message, and the remainder of the island of Oahu once. The residents of the island of Maui were thoroughly witnessed to, and a large portion of the island of Hawaii covered by pioneers.

Chain broadcasts: During the past year these islands participated for the first time in hearing your chain broadcasts from the mainland. In November 1934 your address from Atlanta reached here by shortwave. Again, on January 13, the message of the Kingdom was heard by shortwave and rebroadcast by local station KGMB. On June 2 came the climax, with the world-wide broadcast from Washington, D. C. The shortwave reception was remarkably clear, and it was rebroadcast from the local station, also from the sound car with very good results. It was thrilling to be out here in the middle of the ocean and hear Jehovah’s message going out so extensively over the earth. It is a cause for rejoicing that on this important occasion Jehovah permitted his message to reach the people in these islands.

At one of the recent meetings held with the sound car outside a church great interest was shown. After the lecture 3 books and 84 booklets were placed with the listeners. On one occasion when an officer was sent to stop the sound car the purpose of the work was outlined to him. After listening to the conclusion of the "Government” broadcast and enjoying it, he said: "Don’t you feel insulted or discouraged by what I said. Maybe it is only the Devil trying to stop this work.”

HOLLAND (THE NETHERLANDS)

The zeal peculiar to the Lord’s house has been shown in Holland during the past year. The activities have increased, and the results have increased. Jonadabs have joined the remnant, and the work has progressed. The orders sent in from the people individually to the Society’s office for literature show an increased interest of the people of Holland. Like other parts of the earth, the great multitude is beginning to show itself. This is an encouragement to the remnant and a joy to their hearts. The local director of service in his report says, among other things, the following:

Companies

While last year we reported 12 companies only, we are able to start the new year with 21 larger and smaller companies. Some of these have been formed only in recent months, so that there is as yet little to be shown of their activity in the annual

report. The following is a comparison of of the company workers with last year’s:			this year’s results Golden Age
Publishers Hours 1935      71    10,562 1934      76     9,860	Books 797 631	Booklets 26,215 22,718	Copies 9,455 10,933	Total 36,467 34,282
—5   +702	+166	+3,497	—1,478	+2,185

These figures are surely gratifying when we consider that there were five company workers less in the field and that, in spite of this, 702 more hours were spent in the service and 2,185 more publications distributed. The Jonadab work, we believe, will help us during the coming year to considerably increase the number of publishers and hours and the output of literature.

The economic situation in Holland is daily growing worse, and the number of unemployed constantly on the increase, and even the little material help the latter get, the Government is forced to reduce from time to time. This, Of course, makes it more and more difficult for the people to obtain literature. Therefore we are glad to see that during the past year the company workers as well as the pioneers distributed more books than ever before. With the increasing distress many are more and more hungering and thirsting after truth and righteousness. On the other hand, we need hardly say that the publishers need all their energy to obtain such results and that they gladly put forth their best efforts in the service of our great King. Unselfishness and full devotion are put to a steadily increasing test.

Pioneers

in the field and 3 auxiliaries. The for the year as compared with the

Golden Age

Boohs Booklets  Copies    Total

6,380  116,041   40,518   162,939

5,997  125,170   50,487   181,654

—1 +2,552 +383 —9,129 —9,969 —18,715

Service Periods

During the six Service Periods there were 98 company workers in the field. They worked 1,035 hours and distributed to 3,298 obtainers: 28 books, 4,246 booklets and 84 Golden Age copies. During one service period there was more accomplished than in either of the two preceding campaigns in November and February. As can be expected, our joy was great. Never before was such a result reached by the company workers in one Special period. However, we shall do our best to repeat that result in the coming Praise Period, which will inaugurate the new fiscal year.

In the six special campaigns of the past year we had an average of 76 company workers in the field, who in 4,182 hours handed 174 books, 12,278 booklets and 2,971 Golden Age copies to 10,373 obtainers.

Electrical Transcription Service

With this new means, the electrical transcription machines, the Lord has opened up wonderful opportunities of service. As in Holland there is no possibility of using the radio to reach the people, we immediately made a good start with the electrical transcription work. In January we had the first transcription records manufactured in Berne. Meanwhile the companies were invited to order a phonograph or an electrical transcription machine. Shortly thereafter we received orders for 25 phonographs and 1 transcription machine (made in Brooklyn), and all these were shipped. There is much interest shown for the lectures. Much prejudice has been removed thereby, and after the people have heard a few discourses, they are more willing to obtain the literature. All together we have now the complete series A, B, C and D (30-cm. records). These lectures are being circulated from company to company.

Apart from this, towards the end of the fiscal year, we recorded also the first 18 five-minute lectures on 25-em. discs. These records will shortly arrive in Holland, and we hope that they can be put to very good use during the coming year.

As mentioned, the electrical transcription work has but been organized during recent months, but we are, unfortunately, not able to give an accurate report thereof.

Having seen the sound cars in London at the end of the previous fiscal year, we immediately set about to manufacture such a car for the work in Holland. Jehovah has at his service all kinds of workers capable of doing what is required. Thus we have a brother here, a pioneer, who formerly was a bodymaker. This sound car is the first one in use on the European continent. It provides sleeping accommodation for two persons. The two beds may be slung up to the walls. The loud-speaker, of great capacity, can be raised above the roof for use; otherwise it is Bunk in the roof, so that it is not recognized as a sound car. This feature enables ns to surprise the enemy. This ear is also provided with a water-tap fed from a tank in the roof, as well as with a folding table and two camp stools. The top of the back part of the ear can be removed and replaced by a canvas on which we can project the Photo-Drama pictures from the driver’s seat. One brother does the projecting while the other, standing behind the car, explains them. This brother stands in a circle limited by a cord, which circle may be increased or decreased according to the size of the audience. He keeps his bookease close at hand, so that, immediately after the lecture, he can serve the literature to the public. There is much interest in Holland for such lectures, and we are sure that the work done with this car will meet with great success. It has been in operation but a few months, and we have already obtained encouraging results. In two months we worked 89 hours with it, and gave 171 lectures, to a total attendance of 4,023 people. Thereby we distributed 85 books, 1,419 booklets and 186 Golden Age copies. It is a real joy to go out with this car and to be able to proclaim the message of the Kingdom in such a clear and distinct way.

Interesting Experiences from the Field

One sister working in a little place called at a lady’s home. As the bell rang and she saw a woman standing at the door, she said to her daughter: "It is surely again about money for the crisis committee or something else. Wouldn’t it be much better if one came around with Rutherford’s books J That would, be of greater benefit to us. ’ ’ When the lady heard that this sister really came with Judge Rutherford's books, she welcomed her heartily. This family had made a careful study of our literature, and gladly obtained the book Government and three booklets.

A Polish brother worked in a Catholic town. After a while he was accosted by a policeman and was asked what he was doing. The brother explained his missionary activity, but the policeman considered it peddling and asked him to come to the police office. When no attention was paid there to his denunciation, the brother was conducted to the chief of police. There the two were introduced to the chief of police and to a number of higher police officers who just happened to be there. The official charged the brother with peddling before the chief of police, who, after having examined the literature, said that this was a philanthropic gospel-work, which could be done freely. A police inspector happening to be there told the chief of police that a year before he had bought The Harp of God and had found it a very nice book. He said that if all the books were as nice as that one, there should be distributed as many as possible in the place. When the policeman saw that he was not heard, he pulled from the brother’s pocket the booklet Intolerance and asked the police chief what the cover meant. He answered: ‘' This policeman here on the picture, that’s you, who at the bidding of the clergy bring this innocent man before me that I should condemn him. But I shall not do so, for he is guiltless. ’ ’ The brother was then dismissed with the assurance that he would have no further trouble in that town.

HUNGARY

In Hungary the Society’s office and the workers pushed the work as best possible under the handicap. There is great opposition and much difficulty in doing the witness work. In the face of this the brethren continue, by the Lord’s grace, to proclaim the message of Jehovah and his King. The distribution of literature during the year increased, the total number of books and booklets placed being 126,550. From the local director’s report the following is taken:

A great hindrance to the work 13 the fact that only such books and booklets can he distributed as are printed in Hungary itself, and that each import of Watch Tower literature is forbidden. So tall now, because of the high costs -of printing, we had only two books, but now the book Jehovah is in course of preparation, and it is hoped that thereby also the number of books distributed will be higher.

Pioneers

The capital town Budapest nearly fully is witnessed by pioneers who came in from Germany. Yet the difficulty is that they can stay there "a time of only three to six months and must then leave the country for a time, and can then again stay there three to six months. So pioneers must be changed often. But the Eord gave his protection for these brethren and they were able to give a good witness at Budapest.

But we are very glad to say that now there are more pioneers from the country itself who give their whole time to the field service. Especially in the last weeks there was a good increase of these brethren, there being twenty Hungarian citizens who are now engaged in full-time service in Hungary.

Company Workers

There was an increase in the field service done by the company workers. The literature distributed by company workers increased from 37,963 to 70,524, which is an increase of 90 percent. As in all countries, the remnant and the Jonadabs understand better their privileges and go on with greater zeal for the vindication of Jehovah’s name.

Opposition

Opposition in Hungary is very strong. The whole country is ruled by the Cathobe church. The most difficult thing is that all meetings are forbidden. Only at two places the friends have permission to come together. Everywhere else it is forbidden (officially), and there is a large district with a great number of friends where this interdiction is ruthlessly enforced. Not even two friends may meet there undisturbed. It is only a few days ago that in this district a small company once again dared to have a very private meeting, and the police interfered, whereupon a number of these friends were cruelly beaten by the poheemen. Such beating is the custom on every such occasion. After they are treated in this manner, the official con-demuation follows, too: fine or imprisonment. Some of the friends were punished five times in the course of this year. There are more liberal and tolerant authorities, however. The more the Boman Catholic influence dominates, the worse.

Organization

Under these conditions, of course, it is quite difficult to do things orderly and in an organized way. Legally speaking, there are very limited possibilities to do the witness work. The enemy organization has prepared for itself a strong defense. But Jehovah’s anointed know which are the “Higher Powers’’, and they know that Jehovah gave not only permission, but the commission to preach the gospel, and they act accordingly. A great number of friends now take this stand.

With confidence we look for the new fiscal year. The Lord always has provided what his people need, and we trust in Him whose lightning comes now from the temple, enlightening his people.

ICELAND

The workers in Iceland are very few; in fact, only one pioneer. But the distribution in that bleak country during the year has totaled 3,230 books and booklets. The work in Iceland is directed from the Northern European branch office.

INDIA

The Kingdom message does not appeal to people that are holding a lucrative office and ruling over others, or those who are associated with the rulers. The common subjects, however, seeing conditions are unhappy, look to some other than earthly creatures for aid and comfort. Such is the condition in India. The witness work for Jehovah’s kingdom has progressed during the year, but chiefly amongst the natives. There have been 117,689 books and booklets placed in the hands of the people. By far the greater of these is in the native vernacular. From the local director’s report we insert the following:

Measured by the output of literature and the number of publishers engaged in the work, there has been a general increase. Some sections show a decrease, but others, notably the vernacular work, a very great increase. The total literature placed during the year is 117,639, which is an increase of about 15,000 over the previous year. English books and booklets are slightly less, but vernacular booklets very much more than the previous year’s totals.

Pioneers. Whilst we all recognize that everyone has not the same opportunities for seivice, it is the pioneers who have done most to make up the year’s record. All praise belongs to Jehovah for anything accomplished, and we do not wish to make any distinction between the various branches of field workers, but 25 pioneers (of which 15 are Indian) have done much more actual work than all the remainder of publishers put together.

House-cabs. There are three house-cars in. use, and this method of transportation is a great boon. There are some districts in India, and most of Burma, where it is impossible to travel by road, and these districts have, of course, to be worked by train or river steamer. This is costly and inconvenient, for lodging accommodation is scanty and expensive. Taxation makes house-car work rather expensive, but it is more economical in the end and very much more convenient for the pioneer than train travel. One ear carries a cinema equipment and electrical transcription machine, whilst the other two cars carry the transcription machine only.

Sound machines. We have four electrical transcription machines in use, and good work has been done, but this branch of work is greatly handicaped by reason of the language problem. In places where there are large bodies of Indian Christians a machine with microphone equipment can be used with very good effect if there is someone who can speak to them. In the ordinary course where the English pioneers use the machine they have to rely upon some local friend to read from one of the vernacular booklets, which is not always a satisfactory arrangement. On the other hand, the Indian pioneers who could use the microphone quite well do not possess the necessary ability to keep the machine in proper order. A short tour was made in May by a party consisting of an English pioneer to look after the machine and Indians who did the talking, and a tremendous witness was given. Several meetings were held, and thousands of Indians listened with rapt attention to the message in their own language. Hundreds of booklets containing the same lecture were disposed of, and the response was so great that arrangements are being made now

■to send an English pioneer along with an Indian into suitable ■districts at regular intervals.

The use of the portable gramophone is gradually increasing. As with the electrical machine we find the European element in India entirely indifferent to the message, and it is only on rare occasions that we are able to gain access to their homes. But the English-knowing Indians are more responsive and gradually this feature of witnessing is spreading. About 34,000 people have been witnessed to by means of sound machines during the year.

Special campaigns. The special periods set apart for intensive witness have again been richly blessed. The conditions in this part of the world are very different from those obtaining in the western countries. There are few large cities, and most of the company publishers’ are resident in small railway, or other, colonies. There is very little scope for work in a given locality, and such workers are without territory for a considerable part of the year. These special testimony periods afford them a systematic program of work in their local territory. On the other hand, a pioneer often finds it difficult to put in the nine days’ solid work without having to shift to fresh territory and thus unavoidably waste some time in traveling.

Teavancore. The work in Travancore seems to require a special paragraph to itself. Travancore is a native Indian state. It has a population of over four millions, consisting of about one third “Christian”. There are very few large towns. The people are so scattered over the land that it is more like one trig village than several isolated ones. There are about 270 publishers regularly in sei vice, and it is indeed encouraging to be amongst them, and to hear simple peasant folk discuss the latest truths from The Watchtower. If anyone wants to ■see evidence that the Lord has hid his truth from the wise and prudent and revealed it unto babes, he should go to Travancore and see Jehovah’s witnesses clad only in a simple cloth witnessing to the flocks of the long-bearded priests of Baal robed in the garments of Babylon. Malayalam is the language spoken in Travancore, and more than 52,000 books and booklets were distributed in this state alone. This is nearly half the total output of literature for the whole of India, Burma and Ceylon.

Vernacular publications. The vernacular literature forms by far the bigger portion of the total output of literature. Ninety thousand booklets were printed during the year in five different languages. We require literature in many more languages, and translations are made only in those which we are best able to handle. It is sometimes difficult, even impossible, to find suitable translators for other languages, but we are doing what we can to provide the Kingdom message for every nation and language” in this far-flung land- It is a costly woik, and we appreciate the assistance given us by our brethren abroad which makes this work possible.

ITALY

For many centuries Italy has been the seat of government of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, and from this point operations are directed throughout the whole earth. The influence of Italy is felt in many places. Without a doubt the Vatican and Mussolini are in full accord and have a clear understanding as to the operations of both. Because of this combined opposition it is impossible to conduct a regular work of publishing the Kingdom message within the borders of Italy. Only two brethren have been able to do any work in that country during the year, and they have worked under great difficulties. Often the literature is taken away from them and they are thrown into prison. One pioneer was shot dead. The Catholic Hierarchy even manifested its venom toward the Lord’s people in interfering with the decent burial of this pioneer, who was witnessing for the Kingdom. In this opposition the "Protestant” clergy join with the Hierarchy, showing that there is not any longer in fact any such organization as Protestants. The clergy prevented the corpse of this brother from being taken to the funeral rooms, the body being left in an old shed without proper attention. People upon hearing of this outrageous treatment, were incensed, and this furnished an opportunity to give them a witness to the truth. Because the deceased had relatives in that neighborhood, they were outlawed by the clergy and were threatened by fire and brimstone because they had given shelter to a "heretic”, thus showing the same infamous spirit as shown in the early days of Italy, when the Inquisition was at its height. One brother still operating in Italy is able to give out some literature. Often the literature sent to him, however, never reaches him, being confiscated by officials under the direction of the Hierarchy. There have been placed in that country approximately 290 books and booklets during the year, according to the best information we can obtain.

JAMAICA

Jamaica is another place where the poor hear the message gladly while others push it away. The enemy tries to keep the poor in darkness. Yet the Lord will see to it that those who possess a good will toward him shall have an opportunity to know the Kingdom message. The books and booklets distributed in Jamaica during the year and which carry the Kingdom message number 49,018. Amongst other things the local director in his report says:

Since the year 1917 there was not a year that the Devil put forth more strenuous efforts to wreck the work, but there has never been a year in Jamaica when the witnesses put forth more united efforts to drive home the message to the people.

The transcription machines and phonographs have played a wonderful part by causing many to take their stand in God’s organization. These machines have broken down many barriers and caused many to give praise to Jehovah.

Although the pioneers are few and the number less than those of previous years, yet through the work of the machines the output of literature has increased. During the year we had one general convention and twelve local conventions. Our office has been greatly blessed by the addition of a sedan car by which the staff move in the afternoons to deliver lectures with the transeiiption machine, by which thousands have listened to the glorious message of the kingdom of God. It is impossible to find words to express our gratitude to God for the articles in The Watchtower. Truly the Lord is feeding us with the finest of the wheat.

The Washington convention has been a wonderful blessing to all, even though we were not present. The subject on the “great multitude” has heightened our joy and widened our vision. Truly “Zion heard, and was glad”. The Lord has revealed his will and purpose to ub on a question that puzzled us all our life. Praise him for his gracious favor.

JAPAN

Although Japan is not classed as a part of ''Christendom”, there is little or no difference between the conditions in Japan and those in other parts of the earth called “Christendom”. It was one of the signatories of the League of Nations, which is linked up with the other elements of Satan’s organization. The government has effectively stopped the distribution of books and booklets, but has permitted the publication of the Golden Age magazine, and this is the only means by which the Kingdom message has reached people in that country during the year. These issues of the Golden Age magazine are not included in the total distribution of books and booklets, for the reason that they are not in book form. We call attention, however, to the fact that during the year many thousands of issues of The Golden Age containing the Kingdom message were placed with the people. The following is quoted from the report of the brother in that land directing the work:

Catholic Clergy

There are about a quarter of a million Catholics io Japan. The Catholic Hierarchy has a strong standing in the Kyushu district of Japan. Several numbers of Japanese Golden Age carried several long articles which exposed the hypocrisy of the Hierarchy and her dirty tricks during last year. Hundreds of thousands of these were distributed all over in Japan and Korea already. I challenged the Hierarchy with an open debate with the representative of the Papal system. My challenge is announced through The Golden Age and public lectures. The people well remember this challenge, but the Hierarchy is entirely helpless. Of course, the Catholic clergy get mad at us, as well as the Protestant clergy.

The Hierarchy had a good standing in Amami Oshima, an island near Kyushu, for last half century. Last January one of Jehovah’s witnesses made a visit to the island and distributed many copies of The Golden Age there. He had to quit the island by the tricks of ‘ ‘ Catholic Fathers ’ who are mostly Frenchmen.

Just two months later a terrible riot broke among Catholics there, many church buildings were burned and wrecked, three thousand Catholics converted to Nationalists and thirteen French missionaries were forced out of the island.

Great Multitude

As I have reported to you often, we have no "company publishers" in Japan, and the witnessing work to the glory of Jehovah’s name has been carried mostly by full-time pioneer brethren. Of course, there have been some people who have good will with us always, but we did not know how to class them.

However, since the question of the "great multitude” was made clear at the Washington convention the people of this class made their appearance quickly in Japan. Fourteen men and women symbolized their consecration with water in the last two months, and two service companies were organized, and the service directors were appointed for both companies already.

Light from the Lord

Since we were forced to stop the publication of The Watchtower in 1933 by the oppression, the Lord provided a way to supply the spiritual food for his own people by the circulatingletter system. Both anointed and Jonadabs are well strengthened and rejoiced with wonderful light which shines forth through God's organization. Also they are well supplied with fresh news of the activity of Jehovah’s organization on the whole earth by the same system.

"The Golden Age”

The Golden Age in Japanese is the only one organ that we can use for the witnessing work in Japan. It is a monthly publication of eight pages. Each number carries a long article that covers eight full pages. These articles are written according to your writings in books, booklets and Watchtowers.

Since all books and booklets were prohibited to be distributed in Japan and her territory by the order of the government in July 1933, twenty-four write-ups to the name of Jehovah and his anointed King until last August. We reprint these older numbers more and more. We have 26,000 names in the subscribers’ roll. "We print 40,000 of new number and reprint 60,000 of older numbers every month.

The subscription for this periodical is thirty sens (or less than ten cents m American money) for one year, with postage included, and two sens for a copy.

KOREA

The Kingdom work in Korea is directed from the Society’s office in Tokyo, Japan. During the year 1,068,811 copies of the Golden Age magazine in the Korean language were placed in the hands of the people. There 108 engaged in the work. A number of public meetings were held, in which considerable interest was shown by the people. At least, the Korean people are having the opportunity to hear that Jehovah is God and that his kingdom is the only hope of the world.

LATVIA

Jehovah’s witnesses and the Jonadabs in countries where there is less difficulty fully sympathize with our brethren in Latvia, who labor under such abnormal conditions. The persecution has been great in Latvia during the year, and that government, influenced by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy and Germany, has done much to hinder the progress of the distribution of the literature. Books and booklets distributed, 1,634. It will be interesting to note extracts from the report of the local director in Latvia:

The year just ended has been a difficult one. Martial law, which was proclaimed in May 1934, continued during the whole of the financial year and has been extended until February 1936. It was in these abnormal conditions that the Latvian Society (founded in March 1933) was closed in July 1934 and the stock of books on hand seized by the Liquidators, as reported to you last year. At the time the Society was closed the books were not banned, and the friends continued the work with the stocks they had by them. A change came in October, for on the 12th of that month six of the eight booklets we had to work with were prohibited by a decree of the Government and quickly thereafter the homes of the friends were visited and all copies found were confiscated by the police. Of the remaining two booklets, the stock of one was practically exhausted by this time, while the other was in the German language. However, a short time later these two were also banned, followed by further searches by the police. Since then the means of continuing the witness have been limited, except orally. No meetings are allowed and the Watchtower and Golden Age magazines are banned publications.

Early in October an effort was made to establish another Latvian Society, but in this we were not successful. In March and April 1935 Brother Dey was in Riga and made repeated efforts to interview the head of the Government with the object of ending the impasse; an army of secretaries and clerks succeeded in barring the way to this. The Foreign Office, however, admitted that the ostensible ground for the closure of the Society was not the true one. The real reason was that the activities of the Society were undesirable to the Ecclesiastical Department of the home office.

On October 7 two telegrams were dispatched to the Hitler Government from companies in Latvia; a third was not accepted by the postoffice at one town. Later it was revealed that the two were stopped by the censor and the brothers who signed them were each subjected to several hours’ interrogation by the political police. The brothers were glad to have this opportunity of giving a witness in one of the dark places where it is difficult for light to penetrate.

The little company, who on June 2 waited here in expectation, got a real thrill when they heard your voice during the world-wide broadcast on that day. Although only six could understand English, the occasion was a very memorable one. It seemed to draw us closer together and helped us to feel we were all one with our brethren in other lands who, like us, would be listening to the message at the same time.

The position in which we find ourselves, which is imposed upon us by the conditions obtaining in the country, is hard to bear. The friends are all anxious to be more active in the Kingdom work. The Watchtower, which so clearly shows us our privileges and responsibilities, together with reports of what is being done in other lands, make us all the more desirous of having a larger share in the field service. We hope and fully expect that the Lord in his goodness will shortly open a door for us in order that we may be able more effectively to proclaim his name.

LITHUANIA

The opposition, though great, has not prevented the work from making progress to the praise of Jehovah and his kingdom. From the local director’s report the following is quoted:

A quota of 2,500 books and 15,000 booklets, over twice the total for the preceding twelve months, had been set for Lithuania and Memelgebiet, and we started the year with what seemed to be an impossible task before us. Actually the results have exceeded the quota by 28 percent; for 22,437 books and booklets, or 14,058 more than during last year, have been placed in the hands of the people.

The extra efforts put forth by those who really appreciate their privileges have done much to make these results possible, but it is Jehovah who has given the increase, and to him our thanks and praise are due. Without his blessing and protection nothing could have been accomplished. That fact can be better appreciated when some of the conditions under which the work is carried on are understood.

Lithuania is a Roman Catholic country, and that means, of course, that few people know anything at all of the Bible, so that Scriptural proof does not mean much to the average person. Quite recently over the radio the statement was made that the Bible was forbidden to common people, and that it was a dangerous book to read. The name of Jehovah is practically unknown, as is evidenced by the manner in which the majority stumble over that word when reading the testimony card. But that that name is being witnessed to is also evidenced by the fact that some, when they reach the words “Jehovah God”, say, “We don’t want anytliing to do with Jehovah.” Others, less “goaty”, have been heard to say to their neighbors as Jehovah’s witnesses go from door to door, “These are the people whose God is Jehovah.” Still others, a small minority, ask as to when we are likely to have some new literature. On the whole the people are kindly disposed, but they are certainly in darkness so far as the Word of God is concerned.

Economic and political conditions have gone from bad to worse. There is still no proper outlet for the produce of the country. Germany, once Lithuania’s best customer, now refuses to buy anything, and other markets are, under present world conditions, almost impossible to find.

Three service gatherings have been held during the year, apart from several “drives” by motor-bus in Memelgebiet. On the day set for one of the former, the venue for which was a farm not far front the Latvian border, some interested ones started from twenty miles distant aS early SB three o'clock in the morning. Although the rail fare is only the equivalent of 10 American cents, they had not sufficient to pay it. At about four o’clock it commenced to rain, but they continued with their journey and ultimately arrived literally soaked to the skim Others had come a similar distance by cycle and in farm wagons, so that instead of just a few local friends being at the meeting, as the inclement weather had led us to expect, over fifty attended.

There has been an average of 15 workers per week in Memel-gebiet during the year. Compaied with the number of permit holders, this is low; but some of the friends there need to work very long hours, even on Sundays, and find it difficult to make the time they do to engage in the service. Others Who have time lack zeal, so that there is a handful who persistently engage in the Kingdom work and thus share in the greatest privilege afforded to human creatures. In the remaining territory there has been an average of 7 workers, as compared with an average of one during the previous year.

In addition to the above-mentioned figures, nearly 3,000 copies of The Golden Age have been placed, in addition to 665 regular subscriptions. As quite a number of the latter are delivered by the publishers themselves, much time has been occupied in this direction and in the obtaining of renewals.

LUXEMBURG

The territory embracing Luxemburg is small and consists of two divisions, one called “Gutland”, in the south, and “Oesling”, in the north. Until recently it was possible to give the witness only in Gutland. Oesling is a very mountainous country, difficult to reach, and is under the oppressive hand of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. There are a number of “Orebs” and “Zeebs” in that country, and these have caused the confiscation of literature that the witnesses carried with them. Even though the Hierarchy pressed the charges against brethren who were arrested, in each instance they were acquitted before the court. One pioneer is very active there. He reports some cruel acts on the part of the officers of the law. At the instigation of the clergy the brother was assaulted and beaten until he fell to the ground, and was then cruelly struck and prodded with bayonets. Amidst this opposition the publishing work has been done to some degree in that territory, there being distributed books to the number of 602, and booklets, 5,040, Golden Ages, 1,742, and Bibles, 57. A small convention attended by 50 brethren was held during the year, at .which approximately 50 strangers attended also.

MEXICO

The long and dark regime of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy has left the Mexican people in a poor way for advancement, and yet they are getting on top of their difficulties to a large extent. During the year there has been much opposition to the truth by the Hierarchy’s agents, who have incited others to oppose; but, amidst the persecution and opposition, by the Lord’s grace the publication of the message of the Kingdom has exceeded that of any previous year. Reference is made to extracts taken from the report of the local director of service, as follows:

Encouraged by the 1033-34 results, at the beginning of this fiscal year we set a quota of ISO workers, 174,000 pieces of literature, 96,000 hours and 108,000 obtainers. I am pleased to state that the Lord has blessed the efforts of the "publishers” in this country, as the quota was left behind. While the average number of workers came only to 164, nevertheless we came as high as 220, and it is much higher than the previous year. It is difficult to give exact figures of actual work done, due to the fact that some friends neglect to report regularly. Following figures show results:

Average number of publishers                  164

Total number of hours in the service        103,797

Total number of obtainers                  116,397

Total number of books placed               16,424

Total number of booklets placed            181,174

Total number of books and booklets        197,598

Total number of Bibles placed

Total number of Director

Total number of free literature

Grand total of literature circulated          207,355

Conventions, Companies Visited

Only one convention was held this year; it took place at Vera Cruz. It was fairly well attended, and the friends encouraged. We are now getting ready to have a convention in Monterrey, thus starting the new fiscal year with a first-class campaign and an encouraging convention. Of course, publishers here do not count by the thousands.

Instead of conventions, in this fiscal year we aimed at visiting all the groups of interested persons and the companies. Some were visited several times during the year.

Radio, Transcription, Phonographs

Only in the early part of the fiscal year we used radio. Due to the regulations in this country and the fear of stations to broadcast anything that could be taken as "religious”, there was not much chance of doing real radio work, so it was suspended. However, we used longwave and shortwave for broadcasting, and besides the announcements for the literature and the reading of paragraphs from some books we also were able to put across several full lectures.

The transcription machines were not as much used as anticipated, due to the difficulties in transportation. However, we have already started the system of engaging a central location in some of the principal cities and inviting people to the lectures. This method is giving good results. In Mexico City we expect to cover the different "colomas” or boroughs in this way.

The phonographs were kept reasonably busy. In fact, this is about the most practical means in this country. As there are quite a number of homes supplied with phonographs, even in the case of friends not supplied with portable machines, the records can be used. We hope to increase activities along this line. The following are the results of activities under this subheading:

Total number of radio hours                   122

Total meetings with sound equipment           772

Total attendance at those meetings            14,874

Headquarters—Office, Shipping Room

The amount of work and literature handled required the increase of space and office help. Two other rooms were engaged, and two more workers, one of them part of the time. All the booklets issued in Spanish during the year were translated and proofread at this office, and Vindication (Book Two) and Jehovah prepared. The first one is already in Brooklyn. This office supplied all material for the Spanish Golden Age.

The shipping room in Mexico City was kept busy; besides, we shipped literature from three other places, especially from Vera Cruz. From this depot we distribute literature for the campaigns so as to enable the friends to get it in time. During the year the following was sent out:

Full cartons and large packages

Smaller packages

Letters

The actual shipping figures of literature, taking into consideration the inventories and the literature received during the year, show the following results:

Murder, Threats, Opposition

Prophecy was fulfilled in our midst: ‘And of you shall they cause to be put to death ’ Two of our brethren were murdered by fanatics while engaged m publishing the good news. A number of attacks were reported to this office. In one instance only the determination of two sisters not to leave alone a brother in the hands of his attackers was the means used by Jehovah to shield this publisher from a certain death. True, the Catholic church has not much to say here officially, but at the instigation of priests other church “birds” take upon themselves the task of hindering the proclamation of the Truth without invoking the aid of the ‘armed squad’. We could hardly complain about local authorities except in the case of the two brethren murdered.

Some “lawless” ones thought and aimed to cause difficulties to the work, but, by the Lord’s grace, their angry snarling and barking and mad chasing did not hinder the advancement of this “chariot” of war in Jehovah’s organization. The year was “the best ever”, and it leaves us with increased numbers, zeal, courage and determination, and with the prospects of many ■“prisoners” coining forth to join Jehovah’s organization and to welcome the King.

NORTHERN EUROPEAN OFFICE

This office of the Society is maintained in Denmark and has immediate jurisdiction over the countries of Denmark, Norway, Sweden and Finland, which are more particularly known as the older countries, and, in addition thereto, the small countries along the Baltic sea that were carved out at the redistribution of Europe after the World War. The work has been progressing very well in that part of the earth during the year, with the exception of the Baltic States. Germany has been exercising influence over the Baltic States, working together with the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. The work has been greatly interrupted in those states. In the territory embraced within the Northern European office there have been placed in the hands of the people during the year books and booklets to the number of 1,544,334. The total number of books distributed within the Northern European territory must not be confused with the figures named for each country within that territory. From the local director of service the following is taken:

In Estonia, where we have had the utmost freedom in past years, save that we were shut off the air, our work was stopped in July and doubtless at the same instance. The office and stock rooms were sealed up and our foreign workers brought to a standstill Two English brothers have been giving lectures in Estonian, and quite a lot of interest has been aroused. That doubtless angered the clergy; and, then, our up-to-date message is sharp against the League of Nations, and the authorities profess to be very angry, for they owe their existence in Estonia to it. Our lawyer, however, hid two uidversity professors examine a dozen of our publications, and they certified there was nothing detrimental in them to the interests of the Estonian republic or people. The American mi mater, too, made representations, and we have done and are doing all we can to get going again. The first ten months of this year in Estonia gave an increase’over last year.

The following table gives a little conspectus of what was done during the six great testimony periods. The autumn and' spring ones were the best we have ever had, constituting two more records. In April we had 2,662' taking part, the greatest number we have ever had out in the work. At the Memorial, 2,759 partook; so 97 percent were out, though, of course, many of them were Jonadabs. In other words, many partaking of the Memorial do not appreciate their privileges.

Comparative Results of the Six Testimony Periods 1534-35 In Northern Europe

Number                  '‘‘Golden Age"

Period         Out Hours Bobks BkltS. Sub’s Copies Total

Kingdom Praise   2,362  27,802 1,605 188,171  330 11,333 202,039

Servant’s Test’y   1,864  19,501  9,335  38,887 2,512  8,161  58,895

Kingdom Heralds’  2,267 26,275 1,987 167,434 1,016  8,817 179,254

Anointed's Th’ks’g 2,662  32,518  2,023 243,757  270  8,935 254,991

Test’y for Jehovah

and Gideon       2,132  23,712  4,899 114,742  385  5,307 125,333

Unselfish One’s    1,686  18,789  7,356  40,942  366  6,645  55,309

148,597 27,211 793,933 4,879 49,798 875,821

In the result it will be seen that in these 54 days 875,821 pieces of literature were placed, including 27,211 bound books. We felt fired when each period was over, but glad we had done what we could.

The number out each week on average jumped again this year, from 1,133 to 1,221, and we passed our quota for Northern Europe save" in hours and Golden Age work. The following table sets out the year’s quota and the result actually attained:

Quota and Besult fob Northern Europe tor 1934-35

“Golden Age”

Out Hours Books Booklets Sub's Copies Total

Quota       1,211 505,000 107,500 1,293,500 60,410 241.050 1,702,460

Result       1,221 465,379 108,787 1,435,547 53,635 169,482 1,767,451

We were very happy to see so many bound books spread! 108,787. Our total in books and booklets was thus 1,544,334, the best result ever attained among Northern Europe’s 21 millions of inhabitants. We realize it has been possible only because the Lord has helped us. His due time has come for many of the "great multitude" to hear and accept the invitation, "Come.” They have done so, and now they join us in saying, "Come.” In the 18 months from October 1933 to April 1935 the numbers out for these two periods jumped from 1,809 for all Northern Europe to 2,662, and for the period immediately ahead of us we look forward to seeing still more taking part.

Particularly since August 1934, when the two articles "His Kindness” appeared, our work in Northern Europe, as elsewhere over the earth has been colored by the finding of people of good will, the Jonadab or "great multitude” class. The work of our few regional service directors has been very largely along that line. It has been profitable at service conventions and visits to companies to have work meetings, so that ways and means of saying "Come” in the hearing of this class might be discussed. The having of such a distinct objective has greatly assisted us in our year’s work. The Swedish regional service directors have also helped us this year again in Norway, a long and diffi cult and expensive country to work.

Gramophone records. At the same time there has been a great demand for meetings for interested ones all over, so that it is very difficult for our few regional service directors to cope with it. Accordingly, as adumbrated last year, we have experimented in the production of records so that the companies themselves might be in position to hold such meetings as is done in America, England and other English-speaking lands. To be sure, there is the drawback that we cannot have you speaking all these various languages; but as I indicated to you, we have found a good way of overcoming that difficulty and thus preserving uniformity of presentation of the message all over the earth. Placards like the American have been prepared and the talks advertised as Judge Butherford’s turned into Danish. This has proved to be a good method, for it makes clear that the lectures are by the writer of books spread to the extent of 185,000,000 in sixty different languages. Sample records have been made in Danish, Norwegian, Swedish and Finnish and, first in September, were tried out in three open-air meetings in Denmark. The results were good, and we are preparing to make as many records as will be needed. The Lord has bo richly blessed this method in other countries that we feel sure the Kingdom interests will also be increased in Northern Europe. We look forward with much interest to this branch of the work next year, when we expect many countries will have Bound machines of one sort or another. We are thankful for your permission to make some experiments in this direction. In some parts of Norway, Sweden and Finland where the distances are great these sound machines will be a great help in the work, especially for pioneers.

Pioneers. Last year our average number was 242 out each week, and this year we have had 245. The results are somewhat less, however, owing to 11 in Latvia having no ammunition. They often went around and witnessed with their Bibles. In all, these 245 spread 579,443, as against 598,716 spread last year. In many instances these workers have come across interested ones and helped them along until they took their stand on the side of Jehovah. Some of the pioneers have been asking about gramophones and records as a help to them in this work. The work of the Valuta Commission has hindered us somewhat in getting the necessary material, but, anyway, it is wonderful to realize the Lord’s leading in the matter. As the need arises he meets it so that the work may better progress to the vindication of his name.

‘'Director.’’ Of these last year I remarked: "They are the field orders of the Lord’s army this side the veil ” And now the alteration of the name to "Director for Field Publishers’’ just seems to emphasize that this is the case. It is the link between headquarters and the field, and in the result the work goes forward in a uniform manner, as becomes the greatest organization upon earth. The alteration in the color of the testimony cards from time to time is a help, for the public realize ‘this is a new one; we have not seen it before’.

Motorboats. The "Ester’’ on the Norwegian coast is doing capital service, and some brethren have one boat each on the Swedish and Finnish sides of the Baltic, where there are many islands otherwise difficult to come at. Our fleet at the moment is thus one large boat and two smaller ones.

"The Golden Age"

Last year we had reached 53,000, and now we have an additional 600, having reached 53,635. If we take the single copies and our subscriptions into consideration, about 900;000 copies of this magazine were spread this year, m Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Polish, and German, m Northern Europe. Without a doubt the books and The Golden Age are complementary the one to the other. The Golden Age is a wonderful instrument in the Lord’s hands in spreading abroad a knowledge concerning Jehovah and his kingdom, which is the only hope for humanity and which will vindicate his name.

Youth

There must be many young people both among the children of the friends and among their friends. When at Helsingfors service convention last month I talked for a few moments with a young Finnish girl who could speak Swedish. Beally it was enthusing to hear how she had been out on the work one day and spread 4 books and 12 booklets, while next day she had one book and 12 booklets. She was but 13 years of age, and I have wondered whether it would not be good to have some classes for children from 10 to 17 or so: not just to study The Harp, but that they might be helped to take their stand on the side of Jehovah and to get out in the work. They would m turn witness to their fnends, and so an ever increasing circle Would get a testimony.

NORWAY

The workers in Norway during the year have plodded along and made a fairly good showing. The publishers this year placed in the hands of the people 252,440 books and booklets containing the Kingdom message. Amongst other things the local director m making his report to this office says:

It is wonderful to see how the Lord is giving us more and more light through The Watchtower. When we heard of the "great multitude’’, from the Washington convention, all of us rejoiced, glad to have this subject in the right place. Jehovah m his own time makes everything clear and plain. We read the answers of the different questions in The Golden Age and began to understand a little of the subject. Some of us, who can read English, have been glad to partake of the four Watchtowers we already have got. Now the friends are very anxious to get it in our own ‘ Vagttaarnet’. The subject is very interesting so the friends always must talk with each other of it.

As before reported, it was a great joy for us in Oslo to listen to your speech "Government” from Washington. We had a good hall and got the speech from London per telegraphcable. Some other places in Norway the friends heard it direct by shortwave. All the friends in Oslo and a good many strangers were present, and we were very encouraged to hear your speech and the applause from the 15,000 people Also we arose and shouted ¹ Ja’. We have now sent the booklet Government to all workers in Norway. We are thankful to the Lord that Jie will give us the honor to spread it in the October Praise Period, and we hope to get the best result we ever have had.

Jehovah’s witnesses and the "great multitude” are going on with joy and perseverance. Especially the companies in Oslo and Skien are very often on Sundays driving in buses and motorlorries 30 to 60 miles away, going over the places just like a locust-swarm. It seems that Satan and his agents this year have not had so much time to disturb us as he did last year. They have had so many difficulties m their own ranks

In Oslo we have in the summertime twice a week public meetings in two of the greatest parks. It has been very interesting, and many books have been spread. Some of our new publishers have been interested through these meetings. We have used the transcription machine with music records. Your speechrecords in Norwegian we had not got in the summertime. Now we have received some from Brother Dey, spoken in by Brother Eneroth. They are very clear and good. Soon we will have the records also for phonographs, and that will be the best for Norway.

The two brethren on our motorboat "Ester” are still going on. They are now going from north Norway to the middle of the west Coast, where they will work in some of the great fjords this winter. Last winter they had some hard storms. Sometimes they had to start the motor in the middle of the dark night, when the anchor was not able to hold the boat. One morning the storm took their little ship-boat, earned it over the fjord toward the very great-stoned beach. Just a little place of the beach had no stones, and there the waves threw the boat. When the brethren came and found the boat, some men said to them: "We saw the boat coming, and it is a mnacle that it was not destroyed; so you must have prayed much for this boat.” The brethren on "Ester” are doing a very good work on such places, where the people can’t be reached otherwise. This year they have spread 9,357 books and booklets.

We have still great fields in Norway to work in. It is only in some greater towns we have reached to do a lot of work.

In Oslo, Bergen and Skien the witness is given from two to eight times a year.

In all we have sent out 254,263 books and booklets. The publishers have placed 252,440 books and booklets. It is 29,993 more than last year. We have sent out 7,000 copies Director. Twelve companies are organized for service, and 295 friends participated in the witness work; 88 more than last year. Average number each week, 133. Thirty pioneers and auxiliaries have been out, two more than last year.

The publishers have not reached all the territory in Norway. As the facts show, there are many places in the far north country and amongst the mountains that the people have not yet heard the Kingdom message. It is difficult to reach them, but the Lord in his goodness will send somebody in there to do that work.

PHILIPPINE ISLANDS

The Philippine islands are one of the dark spots on the map, having been ruled for centuries by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy and its dupes. Since the United States has taken them over there has been some progress in their educational matters and some towards seeing the good news of God’s kingdom. The Society has a branch ofSee at Manila. There are about 40 publishers in the field, and these have placed in the hands of the people during the fiscal year a total of 42,455 books and booklets. Says the report of the local director:

Many persons in Manila and other parts of the islands are beginning to know Jehovah. The Jonadab class is being manifested in this country.

Since last year the brethren have spread all over the islands, and not one of them complains, which shows that the Lord is richly blessing them. Praised be our heavenly Father for keeping us in tins work.

The people in the Philippines are extremely poor, and many thousands are now unemployed, due to the economic depression. For this reason the placement of bound books is not very high.

The Philippines consist of thirteen large islands and several thousand small islands; and we still need a few more pioneers, and I believe the Lord in due time will raise them.

POLAND

The work in Poland during the year has made progress, by the grace of the Lord. There has been no increase in the number of companies, but there has been an increase in their activities. The organization has been better, and their appreciation of the privilege of serving has increased. Quite a number of Jonadabs have come forward and shown an appreciation of the Lord by participating in the service. This has increased the number of publishers. The local director of service reports, and the following is quoted from his report:

Pioneer work in our country shows a very satisfying increase. Many Polish brethren who formerly resided in northern France or Belgium, and who were Bent from the country, have taken up the work in their own land. There have been 7,887 books placed this year, to compare with the 4,341 of last year; 61,560 booklets, to compare with 55,018 of previous year. Without doubt this increase is due to better organization for service.

A comparison of this year’s work with that of the previous

year is specially interesting:	1933-34	1934-35
Hours	113,606	138,333
Testimonies	863,210	1,089,615
Books placed	9,054	16,240
Booklets placed	120,030	158,012
Bibles placed	1,482	2,098
G. A. copies in German and Polish placed	117,069	163,383
Total of books and booklets dispatched	131,252	159,952
Bibles dispatched	1,271	2,010
Books in all languages dispatched	9,226	16,902
Booklets m all languages dispatched	122,026	143,050
Books and booklets m Polish dispatched	92,540	111,352
Books and booklets m German dispatched	19,047	20,266
Booles and booklets in Ukrainian dispatched	15,153	24,722
Books and booklets in Russian dispatched	3,569	2,599
Golden Age copies in Polish dispatched	187,881	187,276
Golden Age copies in German dispatched	18,000	25,106
Leaflets distributed	188,832	218,370
Regional service directors employed	2	1
These held company meetings	524	433
Number of attendants	16,229	10,547

Public meetings                              55

Number of attendants                      6,494

Letters and postcards received              11,391     13,220

Letters and postcards dispatched             8,001

All the special service periods were always attended with very great joy among the Lord is people in this country, and all gladly participated in the field service. Hardly was one battle fought when the brethren already reported from various parts of the country that they prepared themselves with joy for the next world-wide campaign. Therefore, the results of those months in which there was a service period were always twice as good .as those of the other months.

As the witness work increased during the past year, the clergy got more and more infuriated. There were more than 3,000 cases where brethren were denounced by the clergy to the authorities because they proclaimed the truth. We took up their defense, and in most cases the procedure was dropped, while the other eases ended with acquittals. Nearly always the charge was that the peddlers’ laws had been violated, but these charges could usually be proved unfounded. Then it was claimed that the old press-law of the year 1851 had been violated, then the press-law of 1874, and further various police ordinances of the years 1912, 1924, 1928, etc., and finally the charge of disturbing the Sunday rest was also raised. However, as there was nd evidence of any real violation of any ordinances, in all instances the brethren were acquitted. In their despair, the clergy foamed more and more with rage. As they do not see any other way out, almost everywhere in the country they have now chosen the method of defending themselves with hands and feet, stones, sticks, laths, etc., and this wherever witnesses of Jehovah go from house to house to give the testimony to the people of good will. The brethren are ill-treated, flogged till the blood comes and they lay unconscious on the ground; they are robbed of their literature, which is sometimes burnt publicly. There were, all together, 41 cases of ill-treatment. Some of the worst cases were taken to the worldly courts, so that the enemy should get convinced in this respect as well as that there is a hmit to his actions.

The enemy naturally pursues this course in order to intimidate Jehovah’s witnesses, discourage them and frighten the people of good will; but he is losing out. Thanks to the wonderful food which the consecrated are provided with through The Watchtower, it is no more possible to discourage them, and there where base and vile acts of violence are resorted to against the Lord’s people, the truth is spreading all the more powerfully, and often Catholics of good-will openly side with the brethren attacked, defending and protecting them. Thus the enemy is defeated again and again, while the Lord’s people are marching from victory to victory as the great day of the Lord draws nearer.

RUMANIA

Doubtless in no part of the earth do the brethren work with greater difficulties than in Rumania. At one time the Society’s work was progressing splendidly there, until the one in charge became a traitor and joined the “evil servant” class and worked with the enemy to destroy the work. The publishing, however, has not ceased. Those who are really devoted to the Lord have continued putting forth their best endeavors under the greatest handicap and have held up the banner of the King and Kingdom. The year has been fraught with many severe trials, but this has not caused the faithful to slacken their hand. From the report of the local director of service the following is quoted:

On June 19, 1935, at 8 p.m., the police called at the office of the Society in order to search the house by the order of the minister of cults. They intended to carry away all correspondence, account books, etc., and in fact took the books and a part of the correspondence out of the office, which later, only by force, could be got back again. The street door was watched by a police official, so that no one could leave the house, and that they could work through the whole night undisturbedly. In spite of this precaution one left the house by a back door and went to the Society’s lawyer, who is a senator, and he took the matter up immediately, got in touch with a competent authority over the telephone, and thus this illegal action was stopped. The books and correspondence were returned, and only 12,050 booklets remained under ban. As the confiscated booklets were previously pronounced free for distribution by the highest judicial authority, there is now a lawsuit pending about this.

False brethren, who with the clergy and their general, the mi-mater of cults, had been used by Satan, caused these troubles.

In 35 cases there were ill-treatments of brethren by policemen, there wore 17 arrests, and on the w]iole the brethren spent 60 days in prison.

It rejoices the heart as one only casually scans the result of the work done by pioneers in this land, but much more so when one considers the difficulties encountered by them. The number of pioneers remains about the same as last year. The number of hours worked, however, has been doubled to 13,718, the number of books placed is somewhat less than last year, but there is an increase in the number of booklets, from 25,096 last year to 46,913 this year. The work has been better organized, which has helped to more successful results.

In all the attacks of the Devil Jehovah preserved us, and the work has progressed by about 30 percent, as shown by the following figures:

There are fewer publishers, but the blessing of the Lord has not diminished, as is evidenced by the result of the efforts put forth during the past year.

The brethren in other parts of the earth fully sympathize with our brethren in Rumania and rejoice to be classed with those who are reproached for the name of Christ. The day of deliverance draws nigh.

SAAR BASIN

This part of the earth’s surface was under the control of the League of Nations until the middle part of the year 1935. It was then returned to Germany. In the first months of the year Jehovah’s witnesses put forth an effort there to publish the testimony. They worked 10,964 hours; placed books, 2,465; booklets, 26,941; Golden Age magazine, 11,265. Now, under the control of the German nation and the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, the publication of the Kingdom message is stopped. The people, however, of that little country have received a fair warning, and certainly the clergy a plain warning, as the Lord has commanded through the prophecy of EzekieL

SPAIN

From Madrid, Spain, the Society’s work is conducted both in Spain and in Portugal. There has been some increase in the publication of the Kingdom message during the year, although there have been many handicaps and many difficulties to overcome. The work in these countries at all times has been carried on at the expense of the American office. The people are poor, paper is high, import duties very high, and consequently the contributions are very small. In Spain this year there have been placed in the hands of the people 105,860 books and booklets. In addition thereto, Bibles to the number of 110, and the magazine The Golden Age {Lus y Verdad), 39,500.

There are a few workers in Portugal, and the distribution here has been small, a total of 11,104 books and booklets being put in the hands of the people; but this far exceeds any year in the past.

The Society has a printing press at Madrid, with which booklets are manufactured, and thus the cost of production is somewhat reduced.

The average number of pioneers in Spain during the year is 12, none of them being Spaniards. However, some Spaniards have offered to enter the pioneer work, but they have the burden of large families and this makes it almost impossible for them to do so.

Says the local director:

The work of the pioneers has been growing increasingly more difficult as the Jesuit party has been gaining power. They are once again manifesting their arrogance and intolerance in the many ways familiar to us all, getting our pioneers driven out of towns or villages, inciting the authorities against them and admonishing the people not to read our literature, both from the pulpits and through the press and parish magazines.

As an illustration of the rank hypocrisy of the Devil’s agents, it is interesting to note that one of the reasons given for the expulsion of the two pioneers was that ‘they were distributing literature of a “Jewish-Masonie tendency” whereas the two Bisters who were recently imprisoned were charged by the governor erf the province with distributing "booklets, of Hitleristie character" (Who Shall Rule the World?'). None but poor, blind Catholics could swallow such nonsensei In other instances, the Press labels us as "Protestants-", and since the vast majority of Catholics in Spam have no idea what a Protestant is, believing that he is the worst kind of infidel, a "heretic", as they are fond of calling them, the people get frightened.

There are few service workers in Spam, but it is a constant pleasure to receive the reports of several publishers scattered in different parts of the country, who are loyally and faithfully doing what lies in their power to give the witness, often at the cost of great difficulties from their families and friends. It costs something to be a witness for the Lord in this country, but the joy and enthusiasm manifested by those who are thus active show that they have their reward.

Although this year started off with a revolution, the effects of which have not yet died down, and the prospects did not look too hopeful, we are all very grateful to Jehovah for the many privileges we have enjoyed in the witness work and for the wonderful way in which he has enabled us to carry on in spite of growing difficulties. The "man of sm" class has, of course, also shown itself here, but this only serves to make us niore determined to maintain our integrity to the end.

The Jesuits since ousted have been subtly and vigorously at work to regain power, and indications are that they are likely to succeed. The “old wench” is perking up all over the earth, but we should remember the words of the Lord: "Pride goeth before destruction, and an haughty spirit before a fall.”

Concerning Portugal, the local director’s report states:

Increase in a country such as Portugal is most encouraging and is due in a great measure to the activities of three German pioneers who have been working there during this time, assisted by a Brazilian brother who has also taken part in the pioneer work; for the participation of the company publishers is almost negligible.

Portugal is a most difficult country for the witness work. For centuries it has been priest-ridden, it is steeped m ignorance and fanaticism, and the poverty of the people as a consequence of several years’ ruthless Jesuit dictatorship is simply appalling.

Little wonder/then, that the results obtained there are negligible m comparison with the amount of time and energy spent. ■So much the greater, therefore, has been the faith and devotion of those faithful brethren who, laboring daily for long hours, have scarcely been able to scrape together sufficient for a bare existence. For the same reason, the constant efforts of the few company publishers who have persisted in the face of such discouragement are most commendable.

In order to offset these disadvantages m a measure, the rates of contributions for literature have been repeatedly reduced -from their already low level. This, together with the exorbitant .customs duties charged on it, has meant a very heavy economic burden for the Society.

It is impossible to conceive of the work’s being carried on in Portugal without considerable sacrifice on the part of all and of its bearing very much fruit under the existing conditions. It makes one long for Buch opportunities as are now opening up in many countries with the transcription sets, housecars, etc., whereby the millions of illiterate people would be able to obtain the comfort of our message.

The strangle hold of the Papal Hierarchy and its abominable effects make us take up Habakkuk’s "cry” to Jehovah, while .we rejoice in the knowledge that -God Almighty is about to shortly clear his name and completely wipe out that iniquitous system.

SWEDEN

The zealous workers of Sweden have been active ■during the year and responding obediently and joyfully to the command of the King of kings. The results of their earnest efforts show an increase in the distribution of books and booklets over the year previous. The total number of books and booklets placed in the hands of the people in Sweden during the fiscal year is 484,233 volumes. Extracted from the report of the local director is the following:

Good as it has been to be able to carry on without any outside trouble at all, this very fact has, however, been causing some to wonder whether there be something wrong with us, seeing that we did not get any share of the persecutions which have come to our brethren in other countries m such nch measure. But then our gracious Lord made the matter clear to us, by The Watchtower’s explanation of the oneness and partaking with one another which exists in the body of Christ and how the Father is counting those ill deeds as done to all the company of his anointed ones. And so we rejoice and look forward to the happy time when we shall be able, by his grace, to share with onr brethren the joy of seeing his name fully vindicated and all his faithful people released to serve him without let or hindrance.

The year just ended started, one could say, in the sign of this wonderful oneness among the witnesses for Jehovah, when we all joined in sending those telegiams of protest to the Government in Germany. Although the telegrams from this country were stopped by the State Board, the protests from our companies got there by mail anyway, and it became a mighty witness to some of our authorities here, causing a stream of correspondence back and forth between various boards and local authorities, which lasted for months and gave them quite a bit of information about us and our work. And some stated that they must admire such a courageous action.

That united action was one of the two peaks of the year’s experiences. The other was the revelation given us through your talk at the Washington convention re the ‘' great multitude”. Through the Bulletin and a private letter we learned about this wonderful news just at the time our annual convention was in session here at Stockholm, and so the friends were told about it (all details, of course, being referred to the full explanation to come in The Watchtower in due time), and they were all just filled with joy and gratitude. The witnesses and the Jonadab brethren were equally glad, I dare say, of this really wonderful light and went away to show their appreciation by faithfully carrying out the comm an ri m e-n tn of Jehovah. During the following months little gatherings and service conventions have been held in various parts of the country and members of the ‘‘great multitude” class have come forth and symbolized their consecration with deep gratitude and appreciation.

It is, of course, because of the help given by this class, many of whom are young and vigorous, whereas some of the witness company are growing bodily old and weak, that we have been able to show not only more publishers out on the work but more hours worked, too. The total number of publishers holding permit from this office was 890, and they have worked well over 150,000 hours. This is an increase of 34 publishers and about 10,000 hours. The greatest number out on the witness work at any time was during the Thanksgiving Period, when 919 took part in the service. This year we also had, for the first time, more partakers in the work than in the Memorial. There were 1,059 attending that feast, but only 907 took part of the emblems.

As already mentioned, we have had the privilege of placing more hterature with the public than ever before, the total being 484,233. That which gives us the greatest satisfaction in this connection is the fact that the bound books have been placed to the number of 48,649, or an increase above last year of 11,283. This is the highest figure ever for bound books, and it is, in. fact, several years since the bound-book figure showed an increase. This is due to more time having been devoted to this feature of the work, and especially the Fruit-Bearers’ Period in August, when more books were placed than has often been the case during a whole month. Booklets have been placed to the number of 435,584, or an increase of 14,157. The total increase on last year thus comes to 25,440.

There is an increase also in the number of subscriptions taken for The Golden Age, the number being now 23,624, the highest ever, and before the calendar year is up we expect to have passed the 24,000 mark and be getting on toward the 25,000 one. The best with this magazine is that it is, as Brother Dey puts it, “a Jonadab-finder.” Where this magazine finds its way the books are sure to follow, and presently the subscriber writes in for more books to spread among his neighbors.

The Watchtower also shows a healthy increase in the number of subscribers, 2,030, against 1,808 last year. Last year’s increase was 208, and this year it is 222. The “great multitude’’ brethren cannot do without The Watchtower any more than the witnesses.

The pioneers have been engaged in the service to the number of 61 (three more than last year), the average number being 53 (four more than last year). Their total output has been 190,179, which is 2,200 less than last year, but this drop in total number is more than made up for by the fact they have placed 3,863 more bound books than last year (24,480 against 20,617), and they have, additionally, taken 4,350 subscriptions for The Golden Age, which is 509 more than last year. Two brothers have been using a motorboat, and during the last three months of the fiscal year they have called upon the isolated people at 284 islands along the east coast south for Stockholm, where they placed, with 1,053 receivers, 428 books, 1,145 booklets, 68 subscriptions and 496 loose copies of The Golden Age. Several of those little islands had never been visited before with the message of the Kingdom.

The wonderful and most timely message contained in the new booklet Government will certainly prove a mighty weapon.

It was a thrilling experience when those English-speaking among us heard it over the radio when it was delivered at Washington, and we have been longing ever since for the time when we should be able to let the people read it for themselves. And that time is now here. And so when the world powers are tottering and the sky is darkening more and more for those in Satan’s organization, Gideon’s little band will sally forth with their trumpets and torches and let the battle cry ring: “For Jehovah and for Gideon!” ffis Government is now to take control and rid the earth of all wickedness! Is it any wonder that His people are joyful and happy amidst all trials and difficulties ?

SWITZERLAND

With a population of only about four million persons Switzerland has received probably the most thorough witness of any country of its size on earth. Its people are democratic and liberal-minded and are considerate of the privileges of others. The exception to this rule is the Catholic Hierarchy and those whom they influence. The work has been opposed in every way by priests, aided and abetted by their allies and the so-called "Protestant” organization. Recently the Catholics and Nazis attempted to have the fundamental law changed to limit the freedom of speech in this land, but were defeated. The religious newspapers continue to attack the Lord’s work there. From the report of the director of service in Switzerland the following is quoted:

Without a doubt we are the subject of much discussion in Catholic circles, and utterances of the clergy and newspapers betray their designs against our activity. For example, we call attention to two notices from Catholic papers: ‘ ‘ The sad part of the whole story is that in our Switzerland the distributors of such offensive matter against good citizens can go quietly on, and have the protection of the authorities. We demand the immediate seizure of this hterature which is deeply offensive to more than a milhon Swiss citizens. We ask, Is the city, cantonal and state government not just and strong enough to carry through this measure? If not, then we as Catholics will organize a defense which will give us that right before God and the world. In iho future we will then see to it that in every Catholic community such representatives of hatred and lies shall he seized and with loaded cudgels be made to pay for their doings. This will perhaps not stop their lies, hut their coming again. We demand an answer from the authorities immediately. The measure is full, and our patience is at an end.”

Remarks of a Catholic priest, Holzman-n, Triengen (Luzerne), With reference to the booklet Escape to the Kingdom:

‘ ‘ This publication reveals a mass of Biblical distortions, absurdities, and mean slanders, misleading to the people and appealing to the lower human tendencies. And We Catholics should consent to such a work? Surely there are legal njeans at hand to prevent these fellows, who are misleaders of the people, from doing such harm. Shall we not use our power? We earnestly beg the competent authorities to take sharp action against these malicious Bible Students and give them what they deserve.”

In diSerent parts of Switzerland our pioneers have been meanly treated, put into prison, and without a chance to defend themselves, sent from the canton.

In November of last year Berne was the scene of a unique and very interesting court ease, that of the Protocols of Zion, Which created quite a sensation. Upon the proposal of the defendants the ease was interrupted and resumed again in April of this year. A new expert witness was summoned, the German Lt. Col. Fleischliauer, owner of the U. Bodung Publishing House, and manager of the Weltdienst (“World Service”). In the evidence presented by Pleischhauer, which lasted for days, among other slanderous remarks, he stated that the Bible Students’ organization have openly set as their aim the establishment of world rule by Israel. Thereby Fleisehhauer misinterpreted the activity of Jehovah’s witnesses in such an unheard-of way that we felt it necessary to protest, and to accuse him of using misleading Jesuit methods. Whereupon Fleischhauer entered complaint against us, out of which a case is now pending. It is known throughout the world that the Berne Court declared these Protocols of Zion to be plagiarized and trash. Mention having been made in this case of the activity of Jehovah’s witnesses, the attention of the public far and wide was drawn upon Jehovah, and thus a great witness was given.

"LIga" Exposition

Throughout the month of September an exposition was held in Zollikofen, near Berne, exhibiting the agricultural, horticultural, and industrial products of the canton.

A visitor to the exposition was greatly displeased upon seeing an exhibit of our books, saying that it was quite out of place in an exposition of this kind to have the attention of the people drawn to books of such a nature. The books alluded to were those of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society, which bring hope and comfort in this critical time and in the true sense of the word are educational.

Many people of good will know the members and work of this printing organization and are convinced that it is a purely unselfish work carried on for the good of their fellow men. To the homes of the people is brought a most comforting and satisfying message, helping to a better understanding of the Bible as God’s Word.

It is unthinkable that this visitor to the exposition has no knowledge of the contents of these books and of the work of Jehovah’s witnesses carried on so actively and openly for years. It is also surprising that the clerical Berner-Tagblatt should permit its columns to be used to convey the slanderous remarks of this "Inga” visitor.

We have written the editor of this paper, also an article entitled “A Slander as Usual” is to appear in The Golden Age. It is not the first time, however, that this paper has scoffed and sneered in an insulting way at the acknowledged noble-minded work of the Watch Tower Society.

In the abusive Tagblatt article, among other things, it was asserted that the witness of Jehovah’s witnesses was not a witness, but a business proposition carried on by means of their publications. It is well known to everyone who has honestly and without prejudice examined the contents of this literature, and who has come into contact with the representatives of this organization, that this is a slanderous statement.

The answer to the Tagblatt article follows:

"Gentlemen,

"Herewith a necessary reply to your news-item entitled ‘A Beauty Defect in the Liga’, published in your issue of September 13.

"There may, of course, be some men who wonder that a solid publishing firm which has existed in Berne for years, and has always met its obligations, should be represented at the ‘Liga’ in Zollikofen, because such people have had until now no opportunity of learning the purpose of this firm.

"However, it seems strange that any person should wonder that in a Christian canton, at a decent exhibition, there should also be represented a Christian publishing house, namely, the editors of Jehovah's witnesses, the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society in. Berne. This Society is registered in the Swiss Registry of Commerce as a philanthropic organization, without monetary aims, and the purpose of which, as stated in its charter and by-laws, is to prepare in its own printing plant books and booklets explaining the Bible and to distribute these. Briefly stated, to render the Bible popular. For this purpose an exposition as the ‘Riga’ should be the proper place, particularly since the Watch Tower Society was officially invited to participate without having previously applied for entry.

“ Astonishment or admiration is all right, but it is false to claim that the witnesses of Jehovah are doing business with printed paper. The publishing house itself, as has been officially proved, does not do any commercial business, and as regards Jehovah’s witnesses as individuals, they joyfully sacrifice their all in the cause of God’s kingdom. As is evidenced in Germany and in other lands, they are, by the thousand, being cruelly persecuted and slandered for the sake of their faith, which can hardly be considered as a commerce, but which should call forth sincere admiration from all rightly thinking people.

“It is more than unfair to ironically ridicule God-fearing men and their activity.

“Many have expressed themselves admiringly to see God’s Word represented at the ‘Liga’, and then again the Bible and Christianity are neither of American nor of Swiss origin.’’

The attendance at the exposition was exceedingly good throughout, and the visitors passing our stand would pause to express their commendation that in such a place God’s Word should be represented. Over 5,000 catalogues and more than 500 books, booklets and G. A. copies were placed with the people. Phonograph records were also sold. At the entrance to the exposition a large and beautiful placard advertising The Golden Age was hung.

Without hesitation we can say that through this exposition a splendid witness was given to the honor of Jehovah’s name.

Through books and booklets a witness was given in Switzerland as follows:

Company publishers	684	Books	25,277
Pioneers	4	Booklets	338,535
Auxiliaries	7	The Golden Age	110,735
Hours	86,230

There has been an increase of 12,870 hours and 52,471 booklets over last year. This is striking evidence that the Catholic and Protestant clergy have not in any way intimidated the true witnesses of God’s kingdom. The anointed fear neither men nor the Devil.

Because of the increasing attacks by the police and the press against Jehovah’s witnesses, we have published a leaflet entitled “Jehovah’s witnesses, Who Are They, and What Is Their Aim?” and 200,000 of these have been distributed in Switzerland.

During the past year, there have been 148 arrests, and 111 court cases; 45 were decided in our favor; 49 days were spent in prison by various brethren who refused to pay the fines imposed. Ers. 1,629 in fines and costs were spent in this past year.-

Instead of Jehovah’s witnesses’ being a commercial organization, the following is a sample of what the workers do at their own expense: For their train and omnibus transportation during the year they paid out of their own pockets the sum of 33,178.24 francs; for their lodgings, 2,660.50 ftancs; miscellaneous, 4,885.45 francs.

There were eight service conventions held in Switzerland during the year, with an attendance of 1,480. In other parts of Central Europe, 9, with an attendance of 1,455.

SYRIA

The Society maintains its branch office for the Levant states, Lebanon and Syria, at Aleppo, Syria. The work continues under much handicap, and yet the brethren there are zealous and put forth their best endeavors to publish the truth. During the year only one pioliedr has'been in the service, one auxiliary, and 19 company publishers, making a total of 21. Together they have put in 5,390 hours in the service and placed in the hands of the people a total of 6,927 books and booklets. The local director in his report says:

The past fiscal year for Syria has been the period of persecution and propagation.

At the first quarterly a celebrated evangelical “Reverend”, a worldly enemy of the Watch Tower, came from America to Syrian and Aleppo; to destroy the Watch Tower and to a-nni-hilate it from Syria, as his men told us. And from their pulpit he horribly attacked the Society. And one day he declared that he has many things to do against Bussellism, and just at this time he became suddenly sick, and remained three months in bed. He returned to the U. S. A. sick and noiseless. Afterwards a celebrated Armenian journal at Beirut, Syria, attacked the Watch Tower in two long articles. And in the March issue of the Armenian Watchtower, by my letter with the title ‘‘The Persecution Has Been the Propagation”, I gave information that at this period we have had an incomparable success at Aleppo.

On May the 8th two detective policemen confiscated from the office and from the depot of Aleppo’s W.T.C. the book Deliverance, and that very week we began a Bible study using that same book, which we had neglected for a long time, and which we continue uninterrupted until today.

The little company at Lebanon, working under the direction of the Society’s office from Aleppo, reports that the lecture on “Government” from Washington, D.C., was heard and much appreciated. The books and booklets distributed by the company during the year total 4,500.

TRINIDAD

The publication of the Kingdom message covering Port of Spain and ne,ar-by islands has progressed from Trinidad during the year, the total number of books and booklets placed in the hands of the people being 47,357. This shows a decrease of bound books, but an increase in the booklets during the year. From the local director’s report the following is taken:

The brethren in these islands (Trinidad, Tobago, St. Vincent, Grenada, Dominica, Barbados, Antigua) have had many blessings, also some difficulties. They have especially appreciated the way in which the Lord has helped them, with your cooperation, to acquire and use transcription machines, which reach some who would not pay attention to anything else. Numbers of people gather regularly at certain parks and other places where some of these are m use every week and much enjoy the lectures. This work is gaining such momentum that attendance of upward of 90,000 is reported, also many stay in their homes and listen; this is sometimes disclosed when they are afterwards called upon with the literature. At the meetings remarks like the following are often overheard: "There is no work and this is the only consolation; let us draw near.” "That’s right, boy, come here and listen, don’t go back to Belmont and let that man fool you any more.” "I would like 5,000 women to hear that lecture; they are the ones that the priests fool.”

A report from one of the islands describes the year just passed as "a year of depression and heavy tropical rains”. Demonstrations of the unemployed, which commenced in the preceding year, have continued to such an extent that the government of this island has issued prohibiting proclamations. The stringency of conditions amongst the people is reflected in the literature which they have obtained, showing a falling off in bound books, but an increase in the booklets, which have reached their highest point so far.

There is a large number of persons who like and approve of the Kingdom message; we are trying to show them the importance of taking a definite stand on the side of Jehovah.

The Watchtower is always eagerly received. Jehovah’s people know how he sends them what is necessary that they may grow strong thereby.

The Golden Age is also much appreciated, and by a wide circle. Hundreds of distributor copies of each issue aie circulated.

YUGOSLAVIA

In Yugoslavia the following languages are used: Serbian, Croatian, Slovenian, German, Rumanian, and Hungarian. The small number of witnesses employed in the service must meet the requirements in all these languages. Many of the people are unable to read. Sometimes a whole village is entirely illiterate. This is another sample of the priest-ridden Roman Catholic country. Yet there are some who are anxious to know about God’s kingdom. The local service director’s report sets out certain facts, from which the following is taken:

During the past year all together 69 publishers participated regularly in the service from house to house, while the previous year we had had 98 publishers. The number of 69 ineludes 9 Jonadabs who join in the service. In the Memorial 109 brethren participated. This shows that many of them do not appreciate the privilege of service. One reason why this year there were fewer publishers in the field is that the adversary, through his tool, the "evil servant" class, succeeded in getting some of the companies completely on his side, so that these not only did not participate in the work, but even opposed it. However, in view of the decline in the number of publishers, those remaining saw and appreciated their privileges of service and they have been more zealous to make up the deficiency.

While last year the 98 publishers spent a total of 29,293 hours in the field and placed 102,569 publications in the hands of the people, the 69 publishers who engaged in the work during the year under consideration worked, all together, 35,170 hours and distributed 94,105 books and booklets. There is therefore a decline in the output of booklets as compared with the previous year, while the number of bound books placed this year exceeds that of last by 2,865. We are very grateful to the Lord that in spite of the great economic depression prevailing in this country he has granted us such success.

The special service periods were greatly blessed. While the year before an average of 86 publishers participated in these periods, spending together 7,140 hours in the field and placing 25,211 books and booklets, this year 69 publishers were able to distribute 26,059 publications in 8,852.5 hours of work. This again shows that the brethren endeavored to make up for the deficiency in putting in more hours, and the Lord granted his blessing.

During the past year there was only one regional service meeting. Approximately 230 brethren and Jonadabs were present, whereof 212 took part in the service from house to house, placing in 260 hours 964 books, booklets and copies of The Golden Age. In this result we see also the blessing of the Lord, and are full of gratitude, for this work was done in a place where most people have already taken their stand either for or against the Kingdom. The public lecture held on this occasion was also very well attended, this being a good opportunity for giving the witness. There was not the slightest trouble, although the meeting place was situated hardly a hundred meters away from the palace of the Catholic bishop.

Now as to the experiences of the publishers in the field, we see that it is always the clergy and their allies who interfere with the witness and want to destroy it. Especially the Catholic tools are doing all they can to throw suspicion on Jehovah’s witnesses and to elander them before the people. Although many times they succeed m inciting their blind followers and other credulous people against the Lord’s work and servants, yet even in the rurals they have lost credit with -most of the people and many have now a desiie to find out for themselves what the tiuth is and like to read our literature, even, if they often do it in secret for fear of the prison keepers.

CONCLUSION

The foregoing is a brief resume showing the results of the efforts put forth by the publishers of the message of Jehovah’s kingdom during the twelve months just passed. During that period the opposition to Jehovah’s witnesses has been greater than any other time during the Elisha period of the Lord’s work. The Roman Catholic Hierarchy, its allies and dupes, directed by Gog, the Devil’s chief field agent, has fought desperately during the past twelve months to bring greater reproach upon Jehovah’s name and to prevent the people from learning of his kingdom. No doubt the almighty God laughs at their feeble efforts and holds them in derision. This we do know, that Jehovah has sent forth his witnesses to give the testimony concerning his name and his kingdom and those witnesses have placed in the hands of the people books and booklets containing the Kingdom message to a greater number than in any previous year. Many persons who never heard of the Lord’s kingdom before have learned about it this year, and thus the great multitude are beginning to march toward the Kingdom. During the fiscal year this work of publishing the Kingdom message has resulted in placing in the hands of the people books and booklets to the total number of 26,322,854. That, added to the total number reported in previous years, brings the total distribution of books and booklets since the beginning of the publication of The Harp of God in 1921 up to 205,217,917 volumes.

This is the work of the Lord and marvelous in our eyes, and to him we give all the praise. In taking into consideration the amount of literature placed during the year we should keep in mind the great hindrance put in the way of the work in many countries. In Austria, Germany, Italy and Danzig the Roman Catholic Hierarchy has largely succeeded in keeping the people in ignorance of the Kingdom. Had the publication of the truth been uninterrupted in these countries many millions more would have heard the message. It has placed more responsibility upon the Hierarchy, and for which that wicked organization must shortly account to the Lord.

At the present time the Lord is permitting the devil worshipers to put on their garments and thus identify themselves as of the company that must be destroyed at Armageddon. At the same time those of good will are permitted to identify themselves by taking their stand on the side of the Lord. There is every reason for Jehovah’s witnesses and those faithful Jonadabs who have joined themselves to the chariot to greatly rejoice. The Lord has not revealed to his people just how soon he will begin to express his wrath against the Devil’s organization in the final conflict at Armageddon, but there are many things in the prophecies that indicate this time of great tribulation upon Satan’s organization is near at hand. The faithful will continue in the joy of the Lord to march forward singing the praises of Jehovah and his King as they go, and do with their might what their hands find to do to vindicate Jehovah’s name. This report is joyfully submitted.

Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society

President.

ANNUAL MEETING

WATCH TOWER BIBLE & TRACT SOCIETY

Minutes

Agreeable to the charter and by-laws and notice duly published, the annual meeting of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society was held at Pittsburgh, North Side, Allegheny County, Pennsylvania, on the 31st day of October, A.D. 1935.

The meeting was called to order by C. A. Wise, vice-president. The vice-president read a communication from the president of the Society stating reasons for his inability to be present and communicating in brief the substance of the annual report prepared by him. Upon motion duly put and carried, the annual report of the president was ordered printed in the usual form.

The chair then called upon the secretary to submit the facts as to the number of votes present in person or by proxy. It appeared from his report that 134,931 votes were present.

Thereupon the chair declared that the nomination for the board of directors was in order. Motion was made by George McLamb that the following-named persons be put in nomination for board of directors for the ensuing term of three years, to wit: J. F. Rutherford, C. A. Wise, W. E. Van Amburgh, A. H. Macmillan, T. J. Sullivan, G. Y. McCormick, and H. H. Riemer.

Motion was made and duly seconded to suspend the rule with reference to voting by ballot and that the secretary be requested to cast the entire vote. This motion was unanimously carried.

The secretary then cast the entire vote of 134,931 votes, and the chair declared that the following-named persons were elected as directors of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society to serve during the term of

three years from this date, to wit: J. F. Rutherford, C. A. Wise, W. E. Van Amburgh, A. H. Macmillan, T. J. Sullivan, G. Y. McCormick, and H. H. Riemer.

The next order in business being that of electing officers for the corporation, George McLamb put in nomination the following persons as officers, to wit:

For president, J. F. Rutherford;

For vice-president, C. A. Wise;

For secretary and treasurer, W. E. Van Amburgh. There being no other nominations, upon motion duly put and carried, the rule to vote by ballot was suspended and the secretary directed to cast the entire vote for the persons named, which was done.

Thereupon the chair declared the following-named persons duly elected to be officers of the Society for the term of three years, to wit:

For president, J. F. Rutherford;

For vice-president, C. A. Wise;

For secretary and treasurer, W. E. Van Amburgh.

There being no further formal business before the meeting of the corporation, a motion was made and duly carried to adjourn and the meeting stood adjourned without day.

YEAR TEXT

"For Jehovah and for Gideon." —Judg. 7:18, A.R.V.

TEHOVAH’S NAME shall be vindicated. His I faithful witnesses will participate therein. J Those on the earth are small in number and weak in themselves. Their strength is in the Lord, whom they implicitly trust. The victory God will bring through Christ Jesus, the Greater Gideon, and of that there is not the slightest doubt.

The visible division of the enemy host, led by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, is daily growing more arrogant, aggressive, bold and scornful. Tormented by the zeal and activities of Jehovah's witnesses, who declare the truth to the people, and apparently making progress in suppressing those witnesses, it may be expected that soon the enemy will say to each other: “Peace and safety/’ Then what?

Jehovah answers that he will “do his work, his strange work; . . . his act, his strange act”, and thus will express his wrath against his hypocritical enemies. The Lord is maneuvering the enemy forces to that very point. In his due time he will rise up. Knowing this, every faithful servant of God will now be very courageous. The witness work must be done before destruction falls upon the enemy.

Because of full assurance of faith in Jehovah and in Christ Jesus, and because they delight to do God’s will, the anointed and their companions will not slack the hand now, but in the joy of the Lord will press forward, shouting as they march: "For Jehovah and for Gideon,” the mighty Vindicator of His Name.

Daily Texts and Comments

The comments following the daily texts are taken from The Watchtower (W).

January 1             (226)

Listen, 0 isles, unto me; and hearken, ye people, from far: The Lord hath called me.—Isa. 49:1.

The “isles” here shall, the prophet declares, in due time worship Jehovah and contribute toward his service. (Zeph. 2:11; Ps. 72:10) They shall pay tribute to him, glorify and praise Jehovah. The isles that seek the Lord profit by the message of the kingdom, and of them the prophet of God wrote: “Let them give glory unto the Lord, and declare his praise in the islands.” (Isa. 42: 12) These islands have a desire for righteousness. Coming in contact with Jehovah’s witnesses and recognizing them as his servants, they gladly minister to them and are the ones that go to make up the “sheep” class whom the Lord puts on his right hand and approves. The prophecy says, “Hearken, ye peoples, from far” (R.V.), showing that the kingdom message must be carried to faraway peoples, a witness world-wide. W 9/15/35

January 2             (158)

The Lord will have mercy on Jacob, and willyet choose Israel, and set them in their own land: . . . they shall take them captives, whose captives they were.—Isa. 14:1,2.

Those faithful at the Lord’s coming to the temple, being loosed from prison or condition of restraint, were brought into the temple and anointed, and the commission was given to them as members of Jehovah’s organization under Christ to “proclaim liberty to the captives”, that is, to others still in captivity. These others would include those later brought into the temple, as well as the “great multitude”. Beginning with 1919, and particularly in 1922, Jehovah, by the Greater Cyrus, Christ Jesus, and through his anointed ones on earth, caused proclamation of “liberty to the captives” to be made. The original faithful remnant share in proclaiming liberty to others, by reason of being a part of “the Servant”, Christ Jesus being the chief one to do this work. W 10/1/35

January 3             (148)

0 Lord, revive thy work in the midst of the years, in the midst of the years make known; in wrath remember mercy. God came from Teman, and the Holy

One from mount Paran. Selah.—Hob. 3:2,3.

In days of old Jehovah went forth to vindicate his name by fighting against the enemies of his chosen people. His action then was chiefly to foretell what he will do at the battle of the great day of God Almighty. When he sent Moses to Egypt to make a name for himself, that was temporary, because God’s due time had not arrived to destroy the enemy completely. At Armageddon he will permanently and for ever vindicate his holy name. Habakkuk’s prayersong recounts what Jehovah did in the past, and which foretells what shall come to pass at Armageddon. Jehovah inspired the prayer to 'revive His work at the consummation of the years’. What he did in answer he in times of old fulfilled in miniature, foretelling fulfillment, now in completion. W 6/15/35

January 4             (157)

He saved them for his name’s sake, that he might make his mighty power to be known.—Ps. 106: 8.

Only a comparatively few people on earth believe that Jehovah is all-powerful. Others do not know that ‘all power belongs to Jehovah’. (Ps. 62:11) At Armageddon all will be forced to know of his unlimited power. Necessarily vindication of Jehovah’s name involves an exhibition of unlimited power; and thus he will teach all creation that he is the Most High, besides whom there is none. “Behold, God ex-alteth by his power: who teacheth like him?” (Job 36: 22) Salvation is given to man, not because of inherent good qualities of man, but Jehovah has provided salvation for man for His own name’s sake. Satan matches his power against Jehovah’s. Therefore Satan and all his followers must be destroyed. Armageddon is fixed and will accomplish Satan’s destruction and vindication of Jehovah’s name. ~W 7/1/35

* January 5             (215)

Knowing this first, that no prophecy of the scripture is of any private interpretation.—2 Pet. 1: 20.

Jehovah is the author of all prophecy. In olden times men who were devoted to Jehovah were permitted to make a record of prophecy and to give utterance to the same, hut no man could ever properly take credit to himself for writing prophecy. The same is true relative to interpretation of prophecy. For this reason no creatures could have an understanding of prophecy until God’s due time to reveal the understanding thereof. When his time comes to unfold his prophecy, he causes those devoted to him to clearly see that all prophecy makes paramount these great truths, to wit: Jehovah’s purpose to vindicate his own holy name, and that he will perform that purpose by and through his beloved loyal and faithful Son, Christ Jesus. Vindication of Jehovah’s name is of first importance, but the salvation of man to life is closely related thereto. W 7/15/35

January 6              (34)

They that go down to the sea in ships, that do business in great waters; these see the works of the Lord, and his wonders in the deep.—Ps. 107: 23,24.

The present-day “great multitude” or Jonadab class appear to be here represented as doing the shipping. They have been associated with the people alienated from God (“the sea”) and doing their own business, along with others of the commercial element of Satan’s organization. The time arrives when persons of good will learn something about Jehovah’s purposes and his mighty works. This information comes to them by the witnesses whom Jehovah sends out to proclaim the kingdom message. These see Jehovah’s works performed through his faithful witnesses in preaching the gospel of' God’s kingdom and doing so under adverse conditions. Later these see God’s wonderful works at the battle of Armageddon, which will be great tribulation upon “the sea”. W 9/15/35

January 7              (68)

WTience came they? And I said unto him, Sir, thou knowest. And he eaid to me, These are they which came out of great tribulation. — Rev. 7:13, li.

This tribulation does not come for the purpose of developing the great multitude, but is "the great tribulation” (B.V.) that comes upon Satan’s organization, both visible and invisible, and which will completely wreck that entire organization. "The day of Jehovah” began in 1914, at the birth of God’s kingdom. Had that tribulation, then begun, continued to its finality without interruption, all flesh would have been destroyed. The tribulation was shortened by the Lord about the time the World War ended, affording ■opportunity for his witnesses under his comm and to go forth and bear testimony to his name and kingdom as a witness to the world. It is during this period of giving testimony or ‘preaching this gospel of the kingdom’ that the "great multitude” come out. The tribulation is not for their benefit. W 8/15/35

January 8              (78)

Cry out and shout, thou inhabitant of Zion: for great is the Holy One of Israel.'—Isa. 12: 6.

Jehovah has laid upon the remnant specific duties and obligations, which are set forth in the commission which God has given to them. They are anointed with the spirit of the Lord and are sent forth to tell the truth, regardless of whether the people hear or refuse to hear. They must make known to the people that Jehovah is the only true and almighty God and that this is the day of his vengeance, that is to say, the time in which he will execute his judgment upon all of Satan’s organization. The faithful witnesses of Jehovah can have nothing in common with the enemy organization, but they must be entirely on the Lord’s side and their challenge to the enemy must be boldly expressed by their constant battle cry, to wit, "For Jehovah and for the Greater Gideon, Christ Jesus, the Vindicator of the Most High.” W 3/15/35

January 9              (98)

I raise up the Chaldeans, that bitter and hasty nation, .- . . terrible and dreadful: their judgment and their dignity shall proceed of themselves.—Hab. 1: 6, 7.

The Lord’s army will be terrible and dreadful to Satan’s host. God’s holy nation is the “worst of the nations”, which he will bring against Satan’s organization. The Chaldeans of old were merely instruments of Jehovah to execute his judgment. At Armageddon Christ Jesus will execute Jehovah’s judgment against Satan’s forces. The time having come for execution of his judgment against Satan’s host, Christ will go forth to the work. In doing it the Lord asks and receives no dignity. Likewise his followers are in no wise dignified by the enemy. Jehovah’s witnesses, as followers of Christ Jesus, do not apply for permission or a license to be issued by ‘ ‘ Christendom’s ’ ’ officials to do the work with which Jehovah dignifies them. Those who love Jehovah obey him, and not man. W 5/1/35

January 10             (138)

Be ye not unwise, but understanding what the will of the Lord is.—Eph. 5:17.

The will of God is the same as his purpose. When his will ■ is expressed, that is the expression of his purpose, decree or determination to do that thing as expressed. Jehovah has a fixed and definite reason for every expression of his will or purpose. There are no idle or superfluous words in his expressed purpose. His will or purpose is his unchangeable law; hence his will is the law or rule of action by which his approved children must be guided. Concerning the unchangeableness of his will he caused his prophet to write: “Surely as I have thought, so shall it come to pass; and as I have purposed, so shall it stand.” (Isa. 14:24) Under the conditions and circumstances existing today it is of vital importance to every one of Jehovah’s witnesses that he be filled with the knowledge of God’s will. W 1/15/35

January 11             (159)

We have also a more sure word, of prophecy; where-unto ye do well that ye take heed, as unto a light that shineth in a dark place.—2 Pet. 1:19.

Clearly the correct meaning of Peter’s words is that the transfiguration vision he witnessed is a corroboration or confirmation of what the prophets of old had written at God’s dictation; and when the time had arrived for fulfillment of that prophetic vision, then would be the time when the prophecies of old written by holy men could be understood. According to the A.R.V. rendering: “We have the word of prophecy made more sure.” Peter’s argument is this: The prophets of old wrote concerning Messiah’s coming in power and glory, but now here is a vision of that glorious coming, and three of us were eyewitnesses to this vision which speaks of the ‘coming of the Lord Jesus in power and glory’. Nothing could add to or take away from the Word of God, but it could be confirmed by the above vision. W 7/15/35

January 12            (336)

He stood, and measured the earth: he beheld, and drove asunder the nations: and the everlasting mountains were scattered, the perpetual hUls did bow: his ways are everlasting.—Hdb. 3: 6.

At 1914, at Jehovah’s command, Michael, who is Christ the great Prince and King, stood up to reign. This mighty prince makes an inspection of the earth before the beginning of Armageddon. While he has at the command of Jehovah been taking the measures of the earth, he has also caused his witnesses to go throughout the earth and declare his judgment. When the time for Armageddon is reached, the Lord will not stand still or halt in his marching. He will shake the heavens and the earth and move with rapidity of the whirlwind. “He stood forward, and made the earth tremble.” (Leaser) At Mount Sinai the earth shook, and that was merely a sample of what shall come to pass at Armageddon. W 6/15/35

January 13             (163)

Blessed are they that dwell in thy house: they will he still praising thee. Selah.—Ps. 84: 4.

In God’s organization creatures hold different positions, some higher than others in rank, but there is no reason to say that there is a difference in the degrees of faithfulness required on the part of each and all. All must be completely devoted to Jehovah. Disloyalty is the identifying mark of Satan’s organization and of all creatures therein. Loyalty to God marks every part of Jehovah’s organization. The position of the faithful prophets of old will be less exalted than that of God’s royal house. The great multitude’s position is less exalted than that of the royal house and the “princes in all the earth’’, but that makes no difference. Whatever the position occupied by any creature in God’s organization, that position is an honorable one. Jehovah’s entire organization is honorable and blessed. Happy the creature that has any place therein. W 8/15/35

January 14            (236)

Although the fig tree shall not blossom, neither shall fruit he in the vines; . . . yet 1 will rejoice

in the Lord.—Hah. 3:17,18.

There looms before the prophet’s vision a great calamity, but in the face thereof he expresses his full confidence. The fig tree is symbolic of sweetness and good fruit. (Judg. 9: 11) To Jehovah’s faithful remnant the symbolic fig tree has already blossomed, and they are enjoying the sweetness of the fruit of the Kingdom. They are now in the “holy land”, “their own land,” in the happy condition of the Lord and “under the fig tree”. (Zech. 3: 10) The “true vine” is Christ Jesus, who has come and gathered his faithful unto the temple. There the remnant are rejoicing because of the returned Bridegroom and the Lord Jesus is drinking the wine new with them. The remnant as branches of the true vine hold forth its fruit to Jehovah’s praise. W 7/1/35

January 15            (195)

The love of money is the root of all evil.—1 Tim. 6:10, It was covetousness, which is extreme selfishness, that caused Lucifer to exalt himself and attempt to be like unto God. Selfish desire for personal gam is truly the root of all evil. If those who make a covenant to do God’s will could always keep in mind that their chief work is to honor Jehovah’s name, and that in doing so they must do good unto others as they have opportunity, and especially to the household of faith, and if they would then put self in the background and proceed according to God’s Word, much trouble and needless suffering could be avoided. It is a selfish heart that desires to exalt himself, whereas the hrnnblp-minded one is he who desires to obey and tries to obey God’s commandments even though in doing so he is misunderstood and is caused to suffer at the hands of others.—Prov. 16; IS. W 3/15/35

January 16            (162)

He hath sent me to bind up the brokenhearted, to proclaim liberty to the captives, and the opening of the prison to them that are bound.—Isa. 61:1.

“To them that are bound” the Lord Jesus has opened the doors of restraint and let them go free. Those obligating themselves to Satan’s organization by oaths and who have formed alliances with others therein, all which hinders them from freedom in the Lord and his service, are properly said to be “bound”. Until the Lord’s people came to understand what constitutes the “higher powers” (Rom. 13: 1) they were restrained and were bound in fetters. “Them that are bound” certainly included the Ruth and Esther class, which have been brought into Jehovah’s organization from and after 1922. Christ Jesus, the great Judge and Vindicator, has been using the anointed servant class foreshadowed in Mordecai and Naomi to proclaim to others the ‘opening of the prison doors’, and particularly to the Ruth and Esther class. W 10/1/35

January 17            (132)

Ue sent a man before them, even Joseph, who Was sold for a servant; whose feet they hurt with fetters: he was laid in iron; until the time that his word came; the word of the Lord tried him.—Ps. 105:17-19.

God does not prevent Satan and his organization from putting in prison some of God’s faithful people at certain times. The imprisonment of God’s chosen people, natural Israel, by Satan’s organization, foreshadows things to come to pass later relative to his chosen people, spiritual Israel. Joseph was a man of God, and he was caused to be imprisoned in a dungeon. (Gen. 40: 3,15) Joseph was a type of Christ Jesus, and the binding of his feet in fetters of iron would indicate that the feet members of Christ would be restrained or bound or imprisoned. The Scriptural proof shows that the faithful followers of Christ Jesus were in prison, bound and restrained of their liberty when he appeared at the temple in 1918. W 9/15/35

January 18            (309)

I will stand upon my watch, and set me upon the tower, and will watch to see what he wild say unto me, and what I shall answer

when I am reproved.—Hdb. 2:1.

The application of the prophecy is to God’s people in the time of war, when the faithful are under siege and for that reason requiring watchfulness and prayer to Jehovah through Christ Jesus. The watching of Habakkuk, who here represents the remnant, applies at the time after the Lord’s coming to the temple and during the time Satan is gathering the whole world against the Lord and his anointed. Satan, having been cast out of heaven, turns over to his prince Gog the work of assembling his forces and forming and executing the conspiracy against God’s hidden ones. The wicked forces are seeking the destruction of Jehovah’s anointed. Now the remnant must watch and be on the alert at all times, being diligent in declaring Jehovah’s purpose. W 5/15/35

January 19             (301)

WAo "hath delivered us from the power of darkness, and hath translated us into the kingdom

of his dear Son. — Col. 1:13.

A prisoner is one who is a captive and under restraint by another and is bound and denied his full liberty. If a person is blind to the truth and such blindness is caused by another, then that person is bound in fetters of ignorance. If one is in darkness and does not know which way to go, he is restrained in the exercise of freedom of action and is therefore a prisoner. Satan is the prince of darkness. He, together with his many agents employed in his wicked work, holds the human race in restraint and therefore in darkness. By his prophet Jehovah says: “Behold my servant, whom I uphold, mine elect, in whom my soul delighteth.” Those who become part of this elect servant were at one time in darkness and needed to be brought out into light and liberty in Christ. W 9/1/35

January 20            (335)

Behold, is it not of the Lord of hosts that the people shall labour in the very fire, and the people shall weary themselves for very vanity?—Hdb. 2:13.

When the message of God’s truth is proclaimed by Jehovah’s witnesses, by which the people are informed what shall come to pass, then the earth’s rulers take violent opposition to such message. Therefore there is deadly conflict between the message of truth and Satan’s agents on earth. It is a fight now to the finish, and soon Jehovah will make a short work of it. The people shall “for emptiness weary themselves’’. (Roth.) Big Business, militarism, politicians and clergy stand for or are pictured as “Egyptians”, and now make great claims concerning their plans for saving the world, but “the Egyptians shall help in vain, and to no purpose”. (Isa. 30: 7) Their fighting against Jehovah will make all the enemy weary in the end. W 6/1/35

January 21            (331)

There is one "body, and one spirit, even as ye are called in one hope of your calling.—Eph. 4: 4.

Jehovah’s chief purpose is vindication of his name. The men who maintain integrity toward him are the ones that have any part in vindication of Jehovah’s name. He has taken out from among men a people for his name and permits them to bear witness concerning Himself and his kingdom. These, in order to be approved, must faithfully maintain their integrity. It is not reasonable that God would have another spiritual class in heaven made up of those taken out from men and who have agreed to do his will but who, for fear of men or the Devil’s crowd, have compromised with Satan’s organization and been to a large degree unfaithful and yet the Lord would give them a place in his heavenly organization. His Word discloses that he has called one class and set before them the hope of being partakers with Christ in his suffering, and in his joy associated with him. W 8/1/35

January 22            (304)

Then shall the kingdom of heaven be likened unto ten virgins, which took their lamps, and went forth to meet the bridegroom.—Matt. 25:1.

All are virgins because they are prospective members of the royal house over which Christ Jesus the Bridegroom is Head, Lord and Master. When responding to the call to the kingdom these, each one, took their equipment for letting the truth shine, and to shed forth the light which they had, based upon God’s Word. Their “lamps” were for use to illuminate the way, that others also might see the Lord’s coming to the temple and that those in line for the kingdom might discern the Bridegroom when he arrived. These virgins go forth and meet the Bridegroom, the King, to give him a joyful welcome and to sing the praises of Jehovah God, who sends him. They must be equipped to join him if they would go in with him to the marriage feast. W 10/15/35

January 23            (186)

Thai they may be called trees of righteousness, the planting of Jehovah, that he may be glorified.—Isa. 61: 3, A.R.V.

The faithful remnant on earth are the jplanting of the Lord God and are counted righteous by reason of being with Christ Jesus at the temple and by him clothed with the garments of identification and with the robe of righteousness, which Jehovah has provided for them. They must now prove their integrity under the test, that they might be for ever “trees of righteousness” of Jehovah’s planting. The chief purpose in selecting the remnant is that they might participate in the upholding of Jehovah’s side of the great issue now for determination. To continue in. righteousness they must act at all times to the glory of God. They are planted by him when he sets them in his organization. If they ever thereafter continue faithful and true to the Most High they are trees of righteousness to the glory of the Lord God. W 3/15/35

January 24            (148)

Every one that is proud in heart is an abomination to the Lord: though hand join in hand, he shall not be unpunished.—Prov. 16: 5.

Jehovah inflicts punishment upon his enemies that his name and his word may be vindicated. All must know that Jehovah is supreme, above all, and before whom there is none. Those creatures who set themselves up against God and try to interfere with the execution of his purpose are proud and presumptuous. Pride and covetousness caused the downfall of Lucifer and made him “that old Serpent”, who opposes God. All who set themselves up in opposition to God are the seed of the Serpent. All such are proud, insolent and covetous, and their end is destruction. Jehovah makes known his supremacy by punishing the proud. “The Lord will destroy the house of the proud.” (Prov. 15: 25) The proud are those that conduct themselves with insolence before the Lord. W 11/1/35

January 25            (305)

The eyes of the Lord run to and fro throughout the whole earth, to shew himself strong in the behalf of them whose heart is perfect toward him.—2 Chron. 16: 9.

Jehovah, sustains his servant that is faithful and true to him. By reason of inherent sin all men are weak within themselves, but when a man becomes a servant of God and then with a pure heart continues faithfully devoted to God he is certain to be sustained in the time of crisis. All men make mistakes and no man can of himself do anything perfectly. "When: he is weak and then casts his burden upon the Lord, fully appreciating that his strength must come from Jehovah, and by God’s grace he determines to continue faithful and diligent in the performance of his covenant, being moved so to do unselfishly, he may confidently rely upon God to sustain him. If he is completely devoted to God and his motive is pure and right toward God, then he is certain to receive the sustaining grace of God in times of need. W12/1/35

January 26             (321)

The trees went forth on a time to anoint a king over them; and they said unto the olive tree,

Reign thou -over us.—Judg. 9: 8.

The olive tree finds its greater fulfillment, in the Greater Gideon, Christ Jesus, the Mediator of the new covenant. It is particularly associated with the new covenant as stated in Romans 11 24-27. The olive tree therefore represents those of God’s organization, and is made up of those taken out from amongst men and brought into the new covenant to be a "people for his name ’ ’, to bear witness for Jehovah before the nations. The olive tree in symbol therefore represents also the remnant now on earth bearing testimony to Jehovah’s name. The offer to make the olive tree ruler shows an attempt of Satan to induce those devoted to Jehovah God to turn away from him and, by compromising, yield to the Devil. W d/1/35

I tell you, that, if these should hold their peace, the stones would immediately cry out.—Luke 19: 4.0. Jehovah has favored men and women in these days of peril by making them his witnesses. He has anointed them and placed them upon his “high mountain” as representatives of his kingdom; he has put his message in their mouths, and if these witnesses, because of fear of Satan’s representatives which they behold below, or for any other cause, should fail or refuse to proclaim that message, Jehovah could, and no doubt would, use even inanimate things to speak for him. Let no one of Jehovah’s witnesses take to himself honor by reason of his position. Jehovah has given honor to his faithful ones by making them his witnesses, and they should meekly and humbly appreciate this fact. The faithful will perform their duty with firmness and without fear of any creatures, and in so doing will walk humbly before God, giving praise to his name and to his King. W 4/1/35

January 28              ( 64)

He turneth the wilderness into a standing water, and dry ground into watersprings. And there he mak-eth the hungry to dwell, that they may prepare a city for habitation.—Ps. 107: 35, 36.

During the World War the condition of the remnant of Jehovah’s witnesses was as a wilderness because of wicked persecution heaped upon them by Satan’s organization. God brought them out of this condition and changed it into a happy and productive one. They became the water springs of the Lord to carry the life-giving waters to the people who are thirsty for the same. Today the remnant’s earthly condition is as a “pool”, or delightful springs of water. In this refreshing condition they now dwell. These faithful witnesses of Jehovah now have their habitation in the kingdom gospel service in the organization in Zion, and from this they shall never be ousted by the Devil or his servants. W 9/15/35

January 29            (147)

Woe unto him that giveth his neighbour drink, that puttest thy bottle to him, and makest him drunken also, that thou mayest look on their nakedness!—Hab. 2:15.

Jehovah has commanded every honest man to love his neighbor as himself. That means that men must not take advantage of fellow creatures, but should deal openly, freely and honestly with one another, and be diligent to avoid doing injury to another. The selfish empire-builders have wholly ignored this divine rule. This wicked course is illustrated by “him that giveth his neighbour drink”, that is, a potion handed to his neighbor that advantage might be taken of him. This he does against his neighbor’s will. Thus stupefied, men are easily robbed. Wicked persecution is now applied in some countries, Germany particularly, and this is putting to a crucial test all who have covenanted to do God’s will. God will not permit these things to pass unnoticed. W 5/1/35

January 30            (303)

This is my comfort in my affliction: for thy word hath quickened me.—Ps. 119: 50.

These are the days of peril and warfare. In these days it pleases Jehovah to make known to the remnant the meaning of his prophecies long ago written. This he does, not merely to gratify the desire of creatures to know the meaning thereof, but that his faithful witnesses may be fully assured that he is leading them by his strong hand, Christ Jesus, and that therefore they are in the right way. Knowing that they are right, the remnant are eager to go ahead. When beset by the enemy and subjected to much persecution, the remnant appreciate that such persecution is to be expected, and regardless of all opposition they are determined to continue to press forward, shouting from the very housetops that Jehovah is God, and that now he will get himself the victory and that all who would live must flee to his kingdom. W 3/15/35

January 31             (63)

Behold my servant, whom I uphold, mine elect, in whom my soul delighteth; I have put my spirit upon him.—Isa. 42:1.

Jehovah puts his spirit upon those who are devoted to him. (Ex. 31: 3) He removes his spirit from those who are unfaithful to him. (1 Sam. 16: 13,14) Upon his elect servant Jehovah has put his spirit. It is his spirit that gives strength to those devoted to him. The spirit of the Lord God gives to his commissioned ones power, strength and authority. By his spirit Jehovah gives strength to his people who are devoted to him. Those commissioned to do work jn his name and who are faithful in the performance thereof receive strength by his spirit. (Pss. 29: 11; 89: 20, 21) The spirit of Jehovah came mightily upon Samson and greatly strengthened him. This is proof that he played a part in the drama picturing that class of persons who are faithful to God. W 11/15/35

February 1             (332)

Thou art of purer eyes than to behold evil, and canst not look on iniquity: wherefore lookest thou upon them that deal treacherously, and boldest thy tongue when the wicked devoureth the man that is more righteous than he?—Hab. 1:13.

For centuries Jehovah has beheld evil, but not with approval. (Prov. 15: 3) Hence the remnant now, anxious to see the name of almighty God vindicated and the wicked destroyed, ask the question. “Christendom” has dealt treacherously against Jehovah by becoming part of Satan’s organization. She now enters into a conspiracy against the Lord and his people, and- expects to get away with it; but her treachery is exposed. God’s remnant are “more righteous”, but not “holier than thou”, in justification of self; for, judging each side by their fruits, the remnant know that “Christendom” stands for and holds forth the Devil’s message, while the remnant hold forth the kingdom fruits and are on the right side. W 5/1/35

February 2            (201)

Who is blind, but my servant? . . . blind as he that is perfect, and blind as the Lord’s servant?—Isa. 42:19.

That same ‘elect servant’ is the Vindicator of Jehovah, his word and his name. It is the exalted Servant of Jehovah that is blind, and, says the Lord, 'there is none as blind as that servant.’ Why? Because he has but one purpose, and his eyes are closed to everything else. That purpose is to always do the will of Jehovah. Nothing can cause him to deviate therefrom in the slightest. Of him it is written: “I came down from heaven, not to do mine own will, but the will of him that sent me.” Those who are faithful and true to Jehovah are blind to everything that is contrary to God’s will. Every one who becomes a member of God’s royal house is thereby made a member of the 'elect servant’ class of Jehovah and therefore must follow in Jesus’ footsteps. Like Jesus, all such must be blind to everything save doing the will of Almighty God. W 1/1/36

February 3             (46)

The Lord your God proveth you, to know whether ye love the Lord your God with all your heart and with all your soul.—Deut. 13: 3.

The Israelites on the trek from Egypt to the Promised Land pictured God’s covenant people on the way to the kingdom. Op the plains of Moab God made with them the covenant of faithfulness. Jehovah approves and receives into his royal organization only those who under test remain true and faithful to him. Such must maintain their integrity to God to the end. From the time that Jehovah first declared his purpose to have a righteous government on earth until the present time the question before men has been, Who will maintain their integrity toward God? Everyone whom God will have in his royal house will be a monument or memorial testifying to the fact that Satan is a liar and that Jehovah is true. They must undergo a proving test to reach this point. W 12/15/35

February 4             (S7)

For the, Lord giveth wisdom: out of his mouth cometh knowledge and understanding.—Prov. 2: 6.

Wisdom means the receiving of knowledge into a good and honest mind and that then the creature moved by a pure heart or motive pursues a course of action in harmony with the knowledge of the truth. One may gather together in an abstract manner the facts as stated in the text of the Bible, and be able to repeat the text without hesitation, and at the same time have no spiritual discernment thereof and be entirely void of wisdom. There must be a proper appreciation of the true relationship of the creature to the infinite Creator before one can have wisdom. Hence it is written that a man should not think more highly of himself than he ought to think, but that he should think soberly and with faith in God. One who thinks too highly of himself is never able to succeed in accomplishing a good thing. W 1/15/35

February 5            (326)

And Jehovah answered me, and said, Write the vision, and make it plain upon tablets, that he may run that rcadeth it.—Hob. 2: 2, A.R.V.

The clear implication is that when that time arrives for Jehovah’s anointed to understand the vision, it will be made so plain to them that there could be no doubt about it. Now we know that no man can get a clear understanding of God’s purpose until God’s due time. The record thereof must be a permanent one and preserved for the time of the fall of hypocritical "Christendom”. The vision is not given to be kept secret, but must be told to others and printed and published in plain, readable style. In due time Jehovah began to make clear to his faithful on earth that the vindication of His name is of paramount importance. These things have been made plain, not by the ability or work of man, but because Jehovah caused events to come to pass in fulfillment of his prophecies long ago written. W 5/15/35

The earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the glory of the Lord, as the waters cover

the sea.—Hdb. 2:14.

That certainly means that all creation shall know of his supremacy, his honor, the greatness of his name, because he shall prevail at Armageddon. It will be to Jehovah’s glory to destroy the wicked host of Gog and Satan, (Ezek. 38: 22, 23; 39: 7) “And the glory of the Lord shall be revealed, and all flesh shall see it together: for the mouth of the Lord hath spoken it.” (Isa. 40: 5) The word “together’’here used means “as a unit; that is, unitedly”, all together, at one time. {Strong) That one time is at Armageddon, and not at the end of the millennial reign of Christ. Before that reign of Christ begins all must know that Jehovah is supreme. Not that all creation shall serve Jehovah, but all shall see the manifestation of his supreme power. W 6/1/35

February 7            (147)

And there he maketh the hungry to dwell, that they may prepare a city for habitation; and sow the fields, and plant vineyards, which may yield fruits of increase.—Ps. 107: 36,37.

God has put his hand over his witnesses, and they have made Jehovah their sanctuary and their fear. The faithful remnant are not idle, but continue with diligence in their work. The fruits of the kingdom, with which God through Christ Jesus has so graciously blessed them, they joyfully bear to others, that the name of Jehovah may be known among the people. Those found faithful at the coming of the Lord Jesus to the temple, and who therefore form the original ones of the “faithful servant” class, continuing actively in obedience to the Lord’s commandments are blessed with the privilege of bearing the fruit of the kingdom to others who are brought into the fold, and the number of the servant class is increased. W 9/15/35 A prayer of Habakkuk the prophet upon Shigionoth. 0 Lord,, I have heard thy speech.—Hab. 3:1,2. Habakkuk gives utterance to a soul-stirring prayer in song, the soul-stirring prayer of praise of the remnant now to Jehovah. “Shigionoth” means a wild, irregular, rambling poem. It is a psalm or song of ecstasy which rises to the heights of rapture, as Jehovah gave Habakkuk a vision of what was to come to pass. An understanding now of tha^ vision enraptures those who see what is just at hand. Habakkuk on watch had heard what God had to say to him and why Jehovah had permitted the acts of the wicked, and what He did to them. Now he prays Jehovah to bring to pass his judgments heretofore written. Likewise the remnant standing on watch have heard why Jehovah has permitted them to suffer at the enemy’s hands. They rejoice and in a prayer-song implore him to quickly bring these things to pass. W 6/15/35

February 9            (142)

And after six days Jesus . . . was transfigured before them: and his face did shine as the sun, and his raiment was white as the light.—Matt. 17:1,2. The transfiguration in the “high mountain” was a prophetic tableau giving testimony to the high office of Jesus and foretelling greater things to come to pass thereafter. Hence its true Tnp.aning and importance would appear to God’s people only in his due time to interpret the same and make it plain. This is one of Jehovah’s secrets which belongs to him until he makes it known to his children in his own due time. (Deut. 29: 29) He does not reveal his secrets to rebellious ones, but only to those devoted to him, and then to them only in his due time. “For the froward is abomination to the Lord; but his secret is with the righteous.” (Prov. 3: 32) That which the prophetic transfiguration magnifies as of greatest importance is the vindication of Jehovah’s name by and through his beloved Son, Christ Jesus. W 7/15/35

February 10             (89)

After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues.—Rev. 7: 9.

Particularly since 1922 has “this gospel of the kingdom” been preached in many languages and distributed among the peoples of the various nations in printed form in millions of books, magazines, etc. This gospel has been preached to the world’s ruling factors by giving them notice and warning, which notice and warning was printed and distributed throughout the earth. This gospel has also been preached to the people of good will according to the Lord’s command. It is those that hear, understand and respond to the gospel message by consecrating themselves to do God’s will, and then seek meekness and righteousness, that receive his approval and blessing. This “great multitude” have not been in existence as such all during the time that God has been ‘taking out a people for his name’, his witnesses. W 8/1/35

February 11            (267)

The mountains saw thee, and they trembled: the overflowing of the water passed by: the deep uttered his voice, and lifted up his hands on high.—Hdb. 3:10.

The lofty and exalted government rulers of earthly institutions will see it is Jehovah God against whom they have arrayed themselves in battle, and that now their end is come. The mighty men of earth who now rule in Satan’s organization will not then feel brave and boastful, nor will they think themselves secure, as they now feel they are in their entrenched position. When they come to know it is Jehovah’s power that is being manifested against all those who oppose him, they shall shake and tremble with great fear and trepidation. Seeing what soon shall follow, let God’s faithful remnant now with patience wait upon the Lord and implicitly trust in him, and, instead of being discouraged because of persecution, continue to sing with increased fervor. W 7/1/35

February 12             (34)

He withdraw eth not his eyes from the righteous .. .if they be bound in fetters, and be holden in

cords of affliction.—Job 36:7,8.

Even those righteous in God’s sight may be bound in fetters and hence restrained of liberty. In the past God’s covenant people have held to some doctrines or practices ignorantly, by reason whereof they have been greatly restrained and have not had and exercised full liberty in their efforts to serve God. Those in a covenant with God are bound to him; but when the enemy came against them by force, they, out of fear of the enemy, failed to do their duty, and fell into Satan’s snare. Hence Jehovah permitted them to be taken prisoners. These coming to realize their restrained condition and why they were thus bound and in prison, and then turning with their full devotion to Jehovah and seeking and looking for deliverance by him, Jehovah hears their cries and delivers them. W 9/1/35

February 13            (119)

Every one of you should know how to possess his vessel in sanctification and honour.—1 Thess. 4:4.

Each one begotten and called as a spirit creature to the kingdom is a “vessel”. Each one, in order to be pleasing to the Lord, must be a vessel of honor to the Lord. Some appear to be vessels of honor, and some of dishonor. Surely this means that one class honor Jehovah, and the other class, by honoring self or other creatures, dishonor Jehovah God. Vessels of dishonor are marked by the Lord for destruction. Vessels of mercy are the ones upon whom God makes known the riches of his glory. If a vessel is marked for destruction, surely it could not be classed as one of less honor, receiving a secondary reward in heaven. The vessels of honor make many mistakes because of imperfections, but God’s mercy is extended to them because their motive is right and they honestly endeavor to serve Jehovah unselfishly, W 10/15/35

February 14            (281)

"Who art thou that judgest another man’s servant? to his own master he standeth or falleth. Yea, he shall be holden up: for God is able to make him stand.—-Rom. 14: 4.

God is not selecting persons for his servants who merely appear to be so very good that all others may say: “What a good man he is!” What pleases God is the servant that faithfully obeys his commandments and at all times maintains his integrity. Whenever the Devil sees a man faithfully performing service to God, he is certain to launch against that man some scandalous lie to enable others to say, in substance: “God would not use that sort of man, against whom such charges are made. Therefore such is proof that he is not God’s servant.” But God judges his own servants. The servant need not be concerned at the adverse judgment of imperfect creatures. He that is diligent in endeavor to please Jehovah and have his approval is the faithful servant of God. W 12/1/35

February 15            (108)

AJoimdech . . . slew his brethren, the sons of Jerub-baal, being threescore and ten persons, upon one stone: notwithstanding yet Jotham the youngest son of Je-rubbaal was left; for he hid himself.—Judg. 9: 4, 5.

That “one stone” pictured Christ Jesus, the foundation stone of Jehovah’s royal house and the basis for God’s capital organization. During the World War God’s faithful servants stood firmly for Jehovah’s Stone, his King. It was for that reason, and upon this Foundation Stone, that the work of the faithful was killed in 1918. Jotham, Gideon’s youngest son, escaped because he hid himself. His name means “Jehovah is perfect”. He seems to picture, first, those whom Jehovah preserved during the World War, the faithful ones that survived the persecution. These the Lord made his “faithful and wise servant” class, together with others who afterwards were taken in, and are constituted the remnant. W 3/15/35

February 16            (138)

God from Teman cometh in, and the Holy One from Mount Paran. Selah. His splendour hath covered the heavens, and his praise hath

filled the earth.—Hab. 3: 3, Roth.

That splendor will be a dazzling manifestation of Jehovah’s power appearing in the sky and will surpass the sun’s brilliancy at high noon. At that time it must be that -“the earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the glory of the Lord, as the waters cover the sea” (2: 14), and all nations and tribes and peoples of the earth shall see it at that one time. God has repeatedly stated concerning the enemy that ‘/they shall know that I am Jehovah”. By faith the remnant now see Jehovah with his chariot moving into position for the war, but certainly at the fixed time all earth shall have an ocular demonstration of his mighty organization moving into battle. That will strike terror in the enemy’s hearts. W 6/15/35

February 17            (244)

Salvation to our God which sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb.—Rev. 7:10.

“Salvation” consists in the vindication of Jehovah’s name and word, and results to those who maintain their integrity toward him, and who praise his holy name. There is no other means of salvation. That salvation comes to those who heartily avail themselves of Jehovah’s means for their salvation. (Acts 4: 11,12) Those who have faith in God and Christ Jesus, and who take their stand on the side of God and his kingdom, by their course of action loudly acknowledge, confess and acclaim Jehovah as their Savior, whose salvation is given to them through Christ Jesus. All such hail Jehovah and Christ. They do not “Heil Hitler” nor any other creature; they could not be faithful to Jehovah by exclaiming to any creature “Heil”, for no creature has any power of salvation. They confess that Jehovah and Christ Jesus constitute “the Higher Powers”. W 8/1/35

February 18            (294)

Christ glorified not himself to be made an high priest; but he that said unto him, Thou art my Son, to day have I begotten thee.—Heb. 5: 5.

One of God’s officials had become a traitor and had brought great reproach upon Jehovah’s name. Now God would make the Logos his highest official and his Vindicator. Before vindication would be accomplished the Vindicator must first qualify by proving that man can maintain his integrity toward God under the most adverse conditions. For that reason, it is written concerning the beloved Son: “Though he were a Son, yet learned he obedience by the things which he suffered; and being made perfect, he became the author of eternal salvation unto all them that obey him.” (Vss. 8, 9) Jesus did not make himself a candidate for this high office, but Jehovah called him to the exalted position and made him High Priest to ever carry out Jehovah’s purpose. W 7/15/35

February 19            (285)

The sun and moon stood still in their habitation, at the light of thine arrows as they went, at the shining of thy glittering spear.—Hab. 3:11, A.R.V.

At Armageddon Jehovah’s “bow” will be fully uncovered (vs. 9), and the flying of his arrows from the twanging bow will give light. “Arrows” and “spear”, speeding with glittering light, would suggest shooting lights of fire or flames of fire, such as lightning or liquid fire, and every one making a center hit against the enemy organization. Whatsoever the satanie organization brings forth in the earth will not stand before the onward march of Jehovah’s host. Now Jehovah’s witnesses march forward in the light of his flashing truth, which illuminates them in this dark world. At Armageddon the forces of Christ Jesus will be equipped with missiles that will shed light wheresoever they fly, and thus provide light when it is wanted and leave the enemy in darkness at other times. W 7/1/35

February 20             (77)

From heaven did the Lord behold the earth; to hear the groaning of the prisoner, to loose those that are appointed to death.—Ps. 102:19,20.

During the World War it was the faithfully devoted ones of God’s saints on earth that were in danger of death at the enemy’s hand. Why were these praying that their bonds might be broken and they be released from prison? They had been called and separated as a people for Jehovah’s name, and their desire was to be released that they might serve Jehovah; as stated in the prophecy: “That men may declare the name of Jehovah in Zion, and his praise in Jerusalem.” (Vs. 21, A.B.V.) They could not declare his name in Zion and say to those of Zion, “Thy God reigneth”; nor could they point others to the way to Zion. By hearing their prayers and by releasing them from the bondage of Satan’s restraining power, and by building them up in Zion, Jehovah did have mercy upon them. W 9/1/35

February 21            (273)

These see . . . his wonders in the deep. For he com-mandeth, and raiseth the stormy wind, which lifteth up the waves thereof .-Ps. 107: 24,25.

Into deep destruction Jehovah at Armageddon hurls those who persecute his people that have been faithful in testifying to his name. At the same time he shields and protects his own faithful ones, and also those who have diligently sought meekness and righteousness. Such are some of his wonders in the deep. It is Jehovah who gives the command to start the fight. Satan’s entire organization will realize then that Jehovah has started the great hurricane. The “waves” of the “sea” are the peoples whom Satan has alienated from God, and will be greatly disturbed when the Lord starts the great fight. All the trouble ever on earth caused by men or devils will be insignificant in comparison. Then earth’s peoples will be at the mercy of God’s mighty storm. W 9/15/35

The olive tree said unto them, Should I leave my fatness, wherewith by me they honour God and man, and go to be promoted over the trees?-Judg. 9: 9. The faithful remnant are branches in the "olive tree” and they refuse to compromise with Satan’s organization. They refuse to ask permission of it to preach. They deliver the testimony of Jesus Christ in obedience to God’s commandment, and not in obedience to man’s commandment. Christ refused to "wave to and fro over the trees” of the wieked world (Vs. 9, R.V.) and has shown his disapproval of that unrighteous rule. As the great.“olive tree” he has rejected "Christendom”, or Satan’s organization, and now serves notice on it that destruction is near. Likewise the branches in that great olive tree, the remnant, refuse to be lured away from honoring Jehovah God and his beloved Son, "the man Christ Jesus.” They, like Christ Jesus, reject all promotion from men, and look alone to Jehovah for promotion. W 1/1/35

February 23            (154)

And deliver them who through fear of death were all their lifetime subject to bondage.—Heb. 2:15.

When a creature is a slave to another, he is properly said to be in bondage or in prison. If, because of fear of another creature or an organization having dominion over him, a person refuses to perform his real duty, which he is commissioned to perform, then it is properly said of him that he is in bondage. It is the body members of Christ that are here considered. Every one of these Satan would kill unless they had help from Jehovah. From the beginning of the life of each one of Christ’s followers they have been objects of assault and have therefore been ‘through fear of death subject to bondage by Satan’. Not natural death due to Adamic sin, but death by ‘him that has power of death, that is, the Devil'. That fear of death at the hand of Satan’s organization has held back all the begotten sons of God at some time. W 10/1135

■February 24              ( 84)

A man of knowledge, increaseth strength. For by wise counsel thou shalt make thy war, and in multitude of counsellors there is safety.—Prov. 24: 5, 6.

"Wise counsel” means the Word of God clearly-received into an honest heart, which counsel must "then be followed. Only those who are guided by such divine counsel will be received into glory. (Ps. 73: 24) ‘A multitude of counsel’ therefore means knowledge of God’s will as abundantly expressed in Scripture. Armageddon will be fought "ithin a short time, and only those who possess and are in harmony with a knowledge of God’s purposes received in wisdom and spiritual understanding will successfully go through that great battle. A ‘multitude of counsel’ means the assembly of a great amount of knowledge in spiritual understanding of God’s Word. It is the counsel of the Lord that gives strength, and his counsel is his word or purpose expressed, received in all wisdom and spiritual understanding. W 4/15/35

February 25            (331)

The oracle which Habakkuk the prophet did see. 0 Jehovah, how long shall I cry?~Hdb. 1:1,2, A.R.V., mar.

The name "Habakkuk” means "clasper”, that is, clasper of the hands or in embrace; or love’s "embrace”. As at Canticles 2: 6: "His right hand doth embrace me.” Now the Lord Jesus has returned and gathered his own unto himself at the temple of Jehovah. Therefore the remnant have come into the Lord Jesus’ embrace. This is for their safety and comfort. The holy spirit’s advocacy and comfort are now ceased, because Christ Jesus himself is with his own and he is the comforter. Now God’s remnant have come to unity. They see they must stand together. All the faithful do stand firmly as one man, proclaiming the truth in love. This unity in Christ is the blessed condition in which they now find themselves. In this blessed state the Lord feeds them upon spiritual food convenient for them. W 5/1/35

February 26            (262)

Blessed are they that keep his testimonies, and that seek him with the whole heart.—Ps. 119:2.

Jehovah rewards those who diligently seek to know his purpose and to obey his commandments. His faithful remnant apply themselves that they may gain a knowledge of his will in wisdom and spiritual understanding. They study to show themselves approved unto God, and look not to any creature for guidance and strength. “Blessed is that man that maketh the Lord his trust; and respecteth not the proud, nor such as turn aside to lies. Let all those that seek thee rejoice and be glad in thee; let such as love thy salvation say continually, The Lord be magnified.” (Ps. 40: 4, 16) Those who do not believe that the Lord Jesus is at the temple of Jehovah find no consolation in these texts. Those who are in the temple and who are diligent to learn will receive a knowledge of Jehovah’s purpose, that they may freely and boldly declare it to others. W 5/15/35

February 27             (74)

The Lord our God is one Lord: and thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy might.—Deut. 6: 4, 5. God does not change, neither is his law changeable.

This law or rule of action applies to every creature to whom Jehovah will give life everlasting. From Abel to John Jehovah approved a few men, and the reason for his approval of such men was that they maintained their integrity toward him. This they did by showing their love for him, and their love for him was shown by their obedience to his commandments, and thus they showed their absolute faith in Jehovah God. Those to whom Jehovah gives life as members of his royal house are required to measure up to the same rule or standard and by their course of action prove their love and devotion to Jehovah. Surely there is required the same degree of faithfulness on the part of every creature who lives. W 8/15/35

February 28            (313)

Te became companions of them that were so used. For ye had compassion of me in my bonds.-Heb. 10: 33,34.

Formerly these were held prisoner by Satan’s organization because of their lack of knowledge and appreciation of the truth. In darkness and restrained, they ceased preaching the gospel; but now being brought into full light and liberty in Christ, they boldly proclaim the truth regardless of whether they are in literal prison or outside. They are determined to prove their integrity to Jehovah under all conditions. Satan and his agents may put restraint upon the organization made up of Jehovah’s witnesses, but no longer can Satan and his wicked agents at all hold their minds and heart devotion to the Lord in any wise in restraint. Even though thrown into literal prisons, they continue to preach the kingdom gospel and, when released, they will not slack their hand, but go on regardless of what Satan may do. W10/1/35

February 29            (304)

Ten virgins, which took their lamps, and went forth to meet the bridegroom. And five of them were wise, and five were foolish.—Matt. 25:1,2.

The Bible would be a lamp to no one’s feet except those who have the Lord’s spirit. The lamp picturing God’s will as expressed toward his children, then it is his will obeyed by his children, through the operation of his spirit, that brings to them light. All the virgins had lamps. The number ten is symbolic of all the virgins, all who at the Lord’s coming to the temple were in line for the kingdom. The number five symbolically shows they were divided into two classes without reference to the number in each class. The company that was foolish had marred their virginity by the foolish course taken by them. Their foolishness and its consequences are in harmony with Isaiah’s prophecy: “The Highroad . . . there shall not pass over it one who is unclean; . . . the foolish shall not stray thereinto.”—Roth., margin. W 10/15/35

March 1              (316)

Thou . . . wert graffed in among them, and with them partakest of the root and fatness of the

olive tree. — Rom. 11:17.

The “fatness of the olive tree” is a symbol of joy, and the joy of the Lord Jesus is to exalt and vindicate Jehovah’s name. God’s remnant, by entering into the “joy of the Lord”, do “honour God and man”. They shine forth as lights in the world to God’s glory. Their shining is not because of their inherent brightness, but because the glory of Jehovah has risen upon them, and his light is seen upon them. For Jehovah’s witnesses to join in the reign with Satan’s organization would be to dishonor Jehovah’s holy name. The faithful remnant refuse to have anything to do with politics or political affairs of this world. They do not honor men of the earth, but do honor “the man Christ Jesus”, whom Jehovah has crowned with glory and honor. TV 4/1/35

March 2               (52)

Thou art filled with shame for [instead of] glory: drink thou also, . . . the cup of the Lord’s right hand shall be turned unto thee, and shameful spezving shall be on thy glory.—Hab. 2:16.

They find no glory in the record they have made and are making. They persecute Jehovah’s witnesses because these speak the truth of God’s record, which truth they do not wish to hear. The climax of filling the clergy and their allies brimful with shame and contempt is yet future, and that will be done by the hand of Christ Jesus. He will make these “roosters” appear ridiculous and shameful. He hands the cup to those deserving it. In due time it will come around to each and every one of the ruling element that has indulged in oppressive practices upon the people, and particularly upon Jehovah’s witnesses. First the clergy must drink and be made to appear naked and shameful in the eyes of others; then in turn all worshipers or supporters of Satan’s system. W 6/1/35

March 3              (210)

Execute upon them, the judgment written; this honour have all his saints. Praise ye the Lord.—Ps. 149: 9.

Jehovah has lifted up his hand to heaven and sworn, long ago, to bring his wrath or judgments upon his enemies. Because he gave his Word and oaths to do these things, his remnant, whom Habakkuk foreshadowed, utter the prophetic prayer of Habakkuk and sing to Jehovah, now saying: “Revive thy work in the midst of the years”; and thus they show their complete confidence in and reliance upon the Word of the Most High. The faithful are meek, because they are diligent in seeking to understand Jehovah’s purposes and hasten to obey his will. Therefore Jehovah has pleasure in them and they rejoice and sing: “The Lord taketh pleasure in his people; he will beautify the meek with salvation. Let the saints be joyful in glory.” (Vss. 4,5) Before Armageddon they declare the day of his vengeance. W 6/15/35

March 4              (70)

Thou didst pierce with his own staves the head of his warriors [chiefs (Roth.)]: they came as a whirlwind to scatter me; their rejoicing was as to devour the poor secretly.—Hab. 3:14, A.R.V.

“The poor” are the Lord’s anointed ones, the remnant. These have been brought into the “secret place of the Most High”. (Ps. 91:1) The ‘secrecy’ is on the part of the enemy to keep secret from others what they are doing and thereby disguise their movement and keep honest people in ignorance of what is really being attempted against God’s people. They proceed on the theory that God will give no aid to those who go about with books containing information about the Bible and God’s kingdom. But the time draws near when there shall be a sudden outbreak of the battle of Armageddon. This will bring these conspirators to know that Jehovah is with his faithful witnesses and that these wicked conspirators cannot get away with their camouflaged deeds. W 7/1/35

March 5              (172)

Though he ivere a Son, yet learned he obedience by the things which he suffered; and being made perfect, he became the author of eternal salvation.—Heb. 5: 8, 9.

Satan, being covetous and ambitious for self-honor and glory, denounced Jehovah. Thus the word and name of Jehovah God were put at issue, and became of primary importance. The salvation of man became secondary in importance. To decide the issue in God’s favor, at least one man must prove his absolute devotion to Jehovah, being obedient under all conditions and remaining true and faithful to God. The man Jesus met every requirement under the test, proving his faithfulness to Jehovah, even enduring an ignominious death. Because of his faithfulness Jehovah raised Jesus out of death and made him the author of eternal salvation for all men who would follow in Jesus’ footsteps and who would prove their devotion to God. To get life men must believe on God and Christ and follow the leadership of Christ. IV 7/15/35

March 6               (89)

After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations.—Rev. 7: 9.

God’s remnant now on earth first see or discern the 144,000 of spiritual Israel and the sealing of the same. “After this’’ they see or discern the true meaning of the “great multitude”, the number whereof is one of Jehovah’s secrets not revealed. His kingdom company has been gathered during a period of nineteen centuries, and, taken as a whole, the Lord Jesus designates them as a “little flock” to whom Jehovah gives the kingdom. At no time has there been a great multitude in line for the kingdom, and who were at one time on the earth. The “great multitude” are not a spirit-begotten company, that is, never brought forth and acknowledged by Jehovah as his spiritual sons. Those that go to make up that company are at other places in Scripture designated as “other sheep”, 'people of good will,’ the 'Jonadab class’. W 8/1/35

March 7              (330)

For the Lord heareth the poor, and despiseth not his prisoners.—Ps. 69: 33.

During the World War period Jehovah’s faithful sons on earth were restrained and their liberty in the service of Jehovah was denied them, and they were persecuted and many of them actually put in prison. As God’s faithful children they continued to pray or cry unto Jehovah. It was in 1918 that Jehovah began to build up Zion by resurrecting the faithful who had died and bringing them into his spiritual temple, and also by bringing the faithful remnant on earth unto himself in the temple. “When the Lord shall build up Zion, he shall appear in his glory. He will regard the prayer of the destitute, and not despise their prayer.” (Ps. 102: 16,17) The facts show that God brought them out of prison or the condition of restraint when Zion was built up. They were brought into and made a part of Zion. W 9/1/35

March 8              (156)

Except those days should be shortened, there should no flesh be saved: but for the elect’s sake those days shall be shortened. Immediately after the tribulation of those days shall the sun be darkened.-Matt. 24: 22,29.

During that period the elect have a work to do as witnesses for Jehovah, under his commandment. At least a part of that work is the marking of the great multitude in their foreheads, as commanded at Ezekiel 9: 4. That means that Jehovah’s witnesses must proclaim the message of truth and thus give an intellectual understanding thereof to those of the great multitude class, which class “flee into the mountains”, taking their place and stand in the “city of refuge”. This is “immediately after the tribulation of those days”, that is, after the first part of the tribulation, from 1914 to 1918. The great multitude will also survive Armageddon, because God’s promise to those who seek righteousness and meekness is that they may be “hid” in that time. W 8/15/35

March 9               (40)

Bring my soul out of prison, that I may praise thy name; the righteous shall compass me about.—Ps. 142: 7.

When. Saul was seeking David’s destruction, David hid himself in the cave. God did bring him out of that cave, which was a prison or dungeon. There David pictured Christ Jesus, including the members of his body, and particularly the “feet” members who form the remnant of God’s people on earth. Jesus speaks of his body members as though they were part of himself. Saul pictured the unfaithful “Christendom” crowd, including the “man of sin” class, all of whom are unfaithful to their opportunities to serve Jehovah and his kingdom. The Lord foretold that “Christendom”, as Satan’s agents, would cast his faithful remnant into prison. God’s faithful people, when in prison, do cry unto the Lord for deliverance. It was during the World War period that the faithful were in this prison condition. W 9/15/35

March 10             (252)

The King’s daughter is all glorious within [the palace (R.V.)] ; her clothing is of wrought gold. She shall be brought unto the King.—Ps. 45:13,14.

Those approved and brought into the temple are shown as wearing royal robes; which means that those of the temple are identified as members of the house of the Lord and therefore as the daughter of the great King Eternal. They are made members of the royal family of Jehovah by adoption through Christ Jesus, who takes the approved ones as his bride. This gathering to the temple begins with the resurrection of the faithful dead saints; then follows the gathering of the faithful living ones, the remnant. These are brought “in raiment of needlework”, showing that such are no longer prisoners, but Jehovah’s free creatures rendering him full allegiance and obedience and engaged in his service, giving him all honor and glory. Such faithful and joyful service is an adornment to those gathered to the temple. W 10/15/35

March 11              (15)

.As for thee also, by the blood of thy covenant I have sent forth thy prisoners out of the pit wherein is no water.—Zech. 9:11.

Because of the blood of the new covenant, shed by Jehovah’s Son, that covenant was inaugurated toward the company of the Lord’s people who were found^-faithful at Jesus’ coming to the temple. Because of his blood the “prisoners” are sent out of the pit. Before the ancient Israelites could be released from Egypt there must be shed the blood of the lamb foretelling the shed blood of Christ Jesus the Lamb of God. The first law covenant was inaugurated with blood; and so it must be that the new covenant is inaugurated with blood. It follows that if the covenanters are to fulfill the commission to be 'a people taken out for his name’, and be witnesses to his name, they must be released and set free from prison or restraint of Satan’s organization. Hence, as the prophet writes: “The Lord looseth the prisoners.” W 10/1/35

March 12             (331)

A.nd there was a certain man of Zorah, of the family of the Danites, whose name was Manoah; and his wife was barren, and bare not.—Judg. 13:2.

God used Samson to foreshadow the beginning of deliverance of those who love and serve Jehovah. The name of Samson’s father, Manoah, means “rest, resting-place; or, giver of presents”. It is Jehovah who gives rest to his people. He is the giver of every good and perfect gift. Manoah here appears to represent Jehovah God. “The Lord will bless his people with peace.” “Return unto thy rest, O my soul; for the Lord hath dealt bountifully with thee.” (Pss. 29: 11; 116: 7) By and through the son of Manoah Jehovah gave Israel rest and peace for twenty years. Jehovah’s rest is in his capital organization, of which Christ Jesus is chief. “For the Lord hath chosen. Zion; he hath desired it for his habitation. This is my rest for ever: here will I dwell.” ~W 11/1/35

March 13             (144)

Even sv we speak; not as pleasing men, "but God, which trieth our hearts.—1 Thess. 2: 4.

None of the sanctimonious weaklings of the Elijah period render aid to the faithful, but always assume the attitude of harmless creatures. Such say: “We should be considerate with the clergy and not hold them up to ridicule, but should talk more about love.” How could anyone be a faithful servant of God and at the same time talk sanctimoniously and sentimentally about what was understood to be “love”? Love for God means to obey his commandments, joyfully. During the Elijah period those professed servants of God who did according to their own wish, to avoid reproach, were not moved so to do by love; hence they did not have a pure heart. He who has a pure heart strives to do God’s will as commanded, regardless of what creatures may say or think. To such God shows his strength in times of need. W 12/1/35

March 14               (9)

j4nd Samson said unto her, If they bind me with seven green withs that were never dried, then shall I be

weak, and be as another man.—Judg. 16; 7.

For any statement to be a lie, it must be concerning the matter that the party to whom it is told has a right to know about, and that statement made must be untrue and such as would work injury to the party by reason of not knowing the truth. Probably Samson did not himself fully appreciate the reason of his great strength. During the Elijah period God’s faithful servants themselves did not clearly understand just why the Lord gave them their strength, although they knew they were on his side and their strength came by his grace. Probably Samson’s words had a symbolic meaning. Had the Samson class been bound by seven or all the living creatures in God’s organization (“seven green withs”) they would have been weak, like other men, even as Samson stated to Delilah that he would be weak. W 12/15/35

March 15             (148)

The. word of the Lord is against you; 0 Canaan, the land of the Philistines, I will even destroy thee, that there shall be no inhabitant.—Zeph. 2: 5.

Jehovah caused the foregoing prophecy to be written manifestly to foretell a great and destructive work to be done by his hand at the end of Satan’s world and when God’s King is enthroned and comes to the temple for judgment. That wonderful work when performed will be a vindication of Jehovah’s name. The creatures against whom that marvelous work will be done are God’s enemies, which enemies must be the ones that have greatly defamed the name of the Most High. They are enemies that have knowingly done wrong to gratify a selfish desire, and are therefore designated in God’s Word as “wicked”. “The wicked shall perish.” Sueh enemies are the ones that have persecuted God’s anointed people because these tell the truth about God and his kingdom. W 1/15/36

March 16             (102)

Man looheth on the outward appearance, but the Lord loolceth on the heart.—1 Sam. 16: 7.

Not by his outward appearance does man prepare himself for God’s service, but his faith and unswerving devotion are what bring God’s approval and prepare for that man a place in God’s everlasting organization. The Scriptures show what God requires of those he approves, and everywhere therein absolute and complete faithfulness is magnified. The approved must prove first their integrity toward Jehovah, and this they must do by a singleness of purpose and course of action, always putting forth their very best to do God’s will regardless of what any other man does or might think or say about them. He may make a wrong step, a grievous mistake; but if he confesses to God through Christ Jesus, acknowledging his wrongdoing, and then quickly attempts to face about and do what is right, he may receive Jehovah’s mercy and be fully reinstated in his favor. W 1/1/36

March 17             (221)

And the trees said to the fig tree, Come thou, and reign over us.—Judg. 9:10.

Flattery is an instrument Satan employs to entrap men, and selfish and ambitious men yield thereto and are quickly ensnared. “A man that flattereth his neighbour spreadeth a net for his feet.” “A flattering mouth worketh ruin.” (Prov. 29: 5; 26: 28) The parable of the trees is further evidence of Satan’s subtle method employed to turn men away from God, and, yielding, they are ensnared and necessarily bring about their destruction. The greater fulfillment of the ‘‘fig tree” is found in the ‘‘holy nation” of God. It is the rich, fruit-bearing organization of which Christ Jesus is the Head and the all-essential One. The ‘‘holy nation” of God was born in 1914. (Rev. 12:1-5) Jesus likened the Jewish nation to a fig tree and cursed it for failing to hold forth the kingdom fruit. It is those ‘‘trees” that hold forth the truth to the glory of God that receive his approval. W i/1/35

March 18              (84)

0 Lord, I have heard thy speech, and was afraid: 0 Lord, revive thy work in the midst of the years, in the midst of the years make known.—Hob. 3: 2.

The things Jehovah did to the enemies of his people in times of old were ensamples of what shall now come to pass at Armageddon. Jehovah’s witnesses now pray according to his will that Jehovah will repeat his acts of old according to his promise, to wit: “Then shall the Lord go forth, and fight against those nations, as when he fought in the day of battle.” (Zeeh. 14: 3) That will be Jehovah’s work, his strange work. The climax of “the years” was reached in 1914. There Satan’s world ended and Christ Jesus, the world’s rightful King, was enthroned. The tribulation upon the world there began. At Armageddon it will end in such a spectacular demonstration of power that all will know that it is Jehovah’s mighty hand that accomplishes these things. W 6/15/35

March 19             (226)

Let them exalt him also in the congregation of the people, and praise him in the assembly of the elders.—Ps. 107: 32.

The Jonadabs praise Jehovah because by faith they see his coining wonderful and strange work and that this will vindicate his holy name. After Armageddon they must come over the highway to Zion, and as they come they must sing Jehovah’s praises to those of mankind w*ho will then be awakened out of death. The “elders” are the company of Jehovah’s witnesses, of whom some will be on earth after Armageddon. (Rev. 4: 4) After Armageddon the great multitude or Jonadab company will continue the song of praise to Jehovah, together with those of Jehovah’s witnesses on the earth, and after his witnesses are removed from the earth the great multitude will continue to praise Jehovah with songs of deliverance. His praises shall be heard for ever throughout the earth. W 9/15/35

March 20             (285)

When 1 heard, my belly trembled; my lips quivered at the voice: rottenness entered into my bones, and I trembled in myself, that I might rest in the day of trouble.—Hab. 3:16.

Habaklnlk began his song with the words “0 Lord, I have heard thy speech”. After receiving the vision of the universal war he says it greatly shook and disturbed him. The vision of Armageddon now had by God’s remnant, as revealed to them by him, is awesome and terrible. They cannot tell it out to others except by God’s grace. They tremble, not, however, because of what the enemy does or threatens to do, but because of the fearful prospect that is just before of what God will do upon the earth at Armageddon, the terrible execution of his judgments upon the stubborn ones. It requires a heart and -mind strong of faith in Jehovah to not shrink back from the fearful days just ahead, but Jehovah gives his people strength to continue boldly onward. W 7/1/35

March 21              (50)

We have the word of prophecy made more sure; where-unto ye do well that ye take heed, as unto a lamp shining in a dark place.—2 Pet. 1:19, A.R.V.

The followers of Christ Jesus must have some knowledge as a basis for faith. Until God’s' due time to give them an understanding of the meaning of prophecy they must keep in mind God’s law and prophecies, including Jesus’ transfiguration scene. Peter did not expect prophecy to be understood in his day, nor during the life of the men who lived at that time, but that the Word of prophecy and corroborative testimony concerning the same, given by the prophetic transfiguration vision, would be to the followers of Christ Jesus as a light in a dark place shining for their guidance, and that this condition of little light would continue “until the day dawn’’, at which time there would be a change and hence greater light and clearer understanding. It is even so. W 7/15/35

March 22             (282)

Then went Samson down, and his father and his mother, to Timnath, . . . and, behold, a young lion roared against him. — Judg. 14:5.

The lion was sent there by the Devil, and the purpose was to destroy Samson because he was seeking an occasion against the Devil’s representatives on earth. That “young lion” pictured the clergy of the so-called “Protestant” organizations that bitterly and with great noise opposed the work of God’s people during the Elijah period, when Christ Jesus was preparing the way before Jehovah. Proclamation of the truth caused alarm in Satan’s camp, and occasion was taken to frighten Christ’s followers into silence and bring about their destruction. The Protestant system, at the beginning a “lion” of justice, had now become a representative of the Devil and hence a devouring lion like its father, going about seeking whom it might devour and bent on keeping the people in ignorance of the Scripturbs. W 11/15/35

March 23              (52)

Be not afraid of those ivho kill the body, but cannot destroy the [future] life.—Matt. 10: 28, Diaglott.

Jesus did not say his faithful followers should hide out when persecuted, but he told them that they should go on in giving the testimony. The apostles and those immediately associated with them could not complete the testimony before the Lord’s coming, because they lived only a few years. Hence Jesus said: “When they persecute you in this city, flee ye into another: for verily I say unto you, Ye shall not have gone over the cities of Israel, till the Son of man be come.” (Vs. 23) But how shall Jehovah’s witnesses now act? When persecuted in one place, shall they flee to another to avoid persecution? No; because Christ has now come, taken his authority and gathered the temple class and instructed them and sent them forth as his witnesses. They must finish the testimony, hence boldly continue to bear witness, trusting in the Lord to deliver them. W 4/15/35

March 24              (41)

The burden which Habakkuk the prophet did see. 0 Lord, how long shall I cry?—Hob. 1:1,2.

Habakkuk in this prophecy represented the faithful remnant now on the earth. The cry is for Jehovah to clear his name by establishing righteous conditions on earth in place of oppressive, cruel and lawless conditions which now interfere with the free course of the truth. The crying is apparently in vain and without being heard for a time, which shows that the enemies are for some time permitted to keep up hostilities against the remnant without interference from Jehovah. Is it wrong or showing lack of faith for them to have asked such questions or to make such observations? The answer must be, It is not wrong nor even improper, for the reason that God foretold that his faithful ones would utter such cries to him and that he would comfort their hearts by increasing their knowledge. W 5/1/35

March 25             (196)

Now the just shall live by faith: but if any man draw bach, my soul shall have no pleas

ure in him.—Heb. 10: 38.

Concerning the faithful remnant the apostle adds: “But we are not of them who draw back unto perdition, but of them that believe to the saving of the soul.’’ (Vs. 39) Those who continne faithful in devotion to God shall live; others shall be destroyed. Faith, or faithfulness, means that one maintains his integrity toward Jehovah, refusing to compromise with any part of Satan’s organization, and exercising diligence in learning God’s will and then joyfully obeying his commandments. The faithful remnant gladly feed upon the food Jehovah has graciously provided for them, and they grow in strength, regardless of all persecution that the enemy may heap upon the faithful as they go on proclaiming the message of Jehovah’s name and kingdom. W 5/15/35

March 26             (273)

The Lord reigneth, let the earth rejoice; let the multitude of isles be glad thereof.—Ps. 97:1.

The people of good will today hear and believe that the kingdom of God under Christ has come and that Jehovah reigns, and they cry out: “Salvation to our God which sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb.” (Rev. 7: 10) This corresponds with the cry of A.D. 33 by the great multitude of that time. Now the great multitude of the present day cries out: ‘Salvation is come; save now, send us prosperity.’ They attribute the work of God’s salvation or vindication unto his great Vindicator, Christ Jesus, the Lamb of God, and that their own salvation is from Jehovah by and through Christ Jesus, and not from any other source. The “great multitude” is made up of human creatures who hear, accept and rejoice in God’s kingdom under Christ. They openly confess that they are on the Lord’s side. TV 8/1/35

March 27             (331)

Then there shall be a place which the Lord your God shall choose, to cause his name to dwell there; thither shall ye bring all that I command.—Deut. 12:11.

The words uttered by Moses to Israel now apply with greater force to spiritual Israel, the remnant. The same rule must be obeyed by the great multitude, because they have become a part of God’s organization. They must come to Zion, God’s temple, and worship there, and not at any worldly organization called “the church’’. Jehovah’s temple is not anywhere in Satan’s organization. Therefore they must flee out of “Babylon’’, Satan’s organization, and must boldly take their stand on the Lord’s side and associate themselves with God’s anointed people. “In his temple,” where the great multitude serve God (Rev. 7: 15), does not mean the temple’s inner court, because such inner court is exclusively for Jehovah’s priestly class; but they are separated to the “outer court” and there serve him continuously. W 8/15/35

March 28              (93)

Let the' sighing of the prisoner come before thee; according to the greatness of thy power preserve thou those that are appointed to die.—Ps. 79:11. Because of restraint or imprisonment God’s faithful ones during the World War did sigh, and their prayer was as expressed here by the psalmist. Because these were marked by the enemy for death they are here mentioned as “children of death”. {Margin) The remnant or faithful ones were not praying that death under their covenant by sacrifice might be deferred, but that the enemy’s attempt to kill them might be prevented in order that they might continue to serve Jehovah. It was “for the elect’s sake” that the period of tribulation was shortened, which period began in 1914 and was cut short in 1918, the World War also being then stopped, that the elect might serve Jehovah in bearing testimony to his name. —Matt. 24: 21, 22. W 9/1/35

March 29             (218)

They that were foolish took their lamps, and took no oil with them; hut the wise took oil in their vessels with their lamps.-—-Matt. 25: 3,4.

Oil being a symbol of joy and gladness resulting from loving devotion to Jehovah God and Christ Jesus, this would mean that the foolish were selfish, did not have love for God and Christ Jesus, and were such as have not “the joy of the Lord”. They were looking for the coming of Christ Jesus, not that Jehovah’s name might be honored and glorified, but that they as creatures might be ekalted to a high position. There was no joy in their hearts, as indeed there cannot be in an extremely selfish heart. The wise had the joy of the Lord in them; it was their strength. They were unselfishly devoted to God and his kingdom at all times and were anxious to know and to do the will of God, even though all their previous views might be completely overthrown. W 10/15/35

March 30             (295)

Then three thousand men of Judah went . . . to Samson. . . . And he said unto them, As they did unto ' me, so have I done unto them.—Judg. 15:11.

Here the host of Judeans picture the weak-kneed, faithless modem Judeans, the professed servants of God. This crowd wanted peace at any price and were willing to compromise and, being unable to entice the faithful ones to compromise, to resort to a treacherous conspiracy with modern Philistines. The Philistines had reproached the name of Samson’s God by wickedly opposing and persecuting Jehovah’s chosen people, and the faithful Samson would not let the insult go unnoticed. Likewise God’s “faithful servant” class say to the clergy, to their faithless brethren, and to all “Christendom”; ‘You'have reproached God’s holy name by inflicting great indignities upon God’s faithful people, and we will not compromise by bowing to you, but we will obey God and do what he has commanded us to do.’ W 12/1/35

March 31             (101)

Woe unto him that giveth his neighbor drink, to thee that addest thy venom, and makest him drunken also, that thou mayest look on their nakedness! — Hob. 2:15, A.R.V.

The attempt is made to force this symbolic venomous strong drink to the lips of those who serve Jehovah, and this is done to destroy the integrity of God’s children toward him and to bring them into shame before others. But let all those who love Jehovah God and trust him implicitly know that the enemy shall not succeed. The enemy will continue to shove the cup of strong drink and wickedness into the face of Jehovah’s witnesses and thereby try to make them unfaithful in the Lord’s service, and to bring them into shame before others of the world. But the enemy shall fail in their efforts, because Jehovah’s witnesses are under the hand of the Most High and have been commissioned to declare his message and this they will continue to do. W 6/1/35

April 1                (221)

That ye might walk worthy of the Lord unto all pleasing, being fruitful in every good work, and increasing in the knowledge of God.— Col. 1:10.

Walking worthy before God does not mean what was formerly thought, such as character development. It means to know God’s purpose and then to be faithful in performing the commission and obligation laid upon his witnesses. To be “fruitful in every good work’’ means to be bearers of the fruit of God’s kingdom, which fruit is the message of truth concerning the kingdom. This he has committed to his witnesses. This life-giving and life-sustaining message of truth they must carry to others; and in doing this such witnesses increase in the knowledge of God. The greatest privilege ever accorded to a creature is that of serving Jehovah God. Those whom he has taken out of the world for his name’s sake Jehovah has constituted his witnesses.—Isa. 43: 10,12. W 4/15/35

April 2                 (58)

And Samson said concerning them, Now shall I he more blameless than the Philistines, though I do them a displeasure.—Judg. 15: 3.

Samson knew he would be blamed by the Philistines. He also knew he would in fact be without blame because he was carrying out God’s purpose. Samson was commissioned to bring a calamity or evil destruction upon the Philistines. Therefore in what he did he was blameless. Likewise during the Elijah period God’s servants were used to bring evil upon modern Philistines by proclaiming the truth, because God’s Word of truth is sharper than a two-edged sword. Wielding that sword “shocks the religious susceptibilities” of the hypocritical crowd and ‘burns their pastures’. Proclamation of the truth has inflicted much punishment upon modern Philistines. In performing this work God’s faithful servants are without blame before him, even as Samson was. W 12/1/35

April 3                 (10)

Jotham . . . went and stood in the top of mount Gerizim, and lifted up his voice, and cried, and said unto them, Hearken unto me, ye men of Shechem, that God may hearken unto you.—Judg. 9: 7.

Now Jehovah’s witnesses, by God’s grace, cause Big Business, the politicians, and the clergy to hear the declaration of and concerning Jehovah’s purposes. Hypocritical Christians, including the “man of sin”, have repeatedly insisted that Jehovah’s witnesses should say nothing about the commercial and political elements of this world, because, say they, such elements constitute the higher powers that rule and to such higher powers all should be subject. In that, as in all other matters, they are wrong. Here is a prophetic picture showing that God’s remnant must cry out to those who have set up the “abomination of desolation” in the place of God’s kingdom, and must sound warning to the people, telling them the facts, that they might flee to safety. W 3/15/35

April 4                (169)

For Jehovah will rise up as in mount Perazim, he will be wroth as in the valley of Gibeon; that he may do his work, his strange work, and bring to pass his act, his strange act.-Isa. 28: 21, A.R.V.

The Hierarchy expects to shortly rid earth of these "pestiferous” witnesses, and says in effect: "This crowd of Jehovah’s witnesses will not last long.” However, when Jehovah rises up as he did at Mount Perazim and at Gibeon and brings about the downfall of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, that will be so wonderful, unusual, tremendous and foreign to what has ever before come to pass, that millions of adherents of the Hierarchy will exclaim: "How strange that God should destroy that organization!” They will see that the work is not of man but must be the work of the Almighty; and it is to such that this work will seem "strange”. Only those will understand it who are wholly devoted to Jehovah and his kingdom. W 2/1/36

April 5                (249)

Then Jehovah answered me and said, Write the vision, yea, make it plain on tablets, that one may swiftly reg,d it.—Hob. 2:2, Rotherham.

When the time arrives for the fulfillment of the prophetic vision, those really devoted to Jehovah will readily understand it. By studying prophecy, together with the well known physical facts, all the meek may readily see and understand the present-day conditions and know that Armageddon is near. Those who do read and understand are obligated to run with haste and tell others about it. When the vision appears, then it is the privilege of those who see to hasten and give others opportunity to hear and understand and thus to publish Jehovah’s name. Thus the time is now due to run swiftly and proclaim the message pertaining to the great wickedness now practiced on earth, the opposition to Jehovah, and that the time of his vengeance is at hand. W 5/15/35

Memorial Date, 6 p. m. April 6                   (12)

As he prayed, the fashion of his countenance was altered, and his raiment was white and glistering.

And, behold, there talked with him two men, which were Moses and Elias.—Luke 9: 29,3Q.

Appearance of Moses in the transfiguration vision, talking with Jesus, was equivalent to saying that the law, which Moses delivered to the Israelites, applies specifically to followers of Christ Jesus, who are spiritual Israelites; that God’s covenant given to the Israelites on the plains of Moab by the hand of Moses foreshadowed the covenant of faithfulness for the kingdom, whieh God makes through Christ Jesus with those who are called to the kingdom; that those who will enter into the kingdom must faithfully perform that covenant of faithfulness; and that when Christ Jesus, the Greater Moses, comes to the temple, then every soul of the temple class must be wholly obedient unto Christ Jesus or else be destroyed. W 7/15/35

April 7                (285)

He stood forward, and made the earth tremble; he looked, and dispersed nations; and there burst asunder the everlasting mountains; there sunk the perpetual hills.—Hab. 3: 6, Leeser.

The Lord has beheld the activities of the’ enemy operating many conspiracies, etc., and also the reproaches and persecutions that the enemy has brought upon Jehovah’s witnesses. Now shall Jehovah permit the nations that have defamed his name to continue their wicked course? Men who rule in this world claim that the nations, pictured by the mountains, are everlasting and shall never perish. But Jehovah can and will level them to the ground, and this he will do by the hand of Christ Jesus. During the World War Jehovah’s witnesses were scattered upon and wandered through all these mountains or nations, until the Lord, from and after 1918, gathered them into his “mountain”, his-organization and place of security. All those nations shall perish. W 6/15/35

April 8                (181)

Hope deferred, maketh the heart sick; but when the desire cometh, it is a tree of life.—Prov. 13:12.

To be strong in the Lord one must be strong in faith. One larking a knowledge and understanding does not possess the basis for strength of faith, because faith comes by receiving understanding of the Word of God. When faith is weak hope grows dim and doubts crowd in. To some of the consecrated it may seem a long time since the Lord’s coming to the temple; and since persecution by the enemy continues against them, those of less faith begin to doubt and to make inquiry. But Jehovah will destroy the wicked by the army of Christ, and this He will do in his own due time. The opposing armies are lining up for the war. Horses symbolize war equipment, and Habakkuk 1: 8 refers to Jehovah’s Arm, Jesus Christ, thus: "Their horses also are swifter than the leopards . . . they shall fly as the eagle.” W 5/1/35

April 9                 (89)

The flock shall be cut off from the fold, and there shall be no herd in the stalls: yet I will rejoice in the Lord, . . . the God of my salvation.—Hab. 3:17,18.

"From the fold the flocks are cut off.” (Leeser) As to God’s remnant the reverse is true. They are brought into the flock of God, into Jehovah’s temple, and he, the great Shepherd, and Christ Jesus, “the good Shepherd,” now abundantly provide food for that flock. The remnant now are restored to the Lord and are going forth at the Lord’s command to bring the fruit of the kingdom to the people. There are "herds” in the stall of the Lord. "Herds” has the meaning of beasts of burden. At present Jehovah’s witnesses have many beasts of burden to help them carry on the Lord’s work, such as radio, transcription machines, books, Watchtower, sound, cars, etc. There never has been such an active witness to the Lord’s name as at the present time. Now the joy of the remnant daily increases. W 7/1/35

April 10                (88)

I beheld, and, to, a great multitude, which no man could number, of dll nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne.—Rev. 7: 9.

The fact that they “stood” shows that they are approved by the Most High, because “the ungodly shall not stand in the judgment, nor sinners in the congregation of the righteous”. (Ps. 1: 5) Stand where? Would the “great multitude” have to go to heaven in order to stand approved before the Lord? Certainly not; nor would they have to be in heaven in order to stand “before the throne”, even in reference to position. In 1914 Jehovah put his beloved Son on the throne of authority. In 1918 Christ Jesus began judgment at the temple. In standing before him for judgment the “great multitude” need not be in heaven, for Jesus stated that when he assumes his throne all nations shall be gathered before him, and surely these nations are not in heaven. W 8/1/35

April 11               (273)

Say among the nations, Jehovah reigneth: the world also is established.—Ps. 96:10, A.R.V.

With knowledge and privilege comes greater responsibility to Jehovah’s witnesses to perform with increased zeal and earnestness their work of bearing testimony to the people of good will. Seeing and appreciating these things, they are determined that no amount of opposition or persecution shall deter them in faithfully performing their assigned duty. Let the Roman Catholic Hierarchy and all others of Satan’s wicked crowd do what they will. By Jehovah’s grace his faithful witnesses will continue to sing forth the praises of the Most High. Increased responsibility also comes upon the Jonadabs as they come to see and understand the truth. They must see to it that they prove themselves faithful and true to the Lord and do with their might what their hands find to do. Such is a condition precedent to being of the great multitude. W 8/15/35

April 12                (39)

David smote them there, and said, The Lord hath broken forth upon mine enemies before me, as the breach of waters. Therefore he called the name of that place Baal-perazim.—2 Sam. 5: 20.

Perazim means “a breach” or ‘‘breaking forth”; Baal has reference to devil worship. Baal-perazim means the place of the Lord’s breaking forth against Devil worshipers, the Philistines, ancient and modem. His breaking forth there was like waters breaking their bounds and rushing like a torrent to destroy everything in their way. This same place is mentioned in Isaiah 28: 21 and there called ‘‘mount Perazim”; therefore the prophecy definitely fixes the battle illustrating the destruction of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. David did not attempt to attack except on command of the Lord. Jehovah’s anointed trust in him with all their heart, and have full assurance that he will direct their paths. W 2/1/36

April 13               (242)

Oh that men would praise the Lord for his goodness, and for his wonderful works to the chil

dren of men! — Ps. 107: 8.

God’s “faithful servant” class have been brought through experiences like those of the ancient Israelites in the wilderness. They are gathered unto Zion as their permanent “city of habitation”, and this has been done since the Lord’s coming to the temple in 1918. The World War experience of the “faithful servant” class was at least a part of these “wilderness” experiences of those who were “redeemed from the hand of the enemy”. (Vss. 2,7) It is this remnant in the flesh, here called “the children of men”, that appreciate God’s goodness to them and that praise the Lord “for his wonderful works to the children of men”. “For he {Jehovah] satisfieth the longing soul, and filleth the hungry soul with goodness.” (Vs. 9) God has satisfied them with a vision of his glory at the temple.—Ps. 17: 15. W 3/1/35

April 14                (86)

How art thou fallen from heaven, 0 Lucifer, son of the morning!... that opened not the house

of his prisoners. —Isa. 14:12,17.

Satan does not open the prison houses to release any of the prisoners. No part of his organization is to be thanked for release of God’s people in 1919, Jehovah delivered them from prison, and all praise and thanks shall be given to him. The released ones are permitted to serve and praise him. The Jonadabs hear the testimony of the anointed witness class and join themselves to Jehovah’s organization and participate in the songs of his praise. Jehovah, by his elect servant, brings the prisoners out of the prison house. This releasing of prisoners is done in a time of controversy or a fight, when the Devil is resisting with all his power, and therefore Jehovah supports his “faithful servant” class and safely keeps them in the hollow of his hand. W 9/15/35

April 15               (159)

I will raise them up a Prophet. . . "Whosoever will not hearken unto my words which he shall speak in my name, I will require it of him.—Deut. 18:18,19.

Let the Lord’s anointed ones fully recognize that they cannot side-step or treat lightly the commission and obligation laid upon them by Jehovah. His clear, positive and emphatic commandment. is that they must go and 'preach this gospel of the kingdom to the nations as a witness’. This commandment is not at all discretionary, but is absolutely mandatory. The obligation is laid upon the anointed remnant, Jehovah’s witnesses, to participate in presenting to the honest people the truth concerning God’s kingdom. This work they must do before Armageddon. It is the truth that serves to open the doors to them that are bound, that they may willingly and intelligently go free. This freedom granted to them is by Jehovah’s great Vindicator, who makes them entirely free by reason of devoting themselves to God. W 10/1/35

April 16                (33)

Other sheep I have, which are not of this fold: them also I must bring, and they Shall hear my voice; and there shall be one fold, and'one shepherd.-John 10:16.

Jesus has some other sheep, and now these he brings forth and permits them to associate with and serve as companions of the little flock on earth. All being under leadership of the “good Shepherd”, and all of God’s organization, they are “one flock”. The great multitude were once prisoners, but now are being set free and brought into the Lord’s organization. It is the faithful remnant’s privilege to bear the fruits of the kingdom to those who come forth and form the great multitude, and these latter as they come forth and enter God’s organization have the privilege and duty to serve as companions to the faithful remnant. Therefore at all service conventions and service meetings the Jonadabs should actively engage with the remnant in bearing the testimony to the people of and concerning Jehovah and his kingdom. W10/15/35

April 17               (266)

And the angel of the Lord appeared unto the woman, and said unto her, . . . The child shall be a Naza

rite unto God from the womb.—Judg. 13: 3-5.

This proves that God’s woman, his organization, gives birth only to those who are completely separated from the world and devoted to Jehovah. They have no alternative. Their devotion to God must be complete and an absolute and complete separation from the world to God, and this must be accomplished before they are brought forth as the sons of God. “All thy children shall be taught of the Lord; and great shall be the peace of thy children.” All who are taught of God must be wholly separated to him; otherwise they would not be taught of the Lord. The fact that Samson could not have his hair cut without losing Jehovah’s favor shows that children of God’s woman cannot partially devote themselves to him but must be entirely and wholly devoted to him. W11/1/35

April 18               (321)

Then said the trees unto the vine, Come thou, and reign over us.—Judg. 9:12.

The greater and complete application of "the vine” is to Jehovah’s royal house, of which Christ Jesus is chief member and Head, which royal house has the supreme joy of participating in the vindication of Jehovah’s name. The vine produces good wine, which is a symbol of joy: "For the joy [of wine] of the Lord is your strength.” Following the World War "Christendom” invites Christ to be her ruler upon her own terms and purely for a selfish purpose. She and her chief men would deny Christ and his faithful remnant-members of his house the privilege and joy of proclaiming the name of Jehovah God. She would prevent them from giving honor and joyful praise by proclaiming Jehovah's name and from thus having part in vindicating his name. Could the royal house of Jehovah agree to any such terms? W 4/1/35

April 19               (131)

In all points tempted like as we are, yet without sin. For in that he himself hath suffered being tempted, he is able to succour them that

are tempted. — Heb. 4:15; 2:18.

The issue raised by the Devil made it necessary and important that God permit him to use his devices in an effort to turn men away from faithful devotion to the Most High. Hence Jesus was tempted by the Devil in the wilderness. In that temptation Jesus won. All members of the royal house must follow in his steps and must likewise be subjected to temptations or tests. To tempt means to entice; to discipline, and to prove. How could one be proved unless subjected to enticement or temptation? When put to test as to whether they will be true to God or not, the faithful will remain true and steadfast in faithful devotion to him. He tempts no man, but does permit the Devil to test God’s sons to afford them opportunity to prove integrity to Him. W 12/15/35

April 20               (102)

Judgment also will I lay to the line, and righteousness to the plummet; and the hail shall sweep away the refuge of lies, and the waters shall overflow the hiding place. — Isa. 28:17.

At the judgment of the house of God the approved ones are anointed, given the name of Jehovah, and sent forth as his witnesses to declare the day of his vengeance. This is God’s time for causing the truth concerning himself and his kingdom to be declared. His message of truth is like a great hail storm, which tears off the veil and sweeps away the refuge or hiding place of lies and fully exposes it to the plain view of honest people. It is the time when God will permit the people to know that the Roman Catholic Hierarchy is hidden behind a great mountain of Ues. To be faithful to Jehovah his witnesses must now declare the truth that exposes that wicked Hierarchy, the modern Philistines. W 2/1/36

April 21               (148)

Every mountain and hill shall be made low; . . . and the glory of the Lord shall be revealed, and all flesh shall see it together.—Isa. 40: 4, 5.

A hill is the highest point in a mountain. Therefore the hills picture the highest or superpower ruling men of the nations of earth. Such men never bow to other men or to God, but at Armageddon they will have to get down and crawl in the dust. Habakkuk 3: 6 says: “The perpetual hiUs did bow,” “are sunk.” (Roth.') Those international superpower men are never subject to local activities. They rise to the very top, above the others, and think themselves invulnerable to all the forces of the nations; but these exalted ones, at Armageddon, shaU be brought low and be abased. Of this God’s Word is plain and explicit. (Matt. 23: 12) When the Israelites went out of Egypt God made even the inanimate creation to bow as a testimony to his name: “the mountains skipped like rams, and the little hills like lambs.”—Ps. 114:4. W 6/15/35

. _ April 22                 (335)

The Philistines gathered them together for to offer a great sacrifice unto Dagon their god, and to rejoice; for they said, Our god hath delivered Samson our enemy into our hand.—Judg. 16: 23.

Samson’s hair was grown long again and he was in God’s favor. Following the World War, and particularly in 1922, the Samson class had been reinstated in God’s favor and they pushed forward with the witness work as never before. The modern Philistines have since continued to make an open show of Jehovah’s witnesses, and the Samson class have been reproached and continue to be reproached because of faithfulness to God and Christ. The modern Philistines have seized upon the emergency to enact oppressive legislation in their endeavor to destroy the work of Jehovah’s witnesses, and to this end have vigorously prosecuted a campaign to discredit Jehovah and his witnesses in the eyes of the people, and to some extent have succeeded in doing so. W 1/1/36

April 23                (23)

Thou wentest forth for the salvation of tKy people, even for salvation with thine anointed.—Hob. 3:13.

Only because salvation of his people is related to the honor of Jehovah’s name does he save them. “Salvation” here does not mean to take one from earth to heaven, but it means preservation alive upon earth in the face of Satan’s murderous attempt to stamp out them and their work. This is another proof that some of God’s remnant will pass alive through Armageddon, when the nations shall be destroyed. When Gog's forces threaten to overwhelm Jehovah’s people they will stand their ground and wholly trust in him, and maintain integrity toward him, and God will bring them through the great battle conditions. Jehovah’s anointed are those commissioned to represent God’s kingdom on earth at the present time, and Jehovah fights “for the salvation of thine anointed”, that is, for their preservation. (F.B.P.) W 7/1/35

April 24                (19)

No prophecy of the scripture is of any private interpretation. For the prophecy came not in old time by the will of man: but holy men of God spake as they were moved by the holy [spirit].—2 Pet. 1: 20,21.

No matter how wise a man thinks he is, he cannot interpret prophecy. Many have tried it, and, of course, have failed. All the prophets foretold the coming of Jesus and the setting up of the kingdom. But no one could fully understand these prophecies until the coming of the Lord Jesus and the beginning of the kingdom, and then only a few have believed since his coming and his appearing at the temple for judgment. Many have persuaded themselves to believe that God’s Word was given for their own special benefit and God has laid on them the obligation to interpret and use prophecy; and then they felt free to use it according to their own ideas. Such is wrong. Jehovah has not given his Word for any creature and given him freedom to interpret it. W 7/15/35

April 25               (231)

1 will multiply thy seed as the stars of the heaven, and as the sand which is upon the sea shore; and thy seed shall possess the gate of his enemies.—Gen. 22:17.

Jehovah selects the heavenly company and no man can tell anything definitely about it unless God reveals it to him. Concerning the stars it is written: “He telleth the number of the stars; he calleth them all by their names. Great is our Lord, and of great power; his understanding is infinite.’’ (Ps. 147: 4, 5) Clearly, then, the meaning of God’s statement is that “the Seed of Abraham” is composed of a great many, but that no man could know the number thereof unless the number were revealed to him by Jehovah. No man could tell what God predestinates. Jehovah specifically designates those who are sealed as his servants to carry out his purpose as 144,000. But what man is he that could number these unless the facts were revealed to him by Jehovah? W 8/1/35

April 26               (318)

For he commandeth, and raiseth the storpiy wind, which lifteth up the waves thereof. They reel to and fro, and stagger like a drunken man, and are at their wits’ end.—Ps. 107: 25,27.

How about those who ‘ ‘ go down to the sea in ships ’ the Jonadabs? “Their soul is melted because of trouble.” Seeing the great havoc wrought at Armageddon the survivors will be made weak because of the fearfulness of that destruction. They will appreciate then how empty and useless is all the wisdom of this world; “all their wisdom is swallowed up.” (Margin) They will learn that they never began to have wisdom till they took their stand on Jehovah’s side, and that the wisdom then received came from above. They will fully realize that man is entirely helpless and can do nothing without the Lord. Even today the “great multitude” is coming to know of the truth -that Jehovah is their only strength; this will be more fully seen and appreciated at Armageddon. W 9/15/35

. April 27                (304)

But at midnight there is a cry, Behold, the bridegroom! Come ye forth to meet him.—Matt. 25: 6, R.V.

This seems to mark the time of the coming out of the faithful prisoners from their condition of restraint where they were held under Satan’s organization. “Then all those virgins arose, and trimmed their lamps.” (Vs. 7) Those represented by Ruth and Esther thereafter received the truth and were brought out of prison and brought into the temple. In 1922 the faithful ones began to greatly rejoice because, they saw the Bridegroom high up in the temple, and on the throne of heaven. They appreciated that they had not been diligent as they should have been in times past. Now they repented and were anxious to go forth in service doing whatsoever the Lord should show them that they must do. With increasing joy the faithful push forward with the work, shouting the praises of Jehovah and his King- W 10/15/35

April 28                (77)

Fools, because of their transgression, and because of their iniquities, are afflicted. Then they cry unto the Lord in their trouble; and he saveth them

out of their distresses.—Ps. 107:17,19.

The fools do ‘not hold the Head’, Christ Jesus, and look to him as leader. They look to men for leadership and teachers; which is contrary to God’s Word. They insist on what they call their “personal liberty’’, which in fact means the desire to do according to their own selfish will. Rather than see the church in unity and be at unity in the spirit of Christ, they separate themselves and oppose God’s organization. Even those who afterwards were made the “faithful and wise servant” class pursued a foolish course, and held to such iniquitous doctrines as this world’s political powers’ being the “higher powers”, “character development,” sanctimoniousness, etc. But Jehovah had mercy on those who did repent and sought to know and follow in the way of the Lord. W 9/1/35

April 29                (15)

The Lord was departed from him. But the Philistines took him, and put out his eyes, and brought him down to Gaza; and bound him with fetters of brass; and he did grind in the prison house.—Judg. 16: 20,21.

The events of 1918 brought about by the World War and the treachery of the Delilah class and the action of modem Philistines made the Samson class a much prized prisoner. Samson was made to grind in the prison house. Likewise the Samson class was made to do, some actually grinding, and all being restrained from activity in public service of Jehovah and forced to render service to Satan’s organization. This caused the modern Philistines to rejoice greatly. The Samson class, now blind and restrained, then really awakened to the situation and with absolute confidence in the Most High prayed God for release to do service to his glory regardless of consequences. God did not let that prayer go unheeded. W 1/1/36

April 30               (128)

Thou art my hiding place; thou shalt preserve me from trouble; thou shalt compass me about with songs of deliverance.—Ps. 32: 7.

Those who have devoted themselves to Jehovah and his kingdom now appreciate that their joy is accompanied with tribulation because the enemy is desperately trying to destroy those serving Jehovah. The rebellious ones are doomed for destruction, but the remnant diligently seek to be filled with knowledge and understanding of the progressive steps of the unfolding of God’s great purposes, that they may walk worthily before him. To such faithful ones Jehovah says: “I will instruct thee, and teach thee in the way which thou shalt go: I will guide thee with mine eye.” (Vs. 8) Being taught of him, and from him learning the meaning of the present-day persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses, the faithful have full assurance of final victory, and they sing. W 6/15/35

May 1               (292)

And he gave him his hand; and he took him up to him into the chariot. And he said, Come with me, and see my zeal for the Lord.—2 Ki. 10:15,16. Jonadab did not take the reins of the steeds drawing Jehu’s chariot, but he rode with him at Jehu’s invitation. In like manner the Jonadab class today do not lead or teach the faithful remnant, representing the bride of Christ, but they go along ’with them, following after them and doing the service of Jehovah. They hear the message from th$ anointed bride class and take it up and join with them in proclaiming it. They follow the remnant over the highway to Zion. They once were but are no more prisoners, being now free from the Devil’s organization, and they unite themselves under God’s organization. When God’s chosen people, ‘‘Israel after the flesh,” were set free from Egypt and went on the trek to Canaan, other non-Israelites, ‘‘a mixed multitude,” joined them.—Ex. 12: 38. TV 10/15/35

May 2              (323)

Lo, I raise up the Chaldeans, that hitter and hasty nation, which shall march through the breadth of the land, to possess the dwellingplaces.—Hdb. 1: 6.

The Chaldeans picture Christ Jesus the Executioner, who acts at Jehovah’s command and who is in command of the army of the Lord. God’s executioner is bitter against the defamers of Jehovah’s name. "That bitter and hasty nation” (impetuous nation, Leeser) is God’s holy nation, which shall vindicate his name under the leadership of Christ Jesus. That nation makes haste or speed in executing Jehovah’s judgment, moving with swiftness like Jehu’s. Jehovah’s Executioner ‘marches through the breadth of the land’, not only through “Christendom”, but through all nations of the earth, as the Chaldeans did. (Jer. 25: 9-11,26) The “dwellingplaces” of “Christendom⁰ are parts of Satan’s organization which must be destroyed, and Christ Jesus will destroy them. W 5/1/35

May 3               (78)

Study to shew thyself approved unto God, a work, man that needeth not to be ashamed, rightly

dividing the word of truth.—2 Tim. 2:15.

A workman that is ashamed cannot be bold in this day of judgment in declaring the truth as God has commanded his witnesses to do. He must grow in a knowledge of present-day truth with wisdom and spiritual understanding in order to be strong in the Lord and the power of his might and in order to be a true witness to Jehovah’s name. To ‘rightly divide the truth’ means to have a knowledge and understanding of God’s purposes as disclosed by his prophecies, the meaning of which is now unfolded by the Lord to his people. One who studies to show himself approved to God is not meditating on how wonderful and beautiful he is within himself, but is gaining knowledge of God’s expressed will and receiving that knowledge in wisdom and spiritual understanding. W 4/15/35

May 4              (308)

I will stand upon my watch, and set me -upon the tower, and will look forth to see what he will speak with me.—Hob. 2:1, A.R.V.

Jehovah shows that he will speak and give his reason for permitting the wicked to continue their iniquitous work. The crucial hour has come, and it is only the Lord who can give complete peace and strength to his people. They get up into the siege tower to see what? Manifestly to see the movement of Jehovah’s host against the doomed “Christendom” and to get a clearer vision and to cry out to those below, and particularly to those of good will known as Jona-dabs. Habakkuk’s language is symbolic, of course, and the siege tower pictures the remnant uplifted and in a heavenly position. Jehovah speaks to them by his prophecies and thus gives them flashes of lightning, revealing to them what is written in His Word for their comfort and hope. IT 5/15/35

May 5               (322)

0 Jehovah, I have heard the report of thee, and am afraid: . . . God came from Teman, and the Holy One from mount Paran. Selah-Hob. 3:2, 3, A.R.V.

On his triumphant march from Mount Sinai to Jerusalem God led his people through the land of Teman. “Lord, when thou wentegt out of Seir [of which Teman is a part], when thou marchedst out of the field of Edom [to which Teman belonged], the earth trembled, and the heavens dropped [waters], the clouds also dropped water.” (Judg. 5: 4, 5) “Paran” means “beautiful, gleaming”. Jehovah in his conquering march to the battle of Armageddon comes from the highest place, illustrated by the mountains, but far more lofty and beautiful than Mount Paran. God led the Israelites from Sinai to the north by Moses’ hand. Now he leads his mighty hosts by the hand of the Greater Moses, Christ Jesus, approaching as “from the south” (margin) to engage in the great battle. W 5/15/35

May 6               (313)

Hut they that wait upon the Lord shall renew their strength; they shall mount up with wings as eagles; they shall run, and not be weary, and

they shall walk, and not faint.—Isa. 40: 31.

Continued persecution, arrests, imprisonment and ill-treatment of Jehovah’s witnesses by the Devil’s representatives would tend to make weary and faint the strongest ones if they were not permitted to receive a knowledge and understanding as to the reason for such persecutions. But since Jehovah has opened his prophecies and makes clear to them the reason, his faithful witnesses are glad to be permitted to have part in the sufferings that came upon Christ. To maintain his integrity Christ Jesus suffered, and was made perfect. Likewise the faithful remnant must suffer persecution and be faithful in order to maintain their integrity. By God’s grace they will not become weary and faint.—Gal. 6: 9. W 6/1/35

May 7               (286)

We have the word of prophecy made more sure; where-unto ye do well that ye take heed, as unto a lamp shining in a dark place, until the day dawn, and the day-star arise in your hearts.—2 Pet. 1:19, A R.V.

Manifestly the words “until the day dawn” mean the beginning of the “day of Jehovah”, which had its beginning when Jehovah placed his King upon his throne in Zion, in 1914, and when he was sent forth to rule. God had given his word to send his King in due time, and his followers were to look forward to the kingdom and hold firmly to their hope which God had set before them, and they must keep themselves separate and distinct from the wicked world. If they should become negligent and indifferent they would become blind and not see afar off concerning the coming of the King and his kingdom. When the “day of Jehovah” should arrive, would all see clearly? Not all who had once believed, but only those whose heart devotion is to God and his kingdom. W 7/15/35

May 8               (261)

A great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb.—Rev. 7: 9.

Jesus Christ sits in the throne with Jehovah, that is, as the special Judge who renders judgment at Jehovah’s throne. (Rev. 3: 21) It is those on earth of good will, who take the side of the Lord and become his “sheep”, that stand before him the great Judge as approved. To these “sheep” Christ Jesus says: “Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.” These are the ones that get life eternal, on earth. While being judged, they are on earth, but ‘in the sight of’ Christ Jesus, because now he is giving attention to them, although no human eyes can see him. The great multitude learn he is at the temple, on his judgment throne. They discern this truth though not seeing him with natural eyes. W 8/1/35

May 9         _     (285)

The mountains saw thee, and were afraid; the tempest of waters passed by; the deep uttered its voice, and lifted up its hands on high.—Hab. 3:10, A.R.V.

Thus is foretold of the overflowing and victorious armies of Jehovah under the leadership of Christ Jesus that flow by and overflow and destroy the enemy. “The deep” contains the thought of a “roaring” abyss of waters. The picture is one of roaring and high waves, denoting either very high winds or undersea earthquakes causing a tidal wave. Such a thing on a far more tremendous scale must come to pass at Armageddon. Such would cause the deepest part of the sea to be greatly disturbed. This would indicate that the people who are most completely alienated from God by reason of the Devil’s influence will at Armageddon be terribly shaken. In the midst of all that storm, earthquake, trembling and tumult, God’s faithful remnant will be safe, and Jehovah will preserve them from it all.—Ps. 46: 1-3. W 7/1/35

May 10               (68)

The child shall be a Nazarite unto God from the womb; and he shall begin to deliver Israel out of the hand of the Philistines.—Judg. 13: 5.

At this point Samson pictures those who began to deliver God’s people from the antitypieal Philistines and who did so by faithfully declaring God’s Word and making known God’s power and great name. The work of complete deliverance of Israel from the Philistines was performed by David particularly in the two great battles, one at Mount Perazim and the other at Gibeon, to which Jehovah by his prophet refers, and which foreshadows the greater deliverance to be accomplished by Christ Jesus, the great antitypical David. In harmony with this Christ Jesus from about 1878 began to prepare the way before Jehovah, and sent forth his faithful followers from then on to declare Jehovah’s purpose to oust all his enemies and to set up his kingdom. W 11/1/35

May 11              (231)

He poureth contempt upon princes, and causeth them to wander in the wilderness, where there is no way. Yet setteth he the poor on high.—Ps. 107:40,41.

When God’s people were oppressed many fell away; therefore the number was diminished. (Vs. 39) There were those in line for the kingdom, including “elective elders”, who became lawless and formed the “evil servant” class. These, together with the arrogant clergy, and all would-be leaders of “Christendom”, came in for judgment. All such self-important ones are styled as "nobles” or “princes”. Sueh became like the scapegoat, which was led away into the wilderness. (Lev. 16: 8, 20-22) In the final tribulation such will find no way of escape. Jehovah’s remnant are poor in spirit and poor in their own estimation, relying wholly upon the Lord. Such humble themselves under his mighty hand. Jehovah set them on high from affliction after they were brought out of restraint and affliction of the World War. W 9/15/35

May 12              (53)

The foolish said unto the wise, Give us of your oil; for our lamps are gone [are going (R.V.)] out. But

the wise answered, saying, Not so.—Hatt. 25: 8,9.

The foolish did not manifest the zeal and enthusiasm of the wise for the service of the Lord and his King. They said to .the faithful, in substance: “Divide up with us; go fifty-fifty with us; give part of your plaudits to the Lord; do the work you think you must do, and we will let you do the service, but only divide with us the honors,” that is, that which brought joy to the foolish. These foolish ones would get some joy out of being flattered and patted on the back and put in positions of honor among men, to show themselves as important. If they could receive that much, it would encourage them to continue in the company of the wise. They were not willing to come along and bear the reproaches that were upon the wise and do the menial service. But the wise said, ‘We cannot comply with your request.’ W 10/15/35

May 13              (288)

y/hoso pleaseth God shall escape from her; but the sinner shall be taken by her.—Eccl. 7: 26.

During the Elijah period of the church some .who afterwards formed the “faithful servant” class boldly spoke the truth concerning illicit relationship between professed Christians and political elements who pretended to serve God but in fact served the Devil. These faithful ones were objects of criticism by the class represented by the Philistine woman, Samson’s prospective wife. She employed feigned affection and sentimentality to prevent the spoiling of Jehovah’s enemies. The fact that Samson had not told her concerning the secret of the riddle shows that the true followers of Christ Jesus put Jehovah and his organization above all things of the world. Therefore Samson’s remarks to “his wife” picture these faithful ones’ standing out for that which is pleasing in the sight of the Lord.—Judg. 14: 16. W 11/15/35

May 14               (48)

For Jehovah heareth the needy, and despiseth not his prisoners.—Ps. 69: 33, A R.V.

While they prayed, God heard them. “For God will save Zion, and build the cities of Judah; and they shall abide there, and have it in possession. The seed also of his servants shall inherit it; and they that love his name shall dwell therein.” (Vss. 35, 36, A R.V.) It is the faithful followers of Christ Jesus who are gathered to Zion and who abide therein. Such are the ones that Jehovah has brought out of prisons or a restraint and built up into Zion. They were in restraint or imprisoned by Satan’s organization, particularly during the World War period. Now the remnant are in greater danger of death at the hand of the enemy, but they confidently rely upon Jehovah and Christ Jesus and by the grace and the strength of the Lord they go on in the proclamation of the message of the kingdom. W 9/1/35

May 15               (70)

Thine hand shall find out all thine enemies: thy right hand shall find out those that hate thee.—Ps. 21: 8.

No human power could successfully resist the wicked organization. Anyone not having full confidence and faith in God and his promises would not dare tell the truth about the organization of the Hierarchy. But the faithful have taken their stand wholly on the Lord’s side and Him they will serve, and not man. They know their God will intervene in their behalf. They know that the Roman Catholic Hierarchy is the Devil’s chief visible agent on earth and that God will search out and destroy all his enemies, including the Hierarchy. With this knowledge and assurance from God’s Word, the faithful pray God to hasten the day when the enemy shall perish from the earth, and they continue with joyful words to sing Jehovah’s praises, knowing that the enemy can do nothing worse than to kill them. Deliverance is at hand. W 2/1/36

May 16               (24)

But God clave an hollow place that was in The Jaw, and there came water thereout; and when he had drunk, his spirit came again, and he revived.-Judg. 15:19.

God brought forth water at a point in that land which Samson had called Lehi, that is, “a jawbone,” or Ramath-lehi, meaning the place of' lifting up the instrument of vindication of Jehovah’s name. God there refreshed and sustained his faithful servant. God’s faithful servant class may confidently rely on Jehovah to sustain them in every time of need and that he will never forsake those who continue faithful in performing their covenant to do his will. When the conflict was trying and the faithful became tired, worn and thirsty for some refreshing assurance from the Lord, he provided it, and on they went with their work and continued to rejoice. This exactly accords with God’s promise to those faithful to him. (Isa. 40: 29-31) What God does to one faithful servant, he does likewise to all faithful to him. W 12/1/35

May 17              (236)

Until the days he fulfilled, in the which he separateth himself unto the Lord, he shall he holy, and shall let the locks of the hair of his head grow.—Num. 6: 5.

"If a man have long hair, it is a shame unto him.” (1 Cor. 11: 14) Therefore the long hair worn by Samson, or by any man as a Nazarite, symbolically said: “This man is shameful before men of the world; hence he must bear the reproaches that come upon him from the world and its god.” The long hair is for Jehovah’s sake and pleasure when worn by a man, and He commands that devoted men bear the reproaches from the enemy. Concerning Jesus it is written: "The reproaches of them that reproached thee are fallen upon me.” Like reproaches fall upon his followers. Therefore the Nazarite’s long hair pictured the reproaches that necessarily come upon all who are wholly and truly devoted to Jehovah God. W 12/15/35

May 18              (299)

The vision is yet for an appointed time, but at the end it shall speak, and not lie: though it tarry, wait for it; because it will surely come.—Hdb. 2: 3.

The “vision”, which is given to the prophet and now to the remnant, is of the battle of the great day of God Almighty, which battle will be fought for the purpose of vindicating Jehovah’s name; and hence it is for a definitely appointed time. The vision is made clear to Jehovah's witnesses before the final end; otherwise there would be no opportunity for them to sound the warning to the people. The vision “hasteth toward the end”. (A.R.V.) This suggests that not only is the time definitely fixed, but the time is short and Jehovah’s witnesses must make haste to do the work the Lord has given them to do. After the warning, which the anointed must give to the people of good will, “then shall the end come.”—Matt. 24: 14, 21; Ezek. 7: 2-6. W 5/15/35

May 19               (63)

He did grind in the prison house. Howbeit the hair of his head began to grow again.—Judg. 16: 21,22.

With the regrowth of Samson’s hair his position as a Nazarite was renewed and his purification was accomplished, thus foretelling that God’s faithful people, pictured by Samson, must continue in faith and be faithful. Samson appears now to be stronger than ever before, and surely after 1918 God’s faithful people on earth were, and since have been, stronger than ever before, “strong in the Lord, and in the power of his might,” faithfully declaring his message. While grinding in prison Samson would be considering how he could fulfill his commission from God. During the restraint of the Samson class they were praying to God and meditating how again to be of greater service to Jehovah than ever before. In 1919 his anger toward his people ceased and the Elisha work was begun. Thereafter the Samson class experienced Jehovah’s favor and since sing his praises. W 1/1/36

May 20              (119)

But the fig tree said unto them, Should I forsake my sweetness, and my good fruit, and go to be promoted over the trees?—Judg. 9:11.

The fig tree’s refusal is stated in question form, but in such forcible terms that there could be no mistake of its meaning. The fruit of the fig tree is sweet. The doing of God’s will is sweet to those who by his grace composed the new nation. These delight to do his will, because his law is right. They worship him as the only true God and worship him in spirit and in truth. They do not fear creatures, but they do fear God and are exceedingly anxious to obey his commandments, and that is sweetness to them. The fig tree’s good fruit is life-giving and life-sustaining truth of the kingdom. Such alone is good fruit. This fruit of the kingdom Jehovah commits to the holy nation, including the remnant which bear it before the world as witnesses to Jehovah’s name. W 4/1/35

May 21              (200)

0 Jehovah! Thy work—in the midst of the years, 0 revive it, in the midst of the years wilt thou make known? In trouble wilt thou remem

ber compassion? — Hab. 3:2, Both.

“In wrath remember mercy.” (Auth. Ver.) “Wrath” here denotes a time of great trembling, trepidation and disquietude. It relates to the time of Armageddon. The prayer of Habakkuk, and now by God’s remnant, will then be heard by Jehovah and answered, with mercy toward those devoted to Jehovah, who are the remnant and the Jonadab class. These who stand for the name of Jehovah God and boldly proclaim his message God will remember, shield and protect. The ruling powers of this wicked world shall pass away in the midst of great tribulation, but Jehovah will have mercy on those who love and serve him. Mercy will mean that those serving him he will spare during his wrath at Armageddon, not for their sake, but for his own name’s sake. W 5/15/35

May 22              (309)

We have not followed cunningly devised fables, when we made known unto you the power and coming of our Lord Jesus Christ, but were eyewitnesses.—2 Pet. 1:16.

Three apostles were eyewitnesses of a vision that related to the Lord’s coming in power and glory. That definitely establishes it that the vision was a prophecy relating to his coming in glory and power for judgment at the temple. Jesus, with three of his faithful followers, was in the mountain, but Jesus is the only really important one that was there. He was the one that appeared with ‘face shining as the sun and his raiment white as the light’. That would picture him at the time when God placed him on the throne as the world’s rightful Ruler and Jehovah’s mighty Vindicator. That enthronement of the Lord Jesus took place in 1914. His coming to the temple as the great Judge was in 1918. “Have these things always in remembrance.”—Vs. 15. W 7/15/35

May 23              (285)

The sun and moon stood still in their habitation: at the light of thine arrows they went, and at the shining of thy glittering spear.—Hab. 3:11.

It is within Jehovah’s power to cause pitch-darkness to envelop the whole earth, in both the eastern and the western hemisphere, at the same time, and surely then would come to pass the prophecy, to wit, “I [Jehovah] . . . create darkness.” (Isa. 45: 7) As that darkness approaches, there will be multitudes assembled “in the valley of decision”, where they will be thrashed to a finish. (Joel 3: 14,15) At Armageddon Jehovah’s forces will not need to depend upon the light of the sun or of the moon or of the stars. At that time Jehovah can, and, it seems certain, will, produce other lights of sueh brilliancy as will make even the sun seem dark in comparison. Imagine what will be the effect upon the earthly hosts of Satan under such conditions! W 7/1/35

May 24             (244)

All the angels stood round about the throne, and about the elders and the four beasts, and fell before the throne on their faces, and worshipped God—Rev. 7:11.

These holy angels are assembled for service of Jehovah and Ghrist Jesus. It is the time of the coming of the Lord Jesus to the temple. It is the judgment throne of Jehovah, and there is seated Christ Jesus as presiding Justice to render judgment. The “four and twenty elders” include all who are able ministers of God’s new covenant (2 Cor. 3: 6), and this includes Jehovah’s witnesses, because these have been brought to maturity in Christ and have become elders in fact. The four living creatures, picturing Jehovah’s universal organization, are round about the throne. Thus the vision discloses Jehovah’s four-square universal organization composed of his living creatures, all supporting Jehovah and appearing in complete contrast with Satan’s organization. W 8/1/35

May 25              (274)

~Yet setteth he the poor on high from affliction, and maketh him families like a flock. The righteous shall see it, and rejoice.—Ps. 107: 41,42.

This applies after the faithful remnant are brought out of restraint and affliction of the World War period. After that God multiplied “him”, the “faithful servant” class as a whole, by increasing the numbers of that servant class. Those foreshadowed by Mordecai and Naomi were privileged to carry the message of the kingdom to the Ruth and Esther class, who also were brought into the family of God on earth and were made part of God’s flock under Christ Jesus. Now the “great multitude”, the “other sheep” mentioned by Jesus, that is, the Jonadabs, are invited and are brought into the organization or the flock of the Lord. Comparatively few people see and appreciate God’s dealings with his own people at the present time. Those who do “see it” are the ones who love righteousness and hate iniquity. W 9/15/35

May 26              (238)

Loose the four angels which are bound in the great river Euphrates. And the four angels were loosed.—Rev. 9:14,15.

“Angel” often means a commissioned messenger with a message from Jehovah. The number four here signifies the organization of Jehovah’s witnesses in the four quarters of the earth, in a strong working body, doing service of Jesus Christ under commandment from him and Jehovah. The fact that the command is given to loose them shows that up to a time certain they have been bound. The “four angels” or commissioned messengers are all of Jehovah’s witnesses anointed and commissioned and commanded by. him to bear the testimony of Jesus Christ to the nations of the earth. These witnesses must first be loosed from restraint and then be “prepared” and equipped for the work assigned to them. The loosing of them, which' began in 1919 and reached a climax in 1927, was done by the Greater Cyrus. W 10/1/35

May 27               (60)

And I said unto him, Sir, thou knowest. And he said, to me, These are they which came out of great tribulation.—Rev. 7:14.

John’s attitude here corresponds with the correct attitude of God’s remnant. This shows that the remnant admitted that they did not know the correct answer and that they are not interpreters of prophecy, nor are they teachers. The remnant recognize God and Christ Jesus as the Teachers, and to them they give the honor and the glory. To "come out of the great tribulation” (R.V.) means not alone to survive that trouble as 'flesh that shall be saved’, but primarily that the great multitude come out from Satan’s organization and take their stand on Jehovah’s side during the time that elapses from stopping the World War until Armageddon, during the time that the “days should be shortened”. During that time this kingdom gospel is preached. W 8/15/35

May 28             (281)

It came to pass, when their hearts were merry, that they said, Call for Samson, that he may make us sport. And they called for Samson out of the prison house; and he made them sport.—Judg. 16: 25.

■ No doubt the thought then came to Samson’s mind that God had permitted him to be brought into this condition of great reproach and humiliation that he might perform his mightiest service looking to vindication of Jehovah’s name. In making sport of Samson the Philistines reproached Jehovah’s name and praised the Devil through their god Dagon. In modern times the modern Philistines, making sport of Jehovah’s ■witnesses, have brazenly reproached his name and given praise to the Devil and his organization. “Who is blind, but my servant?” says the Lord. The true Samson class must now be blind to all save doing God’s will. In this time of persecution these faithful witnesses, blind to everything except God’s service, hear his words of comfort. W 1/1/36

May 29               (42)

Now these are the nations which the Lord left, to prove Israel ~by them; even as many of Israel as had not known dll the wars of Canaan; namely, five lords of the Philistines.—Judg. 3:1,3.

The land which Jehovah promised (by oath binding that promise) to give his chosen people is his kingdom under his beloved Son, Christ Jesus. The Philistines were in the land before God’s chosen people arrived in Canaan. Likewise the modern Philistines, the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, occupied the place or condition claimed by them as a divine provision for that organization, before the anointed ones are taken out of the world and anointed of the Lord. Jehovah permitted this in order that he might prove that his people love God and prove it by unselfish obedience to his commandments under stress. These faithful maintain integrity toward God; they must do it in the face of wicked opposition. W 1/15/36

May 30              (270)

Hurt not the earth, neither the sea, nor the trees, till we have sealed the servants of our God in their foreheads. — Rev. 7: 3.

Every tree in the earth, that is, all men of earth, must choose to stand by Satan and be "hurt” or stand firmly by Jehovah and Christ Jesus and receive God’s blessings. To his sealed remnant Jehovah now says in substance: ‘You are commissioned to proclaim the day of God’s vengeance. You are commissioned as trees of God’s planting to give this witness, that you may be trees of righteousness to the glory of the Most High.’ No creature ever enjoyed such a privilege as this. Every true and faithful one of the remnant will now joyfully say, We are for Jehovah and for the Greater Gideon, his Vindicator. Each one now will be able to meet the test only if he, like trees planted by the waters, reaches down deeply and drinks of the truth and then faithfully, unhesitatingly, boldly and fearlessly declares the truth. W 4/1/35

May 31              (301)

0 Lord, how long shall I cry, and thou wilt not hear! even cry out unto thee of violence, and

thou wilt not save!—Hah_r 1:2.

Such a cry does not constitute a complaint against the Lord, but the condition inducing such cry causes the anointed to inquire as to the reason for persecution. Instead of permitting his "hidden ones” to remain in perplexity and doubt as to the reason for the violence heaped upon them, God has made it known to them that the old Dragon, Satan, not only is active but is putting forth his strongest efforts to destroy those who give the testimony of Jesus Christ in obedience to God’s commandments, that the enemies of God’s people are numerous and are made up of a host of wicked angels and the clergy and "the man of sin” and other dupes, who do Satan’s bidding, and that this multitude of enemies will continue to assault Jehovah’s witnesses. W 5/1/35

June 1               (144)

The fear of the Lord is to hate evil: pride, and arro-gancy, and the evil way, and the froward mouth, do I hate.—Prov. 8:13.

One who fears God fears to do any injury to his brethren and puts away from him pride and arro-ganey, regarding these as deadly enemies. If one thinks of himself as of more than ordinary importance, and that he should lord it over and browbeat his brethren, then he does not have the fear of God in his heart. One who is arrogant or proud and haughty, and hence without fear of God, is in very grave danger. The wise person fears pride, arrogancy and an injurious way, because such are contrary to God’s law; hence the wise person fears God, and this is the beginning of wisdom. To increase in wisdom he must always fear to displease God or to think of himself as of great importance. He must remember what God requires of those he approves. W 4/15/35

June 2                (10)

ShdXt not all these take up a parable against him, and a taunting proverb against him, and say, Woe to him that increaseth that which is not his!—Hob. 2: 6.

The taunting proverb is set out in Jehovah’s Word, and the faithful ones, Jehovah’s witnesses, take up and declare this proverb. This includes also the people of good will, who receive the message from the lips and hands of Jehovah’s witnesses and then join in declaring the truth. Soon God will bring these woes that are pronounced in Habakkuk 2 upon Satan’s organization, particularly upon “Christendom”, and it is those who love and serve Jehovah that must and do declare the same immediately preceding Armageddon. “Woe to him!” To whom? Satan’s organization visible, which, as all now well know, 'has increased that which is not his,’ and this has been done particularly since 1914, and each year the burden on the people has grown greatly, W 5/15/35

June 3                (20)

But now are they many members, yet but one body. Whether one member suffer, all the members suffer with it; or one member be honoured, all the members rejoice with it.—1 Cor. 12:20,26.

If some do not suffer actual violence or imprisonment, shall that be taken as proof that they are not of the Lord’s organization? Lest such be in doubt and thereby discouraged because they have not actually been arrested, beaten, imprisoned or otherwise forcibly ill-treated because of preaching the kingdom gospel, consider this: Christ Jesus and the members of his royal house are one. These members have been taken out as a people for Jehovah’s name and been gathered into one compact company. With the Lord’s coming to the temple and gathering the faithful unto him into the temple these are made one. Those of the temple class are at unity in Christ Jesus. Jehovah treats those of his royal house as a unit. W 6/1/35

June 4                (52)

He beheld, and drove asunder the nations . . . I saw the tents of Cushan in affliction; the curtains of the land of Midian did tremble.—Hob. 3: 6,7, A.R.V. “Cushan” seems to apply to an Asiatic Cush, king of Mesopotamia, namely, Chuskan-Rishathaim. (Judg. 3: 10) In Hebrew it means “Cush of the two wickednesses”; in Arabic, “Chief of two governments.” This appears to apply to Gog, chief one of the visible and invisible government of the hosts of Satan’s organization; also to the chief of the ‘two-homed power’ or ‘two-horned beast’, viz., the British-American empire system. Tents would denote the dwelling place of the warriors. At Armageddon the forces of Gog shall be in great affliction. The seventh worldpower, now controlled by Gog, will come to the greatest affliction of all the visible parts of Satan’s organization. The overthrow of the Midianites of old is a type of the destruction of Satan’s earthly organization. W 6/15/35

. June 5                 (47)

If ye do these things, ye shall never fall: for so an entrance shall be ministered unto you abundantly into the everlasting kingdom of our Lord.—2 Pet. 1: 10,11.

Peter under inspiration of the holy spirit informs his brethren that Jehovah has given unto them all things pertaining to life, that therefore they should give all diligence to add to their faith virtue, knowledge, self-control, patience and godliness, and if they were diligent in doing so they would be fruitful, bearing the fruit of the kingdom to others; otherwise they would be blind to their privileges and would fall away. He says nothing about development of character that would qualify anyone to help the Lord rule the universe. He emphasizes the great importance of the coming of the Lord Jesus and his kingdom and urges his brethren to keep this at all times in mind. His admonition is to not be drawn away by private interpretation placed upon prophecy. W 7/15/35

June 6               (324)

The labour of the olive shall fail, and the fields shall yield no meat; . . . yet . . . I will joy in the

God of my salvation.—Hab. 3:17,18.

The olive is a symbol of fatness, prosperity, enlightenment, peace and unity of the remnant with Christ Jesus. To God’s remnant the “olive” does not fail, because God’s servant is ‘like a green and fruitful olive tree in God’s house’. (Ps. 52: 8) The “two olive trees” (symbolical) stand beside Jehovah’s lamp. The remnant are illuminated and constantly being fed upon the blessed things revealed to them by reason of the illumination of God’s Word. (Zech. 4: 3,11,12) Contrary to ‘the fields’ yielding no food’, the remnant now receive “meat in due season” in abundance, which is furnished them by Jehovah. Zion’s children are being taught by Jehovah their Father and are fed upon the finest of wheat. (Ps. 147:14) The work of the remnant in the field increases to His praise. W 7/1/35

June 7               (295)

For the freward is abomination to the Lord: but his secret is with the righteous.—Prov. 3: 32.

Jehovah makes known his purpose to his creatures when it pleases him. Jehovah is his own counselor, and his will is his purpose. His secrets are dark to all until his time to reveal them. He that is perfect in wisdom knew the end from the beginning, and his purpose is to do according to his will, and this is especially true with reference to all who shall he members of his organization. Nothing can possibly interfere with accomplishment of his purpose. He has a fixed time to accomplish and make known his purpose. Neither men nor angels are permitted to know his secrets until his due time. He does not reveal his secrets to enemies or rebellious ones. No wonder it is written in God’s Word that ‘the wisdom of man is foolishness in God’s sight’. Men wise in their own conceits seek in vain to understand. W 8/1/35

June 8               (337)

These . . . have washed their robes, and made them white in the blood of the Lamb. Therefore are they before the throne of God, and serve him.—Rev. 7:14,15.

They must wash up before Armageddon comes. It would be too late to wash at the time of Armageddon. They “flee into the Mountains”. This they do before the “winter” time, the great climax or tribulation at Armageddon. They have come out and still they come, and now together with God’s remnant they are singing, “Salvation to our God . . . and unto the Lamb.” (Vs. 10) They honor Jehovah God and his King, and they refuse to give any glory to any part of Satan’s organization. They are certainly not contaminated with the ideas and ways of this world. They are against it. These honest-hearted ones who have left Satan’s organization are now on the Lord’s side and want that faet to be known, and they make it known and worship the only true God Jehovah and his King. W 8/15/35

June 9               (336)

Dan shall he a serpent by the way, an adder in the path, that biteth the horse heels, so that his rider shall fall backivard.—Gen. 49: 17.

Dan means "umpire, or judge”. The time arrived for Jehovah to vindicate his prophetic word concerning the tribe of Dan, as prophesied by Jacob: "Dan shall [through his descendant, Judge Samson] judge his people, as one of the tribes of Israel.” Through Samson Dan should be a serpent or one who brings an abiding calamity or evil upon God’s enemies, "by the way” of the enemies; and "an adder”, or one who is deaf and refuses to hear and be influenced by the charms of Satan, in the war path, "that biteth the horse heels” or war organization of Satan, so that his rider, Satan’s exalted agencies, "shall fall backward.” "I [God’s people on earth] have waited for thy salvation, 0 Lord,” by thy Judge. (Vs. 18) He shall oust the enemy.—Deut. 33: 22. W 11/1/35

June 10               (306)

Listen, 0 isles, unto me; and hearken, ye people, from far: The Lord hath called me from the womb.—Isa. 49:1.

There are isles picturing those who seek the Lord and who desire a righteous government; legitimate business men in the world who have unwittingly been supporters of the Devil’s organization but who are out of heart harmony with its wickedness. Such "isles” watch for God’s law; they wait for Jehovah and trust in his arm. (Isa. 42: 4; 51: 5; 60: 9) To them Jehovah sends his witnesses. The prophet says: Jehovah "hath called me from the womb”. This applies to the Lord Jesus, and later to the members of his body, who are made part of the servant. "The womb” here is not that of Mary, but that of Zion, Jehovah’s woman or universal organization. This prophecy was fulfilled in miniature at Jesus’ anointing in A.D. 29, and in completion upon Jesus in 1914, at the birth of the kingdom, when he was enthroned. W 9/15/35

June 11                (68)

And he found a new jawbone of an ass, and put forth his hand and took it, and slew a thousand

men therewith. — Judg. 15:15.

Only the miracle of God could make that jawbone stand the wear and tear of crushing the skulls of a thousand men. Samson, the faithful servant, fought alone, so far as human help was concerned, but he fought in the strength of the Lord. Likewise during the Elijah work of the church a faithful, zealous and fearless company of men and women continued to do the work, while many others stood by and refused to do anything to the honor of Jehovah. Those who continued to serve Jehovah were a peaceful, meek and obedient class like unto an ass, and they used their jaws to do speaking or witness work in the name of Jehovah and Christ Jesus and slew modern Philistines with the Word of God. The warfare continued, and the righteous held up his banner. W 12/1/35

June 12               (252)

She shall be brought unto the King in raiment of needlework: the virgins her companions that follow her shall be brought unto thee.—Ps. 45:14.

A “virgin” is one completely separated from Satan's'organization and fully devoted to God. This class is not limited to spirit-begotten ones. Having taken their stand openly and completely on the side of Jehovah and his organization, and trusting entirely in Jesus’ shed blood, and devoting themselves unselfishly to the Lord, they are chaste ones; they defile not their purity or virginity by consorting with the Devil’s organization. The prophetic picture here shows the daughter of the King Eternal, the bride of Christ Jesus, Jehovah’s anointed King, gathered to him; then the Jonadab class brought into company with those on earth who represent the bride. These companions to the bride ‘take hold of the skirt of him that is a Jew, saying, We are with you; for we have heard that God is with you’. W10/15/35

June 13               (158)

Such as sit [(A.R.V.) sai] in darkness and in the shadow of death, being bound in affliction and iron; . . . He brought them out of darkness.—Ps. 107:10-14.

By reason of fear of the visible rulers of this world as being “the higher powers” (Rom. 13: 1) almost all of God’s people became negligent and disobedient to the commandments to serve Jehovah God, and hence their conduct was to that extent rebellious. The fact that they were not then bold in declaring the message of the truth had the effect of causing the enemy to more vigorously persecute and oppress them. All of God’s people therefore came into a condition of restraint during the World War, including the rebellious ones and those who were more faithful, and they all sat in darkness. Those, however, who under the test proved faithful the Lord brought out of darkness. “Unto the upright there ariseth light in the darkness.”—Ps. 112: 4. W 9/1/35

June 14               (101)

He told her all his heart, and said unto her, There hath not come a razor upon mine head; for I have been a Nazarite unto God from my mother’s womb. — Judg. 16:17.

The divine record does not say that Samson was bound by any vow or other obligation to refrain from telling the secret of his great power. Today the source of divine strength exercised by the faithful is not kept a secret, but is told in the Watch Tower publications. Formerly it was not correctly understood and therefore could not be correctly disclosed. The Delilah class did not know or understand. The Samson class knew they must be faithful to God and they wanted to be faithful, but their exact relationship to Jehovah and his kingdom was not understood prior to the Lord’s coming to the temple. It is certain that Samson’s strength was not in his hair, but was provided by the Lord by reason of what his long hair stood for or pictured. W 12/15/35

June 15               (203)

Bless the Lord, 0 my soul. . . . That he may bring forth . . . wine that maketh glad the heart

of man.—Ps. 104:1,14,15.

The wine of Jehovah not only cheers his heart but makes glad the heart of the "man Christ Jesus”, because Jesus’ joy is to vindicate his Father’s name and he rejoices over the remnant that participate with him in that joyful work. It is to Jehovah and Christ Jesus that the faithful remnant give cheer by their full devotion to God, his King and kingdom. They are not seeking to be pleasers of men on earth, but seeking only to please God and Christ. “Not as pleasing men, but God, which trieth our hearts.” (1 Thess. 2:4) “Ye ought to walk ... to please God. ” (1 Thess. 4: 1) These words of admonition apply to those of the royal house, and therefore to the branches of “the true vine”. Said Jesus, the true vine: “I do always those things that please him,” Jehovah.— John 8: 29. W 4/1/35

June 16                (98)

But when the Philistines heard that they had anointed David king over Israel, all the Philistines came up to seek David; and David heard of it.—5 Sam. 5:17.

David is a type of Jehovah’s beloved anointed One, Christ Jesus the King, and includes all the anointed of the temple or royal house of God. Hence the prophecy applies to the anointed remnant on earth, gathered to Christ Jesus at the temple from 1918 on. When the Lord cleansed the temple he brought all his people into unity under Christ Jesus, the Head over the church and of the temple. From that time on the faithful anointed witnesses of Jehovah have declared his message against the wicked rulers of “Christendom”, and particularly against the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. As the ancient Philistines wanted to get David, so now the effort of modern Philistines, the Roman Catholic Hierarchy and its allies, is to bring about destruction of God’s anointed ones. W 2/1/36

_          June 17                (87)

That ye might be filled with the knowledge of his will, in all wisdom and spiritual understanding.—Col. 1^ 9.

It is the desire that Jehovah’s witnesses he filled with the knowledge of God’s will. Knowledge, within the meaning of this text, does not consist merely in a mental putting together of certain facts, hut it does mean that facts or truths as expressed in God’s Word are collected and put together in wisdom and understanding. Knowledge of the truth means clear perception of the truth. A knowledge of God’s will means a clear perception of what God has expressed in his Word concerning his purpose as the same is related to his chosen people. Knowledge in “wisdom and spiritual understanding’’ means that a knowledge of the truth is received and accompanied by thorough or true wisdom and discernment of spiritual things. Spiritual things can be discerned only by those who have devoted themselves to God. W 4/15/35

June 18               (292)

And they called for Samson out of the prison house; and he made them sport; and they set him between the pillars.—Judg. 16: 25.

The house represented Satan’s visible organization, in which his devotees feast and praise his name and curse Jehovah. The two supporting pillars thereof are (1) that the visible ruling powers, the ones to be praised, are religionists, controllers of commerce, and political instruments, and that these constitute the “higher powers”, to which all must he subject, regardless of what God may say; (2) that such “higher powers” or visible ruling factors are the ones endowed and empowered and ably qualified to give the people prosperity, security and peace -on earth; and that these two “pillars” will robe earth in glory and beauty. For some time now the Samson class, God’s faithful witnesses on earth, have been placed between these two “pillars”. They now clearly discern that these “pillars” are false. W 1/1/36

June 19               (200)

God came from Teman, and the Holy One from mount Paran. Selah. His glory covered the heavens, and the earth was full of his 'praise.—Hah. 3: 3.

Certain it is that the enemy will not be singing Jehovah’s praises, and therefore these words must mean that God’s praises will be sung by the small band of Jehovah’s witnesses on earth as they behold his glory and the marching of his martial host going into battle. Jehovah in times of old made pictures of this very thing. (2 Chron. 20: 22) It is true that the remnant, now see Jehovah’s glory and sing: “O Lord, our Lord, how excellent is thy name in all the earth! who hast set thy glory above the heavens.” (Ps. 8: 1) Is it not also true that the faithful ones on earth will sing the praises of Jehovah when Armageddon begins? "Sing unto the Lord a new song, and his praise from the end of the earth.” This Will occur after the fight is beginning. W 6/15/35

June 20               (225)

Sing, 0 ye heavens; for the Lord hath done it... Break forth into singing, ye mountains.—Isa. 44:23.

Now Jehovah’s remnant have learned that he permits the enemy to continue to persecute the remnant in order that they may have an opportunity to maintain their integrity toward God and in order that the acts of the enemies may be testimony against themselves. Then Jehovah shows his people that soon he will march through the land and destroy the enemy forces and completely vindicate his own great name. The vision of that battle of Armageddon was given to Habakkuk. The remnant now are permitted by faith to see something of the manner in which it will be conducted. It will be far too stupendous, aweinspiring and overwhelming for any human language to now describe it. The remnant by faith see what is coming within a short time, and knowing that it means Jehovah’s vindication and their own deliverance, they break forth in song. W 7/1/35

June 21               (192)

And there was a cloud that overshadowed them: and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, This is my beloved Son; hear him.—Mark 9: 7.

Jesus had been sent by his Father to earth to do his Father’s will, and Jesus had been wholly obedient to his Father. Jesus declared he was sent to bear witness to the truth, and his faithfulness in performing his commission earned for him the title “The Faithful and True Witness”. The words which the three witnesses heard from the cloud disclosed the necessity for them to be likewise obedient to God and, since Jesus spoke with authority, that whatsoever he commanded they must obey. This fixes the rule that all followers of Jesus must obey his commandments. Obedience is one of the fixed rules of Jehovah. There is no deviation therefrom permitted. God’s inflexible rule concerning his creatures was long ago announced: "Behold, to obey is better than sacrifice.” W 7/15/35

June 22                (85)

He that sitteth on the throne shall dwell among them. They shall hunger no more, neither thirst any more; neither shall the sun light on them, nor any heat.—Rev. 7:15,16.

Since the Lord’s coming to the temple Jehovah’s witnesses have been privileged to carry to. the hungry ones in "Christendom” God’s message of truth, and those who have fed upon it have no occasion to ever hunger and thirst. In Satan’s organization, or under it, the honest ones have hungered and thirsted both figuratively and literally. Satan’s big "tree in the midst of the earth” furnishes them no shade. Those of Satan’s world claim to be its sunlight, and then they scorch and blister honest people. But now it is "not so hot” to those of the "sheep” class under them, who have heard and read the message of God’s name and his kingdom. They have turned themselves to his organization. W 8/15/35

Jane 23               (318)

He maketh the storm a calm, so that the waves thereof are still.—Ps. 107: 29.

The hypocritical crowd of “Christendom” now refuse to hear the testimony which Jehovah’s witnesses bring to them and God will not give heed to the cries of such at Armageddon. When the great storm has completely wrecked Satan’s organization it will then cease. Jehovah will bid his Field Marshal to cease the fight; then the storm ceases: “and silent are their rolling waves.” (Roth.) That will mark the end of Jehovah’s wrath, and also the complete destruction of Satan’s visible organization. Armageddon will be terrible beyond the description of all human words. The Jonadabs, once prisoners to Satan’s organization, but who have escaped therefrom and have witnessed the destruction of Satan’s organization and the vindication of Jehovah’s name, will then be glad and sing: “Glory to God in the highest.” W 9,/15/35

June 24               (148)

And your covenant with death shall be disannulled, and your agreement with hell shall not stand; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, then ye shall be trodden down by it.—Isa. 28:18.

When the people are told of Jehovah’s purpose to destroy Satan’s organization, both visible and invisible, the Roman Catholic Hierarchy says: “Those scriptures do not apply to us, because we have made a covenant with death and with hell and are at agreement therewith.” Verse 15: “When the overflowing scourge shall pass through, it shall not come unto us; for we have made lies our refuge, and under falsehood have we hid ourselves. ’ ’ The refuge or hiding place of the entire Catholic scheme is a great mass of lies. Jehovah’s positive declaration is that the Roman Catholic Hierarchy has made with death and hell a covenant which shall not stand, but shall fail. He will bring upon them a great scourge that will expose and destroy them. W 2/1/36

June 25               (307)

.And the. vine said unto them, Should I leave my wine, which cheereth God and man, and go to he

promoted over the treest-—Judg. 9:13.

To compromise with “Christendom’’ by touching the unclean thing or by having anything in common with her or by holding any official position under her organization, God’s remnant would thereby be required to forsake the joy of the Lord, and that would mean to “leave my wine, which cheereth God and man”, that is, Jehovah God and “the man Christ Jesus”. Jehovah has joy in the vindication of his own name, and those who “walk in the light” with Christ Jesus, the Vindicator, have partnership with him in vindicating His name. This the wine of the vine here pictures. (1 John 1: 5-7) Jehovah God finds cheer in the wine from his “wine” which he has planted for his own joy. Jehovah has given joy and strength to his royal house. This joy must remain. W 4/1/35

June 26               (321)

The lords of the Philistines were there: and there were upon the roof about three thousand men and women, that beheld while Samson made sport.—Judg. 16: 27.

Doubtless they still feared Samson might do something; but they knew they were great in number and had Samson where they could watch him. Likewise today the modem Philistines, when considering their position and hearing what the Samson class have to say, look with fear at what might come to pass and they trust in their own allied strength and think they have the Samson class where they can watch them and get rid of them at will. Samson prayed to Jehovah; likewise the Samson class pray to God without ceasing. Of himself Samson did not have strength to pull down the great house, but Jehovah was about to furnish all the needed strength. Likewise the Samson class have no power to pull down Satan’s house, but God gives them the strength to declare his purpose to accomplish that very thing. W 1/1/36

June 27                (42)

Let love be without hypocrisy.—Rom. 12: 9, A.R.V.

Those who get in the van of Jehovah’s visible army now and stay there must entirely forget self and truly from the heart say, “I am for Jehovah and for his Vindicator, Christ Jesus, the Greater Gideon/’ Gideon refused to accept rulership over Israel either for himself or for his sons. So now all the remnant who have Gideon’s spirit say at all times, “Jehovah shall rule over the earth.” Jehovah and Christ Jesus are their teachers, and all the remnant must be one, standing shoulder to shoulder, looking well to the kingdom interests committed to them, and in so doing individual self must entirely disappear. All things such creatures have are committed into God's hands and must be devoted to his service. He is no respecter of persons, as there are now no individuals singled out and placed above their fellows in his visible organization. Love is the principal thing. W 3115/35

June 28                (10)

God hath not given us the spirit of fear; hut of power, and of love, and of a sound mind. Be not thou therefore ashamed of the testimony of our Lord.—2 Tim. 1: 7, 8.

Have not all of God’s people had more ot less fear that they might suffer death at the hands of the Devil’s organization if they persisted in telling the truth? Such fear must be put away at some time; and how? By the help and strength that come to them through the Lord Jesus Christ; by learning of him and confidently trusting in his power; by a complete devotion to him, thus showing perfect love for God and Christ Jesus. “Perfect love casteth out fear.” (1 John 4: 18) Have the Lord’s people come to that point when they have perfect love and when fear has departed? Since the coming of the Lord Jesus to the temple and the gathering to himself of the faithful, and they there receiving instruction from the Lord, they have been purged of all fear. W 10/1/35

June 29                (71)

Blessed is the man that trusteth in the Lord, and whose hope the Lord is: for he shall be as a tree planted by the waters.—Jer. 17: 7, 8.

Jesus proved his integrity under test and is made the mighty tree of righteousness that vindicates Jehovah’s name. By and through him life must come from Jehovah to all who become obedient to God’s law. The faithful apostles are other “trees” planted in God’s righteous “forest”. Jehovah has continued to take from among the nations others whom he has planted as his trees to be witnesses for his name. These too must prove their integrity before they can be fully made members of Jehovah’s glorious organization. These trees are planted by him beside his still and deep waters of truth, that they might drink deep of these precious things that God has provided and be in the image and likeness of his beloved Son, being completely devoted to him and his kingdom. W 4/1/35

June 30               (323)

And he said unto them, Out of the eater came forth meat, and out of the strong came forth

- sweetness. — Judg. 14:14.

In due time Christ Jesus will slay Satan and all his organization, and in doing so that will be sweet meat unto him. Says the Lord: “My meat is to do the will of him that sent me, and to finish his work.” His faithful followers, doing the Elijah work by using the “sword of the spirit”, declaring the truth of God’s Word, slew the lion-like clergy, the Protestant organization. This, both for themselves and for others, was really meat to them, because it was God’s will. At Armageddon the faithful will feast on Jehovah’s great “sacrifice”, the slaughter of Satan and his organization. (Rev. 19: 17-21; Ezek. 39: 17-22) “Out of the eater came forth meat”; that is to say, it was meat to the faithful servants of God to slay those who would destroy them. W 11/15/35

July 1                (169)

Lo, I raise up the Chaldeans . . . Their horses also are swifter than the leopards, . . . and their horsemen shall come from far; they shall fly as the eagle that hasteth to eat.—Hab. 1: 6, 8.

Armageddon may seem to be far away, but we should keep in mind that Jehovah is not slack concerning the business of executing his judgment upon the wicked, as some men count slackness. (2 Pet. 3:9) "Christendom” thinks Armageddon is too remote, if it ever comes at all, to even warrant serious consideration, and this is due to the unsound advice given by the clergy. But the "Faithful and True” on his war mount, followed by his armies in heaven, will leap forward to battle against Satan’s organization, and particularly "Christendom”. Nothing can withstand the onward rush of that army. (Rev. 19: 11-14) God’s holy nation is a "hasty nation” and moves with the swiftness of the eagle. W 5/1/35

July 2                (322)

The eyes of the Lord run to and fro throughout the whole earth, to shew himself strong in the behalf of them whose heart is perfect toward him.—2 Chron. 16: 9.

God’s remnant see and appreciate the truth that there are two mighty organizations'facing each other for final battle and that those who are in God’s organization are absolutely in need of divine strength to be exercised in their behalf. Such strength is exercised only in behalf of those wholly devoted to God. By Christ’s blood are we redeemed and made righteous before the Lord God, and by his merit are we privileged to be partakers with him in his kingdom. (Col. 1: 14-16) However, to enter into the kingdom we must suffer reproaches like those upon Jesus, hence suffer because of faithfulness in bearing testimony to the truth, which testimony is now committed to the remnant. God provides the strength for the remnant to meet these trying conditions. W i/15/35

Samson called unto Jehovah,, and said, 0 Lord Jehovah, . . . strengthen me, I pray thee, only this once, 0 God, that I may be avenged of the Philistines for one of my two eyes.—Judg. 16: 28, A.R.V., margin.

Samson could properly charge the blinding of his one eye to his yielding to Delilah, and thus foreshadowing the Lord’s seiwant class’ becoming negligent and to a degree compromising in A.D. 1918. The blindness of the other eye was properly charged to the Philistines, and for that they must settle with Jehovah, because Samson was his servant. Not for personal vengeance Samson cried, but for vindication of Jehovah’s own name. Likewise with Jehovah’s witnesses. Their own negligence had contributed to their partial blindness; but modern Philistines are responsible for bringing about complete blindness, and they pray vengeance upon the modern Philistines for the vindication of Jehovah’s name. W 1/1/36

July 4               (268)

Behold, his soul which is lifted up is not upright in him: but the just shall live by his faith.—Hab. 2: 4.

The “wicked servant” class is here set out plainly in contrast with God’s faithful remnant, to whom this part of the text applies, to wit, “But the just shall live by his faith,” “by his faithfulness.” (Roth.) The just ones are the ones brought under the “robe of righteousness”, and do not withdraw from the battle ranks, but delight to obey Jehovah’s commandments given through Christ Jesus. The “man of sin” class draws back to perdition. Because of self-conceit they magnify their own importance, and are not honest and straight, but are crooked toward Jehovah and his King. Though the vision is made plain by the Lord, these conceited ones refuse to accept it, and not only refuse to run further and tell others, but, on the contrary, oppose Jehovah’s witnesses in giving the testimony relative to the vision. W 5/15/35

July 5                 (28)

Woe unto him that saith to the wood, Awake; . . . But the Lord is in his holy temple: let all the earth keep silence before him.—Hab. 2:19,20.

Any attempt to make the League of Nations, which is the abomination that maketh desolate, stand in the "holy place” is an open and flagrant defiance of Jehovah. His temple cannot be defiled, because there is nothing in common between his faithful temple class and the creature of the Devil and his organization. No one who understands God’s Word, and loves and serves him, can give support to that abomination. The presence of Jehovah at his holy temple means woe to all idol-worshipers, whether that worship be of men or of inanimate things. The people of "Christendom” now have no excuse for worshiping man-made or Devil-made things, for "the Lord is in his holy temple, the Lord’s throne is in heaven”. Hence Jehovah and Christ do the teaching of God’s people. W 6/1/35

July 6                 (89)

Was the Lord displeased against the rivers? was thine anger against the rivers? was thy wrath against the sea, that thou didst ride upon thine horses and thy chariots of salvation?—Hab. 3: 8.

Rivers picture the peoples of the nations under Satan’s control, some willingly and some unwillingly. Today God makes manifest His displeasure, but not chiefly against the poor people. He manifests his power for the vindication of his name, and with all those who support Satan’s organization he is displeased. Like the rivers Arnon and Jordan, which flow into the Dead sea, the streams of mankind flow down into the sea of death. All those in the stream who oppose the marching of Jehovah’s people merit and will receive evidence of his displeasure, because like the rivers Amon and Jordan they have acted as barriers or hindrances to the march of God’s chosen people to the kingdom. W 6/15/35

. July 7                  (74)

Unto the upright there ariseth light in the darkness.

—Ps. 112:4.

In 1918 the Lord Jesus appeared at his temple in glory and in power, and there arose the Morning Star, the “Day Star”, the Prince of Peace. Thenceforth those with hearts wholly set upon God and his kingdom have no more been looking at a ‘light shining in a dark place’, hut in the temple they are favored with the privileges of flashes of light upon God’s Word. There they are taught by Jehovah and Christ Jesus. These great Teachers are the only teachers of those devoted to the Lord, and under their teaching the anointed are given an understanding of prophecy. The faithful witnesses have been suffering great indignities at the hands of the enemy, and continue to suffer. While they thus suffer, the Lord unfolds to them the meaning of his prophecy and shows the reason why they have suffered, and tells them what he will do to our persecutors shortly. W 7/15/35

July 8                 (86)

Behold my servant, whom I uphold, mine elect, in whom my soul delighteth.—Isa. 42:1.

Christ Jesus is and has been Jehovah’s elect servant since he became “the author of eternal salvation”. (Heb. 5: 9) Yet it is at the time of his coming to the temple for judgment that he is the elect servant of Jehovah, clothed with power and authority, and begins his active work of judging. At the time of his coming the consecrated were in prison or restraint to Satan’s organization. When brought out of Satan’s prison and to the .temple the approved ones were formed into the “faithful and wise servant” class and became part of the elect servant. To this class the Lord committed his testimony, which testimony they must deliver according to God’s commandments. Christ Jesus first opened the blind eyes of the remnant ; then he uses the remnant to deliver testimony by which other blind eyes are opened. W 9/1/35

July 9               (208)

I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes.—Rev. 7: 9.

“White robes” pictured that they are clean and approved. Cleanliness results by reason of faith in the shed blood of Christ Jesus, who loved us and washed us from our sins in his own blood. (1: 5) The great multitude by reason of faith in his shed blood, and devoting themselves to God, thereby wash their robes in the Lamb’s blood and make themselves clean. Every human creature that obtains life must obtain it as a gift of God through Christ Jesus, and this is the only way. All such must have their sins washed away by exercising faith in Christ’s shed blood. In consecrating to God by faith in that blood they stand approved before the judgment seat. They keep their robes clean by continuing in faith and devotion to God and his anointed King. W 8/1/35

July 10                (84)

The Lord God is my strength and he will make my feet like hinds’ feet, and he will make me to walk upon mine high places.—Hab. 3:19.

The Lord’s people are here likened unto the hind, the feet of which are swift and sure. The remnant are swift to elude the multitude of enemies, and fleet and sure of foot to hasten to the great Rock of their salvation and climb up high to safety and to there hide themselves in places inaccessible to pursuers. Jehovah keeps the faithful ones informed in advance, and they are prompt to move as he directs them. They worship God upon true and approved “high places”, far above and hence safe from the enemy. As long as they keep in these heights of service and devotion they are on The Rock and are safe under the protection of the Most High. (Ps. 18: 2) From these high places they will witness the battle of the great day and will see Jehovah win. W 7/1/35

July 11                 (77)

Which executeth' judgment for the oppressed: which giveth food to the hungry. The Lord loos-eth the prisoners.—Ps. 146: 7.

During the World War period God’s people were in prison or in restraint. They hungered for spiritual food and nourishment and enlightenment, and God furnished them such enlightenment. Hearing the cry of the faithful ones who later became the “faithful and wise servant” class, Jehovah speaks of them and to the “evil servant”: “Behold, my servants shall eat, hut ye shall be hungry; behold, my servants shall drink, but ye shall be thirsty.” (Isa. 65: 13) After 1922 the class foreshadowed by Esther and Ruth were delivered from Babylon, that is, the state of prison, and were made part of the “faithful and wise servant” class, and they too were brought into the Lord’s vineyard. Then the Jonadabs are released, that they might join the Jehu chariot. W 9/15/35

July 12                (274)

For the Lamb, which is in the midst of the throne, shall feed them, and shall lead them unto living fountains of waters. — Rev. 7:17.

Whether any creature gets life in heaven or on earth, he must acknowledge and worship Jehovah as the only true and almighty God, and Christ Jesus as his King and Chief Executive Officer. Every creature that receives life on earth or in heaven must be absolutely loyal and faithful to God. These requirements are precedent to entering into life. The great multitude must be led by Christ Jesus and fed by him before Armageddon, and must be under his protection and taken through it. Over the ‘highway of holiness’ Christ Jesus goes, and his flock of sheep, the anointed members of the royal house, follow him. The “other sheep”, the great multitude, follow after and with Jehovah’s witnesses and are led “unto fountains of waters of life” (R.V.) and thirst no more. 17 8/15/35

And while they went away to buy, the bridegroom came; and they that were ready went in with him to the marriage feast.—Matt. 25:10, R.V.

The foolish separated themselves from the company of the wise and faithful ones and did not get into the Bridegroom’s procession and follow him at the appointed time and at his command. The wise were equipped by being unselfishly devoted to Jehovah, and later their light shines more brilliantly in their devotion and obedience to the Lord. When the Lord came, they “went in’’, being permitted by the angels guarding the entrance to pass in. That means they were gathered by the Lord into the temple, being caught away “in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air”. This marks the time of the anointing, when the wise received from Jehovah the “new name” and became designated “Jehovah’s witnesses”. W10/15/35

July 14               (135)

Comfort all that mourn; to appoint unto them that mourn in Zion, to give unto them beauty for ashes, the oil of joy for mourning. — Isa. 61: 2, 3.

This means those who were consecrated to do God’s will and who were in line for the kingdom and hence in line for a place in Jehovah’s capital organization, but who, because of ignorance or other influence of Satan, were restrained or bound. They were on Jehovah’s side, therefore of Zion or “in Zion”. Bringing to them the good tidings and 'opening to them the prison doors’ that they might go free would “give unto them beauty for ashes, the oil of joy for mourning”. Restrained in prison, they had the “spirit of heaviness”; but now, such being released and made free to serve Jehovah, and being identified with others serving God who had brought them the message of deliverance, those who thus brought them the message would be thereby giving them “the garment of praise for the spirit of heaviness”. W 10/1/35

July 15                (301)

The Philistines shouted against him; and the spirit of the Lord came mightily upon him, and the cords that were upon his arms 'became as flax that was burnt with fire, and his bands loosed.-Judg. 15:14.

Enemies are always noisy when they think they have God’s faithful servants in their power. Would God sustain his faithful servant? If so, that would he proof that Samson had God’s approval. Jehovah then caused his spirit to come mightily upon Samson, and the bonds fell from his hands. By causing him to use the jawbone of an ass Jehovah demonstrated that deliverance of his faithful servant comes not by bow, spear, sword or horse, or other means invented by man, but by the spirit or invisible power of Almighty God. Samson put his trust in Jehovah God, and Jehovah sustained his servant. Likewise those who trusted in God and feared not man but remained true to Jehovah, God sustained. W 12/1/35

July 16                (336)

The rulers take counsel together . . . saying, Let us break their bands asunder, and cast away their cords from us. He that sitteth in the heavens shall laugh;

the Lord shall have them in derision.—Ps. 2:2-4.

The “bands” bound together the Israelites in unity under King David and hindered the operations of the Philistines. All true followers of Christ Jesus are now united under the King, the Greater David, and are loudly proclaiming Jehovah, his King, and his kingdom. Heretofore the Roman Catholic Hierarchy has had its own way. It has been a great test to the true followers of Christ. In every country the Hierarchy carries forward its wicked persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses and now says: “Let us break their bands [their unity under Christ which operates as a restraint to us] asunder.” In this they induce the political and financial elements to join with them. Will not the Lord Jehovah now laugh and hold these presumptuous ones in derision? W 2/1/36

July 17               (139)

All the days 0/ the vow of his separation there shall no razor come upon his head: . . . he shall . . . let the locks of the hair of his head grow.—Num. 6: 5.

Not that all true followers of Christ Jesus must wear their hair long and uncut, hut, long hair on a man being a symbol of reproach, all who do follow in his footsteps must bear reproaches like those that came upon him, and only those wh do faithfully follow in the footsteps of Christ Jesus are strong “in the Lord and in the power of his might”. The long hair of Samson was typical and applies to all the faithful followers of Christ Jesus. Every one who is a faithful and true follower of Christ, who maintains his integrity toward God, will be and must be reproached. In this there is no distinction between men and women, because “there is neither male nor female: for ye are all one in Christ Jesus”. Hence the reproaches fall alike upon all. IE 12/15/35

July 18          .      (118)

Isaac digged again the wells of water which they had digged in the days of Abraham his father; for the Philistines had stopped them after the

death of Abraham.—Gen. 26:18.

Abraham was used to picture Jehovah God, and his son Isaac pictured God’s Anointed, Christ Jesus, and the faithful members of his royal house. Water is a symbol of life-sustaining truth. Abraham dug wells that the people of his time might have water to sustain them. Jehovah provided 'water-wells of salvation’ that his people might be sustained thereby. The Philistines, the representatives of the Devil, stopped up the wells Abraham had dug. Isaac dug again other wells that the people might have water. Christ Jesus, the Greater Isaac, opened the 'waterwells of salvation’ when he came to earth. Every one who has heard and obeyed his voice hastened to that life-giving water and has tried to keep the wells open for his fellow creatures to drink. W 11/1/35

July 19                (285)

His glory covered the heavens,. . . And his brightness was as the light; he had horns [margin: bright beams] coming out of his hand: and there was

the hiding of his power. —- Slab. 3: 3, 4.

At Armageddon Jehovah will make his glorious light to shine that all may see his glory. Jehovah’s rays of light are power, and like horns they push back the forces of darkness into destruction, like prods prodding the enemy. The rays of light from his hand are bolts of lightning hurled forth from his hand that works destruction upon the enemy. The ‘open hand’ well pictures Christ Jesus. The hiding of Jehovah’s power is in his hand. All power of heaven and earth he has committed to the hand of Christ Jesus, who will execute that power in God’s due time. That great power of Jehovah has long been concealed. At Armageddon the hand of Jehovah is to be opened to the natural senses of those who dwell on earth. W 6/15/35

July 20            .    (262)

"When the people saw him, they praised their god; for they said, Our god hath delivered into our hands our enemy, and the destroyer of our country.-Judg. 16: 24. The Philistines heaped indignities upon Samson, their blind prisoner. So in recent years the modern Philistines have continued to heap indignities upon Jehovah’s servant class, blind to all purposes except the serving of Jehovah. They have caused their newspapers to publish malicious lies about them, when the truth might have served their ends better. They have made sport of Jehovah’s witnesses through the press and made them appear as long-haired, crazy people and as a cult that is not to be seriously considered. They have desired to expose Jehovah’s witnesses to ridicule and shame, even as the Philistines did with Samson. Samson would present a picture such as impure, wicked minds would revel in. They would use him for sport the rest of his days. W1/1/36

July 21                (178)

If they obey and serve him, they shall spend their days in prosperity, and their years in pleasures; but if they obey not, they shall perish by the sword, and they shall die without knowledge.—Job 36:11,12.

Knowledge of the truth increases one’s obligation to obey; because God is merciful to the ignorant, but holds responsible those who know and then fail to do. One who is going in the wrong way, even though ignorant, is lawless; but when the Lord shows him the right way, then his responsibility increases. This rule concerning those who are bound in fetters of ignorance is announced in the above words. With the Lord’s coming to the temple knowledge has increased, and all who have made a covenant to do God’s will have opportunity to grow in knowledge and in wisdom. Therefore their responsibility to the Lord increases. Those not teachable and obedient have made no progress in gaining a knowledge of God’s will. W 7/15/35

July 22                (63)

The joy of the Lord is your strength.—Neh. 8:10.

The giving of the witness has caused some to grumble and complain, but the effect upon God’s remnant has been to increase their joy. Many of Jehovah’s witnesses now find they must live in house-cars or tents and get their daily food by strenuous efforts, but these things do not dampen their zeal and joy. Persecution by the enemy increases, but this does not stop them from rejoicing. On the contrary, they continue to “joy in the God of my salvation”. (Hab. 3:18) The remnant know they are on the side of Jehovah and that he is their God. The deliverance and salvation of the remnant will come fully at Armageddon, and to that happy time they now look forward with great rejoicing, because the name of Jehovah is involved and will there be vindicated. To share in vindicating his name, not in earthly comforts, is the cause of their rejoicing. W 7/1/35

July 23                (326)

Bring my soul out of prison, that I may praise thy name; the righteous shall compass me about; for thou shalt deal bountifully with me.—Ps. 142: 7.

God heard David’s prayer and brought him out of restraint or prison, and he was anointed king of Israel. The great antitypieal David, Christ Jesus, was anointed King and afterwards enthroned. In 1918 he appeared at the temple for judgment. Thereafter God’s people were brought into the temple, and do there praise Jehovah’s name and his King. Their praise and activity began particularly in 1919. Those who gave their allegiance to David and made him king showed their faith in God’s promise to Israel. Because of their faith they were counted righteous. In the case of the "faithful and wise servant” class these survived the crucial test at the temple, were made part of God’s organization, and were sent forth by the Lord to praise Jehovah. These were compassed about by those foreshadowed by Ruth. W 9/15/35

July 24                (227)

They fell before the throne on their faces, and worshipped God, saying, Amen: Blessing, and glory, and wisdom, and thanksgiving, and honor, and power, and might, be unto our God for ever.—Rev. 7:11,12, R.V.

They are saying “Amen” to what the great multitude has cried out (Vs. 16), and are expressing themselves as in full accord therewith. Jehovah’s remnant and all including the great multitude are in full accord and giving praise to him; and this shows that they love him and serve him in harmony with his commandment. This leaves nothing to the credit of creatures or persons, church organizations, or any other organization of men. They are not holding to some man’s teaching and giving him the credit therefor. They recognize that all their blessings proceed from Jehovah and that he is the one that is worthy of praise. These show complete devotion to God; such is true worship of Him in spirit. W 8/15/35

July 25                (159)

'Wherefore, holy brethren, partakers of the heavenly calling, consider the Apostle and High Priest

of our profession, Christ Jesus.—Heb. 3:1.

These brethren are the ones begotten to life as the sons of God, and therefore are in Christ, and their life is hid in him. (1 Pet. 1: 3; Col. 3: 3) The life of such began when they were brought forth as the spirit sons of God. These are the ones, and only ones, called to glory and “whose names are [written] in the book of life”. (Phil. 4: 3) The condition precedent to their receiving life everlasting is full and complete faithfulness to God, they maintaining their integrity toward God unto the end of their earthly journey. From the very moment one is brought forth as a son of God through Christ Jesus, the Head and author of eternal salvation, that one is the object of Satan’s assault and must suffer at the hands of Satan the Devil, ‘who has power of death.’ W 10/1/35

July 26                 (58)

He bowed himself with all his might; and the house fell upon the lords, and upon all the people that were therein: so the dead which he slew at his death were more than they which he slew in his life.—Judg. 16: 30.

Samson died true to the meaning of his name, that, is, “destroyer; desolator.” Samson here pictured the work of God’s faithful people designated the “Elisha work”. Those doing the Elisha work must end their course in death. In doing so they accomplish more than was accomplished during the Elijah period. It would appear from this and other scriptures that this part of the Samson drama pictures the beginning of Armageddon, but not its end- That Samson died with the fall of the Philistines’ house does not mean that all the Samson class will go down in death at the beginning or even at the end of Armageddon. The point here particularly emphasized by the prophetic drama is the faithfulness of Samson and his approval, and the faithfulness of the Samson class. W 1/1/36

July 27               (267)

Say among the nations, Jehovah reigneth: . . . Then shall all the trees of the wood sing for joy before

Jehovah; for he cometh.—Ps. 96:10-13, A R.V.

Jehovah has enthroned the Greater Gideon as King. His Vindicator is marching to Armageddon, and Jehovah commands his witnesses to say to the people concerning his great King and Vindicator, "In his name shall the nations hope.” The kingdom is the only hope of the world. What a blessed hope that is now set before the people who are downtrodden "trees” of this world! Those who turn to the King and the kingdom of Jehovah will have every reason to clap their hands and rejoice. Jehovah’s capital organization, of which Christ Jesus is Head, constitutes the 'trees of righteousness, the planting of God’ (Isa. 61: 3). These will ever be in the van of those who bring glory and honor to his name. All the ‘' trees ’ ’ that survive must get in line. Then shall "everything that hath breath praise Jehovah”. W 4/1/35

July 28                (148)

David therefore did as God commanded him; and they smote the host of the Philistines from Gibeon even to Gazer.—1 Citron 14:16.

This shows that Isaiah 28: 21 refers to the destruction of the Philistines, the chief enemies of God’s chosen people Israel. The Scriptural account of two fights, to wit, Perazim and Gibeon, does not necessarily mean the Lord will make two separate and distinct fights against modern Philistines. He 'shall rise up AS at Mount Perazim and be wroth AS at Gibeon’. In other words, what took place at Mount Perazim and Gibeon foreshadows what the Lord will do against the antitypieal Philistines. The fight against them will be by the Greater David at Jehovah’s command. It was Jehovah who brought the victory to David. This foreshadows that the antitypical battle is not the battle of creatures against modern Philistines, but is the battle of Jehovah. W 2/1/36

July 29                (335)

Because thou hast spoiled many nations, dll the remnant of the people shall spoil thee; because of men’s blood, and for the violence.-Hab. 2: 8.

Satan’s organization has spoiled the nations, and during the World War and since Gog and his earthly agents have particularly attempted to spoil and cut off Jehovah’s remnant taken out of the world as a people for His name, and to thus prevent them from becoming a nation. Now the remnant will see Satan’s organization spoiled by the Lord God’s invisible armies. Benefits also accrue to the Jonadab class, who have taken their stand on the side of Jehovah and who continue to obey his commandments. But Satan’s “woman”, that is, his wicked organization, is “drunken with the blood of the saints” and of all slain upon the earth. Thus this wicked crowd has knowingly and maliciously broken God’s everlasting covenant and shall suffer His vengeance. W 5/15/35

July 30                 (48)

The fear of the Lord is the beginning of hnowledge: but fools despise wisdom and instruction.—Prov. 1: 7.

A man who does not fear God does not begin even to acquire knowledge and wisdom. God’s promise (Ps. 25: 12-14) to the man beginning in the right, way is that God will show him His covenant. God’s covenant is an expression of his purpose. Fear, as that word is used in the foregoing, does not mean merely reverence for God. What constitutes fear is defined in these words: “The fear of the Lord is to hate evil: pride, and arrogancy, and the evil way, and the fToward mouth, do I hate.” (Prov. 8: 13) These words are a warning that a child of God should fear to entertain or to cultivate pride, arrogancy and an evil way, that is, a way that would do injury to others. These things Jehovah hates, and the wise creature likewise hates them and fears to do or to approve what is hated by Jehovah. He fears to displease God. W 4/15/35

July 31               (242)

Upon my watch will I stand, and place myself upon the tower, and will watch to see what he will speak with me, and what I shall answer to him who reproveth me.-Hab. 2:1, Leeser, margin.

It is the rulers of this wicked world who challenge the right and freedom and authority of Jehovah’s witnesses to proceed with their work. Jehovah does not reprove them, because they are doing His will. The “evil servant” class, the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, and such like, reprove the remnant and smite them. The faithful know they are right, and persistently go forward with the witness work; but they have a keen desire to understand just why the enemy is permitted to continue to oppress them. Jehovah provides a place and manner for them to find out the answer. "So shall I have wherewith to answer him that reproacheth me: for I trust in thy word.”—Ps. 119:42. W 5/15/35

August 1              (303)

Despise not prophesyings.—1 Thess. 5: 20.

Were it unnecessary for God’s people to have an understanding of the prophecies, they would not have been recorded in the Bible. The fact that they were recorded in Holy Writ is conclusive proof that the remnant must now learn of them and be diligent to get an understanding thereof, because there will be no occasion to seek understanding of these prophecies after Satan’s organization is gone and the kingdom of righteousness is in full control of the world. If it pleases God to continue to show his witnesses that they are pursuing the right course and he does so by unfolding to them the prophecies he caused to be written, then the remnant will continue to receive such information with much joy and thanksgiving. If we find one prophet corroborating another, then we may know that such corroborative testimony is essential for the welfare of God’s people. W 5/1/35

August 2             (283)

Thy bow was made quite naked, according to the oaths of the tribes, even thy word. Selah. Thou didst cleave the earth with rivers.—Hab. 3: 9.

For many centuries Jehovah has kept his war equipment out of sight and has given Satan full opportunity to make good his boastful challenge, but at Armageddon there will be a complete change and Jehovah’s forces will be fully revealed. There he will completely uncover his “bow”, make it twang and throw a shower of arrows against the enemy’s -forces. Christ Jesus is Jehovah’s battle bow, and he will hurl his irresistible strength against the enemy and work havoc to the enemy’s forces. Jehovah gives to his faithful remnant full assurance by revealing to them the meaning of his prophecies that they may be strengthened. Long ago he gave his Word and bound it with his oath, and thus gives double assurance to those who rely on his Word. W 6/15/35

August 3             (313)

Ye endured a great fight of afflictions; partly, whilst ye were made a gazingstock, both by reproaches and affliction; and partly, whilst ye became companions of them that were so used.-Heb. 10:32,33.

Some suffer one indignity, and some suffer another, but all suffer because of their unity in Christ and faithfulness unto God and Christ. The question each one must now answer in the proper way is, Are you consecrated and wholly devoted to God and Christ Jesus, and have you evidence that you are God’s child, and are you faithfully performing the commission given to you by Jehovah? If so, then you may be suffering, either directly or indirectly. If directly, then you are aware of that fact. If indirectly, you are suffering because of your companionship with others who are enduring greater physical suffering for righteousness. One being in this condition, it is faithfulness to God and his kingdom that is required. W 6/1/35

August 4               (6)

And he was transfigured before them. And there appeared unto them Elias, with Moses; and they were talking with Jesus.—Mark 9: 2,4.

Elijah performed prophetic work which foreshadowed Christ Jesus and a work he would do preparatory to coming to the temple of God. That work had particular reference to restitution of the great and important doctrines concerning the kingdom of God. Those truths had been delivered to the Israelites and the apostles after Jesus’ coming, but had been lost sight of after the death of the apostles and were hid until the Lord Jesus turned his attention to the tilings of the earth a short time prior to coming to the temple. Elijah’s prophetic work was fulfilled in miniature by John the Baptist, who, as forerunner, announced the coming of Jesus at his first advent. The Elijah work was performed in completeness by the Lord before coming to the temple. W 7/15/35

August 5               (41)

I tremble in my place; because I must wait quietly for the day of trouble, for the coming up of the people that invadeth us.—Hab. 3:16, A.R.V.

None of God’s remnant are heard now to say they want to die and go to heaven before Armageddon. Their desire is to live and see Jehovah execute his judgment upon the enemy in vindication of his holy name, regardless of how terrible that may be. It is His fight, and they know that he is right. Now they rest in faith and “sing aloud upon their beds'” of ease. (Ps. 149: 5) While they tremble for what they see coming upon the peoples of earth, they know that their own safety is in God’s mighty hand. There they will rest. Habakkuk trembled because of the frightful destruction that will result to the people “when he who should invade with his troops should come up against the people”. (Roth., margin) This means, when Gog begins his assault, Jehovah will invade Gog’s forces and cut them to pieces. W 7/1/35

August 6             (156)

A great multitude that had come to the feast, when they heard that Jesus was coming to Jerusalem, took the branches of the palm trees, and went forth to meet him, and cried out, Hosanna.—John 12:12,13, A.R.V.

When Jesus rode into Jerusalem and presented himself as King this was the laying of the Corner Stone in miniature, and foreshadowed the laying thereof in completeness when Christ appears at the temple as King. The great multitude that spread down their garments and waved palms were not then disciples of Jesus Christ. Likewise when He is enthroned, the great multitude (Rev. 7: 9) are not discerned and understood and are not Christ’s disciples. It is after he is presented as King and seated upon his throne of judgment that the great multitude is discerned with “palms in their hands”. They wave these as an evidence that they are heartily in accord with the King, about whom they have learned. W 8/1/35

August 7             (186)

He saved them out of their distresses. For he hath broken the gates of brass, and cut the bars of iron in sunder. — Ps. 107:13,16.

God did not save them out of their distresses by taking them to heaven, but by stopping the World War, opening the way for further service to the faithful. Satan’s organization is called “Babylon”. There was where the faithful servant class were restrained and imprisoned. But in 1919 God began to bring forth these faithful ones and give them light and to send them forth in his service with joy. Thus Jehovah did by the hand of his ‘elect servant’, whom Cyrus foreshadowed. (Isa. 45: 1-4) Not that God literally broke the gates and iron bars of a literal prison; but Babylon’s organization was holding his chosen people, and his servant class as a whole as prisoners were restrained, and Jehovah exercised his power in behalf of these and released the prisoner class, opening to them again the way of service. W 9/1/35

August 8             (286)

In an acceptable time have I heard thee, and in a day of salvation have I helped thee.—Isa. 49: 8.

The “day of salvation”, as applied to Christ Jesus, was from A.D. 29 to 33. (Ps. 116: 13) As to those of the early church taken out for Jehovah’s name in the days of the apostles: “Behold, now is the accepted time; behold, now is the day of salvation.” (2 Cor. 6:2) In the case of the remnant salvation is in the “day of Jehovah”. The word “salvation” conveys the thought of something saved, such as the remnant. These are “the feet of him . . . that publisheth salvation”. (Isa. 52: 7) These are clothed with the “garments of salvation”. (Isa. 61: 10) These are the ones that “cried unto the Lord in their trouble, and he saved them out of their distresses”. (Ps. 107: 13,14) These say unto the Lord: “Save now, I beseech thee, 0 Lord; O Lord, I beseech thee, send now prosperity.” (Ps. 118: 25) “The Lord also shall save the tents of Judah first.”—Zech. 12: 7. TV 9/15/35

August 9              (331)

Put on thy beautiful garments, 0 Jerusalem, the holy city: for henceforth there shall no more come into thee the uncircumcised and the unclean.—Isa. 52:1.

This prophecy manifestly applies after the Lord’s coming to the temple, after the loosing of the prisoner company, which forms the “faithful and wise servant” class, and after the sanctuary is cleansed. Jehovah’s capital organization is “the holy city”, the “new Jerusalem”. All those who abide in the blessed organization must be “virgins” at the time presented to the Lord Jesus, the Bridegroom, and Head of the holy organization: “espoused ... to one husband, that I may present you as a chaste virgin to Christ.” (2 Cor. 11:2) The whole organization is symbolically shown as “the holy city, new Jerusalem, coming down from God out of heaven, prepared as a bride adorned for her husband”. Only the overcomers are in that holy city. W 10/15/35

August 10              (211)

These are they which came out of great tribulation, and have tvashed their robes, and made them

white in the. blood of the Lamb.—Rev. 7:14.

The “robes” mean their own public profession by which they identify themselves as trusting in Christ’s blood as mankind’s redemptive price, and by openly taking their stand on Jehovah’s side. The great multitude do their own washing; that is, by the course of action they take they break away from Satan’s unclean organization and openly show themselves on Jehovah’s side. This they do by openly confessing their devotion to God; “with the mouth confession is made unto salvation.” (Rom. 10: 10) Coming to a knowledge of the fact that Jehovah’s name must be vindicated and that that is the important question, they not only confess themselves on his side but give assistance to his temple company in bearing witness to the honor and name of Jehovah God. W 8/15/35

August 11              (95)

And the angel of the Lord said unto him, Why aslcest thou thus after my name, seeing it is secret?—Judg. 13:18.

Manoah with good intention inquired of God’s messenger concerning his name. The angel showed complete obedience to the Lord by declining to disclose his name. The angel would not make merchandise of the work committed to him, nor of God’s power operating through him. His name was wholly immaterial. Likewise Jesus gave all credit, honor and glory to his Father. He was sent to speak in his Father’s name and to vindicate his Father’s name. He refused to deviate from that fixed purpose, and therefore “made himself of no reputation”, but was entirely obedient to his Father’s will. Manifestly therefore it is to be seen that they who would receive the approval of the Lord must walk humbly before him and take no credit to themselves for what is accomplished, but must give all honor to Jehovah. W11/1/35

August 12              (77)

As for thee also, whose covenant is "by blood, I have sent forth thy prisoners out of the pit wherein is no water. —Zech. 9:11, margin.

During the World War Satan’s organization cast God’s people into prison; the entire number of his faithful ones were either directly or indirectly restrained of liberty and held in subjection to Satan’s organization. That organization was then and is now entirely void of the life-giving waters of the truth. “They have cut off my life in the dungeon, and cast a stone upon me. Waters flowed over mine head,” but did not get into the dungeon. (Lam. 3 : 53, 54) Then “the Lord looseth the prisoners”. For what purpose? “To declare the name of the Lord in Zion, and his praise in Jerusalem; when the people are gathered together, and the kingdoms, to serve the Lord.” (Ps. 102:21,22) Surely this means when the Lord Jesus appears at the temple, and before him are gathered the nations. W 10/1/35

August 13               (52)

The spirit of Jehovah came mightily upon him, and he went down to Ashkelon, and smote thirty men of them.—Judg. 14:19, A.R.V.

God put his spirit upon faithful followers of Christ Jesus who did his service during the Elijah period and who continued zealous in performing the commission committed to them. The zeal and devotion of those faithful ones during that period often brought the modern Philistines into great embarrassment and distress. Jehovah used his faithful ones for that very purpose. His vengeance expressed against the Philistines through Samson foreshadows the expression of his vengeance against modem Philistines, who conspired to injure Christ’s faithful followers proclaiming the Lord’s presence and the nearness of his kingdom. If God sustained Samson, would not that prove that Samson pictured a people of pure heart who receive God’s sustaining grace? W 11/15/35

August 14             (226)

The olive tree said unto them, Should I leave my fatness, wherewith by me they honour God and man, and go to wave to and fro over the trees?—Judg. 9: 9,

"The man Christ Jesus” has now actually entered into "glory and honour” (Psalm 8: 4,-5), and Jehovah’s witnesses declare his glory and honor. They honor the Father and the Son. While they do not honor any man on earth, they do obey Jehovah’s commandments to honor the Son even as they honor the Father. (John 5: 23) They continually honor Jehovah and Christ Jesus, his beloved Son, by telling the people that God’s kingdom under Christ his King is the only hope of mankind, and that it will completely vindicate Jehovah’s name. Therefore is fulfilled the prophetic parable of the trees as to God’s remnant in their refusal to ‘leave their fatness wherewith they honor God and man’. They refuse to be promoted by Satan’s organization. W i/1/35

August 15             (195)

Blessed are the pure in heart: for they shall see God. —Matt. 5: 8.

A pure heart does not mean merely that a man has good intentions, but does mean that he is moved to take a course of action, and that he does take such course of action, not for selfish gain, but that he may do the will of God. Then he has a pure heart. One is a servant of Jehovah when he renders service to Jehovah and does so unselfishly or with a pure heart. (Rom. 6: 16) The servants of God generally have been wrongfully judged by most men because men look only at such things as the natural eye can see. God knows the heart or motive of his servants, and he judges them righteously. Commentators have leveled much criticism against Samson. Samson was a servant of God, and no one is competent to judge His servant. God made Samson stand and perform his will, and finally entered of record his approval of Samson. W 12/1/35

August 16             (196)

From the time that it goeth forth it shall take you: for morning by morning shall it pass over, by day and by night: and it shall be a vexation only to understand the report. — Isa. 28:19.

From the time the message of God’s vengeance goes forth against the hypocritical organization, it constitutes a great vexation to them. It exposes their very hiding place, which is a great mountain of lies. “For the bed is shorter than that a man can stretch himself on it; and the covering narrower than that he can wrap himself in it.” (Vs. 20) The bed, which the Hierarchy has made for itself, and the covering of lies used to hide its nefarious work, are entirely inadequate for that purpose. Its refuge of lies shall be completely swept away. Heretofore no opposition to the Roman Catholic organization has been able to stand. Now is God’s due time to take action, and no part of the organization shall stand. W 2/1/36

August 17             (203)

There hath not come a razor upon mine head; for I have been a Nazarite unto God from my mother’s womb: if I be shaven, then my strength will go from me, and I shall become weak, and be like any other man. — Judg. 16:17.

That meant that he had been a Nazarite before he had any power to determine the matter for himself. God had foreordained that Samson should be a Nazarite, manifestly for the purpose of performing his part in the great prophetic drama. To be a Nazarite one must not shear his hair. Neither Jehovah nor his “woman” (his organization) could relieve Samson of the obligation of carrying out the terms of the Nazarite vow, because God does not reverse his law. The same is true of those for whom Samson stood in this prophetic drama. One, having become the child of God through his woman or organization, and fully devoted to him, must continue so for ever to have God’s approval. W 12/15/36

August 18               (98)

Lo, 7 raise up the Chaldeans,... They come all of them for violence; the set of their faces is forwards; and they gather captives as the sand.—Hab. 1: 6, 9, A.R V.

The Scriptures show that the battle of Armageddon will be real destruction, and the most extensive and complete destruction that will ever have come to pass. The armies of the Lord turn neither to the right nor to the leit, but go forward to destroy Satan’s organization. (Ezek. 1:12; 43:3) “They gather captives as the sand,’’ that is, the host of Gog, which is a great and “mighty army’’. (Ezek. 38: 3, 4, 9,15) These were also foreshadowed by the Midianites, “like grasshoppers for multitude,” and their camels “as the sand by the sea side for multitude”. (Judg. 7: 12; 6: 5) The captives are gathered for destruction. The people of good will do not need to be taken captive. They voluntarily flee to God’s organization in obedience to the Lord Jesus' admonition.—Luke 21: 21. TK 5/1/35

August 19              (119)

We must through much tribulation enter into the kingdom of God.—Acts 14: 22.

Jesus’ announcement that the kingdom of heaven is at hand meant that he, as rightful King, had come, and his announcement was an open and bold challenge to Satan the Devil. Hence Satan waged deadly warfare against Jesus from that time forward. Those who shall be associated with Christ Jesus and his kingdom of a certainty must be subject to repeated assaults by Satan and his agents. Due to the fact that they told the truth, many of these faithful ones have been foully killed. What was the real reason for it'? Because Satan’s earthly agents feared these men who were faithful to God? Not at all. It was because these faithful ones were proclaiming the truth concerning God’s kingdom under Christ and that proclamation of the truth was a challenge to the Devil. For that reason he sought their destruction. W 4/15/35

August 20              (292)

And Samson called unto the Lord, and said, O Lord God, remember me, I pray thee, and strengthen me,

I pray thee, only this once, 0 God.—Judg. 16: 28.

Doubtless Samson’s prayer was spoken aloud that the Philistines might hear and know by whom their destruction would be accomplished. Today the Samson class pray to God and call upon his name aloud and herald his message far and wide that the Philistines may hear and have opportunity to know by what power their calamity is coming upon them. “For they shall know that I am Jehovah.” The remnant now are fully aware of the meaning of the great issue at hand and know the key position, and they pray to Jehovah to show His strength and pull down the wicked organization. Samson cried out: “Only this once, 0 God.” He knew this would be his final effort, and wanted to make the most of it. Now is “the day of Jehovah”. It is only “one day”. It is the opportunity to vindicate Jehovah’s name, and it is “only this once”. W 1/1/36

August 21              (337)

Woe to him that coveteth an evil covetousness to his house, that he may set his nest on high, that he may be delivered from the power of evil!—Hab. 2: 9.

The cruel, dishonest and covetous elements have thought to put themselves beyond the power of all punishment; thus they have builded their organization “that [they] may be delivered from the power of evil”. “Evil” means a calamity upon the wicked, inflicting punishment upon such for wrongdoing. That punishment or evil comes from Jehovah. The Roman Catholic Hierarchy and its dupes arrogantly carry on wicked practices, all the time claiming to be immune from punishment at the hand of Almighty God. While they are doing this the obligation and privilege is upon Jehovah’s witnesses to carry to the people the message concerning the near approach of Armageddon and what will be the result. W 5/15/35

August 22              (78)

The Lord gave the word; great was the company of those that published it.—Ps. 68:11.

Having full confidence in Jehovah and his Word, and in obedience to his commandment, his remnant, who are Jehovah’s witnesses, sound the warning to the rulers of the world and to the common people before the beginning of Armageddon. The result of their efforts in this behalf shows they have received the Lord’s blessings, and that particularly in recent years. The enemy and his agents make all the trouble possible for such publishers of the truth, who announce the curse or judgments of Jehovah upon those who now wickedly rule the world. What else could be expected at this time than opposition and persecution of those who firmly stand for God and his kingdom? The things we see coming to pass in these days are exactly in accord with what God long ago foretold, and are necessary to enable the remnant to maintain their integrity toward God. W 6/15/35

August 23             (270)

A bright cloud overshadowed them: and, behold, a voice out of the cloud, which said, This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased; hear ye him.—Matt. 17: 5.

Here in substance is the emphatic statement from Jehovah that Christ Jesus is the great High Priest, Judge and King, to whom all creation must render absolute obedience, because God in due time would send him to be his Vindicator and to carry out all of his purposes and this would be done when Christ Jesus is enthroned as Ruler and Judge of the world. The overshadowing cloud symbolically spoke of Jehovah’s presence. The fact that it overshadowed the three disciples suggests that fulfillment of this prophetic vision would take place at the time of the Lord’s second presence. The words which the three disciples heard expressed by “a voice out of the cloud” would mean that Christ Jesus had maintained his integrity towards Jehovah. W 7/15/35

August 24             (111)

Thou didst cleave the earth with rivers. The mountains saw thee, and they trembled.—Hab. 3: 9,10.

Jehovah has opened up channels for his Word of truth and caused it to flow as waters on Satan’s closed organization among men. Thus notice and warning have been served upon Satan’s earthly ruling groups and those under them. Among them are found some people of good will called “Jonadabs”. These have been reached by the refreshing waters of truth and thereby been divided or separated from Satan’s organization. In the mighty and spectacular conflict at Armageddon the literal earth will be split with rivers flowing out from such cleavages or open places, and the peoples will be divided and split away from one another and will blindly fight one another. Above all, the invisible armies under Christ will smite the enemy to death, including both the visible and invisible hosts thereof. W 7/1/35

August 25             (175)

He . . . said, Where is the Lord God of Elijah? And when he also had smitten the waters, they parted hither and thither; and Elisha went over.—2 Ki. 2:14.

Jehovah’s witnesses have gone forward to the work with songs of joy upon their lips because they know the King is upon his throne and the vindication of Jehovah’s name is near. With their going forth the enemy has put forth his greatest endeavors to devour them, because they are delivering the testimony of Jesus Christ in obedience to God’s commandment. No amount of persecution has dampened the zeal of the faithful ones. They have observed the Lord’s hand dividing the people. They have seen the “goats” assembling together under the commandment of Gog to carry out Satan’s will, and they have observed the honest “sheep” class gathering themselves into a company under the Lord’s leadership. They behold these brought into the “city of refuge” before the greatest tribulation falls upon the world. W 8/15/35

August 26             (283)

Sanctify the Lord of hosts himself; and let him be your fear, and let him be your dread.—Isa. 8:13.

Jehovah prepares for himself a people which he specially makes manifest in the vindication of his name. That people must be a militant organization because they are fighting against and must continue to fight against the Devil and his organization. Now every one of God’s remnant must resist the Devil and do it vigorously. That means to resist the Devil’s agents by truly and faithfully serving the Lord. That means a fight to the end, and the faithful followers of Christ Jesus will continue fearlessly to follow his leading whithersoever he directs them to go. These faithful ones refuse to have anything in common with Satan’s worldly organization. With full confidence in Jehovah and his executive officer, Christ Jesus, the faithful go forth to the performance of their covenant. As they go they sing out constantly: “The Sword of Jehovah and of Gideon.” W 10/1/35

August 27             (242)

Samson said unto the lad that held him by the hand, Suffer me that I may feel the pillars whereupon the house standeth, that I may lean upon them.-Judg. 16: 26.

Samson, entirely blind, there pictured Jehovah’s “faithful servant” class now blind to everything save the service of Jehovah looking to vindication of his name. They give the appearance of weakness, because they are but few in number and possess not this world’s riches, nor political power nor influence. They trust wholly in Jehovah and his King. Like blind Samson, since 1922 the Samson class, blind to the reproaches, taunts, jeers and repeated insults heaped upon them, have determined, by the Lord’s grace, to get themselves into a position that they may have some part in vindicating Jehovah’s name. They see that such is the very purpose of Jehovah’s taking out of the world a people for his name. W 1/1/36

August 28              (249)

Sow the fields, and plant vineyards, which may yield fruits of increase. He blesseth them also, so that they are multiplied greatly, and suffereth not their cattle to decrease,—Ps. 107: 37, 38.

Jehovah’s remnant have carried the fruits of the kingdom to the ones pictured by Ruth and Esther. The Ruth and Esther class were prisoners to some part of Satan’s organization, whether in the church systems or outside, because they were dominated and kept in restraint by Satan. Hearing the truth, however, they responded thereto, and are brought to Zion and into God’s great organization. The faithful remnant continue to bear the kingdom fruits to others, and in this work God ‘‘suffereth not their cattle to decrease”. Cattle symbolize the means of carrying on the work of the Lord’s organization and represent both inanimate as well as animate vessels or instruments. There is now no decrease, but an increase in the number praising Jehovah. W 9/15/35

August 29               (23)

Strengthened with all might, according to his glorious power, unto all patience and longsuffer-

ing with joy fulness.-Col. 1:11.

God’s remnant must study to gain this knowledge and strength. Because of continuous persecution by Satan’s agents Jehovah’s witnesses must suffer long and be patient. Patience means constant and steadfast forward movement in performing their God-given commission and doing so amid great persecution, at the same time rejoicing to have part in suffering reproaches like those the Devil heaped upon Christ Jesus for his faithfulness in telling the truth. ‘‘Even Christ pleased not himself; but, as it is written, The reproaches of them that reproached thee fell on me.” There is no other way to enter into the kingdom save through suffering for righteousness’ sake; and the remnant, knowing that truth, rejoice to be permitted to fight on God’s side. W i/15/35

August 30              (12)

The Philistine's have dealt by revenge, and have taken vengeance with a despiteful heart, . . . therefore, thus saith the Lord God, Behold, I will stretch out mine hand upon the Philistines.—Ezek. 25:15,16.

From the time of Isaac, son of Abraham, the ancient Philistines opposed God’s people and ill-treated them. From the time of the antitypical Isaac Satan persecuted Jesus; and Satan’s agents, and particularly the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, have opposed and ill-treated God’s chosen people. The Philistines were privileged to be in the land God had assigned to his chosen people, and they tried to thwart God’s purpose to set up his typical kingdom there. Likewise for centuries the Roman Catholic Hierarchy has been suffered by Jehovah to occupy the place of his people on earth and has assumed to occupy the favored place of Jehovah; at the same time it attempts to prevent Jehovah’s setting up his kingdom. Its day of destruction is at hand. W 2/1/36

August 31             (322)

Thou art of purer eyes than to behold evil . . . wherefore lookest thou . . . and makest men as the fishes of the sea, as the creeping things?-Hab. 1:13, li.

Particularly "Christendom’s” clergy assume to be the favored ones, and that God is giving no protection to His remnant; therefore the wicked hook the harmless as fish and enmesh them in the net. The haughty and cruel ones treat those who serve God as though they were creeping things. Thus they oppose God and defame his name. God will vindicate his name before the enemy and uphold his servant class. In the past the enemy has employed hook methods to ill-treat individuals, but now they pursue a wholesale dragnet method by forming and executing a wholesale conspiracy against the Lord’s hidden ones. "They take up all of them with the angle, they catch them in their net, and gather them in their drag: therefore they rejoice.”—Hab. 1: 15. W 5/1/35

September 1            (337)

When they told it to Jotham, he went and stood in the top of mount Gerizim, and lifted up his voice, and cried, and said unto them, Hearken unto me, ye men of Shechem, that God may hearken unto you. —Judg. 9: 7.

Mount Gerizim here seems to clearly picture the kingdom or capital organization of Jehovah upon which the feet of Jehovah’s servants now stand while they proclaim God’s message of warning and of good tidings to those who have a hearing ear. It is the “feet” of the Greater Gideon, Christ Jesus, standing upon the mountains, that now deliver the testimony of Jesus Christ by God’s grace. In that position high up in the mountain Jotham pictured Jehovah’s remnant now in the secret place of the Most High, from which place of security they constantly proclaim the Lord’s message. Thus God causes the ruling elements of Satan’s organization to receive notice and warning delivered by his witnesses. W 3/15/35

September 2            (301)

Because thou hast spoiled many nations, all the remnant of the people shall spoil thee; because of men’s blood, and for the violence of [to] the land, of the city, and of all that dwell therein.—Hdb. 2: 8.

“The land” here means particularly God’s people, pictured by the land of Judah. From 1918 to the present the violence against 'God’s people has increased. Today in Germany, in Canada, in New Jersey and many other parts of the United States, violence continues against Jehovah’s witnesses. God’s “city” is Zion, that is, his organization, now represented on the earth by his remnant. Because of violence to Zion the Devil’s visible organization shall be spoiled. From the days of Jesus’ ministry on earth to this very day “the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence”. The account will be squared at Armageddon. “As Babylon hath caused the slain of Israel to fall, so at Babylon shall fall the slain of all the earth.”—Jer. 51:49. W 5/15/35

September 3            (305)

Cast not away therefore your confidence, which hath great recompence of reward. For ye have need of patience, that,-after ye have done the will of God, ye might receive the promise.—Heb. 10: 35,36.

Every one today who is faithfully proclaiming the testimony concerning Jehovah’s name and kingdom is looked upon with contempt by the rulers of all nations. The reproaches that have come upon God’s name and that fell upon Christ Jesus have also fallen upon all the faithful followers of Christ Jesus. Some suffer one indignity, and some suffer another. Let all of God’s witnesses take courage and stand shoulder to shoulder as one man, fighting for the gospel of the kingdom, because as one suffers such suffering is counted as to all. (1 Cor. 12: 26) The faithfulness of God’s people in standing together and serving Jehovah God will be an evidence to the enemy that they are in for destruction themselves.-Phil. 1: 27, 28. W 6/1/35

September 4            (285)

His goings were as of old. I saw the tents of Cushan in affliction; the curtains of the land of

Midian did tremble.—Hab. 3: 6,7, A.R.V.

Gog, Satan’s chief officer, assembles the wicked angels and wicked men at Armageddon, which surround Jehovah’s chosen people. It is certain that the assembly place of that wicked horde will be greatly disturbed. “Midian” means “contention, brawling”. The overthrow of the Midianites is a type of the destruction of Satan’s visible organization. When the tent curtains of the “Midianites” get to trembling, the stake pins will loosen and the guy ropes will slack, and the tents will collapse. Likewise the Devil’s organization will tremble, shake and fall when they learn that Jehovah is fighting against them. Nothing will be able to stand against the marching hosts of Jehovah. Habakkuk had a vision of it. God’s remnant shall in fact see it. W 6/15/35

September 5             (303)

Prophecy; whereunto ye do well that ye take heed, as unto a light that shineth in a dark place.—2 Pet. 1: 19.

Jehovah caused his law and his prophecy to be written. His law is written in plain language, that can be understood by his creatures. Prophecy he caused to be written so that it can be understood only in God’s due time, and then by those who love him. The law of God, as set out in his Word, is the light to guide men in the right way, showing them how they may maintain their integrity toward him. (Ps. 119: 105) Therefore it is written that the Scriptures point out the right way for man who devotes himself to God, that such a man may be thoroughly furnished unto all good works. (2 Tim. 3: 16,17) If a man strictly follows God’s Word to the very best of his ability and remains faithful and true to God under all circumstances, he thereby maintains his integrity toward Jehovah. Faithful men of old did that very thing. W 7/15/35

September 6            (323)

Thou didst march through the land in indignation, thou didst thresh the heathen in anger.—Hob. 3:12.

“The land” signifies the place of the habitation of the enemy. “Indignation” would indicate fires and burning anger, before which nothing could stand. With the execution of Jehovah’s indignation at Armageddon no one and no power will be able to stand. The battle is not ours, but it is the fight of Jehovah, and he will do the destroying through Christ Jesus. The most terrible beating the Devil’s crowd will then receive at the hands of Jehovah’s organization. It is Jehovah’s purpose to give terrible punishment to the forces of wickedness, and thus make an end of them for ever, and they will never rise up again. (Nah. 1: 9) The meaning of these prophecies is now revealed to those who faithfully serve Jehovah, that they may not faint amid persecution, nor slack their hand, but joyfully go on. W 7/1/35

September 7             (65)

Lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands.—Rev. 7: 9.

These have taken their stand on the side of Christ Jesus and Jehovah God, as shown, by the fact that they stand before the throne of God and the Lamb clothed in white robes. In 1918 God’s “precious corner stone” was laid in Zion in its completeness, when Christ Jesus was presented to Zion as Jehovah’s King. Learning this great truth and believing it, they hailed Jehovah’s anointed Ruler, Christ Jesus, as the world’s rightful King. Having palms in their hands symbolically says, This great multitude hails Christ Jesus as King and rightful Ruler of the world and the Savior of mankind. Manifestly these are not the footstep followers of Christ, that is, the remnant, but others who hear about Jehovah and his kingdom. W 8/1/35

September 8            (206)

1 the Lord have called thee . . . for a light of the Gentiles; to open the blind eyes.—Isa. 42: 6, 7.

Many sincere ones were in bondage to Satan’s organization, and it is Christ Jesus, Jehovah’s elect servant, that opens their eyes and brings them into the light. To accomplish the work of opening the blind eyes there must be a fight with Satan’s organization because that wieked one would not willingly agree to anything tending to open people’s eyes to a knowledge of the truth, but would bitterly oppose and continues to oppose all truth. Prior to the Lord’s coming to the temple the eyes of the faithful on earth were blinded concerning many things, as shown by Deuteronomy 29: 4. The deeper things of God’s Word came to them after they were gathered to the temple. Since then only those who have had their eyes opened and received God’s approval, having willingly obeyed, have been taught of God. W 9/1/35

September 9            (130)

He shall call to the heavens from above, and to the earth, that he may judge his people. Gather my saints together unto me.—Ps. 50: 4, 5.

Jehovah’s organization must of necessity be a militant body. While Jesus is the 'elect Servant’, and the one to whom Isaiah 61: 1, 2 is specifically applied, yet he could not perform all of that commission at the time of his first presence, in A.D. 33. He quoted part of that prophecy and applied it to himself, but omitted in the quotation the words “the day of vengeance of our God”. After he is enthroned Christ Jesus appears at the temple for judgment, which judgment includes not only the declaration of God’s vengeance but the execution thereof. Before him are gathered all who have covenanted to do God’s will and been called to the kingdom. Now the Lord calls not for sacrifice and formalism and sanctimoniousness, but calls for complete obedience.—Vss. 9-13. W 10/1/35

September 10            (155)

They shall hunger no more, neither thirst any more . . , For the Lamb, which is in the midst of the throne, shall feed them, and shall lead them unto living fountains of waters.—Rev. 7:16,17.

Christ Jesus at the temple as head of Jehovah’s capital organization now leads and feeds those who honestly put themselves under his leadership. He is the real Sun, “the Light of the world.” No more shall the great multitude, which stands “before the throne” (Vs. 9), hunger and thirst. Into the hand of the Lord Jesus all power is committed, and the Lamb of God shall be their shepherd. He is the real Shepherd-King, of whom King David was merely a type. (Ezek. 34: 23, 24) This great multitude or Jonadab company manifestly are those whom Jesus called his “other sheep”. All who come into and remain in Jehovah’s organization must be of one harmonious flock, whether in heaven or in earth. W 3/15/35

September 11            (101)

For the child shall be a Nazarite to God from the womb to the day of his death.—Judg. 13: 7.

Christ Jesus was wholly and completely obedient to God even unto the most ignominious death. Because of his faithfulness he was given the great and high position of “author of eternal salvation” and great Deliverer and Vindicator of God’s holy name. All who are born of God’s woman must likewise be faithful unto death if they would have part in the vindication of Jehovah’s name. One might temporarily be overreached by the enemy and quickly repent and receive forgiveness; but to separate himself from the Lord would mean his eventual end in destruction. The Nazarite vow enjoined on Samson’s mother shows that Jehovah’s organization would have on earth only a people entirely devoted to Jehovah. Faithfulness must begin from the time one is born of God’s organization and continue ever thereafter. W 11/1/35

September 12            (218)

The foolish said unto the wise, Give us of your oil; for our lamps are going out. But the wise answered, saying, Peradventure there will not be enough for us and you.—Matt. 25: 8, 9, R.V.

The wise, in substance, said: ‘We cannot comply with your request. We have no desire or inclination to divide our devotion, honor or service between God and man. We declare his purpose, including the day of his vengeance, and we refuse to compromise in any manner with any creature or any part of Satan’s organization.’ Had the wise virgins taken any other Course they would certainly have been completely set aside by the Lord. Partial activity or partial devotion to the Lord would not be sufficient. The Lord requires of those whom he approves full and complete obedience. (Acts 3: 23) The wise refused to divide their oil, and, doing so, were not acting selfishly, but with wisdom from above, and showing complete devotion to the Bridegroom. W 10/15/35

September 13            (196)

Behold, a young lion roared against him. And the spirit of the Lord came mightily upon him, and he rent him as he would have rent a kid, and

he had nothing in his hand. — Judg. 14:5,6.

The Lord’s little band of faithful witnesses here pictured by Samson and led by the then editor of The Watchtower slew the modern “young lion”, to wit, the so-called “Protestant” clergy. They had the Lord’s spirit, which God had mightily put upon them by Christ Jesus. They used the “sword of the spirit, which is the word of God”, with which to slay the lion. The death of the “young lion” did not result at the beginning of the controversy. The clergy continued to roar. This conflict continued until the World War came; then the Protestant “lion” died completely, in this: it went over body and all into the Devil’s camp and became part of the modern Philistines, the ecclesiastics operating fraudulently in the Lord’s name and against God. W 11/15/35

September 14            (157)

I will preserve thee, and give thee for a covenant of the people, to establish the earth.—Isa. 49: 8.

The commission of The Servant is here made known. The application is first to spiritual Israel, Christ Jesus being the guarantee of salvation unto the remnant thereof, and now later a guarantee “of the people” that go up with the remnant to God’s organization, that is, the people of good will, who constitute the “other sheep” mentioned by Jesus; and for these the elect servant is a guarantee. The time is come to make God’s name known in the earth and when his faithful ones must bear witness to his name. Therefore says the commission: “To establish the earth [(B.V.) to raise up the land].” The earthly condition of the remnant was trodden down of the Gentiles during the World War period. When released and established, the remnant “arise” and “shine” to the honor of Jehovah’s name. W 9/15/35

September 15             (24)

The shapes of the locusts were like unto horses . . . and their faces were as the faces of men. And they

had hair as the hair of women.—Rev. 9: 7, 8.

At 1 Corinthians 11: 14 the point is made that it is a shame for a man to have long hair, thus showing that long hair is a reproach; but with reference to the picture of Christ and his body members verse 6 reads: “If it be a shame for a woman to be shorn or shaven, let her be covered.” The reproaches pictured by Samson’s long hair come upon one by reason of his faithfulness and his unswerving devotion to Jehovah God. At Revelation 9: 7, 8 the followers of Christ Jesus, the faithful and the true, are likened unto locusts with faces of men with long hair. Thus the faithful ones are shown as wholly consecrated, devoted and separated unto God by a vow to do the will of God even unto death. Such willingly and gladly bear the reproaches that result by reason of faithful devotion. W 12/15/35

September 16            (19)

The heart of the righteous studieth to answer. —Prov. 15: 28.

Hence study is vitally necessary. If we believe that Christ Jesus is at the temple and that he and Jehovah are our Teachers, then we may know that these great Teachers have provided information today that we might grow in the knowledge of Jehovah’s will in wisdom and in spiritual understanding. Believing these things, every one of the temple class should be exceedingly diligent not merely in casually reading what is published, but in carefully studying and considering what God has caused to be published. We cannot show ourselves approved unto God unless we study the truth which he has revealed for our benefit. Those who are neglecting to study carefully the truth as it is unfolded are sorely neglecting the food which God has provided for them and by and through which their strength is derived. W i/15/35

September 17            (133)

And Samson . . . smote them hip and thigh with a great slaughter: and he went down and dwelt in the top of the rock Etam.—Judg. 15: 7, 8.

This also well pictures defeats inflicted upon modern Philistines during the Elisha period of the church. Following the “great slaughter’’Samson went to dwell in cliffs of the rock Etam. Etam means “place of ravenous birds’’, such as eagles. Samson preferred to dwell there rather than among his brethren, thus to show complete reliance upon Jehovah for protection and not to trust for help or protection from his weak-kneed faithless brother Israelites. Likewise Jehovah’s true and faithful servants have found refuge and consolation in the great “Eock of Ages’’, Jehovah, and not among those who are weak-kneed and faithless. Although surrounded by the beastly, ravenous organization of Satan, in the Great Eoek God’s people have been sheltered and protected. W 12/1/35

September 18            (199)

But the fig-tree said unto them, Should I leave my sweetness, and my good fruit, and go to wave to and fro over the trees?—Judg. 9:11, A.R.V.

Why should anyone, so greatly favored by Jehovah by being made part of the new nation, “go” to have part in the rule over this ungodly world? Should a Christian so do he would be refusing to express Jehovah’s judgment against Satan’s wicked organization. Hence he would be compromising with the Devil. God’s people today, by reason of enlightenment from his Word, are far better equipped than those of the world to put in operation an equitable rule among men; but to turn aside from their God-given commission and to yield to flatteries of men of this world by accepting or participating in holding office, would mean to fail in the purpose for which Jehovah has called them. They would fall into Satan’s flattering snare and be for ever destroyed. Hence they refuse to yield to worldly flattery or coercion. W 4/1/35

September 19            (261)

And they smote the host of the Philistines from Gib eon even to Gazer. And the fame of David went out into dll lands; and the Lord brought the fear of him upon all nations.—1 Chron. 14:16,17.

With the Hierarchy (modern Philistines) disgraced and destroyed, the honest people, including the ‘ ‘ Catholic population”, will seek Zion, God’s organization. David represents Christ Jesus, the Beloved of Jehovah. The fear of the Greater David, Christ Jesus, means the release of millions of “Catholic population” from bondage to the wicked Hierarchy. This calls to mind the words of John: “After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations.” The great multitude is beginning to be manifested. Many of this great multitude shall march away from the influence of the Catholic organization. The people of good will of all nations shall come and worship before the Lord. W 2/1/36

September 20            (292)

Lo, I raise up the Chaldeans . . . And they shall scoff at the kings, and the princes shall be a scorn unto them; they shall deride every strong hold; for they shall heap dust, and take it.-Hob. 1: 6,10.

It is these “kings” and “princes”, the political and commercial rulers, together with the clergy, that have conspired against the Lord and his anointed, and Jehovah says he will laugh at them and have them in derision. (Ps. 2: 2-5) He will bring them to nothing. (Isa. 40: 23; Ps. 76: 12) Satan’s visible organization has many apparent strongholds. All these are a joke, when compared with the ‘all power in heaven and in earth’ committed to Christ the King and mighty Warrior. No earthly or devilish stronghold will be able to hold out against the assault made by the Lord’s armies. Certainly God’s purpose is that his remnant keep these things in mind at all times, that they may now be strong in faith and bright in hope. W 5/1/35

He commanded, and it stood fast. The Lord bringeth the counsel of the heathen to nought.—Ps. 33: 9,10.

The day is here for the final test, and Satan’s hordes are bent on forcing all who serve God to become unfaithful, fall away and die. The enemy is certain to fail in his efforts. Those who love and serve Jehovah do not now lean to their own understanding, but they are trusting in the Lord; and, true to his promise, he is guiding them in the way they should go. Let the remnant in Germany, Quebec, New Jersey, and any other place on earth, and regardless of all manner of persecution, stand firm and rely confidently upon Jehovah. Persecution of the faithful will increase from now on until the great war. We should expect nothing else nor desire anything save what Jehovah permits. While within themselves the remnant are without strength to withstand the enemy, let each one remember that “the eternal God is thy refuge’’.—Dent. 33: 27. W 7/1/35

September 22            (285)

He beheld, and drove asunder the nations; and the eternal mountains were scattered; the everlasting hills did bow; his goings were as of old.—Hab. 3: 6, A.R.V.

Jehovah at Armageddon will level things. His remnant now pray and sing, when they see these things coming to pass, because they know that Jehovah will vindicate his name and that they shall have the privilege of being on his side and beholding his victory. His ways of long ago he can and will duplicate at Armageddon on a far grander scale than ever before. In the long ago past God performed certain acts which there in miniature vindicated his name, but at Armageddon his work will be strange and miraculous, beyond anything that has ever been done: when he comes forth to defend his cause and people he will “be his old self again”, and all creation shall know that he is the Almighty One. W 6/15/35

September 23            (58)

They feared as they entered into the cloud. And there came a voice out of the cloud, saying, This is my beloved Son: hear him.—Luke 9: 34,35.

One of the specific commandments given to the consecrated by the Lord Jesus at his coming to the temple is: “This gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in all the world for a witness unto all nations.” Some have thought they could ignore this command and still get into heaven; but all the Scriptures appearing upon the point show they cannot ignore this commandment, refuse to have part in the witness, and yet have entrance into the kingdom of heaven. Only those who obey receive the Lord’s approval. This was emphasized at the transfiguration vision by the words: “This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased; hear ye him”; that is, ‘obey him.’ To hear what the great Prophet now says means, not idleness, but diligence to perform the work commanded. W 7/15/35

September 24            (64)

I will preserve thee, and give thee for a covenant of the people, to establish the earth, to cause to inherit the desolate heritages.—Isa. 49: 8.

At verse 6 it is written: “Thou shouldest . . . raise up the tribes of Jacob,” the faithful remnant. The elect servant not only establishes the earth, but is commissioned “to cause to inherit” or {Roth.) “to bring into possession” the “desolate heritages”. This applies first to spiritual Israel, which had been dispossessed during the World War period. Such then become “trees of righteousness, the planting of Jehovah, that [his name may] be glorified”. “And they shall build the old wastes, they shall raise up the former desolations, and they shall repair the waste cities.” (Isa. 61: 3, 4) This waste had been committed during the World War period. The building up of God’s people, the elect, came first; then follows the work in behalf of the “other sheep”, the “great multitude”. W 9/15/35

September 25            (238)

And his brightness was as the light; . . . Before him, went the pestilence, and burning coals went forth at his feet. — Hob. 3:4,5.

"Christendom’s” sanitary and medical corps that have fought against diseases will be powerless at the time of Armageddon to stay the pestilence and disease. Jehovah God will smite the enemy therewith. All against his holy organization are pictured by the unfaithful Jerusalem; the faithful ones, by faithful Jerusalem. “Christendom,” having fought against the real servants of the Lord, shall suffer the pestilence and plagues which God has caused to be described in his Word, as at Zechariah 14: 12. The basic sense of “burning coals [margin: diseases] ” is that of burning, whether with hot coals, lightning or disease. Warning concerning these burnings has been given to the nations by Jehovah’s witnesses in obedience to the Lord’s commandments. W 6/15/35

September 26            (128)

Therefore are they before the throne of God; and they serve him day and night in his temple: and he that sitteth on the throne shall spread his tabernacle over them.—Rev. 7:15, A.R.V.

Now we see a company that exactly fits the description. They look to the throne of God and Christ, and to no other place. Therefore they are “before the throne” and in the sight of Jehovah and his King. They vote for God’s kingdom and participate in the publication work of advertising the King and the kingdom. They have the recognition of the throne, and God turns his favorable attention to them so that they may be hid in the day of his anger. Jona-dab being used as a type of this "great multitude”, and these of the great multitude being like Jonadab, God’s promise to Jonadab now applies to them: ‘ ‘ Therefore thus saith the Lord of hosts, the God of Israel, Jonadab the son of Rechab shall not want a man to stand before me for ever.”—Jer. 35:19. W 8/15/35

Samson called . . . and said, 0 Lord Eternal, remember me, I pray thee, and do thou strengthen me only this once, 0 God, that I may be avenged for one of my two eyes on the Philistines.—Judg. 16: 28, Leeser.

Such vengeance or vindication involves Jehovah’s witnesses because they are his representatives and are the ones the enemies reproach and against whom they conspire to bring about their destruction. The account must now be squared and his holy name vindicated. Jehovah did not authorize the Philistines to blind Samson, nor did he lay upon modern Philistines the duty of bringing about the blindness of his faithful servant class. The effort on the part of modem Philistines is therefore presumptuous before the Lord, for which sin they must answer. They have reproached his name by willfully misusing and ill-treating his witnesses. Therefore they must and will suffer destruction at the Lord’s hand. W 1/1/36

September 28            (23)

Turn you to the strong hold, ye prisoners of hope: even to day do I declare that I will render double unto thee.—Zech. 9:12.

In the dark period of the World War Jehovah’s people did not realize that their King had come to the temple. Not for some years thereafter did they learn and appreciate it. Then they did turn to Zion, the stronghold of which is Jehovah and his King and Vindicator. Those prisoners of hope and of Zion, being loosed in 1919 and brought into full accord with Zion at the inauguration of the new covenant, were united with the Lord in the temple. Throughout the temple they began to be enlightened and later came to an appreciation of the foregoing and other prophecies. Since being brought into the temple they appreciate that the Lord has rendered unto Zion, including themselves, a double portion. They are given a double portion of Elijah’s spirit. W 10/1/35

September 29           (175)

Take up a parable against him, and a taunting proverb against him, and say, Woe to him that increaseth that which is not his! how long? and to him that lad-eth himself with thick clay [pledges, R.V.] l—Hab. 2: 6.

The prophet cries out, “How long?” that is, How long will it continue? The answer is, Not very long now, because the day of the battle of Jehovah draws nigh. Therefore, says the Lord’s witness, ‘be patient, brethren.’ (Jas. 5: 7) The ruling element has gypped the people, who produce the wealth by bestowing labor upon that which God has provided for them, and then the ruling crowd has held back from the honest people what belongs to them. Thus the ruling element loads itself with burdens, pledges or heavy debts that will never be paid by them. Therefore God will require an accounting by them at Armageddon, and commands his witnesses to now take up the “taunting proverb” and say, “Woe to him!” W 5/15/35

September 30           (335)

And they shall know that I am Jehovah, when I shall lay my vengeance upon them.—Ezek. 25:17, A.R.V.

When the great multitude take a firm stand on the side of Jehovah God and his kingdom, and in obedience to his commandments continue to seek righteousness and meekness, they will suffer reproach at the hands of any and all of Satan’s agents remaining on earth, particularly those pictured by “the beast” and “the false prophet”. They will suffer because they are companions of those who have been and are persistently announcing God’s kingdom under Christ. Let all who love God and his King now have full assurance of faith that Jehovah’s time to establish his kingdom is here and has begun and all opponents that the Devil can muster cannot possibly prevent its complete establishment. Jehovah will rise up and fight the battles of his people, and rid earth of the Catholic Hierarchy and all the Devil’s representatives, to vindicate His name. W 2/1/36

October 1              (162)

Walk circumspectly, not as fools, but as wise, . . . because the days are evil.—JLph. 5:15,16.

The fool despiseth wisdom and instruction. (Prov. 1: 7) “The fool hath said in his heart, There is no God.” (Ps. 14: 1) Such do not say so by their mouths, but their motive or heart condition is determined by their course of action. Despising instruction they oppose the instruction that God gives to his people through his appointed method. Such opposers pursue their own selfish way, and hence are lawless. Being lawless, they violently oppose Jehovah’s witnesses. Being workers of lawlessness or iniquity, they thereby give evidence that they have no knowledge. Jehovah through Christ Jesus now teaches his people. No man can today successfully withstand the enemy’s assault and prove his own faithfulness and integrity toward God who fails or refuses to feed upon the spiritual food God has provided for his people. W 4/15/35

October 2              (249)

The people shall weary themselves for very vanity. For the earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the glory of the Lord, as the waters cover the sea. — Hab. 2:13, 14.

A knowledge of the truth will make manifest the glory, weight and supremacy of Jehovah God. At Armageddon Jehovah will fill all the earth with the unmistakable manifestation of his supremacy and terrible power, weight and greatness of himself, and thereby make all creation know that Jehovah is the Most High. Jehovah’s witnesses now spread the gospel message throughout “Christendom” by radio, books and other means, but that is a very small matter compared with what shall come to pass at Armageddon and which will disclose the glory of Jehovah. Before the thousand-year reign of Christ begins all must know that Jehovah God is supreme. Satan’s organization must be destroyed that all may know. W 6/1/35

October 3              (133)

Let fire come out . . . and devour Abimelech. And Jotham ran away, and fled, and went to Beer [Well], and dwelt there, for fear of

Abimelech. — Judg. 9:20, 21.

By putting Jotham high up on the mountain to deliver His message, Jehovah provided the means for his escape from the wrath of the men. of Shechem. This finds its greater fulfillment in this, that Jehovah has provided a way for his faithful witnesses to escape the wrath of Satan’s agents now on earth and that he will protect and preserve his faithful ones during the time of the great battle at Armageddon. The remnant find security in him who is the great Well of life and truth. He is their strong tower and refuge. They know that if they should venture out of his secret place of security they would be in danger of immediate destruction by the enemy. Their only place of safety is to remain close to the Lord by absolute and complete devotion to him. W i/1/35

October 4               (34)

Behold ye among the heathen, and regard, and wonder marvellously: for I will work a work in your days, which ye will not believe, though it be told you.—Hdb. 1: 5.

This “marvellous work’’ (Isa. 29:14; 28: 21) will be at the great battle of the day of God Almighty, and no unrighteousness shall stand. “Christendom” will not believe this prophecy. God’s remnant must now deliver the warning message to her in order that the hypocritical nations may be put on notice and have no excuse to say they had no opportunity to hear; and that those people of goodwill within “Christendom” may hear and flee to the place of refuge. “Christendom’s” ruling factors will not hear, but those who do hear are ‘marked in their foreheads’. Because the ruling factors fail or refuse to believe or obey God, such don the Devil’s identification garments and mark themselves for destruction. W 5/1J35

October 5              (156)

We have also a more sure word of prophecy; where-unto ye do well that ye take heed, as unto a light that shineth in a dark place, until the day dawn, and the day star arise in your hearts.—2 Pet. 1:19.

“Day Star” here means the “Morning Star”, which is Christ Jesus, the glorious King. (Rev. 22: 16) The rising of the “day star” clearly relates to the coming of Christ Jesus to the temple, and his sending forth his angels to direct the course of action to be taken by those on earth who are wholly devoted to God and his kingdom. The prophecies of the Scriptures are directed to his church. God, by the prophet, had said: “There shall come a Star out of Jacob, and a Sceptre shall rise out of [spiritual] Israel.” (Num. 24:17) Christ Jesus is “the Bright and Morning Star”, who proclaims the new day. It is those whose heart devotion is to God and his King that see. To these he makes known the meaning of his prophecy. W 7/15/35

October 6               (12)

Samson called unto the Lord, and said, 0 Lord GOP, remember me, I pray thee, and strengthen me, I

pray thee, only this once, 0 God, that I may be at once avenged of the Philistines.—Judg. 16: 28.

Jehovah’s faithful witnesses are determined to make the most of this day, regardless of the consequences that may befall them through man. Samson, whoUy blind, knew he must die. Now the Samson class, blind to everything save doing God’s will to the vindication of his name, know they must die. This they are glad to do and are determined to do out in the service of the Most High. They are so blind to everything else that they refuse to be turned aside to look at anything else. They declare: ‘This one thing I will do,’ that I may be a true follower of Christ. Threats, opposition, assaults, prison and ill-treatment will not deter them in carrying out their consecration vow to God. “Be thou faithful unto death.” This they are determined to do. W 1/1/36

October 7               (88)

Lo, a great multitude . . . cried with a loud voice, saying, Salvation to our God which sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb.—Rev. 7: 9,10.

When the people of earth of good will learn that the King of righteousness has come and that God has provided salvation by and through Christ’s blood: and his kingdom, and that there is no other means of salvation, they shout the praises of Jehovah, who is the Author of salvation, and devote themselves to his service. They do not remain mum, but vigorously join Jehovah’s witnesses, the remnant, in crying out the kingdom message. They have the good news which they have received at the mouth of Jehovah’s witnesses and which the witnesses have brought to the “sheep” class and have said to them: “Let him that heareth say, Come.” (Rev. 22: 17) And being thus invited this sheep class, the Jonadabs, do say to others: ‘Come and learn the only way of salvation.’ W 8/1/35

October 8               (61)

Their soul abhorreth all manner of meat; and they draw near unto the gates of death. Then they cry unto the Lord in their trouble; and he saveth.—Ps. 107:18,19.

The stubborn ones would not partake of spiritual food served on the Lord’s table, because they were spiritually sick and could not appreciate it. They did. not then discern and have not since discerned the true teachers, but look to men for instruction. Not partaking of “food convenient”, many who afterwards repented, as well as others who did not repent, drew near to the gates of spiritual death. (1 John 5: 16) Therefore, says Proverbs 10: 21, ‘the fools died for want of wisdom.’ Such do not serve and praise the Lord, and are at the very gates of death. Those remaining in this state of rebellion, died; others who had with them gone astray, and who afterwards repented, found mercy. Even if some of the temple fall into difficulty, when they discover it and turn quickly God’s mercy is extended to them. W 9/1/35

Thou didst strike through with his staves the head of his villages [chiefs (Roth.)]; they came out as a whirlwind to scatter me; their rejoicing was as to devour the poor secretly. — Hab. 3:14.

All parts of Satan’s organization, and particularly the chieftains, seek the destruction of Jehovah’s witnesses now. In due time Jehovah disarms them and uses their own weapons to inflict punishment upon them. The enemy concludes that scattering Jehovah’s witnesses would prove their undoing and would thus stop their work of giving testimony. Therefore the enemy or conspirators rush to the work of persecuting the Lord’s anointed. The remnant come to know that the grand rush of the enemy is futile, because God is their shield. Jehovah’s battle lines remain firm and unbroken, and Jehovah turns the enemy’s weapons against their own heads at Armageddon and scatters them. The remnant will see this. W 7/1/35

October 10              (2G7)

Loose the four angels that are bound at the great river Euphrates. And the four angels were loosed, that had been prepared.—Rev. 9:14,15, A.R.V.

During the World War period the faithful servant class were in prison or restraint by Satan’s organization. Their release took place in March, 1919. It was in 1927 that Jehovah’s witnesses were turned loose upon “Christendom” to do the work God had provided for them to do. “The four angels,” or Jehovah’s witnesses, scattered to the four corners of the earth, were now better prepared than they had previously been to carry the message of God and his kingdom to the people. That marked the beginning of a campaign calling upon the people to break away from bondage to Satan’s organization and declare themselves for Jehovah and his kingdom. The drying up of the river Euphrates followed, signifying that other bound ones would be released and march joyfully to Jehovah’s organization. W 10/1/35

October 11             (154)

The woman "bare a son, and called his name Samson: and the child grew, and the Lord blessed him. And the spirit of the Lord began to move him.-Judg. 13: 24,25.

Samson means “sunny, sunlike”, or, "desolator, destroyer.” Samson was a sunny, witty and happy-appearing ereature, and was also the desolator of the Philistines. Those whom he pictured are likewise sunny and pleasing to those who love God, and at the same time they are all desolators of the antitypical Philistines. Samson’s birth was the beginning of Israel’s deliverance, and corresponds with the time when Christ Jesus began to turn his attention to the things of the earth and began to prepare the way before the Lord, which time was from about 1878 onward. Samson therefore appears to represent the work of the Lord performed by and through his people during that period of time from 1878 onward and which is known as the Elijah work. W 11/1/35

October 12              (192)

The Lord hath called me from the womb; from the bowels of my mother hath he made mention of my name.—Isa. 49:1.

“From the bowels of my mother” means ‘from God’s woman or organization’, showing that Jehovah prepared his King and his kingdom before the birth and therefore the King must wait until God’s due time for him to go forth and rule. Isaac, a type of Christ Jesus, was named before his birth. Likewise the Greater Isaac, Christ Jesus the King, was named before his birth. Before the kingdom’s birth, in 1914, so “my name” was mentioned, to wit, The Servant. For forty years before 1918, and even for some time thereafter, identity of “The Servant” was in doubt, some thinking it to mean a man on earth. The purpose of the Servant is to give witness to the name of Jehovah and to vindicate Jehovah’s name, and this has been seen and understood only in recent years. W 9/15/35

October 13               (78)

They . . . have washed their robes, and made them white in the blood of the Lamb. Therefore are they before the throne of God, and serve him day

and night in his temple.—Rev. 7:14,15.

Daytime and nighttime means all the time; hence the great multitude serve Jehovah all the time, regardless of hours. They are not satisfied to work eight hours a day and quit on the strike of the clock and refuse to do what some call “overtime”, but are ready and respond to the call for service at any time day or night. Jehovah’s temple is his capital organization and therefore is on Mount Zion. To serve “day and night in his temple” the great multitude must come to Zion, God’s organization, with Jehovah’s witnesses, who are a part of the temple, and not worship at any worldly organization called “the church”. The great multitude must follow after Jehovah’s witnesses on the highway to Zion. W 8/15/35

October 14             (201)

He shall be holy, and shall let the locks of the hair of his head grow. All the days that he separateth himself unto the Lord he shall come at no dead body.—Num. 6: 5, 6.

The Nazarite vow shows that the faithful ones pictured by Samson do not touch the dead carcass of Satan’s organization, nor eat its unclean things, nor seek heart-cheering gladness from the wine of the “vine of the earth”, Satan’s organization, but derive joy from having part in honoring God and Christ and in participating in the vindication of Jehovah’s name. Samson said: “If I be shaven ... I shall become weak, and be like any other man.” Those devoted to Jehovah are unlike the men of the world, but if they put aside their love and devotion to him and thereby relieve themselves of the reproaches that come upon Christ’s followers, they become like other men of the world and no longer have God’s favor. W 12/15/35

October 15             (304)

They that were ready went in with him to the marriage feast; and the door was shut.-Matt. 25:10, R.V.

Shutting the door does not mean that no more would be admitted to the temple, but does mean that none of the disapproved can enter and therefore to all such the door is shut. No creature on earth is qualified to say that the door to the temple is now shut so completely that none can ever be admitted. Those pictured by Ruth and Esther were brought in. later, and certainly they must be approved before they can enter through the gates into the temple. From the time the temple was set up, the entrance thereto has been shut to all lawless or disapproved ones. The shutting completely of the gate or entrance to the kingdom is a secret of the Lord. As long as there is any danger of one’s being ousted from the temple the way must be open for some approved one to enter. W 10/15/35

October 16              (118)

God clave an hollow place . . . and there came water thereout; and when he had drunk, his spirit came again, and he revived: wherefore he called the name thereof En-hakkore, which is in

Lehi unto this day. — Judg. 15:19.

En-hakkore means “the fountain of the erier”, that is, the well of water provided for him that called upon Jehovah. That permanent spring of water, which God had brought forth for his name’s sake, became a memorial of his power and faithfulness toward those who called upon him and served him in spirit and in truth. How fitting is The Watchtower, and its kindred publications, as a means or channel of bringing refreshing truths to God’s servants. It is God’s provided instrument, and not man’s. Even to this day God continues to use the Watch Tower publications to bring forth refreshing waters of truth to sustain his people. The Lord’s faithful servants are fully assured that God, who has promised to sustain them, will always faithfully carry out his promise. W 12/1/35

For the Lord shall rise up as in mount Perazim, he shall be wroth as in the valley of Gibeon, that he may do his work, his strange work; and bring to pass his act, his strange act.—Isa. 28:21.

The work of Jehovah’s witnesses is merely to declare God’s message. The real work must and will be done by Jehovah in his own good way. No human institution could possibly wreck the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. God will completely wreck it. What took place at Mount Perazim and Gibeon foretells exactly what is to come to pass. It is the Lord's work, and whatsoever he begins he accomplishes. The presentday persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses by the Roman Catholic Hierarchy would, in time, necessarily result in the complete destruction of Jehovah’s witnesses and their work unless God himself intervenes; and he gives his word that he will rise -up and do that very thing. The faithful will take courage. W 2/1/36

October 18               (71)

On either side of the river was there the tree of life, which bare twelve manner of fruits, and yielded her fruit every month.—Rev. 22:2.

The supreme issue must now be settled for ever. The "trees” of Jehovah’s planting will now be put to the most crucial test. The Devil will put forth his greatest efforts to destroy these trees of God’s planting. In the exercise of his loving-kindness toward his own Jehovah now reveals to his faithful remnant the meaning of his many prophecies, that his faithful witnesses may be at the time fully assured that they are in the right way, and that their hope may be strong. For the benefit of these faithful ones the waters of truth are abundantly supplied by the Lord, and the witnesses are commanded to first drink deeply of these truths and then proclaim the meaning thereof to others, that these latter may have an opportunity to choose which side to take. W 4/1/35

October 19             (226)

Shew forth the praises of him who hath called you out of darkness into his marvellous light.—1 Pet. 2: 9.

The apostles were witnesses for Jehovah and were put to a violent death because of faithfulness in declaring the truth. Upon the Lord’s coming to the temple those faithful witnesses are first resurrected and gathered to him. Then the remnant on earth are gathered unto him to the temple, because these are taken out from the world for Jehovah’s name and they must be witnesses to his name. Every one who now enjoys the light of the temple of God was once in darkness in Satan’s world. Now these have been brought out of darkness into the light of God’s kingdom. Why? To show forth his praises. It is impossible for us to show forth God’s praises unless we have a knowledge of his will or purpose. Jehovah through Christ Jesus has now provided all the means for acquiring the desired knowledge. W i/15/35

October 20             (299)

Samson took hold of the two middle pillars upon which the house stood, and on which it was borne up, of the one with his right hand, and of the other with his left.—Judg. 16:29.

The Philistines thinking that Samson’s strength was broken, and not understanding that his long hair pictured the reproach upon a faithful servant and that for that reason God had given him strength again, they would only mock at his prayer and continue to reproach God. Likewise today the modern Philistines look upon Jehovah’s witnesses as a crowd of weaklings, and give no heed to their sayings and their testimony that is borne, but continue to scornfully laugh at that and reproach God's holy name. But the Samson class is full of faith, even as Samson by faith accomplished his work. The publication of Jehovah’s Word and name is all-important, and this must be done before the destruction of modem Philistines. W 1/1/36

Art thou not from everlasting, 0 Lord my God, mine Holy One? we shall not die. 0 Lord, thou hast ordained them for judgment; and, 0 mighty God, thou hast established them for correction.—Hob. 1:12. Satan’s organization has existed for a long while, but Jehovah is from old, without beginning, and his remnant implicitly trust in him, the Most High. Jehovah has “ordained them [i.e., the Chaldeans] for judgment”, to carry out his judgment. Those words foretell that now the remnant truly say: ‘0 Jehovah, thou hast ordained Christ to carry out the judgment work upon “Christendom” at Armageddon.’ God has also ordained, the wicked to be destroyed. “He that chastiseth the heathen, shall not he correct?” (Ps. 94: 10) Jehovah will convince all that he is the only mighty Judge, who is able to save and to destroy. (Jas. 4: 12) God’s remnant now know this, and they rejoice as they increase in knowledge. W 5/1/35

October 22             (321)

Blessing, and glory, and wisdom, and thanks giving, and honour, and power, and might, be unto our God for ever and ever. Amen.—Rev. 7:12.

This emphasizes the absolute requirements of Jehovah, that there shall be undivided devotion to him, and shows that all whom he approves are wholly devoted to him. All these acknowledge that their devotion for ever is for Jehovah God, because they say: “Unto our God for ever and ever.” They have not the slightest desire for one moment to compromise with the Devil and his crowd. Such must be the attitude of all creation that receives everlasting life, including, of course, those of the “great multitude”. The question that each creature must answer in due time is, “Am I on the side of the Devil or on Jehovah’s side?” There is no halfway ground, and no one can be honest with God and at the same time try to please the Devil’s crowd. W 8/15/35

October 23             (155)

Prophets have inquired and searched diligently, who prophesied of the grace that should come unto you. Unto whom it was revealed, that not unto themselves, but unto us they did minister. — 1 Pet. 1: 10,12.

Prophecy does not belong to any man. Prophecy belongs to Jehovah, and only in his due time can it be understood by man. Now God’s people see plainly that prophecy cannot be understood by any man until it at least begins to be fulfilled, and more then until after it is fulfilled. Jehovah God brings to pass events in fulfillment of his prophecy, and these physical facts, set alongside the prophetic words, enable those devoted to God, and in whose hearts the “Day Star” has risen, to see the meaning of the prophecy. No man can uncover prophecy; but Jehovah himself uncovers it, and this he does in his own way to his own people and gives them the information by and through Christ Jesus. W 7/15/35

October 24              (131)

For he commandeth, and raiseth the stormy wind, which lifteth up the waves thereof. Then they cry unto the Lord in their trouble, and he bringeth them out of their distresses. — Ps. 107: 25, 28.

Now the “great multitude” cry to Jehovah. They will continue to cry as the great storm approaches near and during it. When they see that their only means of salvation is at the hand of Jehovah through Christ Jesus, then they will cry in great eagerness to Jehovah. At Armageddon and into the midst of the great storm these will hang on to the Great Rock, Jehovah, and to his mighty Stone, Christ Jesus the King, and will cry out to be spared and saved. Jehovah has given his word that those who now seek meekness and righteousness may be hid and shielded during that great storm and preserved unto life. These Jonadabs are sincere in their devotion to Jehovah; otherwise he would not hear them and deliver them. W 9/15/35

October 25              (39)

Thou rodest upon thy horses, thy chariots of victory. Laid quite hare is thy bow.—Hab. 3: 8,9, Leeser.

Those saved and brought through the great tribulation will be so favored, not because of their own merits, but for Jehovah’s name’s sake. (Ps. 106: 8) Those who seek meekness and righteousness will be doing so in vindication of his name, and he will remember them in the time of stress. Universal war will result beneficially to those people on earth who take their stand on Jehovah’s side. His great army will be led by his chief horseman and mighty Warrior, Christ Jesus. All the warring hosts of heaven will follow him. That will be a war equipment that will completely wreck and destroy Satan’s organization, and Jehovah’s faithful remnant on earth will see it. Above this mighty army Jehovah will ride in supreme command, and before it Satan’s armies will be as weaklings. W 6/15/35

October 26             (332)

Hear, O my people, and I will speak; 0 Israel, and I will testify against thee [unto thee (R.V.)]:

I am God, even thy God.—Ps. 50: 7.

Thus Jehovah addresses the ones gathered before the Lord. The sanctuary must now be cleansed, and only those cleansed and approved may remain in the temple and are the ones com-missioned, and they must obey every commandment of the Lord, that great Prophet. These approved ones the Lord has brought out of bondage even as he did natural Israel, and they must have no other God besides him but be wholly obedient to Jehovah. No formal worship, nor character development, nor sanctimoniousness, nor any kind of like “sacrifice”, could put Jehovah under obligation to anyone. Only complete and unselfish devotion to Jehovah now pleases him. That which now is acceptable to God is joyful performance of his holy will. This is required of those gathered to him. W 10/1/35

October 27              (211)

Thou wentest forth for the salvation of thy people, even for salvation with thine anointed; thou wound-edst the head out of the house of the wicked, by discovering the foundation unto the neck.-Hab. 3:13.

Satan is the head of the lawless house or organization, the earthly foundation of which rests upon the combined elements of politics, commerce and religion. “The neck,” next to the head, seems to picture Gog, Satan’s chief officer, next to the Devil himself and who will be destroyed at Armageddon. Now Jehovah has uncovered and revealed to those who trust fully in him, and has identified, the entire house of the wicked from foundation to top or “the neck” of the thing. All must know at Armageddon what is the wicked organization, and that the Devil is the head of it. Jehovah will make this known by tearing down the house or organization, bringing it into complete disgrace, thereby removing doubts from all as to what constitutes the wicked organization. W 7/1/35

October 28             (392)

"When thou hearest the sound of a going in the tops of the mulberry trees,.. . then thou shalt bestir thyself: for then shall the Lord go out before thee, to

smite the host of the Philistines.—2 Sam. 5: 24.

The “mulberry trees” (Hebrew: “Weeping; the weeping trees”) might well picture the point at which comes a calamity upon the enemy that causes them to weep. David waited for orders from Jehovah, and Jehovah told him how he might know it was time for him to ‘bestir himself’, that is, to be on the alert and then move forward in attack. “The sound of marching” (Roth.) in the mulberry trees not only furnished a signal for David to act, but clearly indicates that Jehovah’s unseen host of angels there participated and led the assault against the enemy. This foreshadows that when the Greater David fights against the enemy, pictured by the Philistines, his armies in heaven will take part in the fight. W 2/1/36

Samson said, Let me die with the Philistines. And he bowed himself with all his might; and the house fell upon the lords, and upon all the people.—Judg. 16: 30.

Samson’s request to die with the Philistines showed he was not seeking something for himself but was willing to die in order to vindicate Jehovah’s name and prove his integrity to Jehovah. To have part in vindicating Jehovah’s name Jehovah’s witnesses must continue proclaiming his name. Such will bring down upon their heads the enemy’s wrath, but they prefer to die in such manner to any other way. They are determined to serve God with their last breath. Now in Jehovah’s strength given to them through Jesus Christ their Head, they go about doing God’s will, and they bend the “pillars” of the modern Philistines with all their might and continue to shout the praises of Jehovah as they do so. W1/1/36

October 30              (281)

All the evil of the men of Shechem did God render upon their heads: and upon them came the curse of Jotham the son of Jerubbaal.—Judg. 9:57.

Jehovah’s faithful remnant are commissioned to declare the curse of his wrath. Jehovah confirms the word pronounced by them. (Isa. 44: 26) This he will do at Armageddon. Why is it of great importance that his name be vindicated ? Because his name stands for justice, wisdom, love and power. No creature could live everlastingly in happiness unless he is in harmony with Jehovah’s name; hence that name is of the greatest importance to all creatures. The vindication of His name means that he must and will enforce his judgment against all who defame his name and oppose righteousness. Wickedness must perish and for ever end. Only the righteous shall survive. “The Lord preserveth all them that love him? but all the wicked will he destroy.”—Ps. 145: 20. W 4/1/35

October 31             (175)

And the Ford answered me, and said, Write the vision, and make it plain upon .tables, that he may

run that readeth it. — Hab. 2:2.

When Jehovah answers, that answer always gives satisfaction and strength. "I will worship toward thy holy temple, and praise thy name for thy lovingkind-ness and for thy truth; for thou hast magnified thy word above all thy name. In the day when I cried thou answeredst me, and strengthenedst me with strength in my soul.” (Ps. 138: 2, 3) It is a condition precedent to asking and receiving that one making the request be wholly devoted to Jehovah, be in Christ Jesus and have God’s Word abiding in him. It is the meek that Jehovah guides, those who make no claim for themselves to be wise and able to interpret the Lord’s prophecy. They trust wholly in him and diligently seek to learn from him his purpose. W 5/15/35

November 1            (35)

Giving thanks unto the Father, which hath made us meet to be partakers o/ the inheritance of the saints in light: who hath delivered us from the power of darkness, and hath translated us into the kingdom of his dear Son. — Col. 1:12,13.

It is Jehovah’s faithful witnesses, taken out of the world for his name and who continue faithful in performing their duties and obligations, that are made partakers of the inheritance of the saints in light. These rejoice in the light given to them at the temple, and delight to do God’s will. Shall we therefore give thanks and honor to any man for this knowledge and light gained by feeding upon the spiritual food provided? Most certainly, no; because to do so would be an insult to God, the One who through Christ Jesus at the temple has provided this spiritual food. Those who give honor and praise to a man for what truth they have received continue in the dark. W 4/15/35

November 2            (95)

Like as a father pitieth his children, so the Lord piti-eth them that fear him. For he knoweth our frame;

he remembereth that we are dust.-Ps. 103:13,14.

Our Teachers know what things we have need of. These needs God through Christ graciously provides. Jehovah’s witnesses are yet in the organism of flesh and know that in themselves is no strength and they cannot rely upon themselves. They fear God. As it is necessary for the human organism to have a certain amount of material nourishment, so must the mind feed constantly upon the spiritual food of God’s Word. Without feeding upon this the remnant would not be able to continue following after Christ. Certainly that is the reason our heavenly Father continues to feed his children. They must constantly have in mind the things necessary for them to do to maintain their own integrity and have a part in the vindication of God’s holy name. W 5/1/35

November 3           (322)

For the earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the glory of Jehovah, as the waters cover

the sea.—Hob. 2:14, A.R.V.

The masses of mankind have been kept ignorant of Jehovah, and therefore have not known and believed that Jehovah would manifest his glory at Armageddon; but when Armageddon is fought all creation, including those who have been in total ignorance, shall come to know that it is the power of the Supreme One, whose name is Jehovah, that has done this great and terrible thing. This knowledge will be known universally. All will come to know that Jehovah is God. The peoples of earth will not need to wait for the remnant of Jehovah’s witnesses to bring them the knowledge of God after Armageddon is over. What shall come to pass at Armageddon will furnish to all a knowledge of the supremacy of Almighty God. This kingdom gospel is preached now merely as a witness. W 6/1/35

And we know that all things work together for good to them that love God, to them who are the called according to his purpose.—Rom. 8: 28.

The word overrule does not appear in the Bible. Since God is unchangeable and his law changes not, the word overrule does not properly apply. To those called according to God’s purpose and who love him he makes all things to work to their good; but it must be remembered that the conditions precedent must first obtain, that is, one must love God and be one who is called according to his purpose. "When one discovers that he has taken a wrongful course, the only thing to do is to reverse his course of action, take the right way, ask the Lord’s forgiveness, and then diligently strive to do God’s will. Jehovah does not make different rules for different creatures; his rules are fixed and his creatures must meet the requirements in order to receive his approval. W 8/1/35

November 5            (74)

0 Jehovah, I have heard the report [(margin) fame] of thee, and am [wtzs] afraid: 0 Jehovah, revive thy work in the midst of the years.—Hab. 3: 2, A.R.V.

By the revelation of prophecy and the making plain of the battle-types of the times of old to Jehovah’s witnesses, these have truly today 'heard the report of thy fame’, and by faith see that Jehovah’s fame at Armageddon will be universal. Not until the Lord’s coming to his temple do the remnant get an understanding of his purpose. Being taught of God they learn that his purpose is to make a glorious name for himself and that the supreme issue or question for settlement is the vindication of his holy name, and in that vindication his supremacy will be made known to all. Armageddon truly is Jehovah’s fight. Now the remnant have heard Jehovah’s words telling of the battle of Armageddon that draws very near, and they stand in awe and fear before the Lord. W 6/15/35

November 6           (156)

A light that shineth in a dark place, until the day dawn, and the day star arise in your hearts: knowing this first, that no prophecy of the scripture is of any private interpretation.—2 Pet. 1: 19, 20.

“Day Star” here means the “MorningStar”, Christ Jesus. “Star” means prince, which is one of the titles given to the beloved Son of God. He is the “ Prince of Peace”, upon whose shoulder rests the government of the world. Those whose heart devotion is to the King and Prince and who are anxious to obey him are the ones favored by receiving an understanding of the prophecies written in olden times. If a man’s heart is not fully devoted to the King he cannot understand and appreciate prophecy. Those who are fully devoted to God and his King prove their devotion by keeping his commandment; therefore they joyfully go forth to deliver the testimony of Jesus Christ according to God’s commandment. W 7/15/35

November 7            (227)

Thou didst walk through the sea with thine horses, through the heap of great waters.—Uab. 3:15.

The seas of the enemy cannot retard the onward march of Jehovah’s victorious warriors. (Ps. S3: 4) Satan and his crowd have misused the natural seas. That wicked one, who has alienated the symbolic seas from Cod, claims them for himself. Neither belongs to Satan. “The sea is [Jehovah’s], and he made it; and his hands formed the dry land.” (Ps. 95: 5) The sea does not belong to Big Business. At Armageddon Jehovah can and will walk through the seas according to his will, and nothing can prevent him. Even now Jehovah will have his witness work done to completeness, according to his will, and all opposition to it shall not succeed. Jehovah has given to the people whom he has selected for his name a message, and he will see to it that they deliver it. “I am the Lord thy God, that divided the sea, whose waves roared.”—Isa. 51:15. W 7/1/35

He brought them out of darkness and the shadow of death, and brake their bands in sunder.—Ps. 107:14.

Because of putting their trust in men and fearing men, they had fallen under the power of the Devil’s organization. The outlook was very black and distressing, and therefore they were in "the shadow of death”. Jehovah heard their cries. By his elect servant Christ Jesus he dispelled the darkness and gave them light when he gathered them to the temple. While sitting in darkness they were marked for death by the enemy, hence "appointed to die”. Satan’s crowd was determined to destroy Jehovah’s faithful people during the World War and afterwards, as other scriptures show. When the war ended, Satan’s crowd did not voluntarily remove the restraint or prison condition and release the Lord’s people, but the Lord himself "brake their bands in sunder” and released his own who were prisoners. W 9/1/35

November 9           (208)

These are they that come out of the great tribulation, and they washed their robes, and made them white in the blood of the Lamb.—Rev. 7:14, A.R.V.

Their "robes” identify them as on the Lord’s side. These saw they were under Satan’s organization and that there was need for cleaning themselves up by getting out. The shed blood of Christ Jesus is the basis for forgiveness of sins and for God to forgive uncleanness. By believing that Christ Jesus’ shed blood is the redemptive price of mankind, and by consecrating themselves to do God’s will, based upon such belief, and by serving, worshiping and obeying the Lord, and not men, these take their stand on the side of Jehovah and participate in his service. That is the only course that would give them a white and clean appearance in God’s sight. No man can take his stand on Jehovah’s side without believing in the shed blood of Christ as the means of salvation. W 8/15/35

November 10            (87)

The righteous shall see it, and rejoice; and all iniquity shall stop her mouth. Whoso is wise, and will observe these things, even they shall understand the lovingkindness of the Lord.-Ps. 107:42,43.

A wise man is one who humbly seeks to know Jehovah and to obey implicitly Jehovah’s commandments and to do so quickly. Such a wise one watches for the Lord’s leadings and gladly responds to his commandments as soon as lie hears and understands them. Jehovah’s witnesses take that course. Likewise the great multitude of Jonadabs must see and appreciate the Lord’s dealings with them, and they rejoice and are diligent in serving Jehovah, “day and night,” that is to say, all the time. (Rev. 7: 15) These being formed into God’s organization, all join in the praise and service of Jehovah because they understand and appreciate the loving-kindness of the Most High. W 9/15/35

November 11            (52)

He . . , might deliver all them who through fear of death were all their lifetime subject to bondage.—Heb. 2:14,15,. A.R.V.

To participate with Christ Jesus in vindicating Jehovah’s name the remnant must be delivered and purged of all fear of the Devil or any of his agents. Now he and his crowd assault Jehovah’s people more vigorously than at any time, and yet, without fear of man or devil, but trusting wholly in the Lord, they press on fulfilling His commandments. They are not under Satan’s organization and have no fear. They know that Satan may actually kill their organism, but only God can destroy their right to life. For this reason Jesus warns them to fear not him that can kill the body, but only Him who can destroy the right to life in Gehenna. Trusting implicitly in Jehovah and his Vindicator, the faithful remnant have been delivered and no more fear the Devil and his agents. W 10/1/35

November 12            (114)

The Lord blessed him. And the spirit of the Lord began to move him at times in the camp of Dan between Zorah and Eshtaol.—Judg. 13: 24,25.

The Danites and Philistines maintained military Camps near by each other. If Manoah was in the military service, doubtless the young man Samson was at the army post with his father. This experience would instill in the young man the spirit of enmity toward the Philistines and create the fighting urge within him against the enemy. Samson appears to foreshadow John the Baptist, and the John-the-Baptist class. (Luke 1: 15) From the beginning of the John-the-Baptist work onward those who maintained their integrity toward God and remained faithful had instilled in them the spirit of war against the enemy, praying constantly and hoping for the day when the Lord will accomplish complete destruction of the enemy and the full deliverance of those who love him. W 11/1/35

November 13            (218)

Afterward came also the other virgins, saying, Lord, Lord, open to us. But he answered and said, Verily

I say unto you, I know you not.—Matt. 25:11,12.

These foolish ones had been "virgins” when the Lord appeared and began his reign, but now they were ravished by the Devil’s organization, and thus lost their virginity; in fact they then became only nominal virgins. The Devil’s crowd went after them, and they fell for the blandishments of such. Later these nominal virgins came asking the Lord to disregard his fixed rules and let them slip into the kingdom. But the Lord has refused to give them the anointing, the "new name”, and understanding of his presence and of other prophecies, and the privilege of carrying the message and of being persecuted by Satan’s organization for the Lord’s name’s sake. The foolish have been in the dark since they went their foolish way. Their lamps are gone out. W 10/15/35

November 14           (282)

And he said unto them, Out of the eater came forth food, and out of the strong came forth sweetness.—Judg. 14:14, Leeser,

The sweetness is not inherent in “the strong”. It is the killing of the lion-like crowd that prey on the defenseless that is a ‘sweetness like unto honey' that comes to those who faithfully follow the Lord Jesus Christ. It is sweet because such is a vindication of Jehovah’s name. To those who had part in the Elijah work of the church it is sweetness to know that the so-called “Protestant” clergy can no longer deceive those honest people who form the “great multitude” and who love the Lord. The Protestants had been a strong organization against the Roman Hierarchy and had been turned by the Devil to war against Christ's true followers. But now, they ceasing to exist as Protestants, out of their decease came sweetness to Christ's true followers, because truth, prevailing, vindicated Jehovah’s name. W 11/15/35

November 15            (336)

ho, I raise up the Ohdldeans . . . Then shall he sweep by as a wind, and shall pass over and be guilty, even

he whose might is his god.—Hdb, 1: 6,11, E.V.

Jehovah by Christ Jesus will make a whirlwind finish of “Christendom” at Armageddon. The Lord will be very offensive to unfaithful “Christendom”, and thus will “be guilty”, or “offend”. {Auth. Ver.) If an earthly general wins a battle, he claims the credit for it, even though he may be far in the rear. But Christ will give glory and credit to his Father Jehovah. ‘ ‘ This his violence is due to his God. ’ ’ {ftoth.) “This is the strength of my God.” {Sept.) The credit for the victory at Armageddon will be given to Jehovah. (Ps. 110: 5) “For the battle is not yours, but God’s.” (2 Chron. 20: 15) It is Jehovah, the almighty God, that is to be vindicated; hence he backs up ■with his unlimited power his beloved Son, executing his orders to the vindication of his name. W 5/1/35

November 16            (63)

And Samson said, With ths jawbone of an ass, heaps upon heaps, with the jaw of an ass have I slain a thousand men.—Judg. 15:16.

Samson was not boasting of his own power, but giving glory to Jehovah, who had sustained him. He had relied upon God, and not upon the instrument he held in his hand. That instrument having served his purpose, he had no further use for it; “he east away the jawbone out of his hand, and called that place Ramath-lehi.” (Vs. 17) “Lehi” means “a jawbone”, and the place was so named after he slew the Philistines. “Ramath-lehi” means “lifting up of the jawbone”, that is to say, using it then and there to vindicate Jehovah’s name by slaying his enemies. Thus Samson memorialized the place of victory to the vindication of Jehovah. This shows that the proper thing for faithful servants to do is to always give glory to God for his sustaining grace and power and never honor man. W 12/1/35

November 17            (162)

Herein is our love made perfect, that we may have boldness in the day of judgment.—1 John 4:17.

Every one who enters fully into the kingdom must be a witness to the truth and deliver the testimony with boldness and without fear of man or devil. Let Jehovah’s witnesses think of themselves soberly, as they ought to think. Why should a witness for the Most High be abashed and tremble in the presence of the harsh rulers of Satan’s world, or be arrogant in the presence of the most lowly person? To think soberly means that Jehovah’s witnesses must keep in mind, in substance, this: By Jehovah’s grace I am his witness. Back of me is unlimited power as long as I am acting according to his will I must expect the enemy to persecute me, and I know that my God is able to deliver me when and how it pleases him. I will continue to declare his name and kingdom regardless of what man may do to me. W 4/15/35

For not he that commendeth himself is approved, but whom the Lord commendeth.—2 Cor. 10:18.

It is even, true that men who desire to appear in eyes of others as models of goodness, chastity and piety, which models will be followed ac examples, level criticism against fellow men to draw attention to themselves. Such is one form of selfishness and hypocrisy. Such creatures fear men and, having men’s persons in admiration, call attention to mistakes and derelictions of fellow men who as Christians are trying to do right, hoping to hear said of themselves: ‘Behold, what a good man he is! what a high standard he sets!’ The motive prompting men thereto is entirely a selfish one. Others are thus deceived, but God knows who are the just and true ones. Whomsoever Jehovah uses and approves cannot properly be criticized by men. The servant of Jehovah is responsible to hiin, and not to man. W 1/1/36

November 19            (39)

David smote them there. Then David said, God hath brohen in Upon mine enemies by mine hand, like the breaking forth of waters: therefore they called the name of that place Baal-perazim.—1 Chron. 14:11.

It was as the onrush of a mighty flood which scatters and destroys everything in its path. Compare this with Isaiah 28: 17: “Hail shall sweep away the refuge of lies, and the waters shall overflow the hiding place.” This indicates that God would cause his message of hard and smiting truths to rush down on the enemy, and this accompanied by the exercise of his great power, in which he will destroy the refuge of lies behind which modern Philistines have hidden and carried on their work and will completely wipe out their organization. In his judgment upon modern Philistines, the Roman Catholic Hierarchy, not only will its lying schemes and wickedness be exposed to view of honest people, but the organization will be brought into disgrace and destroyed. W 2/1/36 His delight is in the law of the Lord; and in his law doth he meditate day and night. And he shall be like a tree planted by the rivers of water, that bring-eth forth his fruit in his season.—Ps. 1: 2, 3.

Trees of divers kinds grow in the forest, some for good and some for less good, and some for evil. In the Scriptures trees are used to symbolize living creatures, and whether for good or for wickedness is disclosed by their relationship to Jehovah God. The chief one among all the “trees” of creation is Christ Jesus, the planting of Jehovah God and always righteous. The members of God’s capital organization under Christ are “trees” planted by Jehovah for his glory and counted righteous. These are planted by the Lord when he sets them in his organization, and if they continue ever thereafter faithful and true to the Most High they are “trees of righteousness, the planting of the Lord, that he might be glorified”. W 3/15/35

November 21            (157)

Thon hast magnified thy word above all thy name. —Ps. 138:2.

Formerly Christians looked forward with gladness to the day of their own salvation, but they had little or no understanding that Jehovah’s chief purpose is to magnify and vindicate his holy,name. But now, in the present day, when vindication of- his name is at hand, and when Armageddon draws near, God confirms his Word which his witnesses have heard and published, and he will at Armageddon vindicate both his Word and his name to his praise and honor. Joyful now are those who continue to publish Jehovah God’s fame and Word. They cannot and will not keep back the song. They see and appreciate the unfolding of prophecy, and together lift up their voices and with one accord proclaim praises of his holy name. (Isa. 52: 8) This they must and will continue to do until God directs otherwise. W 6/15/35

November 22            (93)

Woe . . . Thou hast consulted shame to thy house by cutting off many people, and hast sinned against thy soul. For the stone shall cry out of the wall, and the beam out of the timber shall answer it.—Hab. 2: 9-11.

“Christendom” has closed her eyes and ears to God’s Word. By the laws made and executed by her dictators she now seeks to slay all those who speak the truth of and concerning God and his kingdom. Her avaricious and covetous spirit is of Satan. Her ruling element seek now to strengthen the walls of her house and make them proof against the sound of God’s message. But now every part of that structure will cry out, and Jehovah will hear those cries and by his Executioner he will completely destroy the oppressors. Their strong-arm squad and great military powers will avail them nothing. Jehovah can and will make the very stones to cry out. W 5/15/35

November 23            (61)

Trustee not in a friend, put ye not confidence in a guide; keep the doors of thy mouth from her that lieth in thy bosom [Delilah the betrayer].—Mic. 7: 5.

Did Samson show weakness and make a mistake by disclosing his secret to Delilah? No; because he was playing his part in the prophetic drama foreshadowing that the Samson class at the end of the world would make a grievous mistake. The “evil servant” class (pictured by Delilah) saw that the opportunity was ripe to entrap “Samson” and destroy his work, and thus bring themselves into prominence and make themselves secure with the rulers. So they said to the modem Philistines: “The Samson class will insist on their consecration to God as against the government when put to the real test. Their strength is in that they have set God’s law above that of earthly governments. They have disclosed this fact to us. Now is the time to get them in the trap. Come up this once and we will get them. ’ ’ They came, in 1918. W 12/15/35

For he received from God the Father honour and glory, when there came such a voice to him from the excellent glory, This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased-2 Pet. 1:17.

The transfiguration vision began to have fulfillment at the time of the Lord Jesus’ appearing at the temple for judgment. At that time he began to exercise his power as King, Priest, Prophet and Teacher. From that time forward there must be a wider witness given to the message concerning Jehovah and his kingdom, and the followers of Christ Jesus, the anointed ones, must from that time onward be diligent in bearing testimony, that is to say, bearing the fruit of the kingdom before others. It is from that time onward that those who hear the message that the King has come and his kingdom begun must also obey by taking up the glad tidings and proclaiming them to others; “let him that heareth say, Come.” W 7J15/35

November 25            (236)

Although . . . the fields shall yield no meat; . . . yet I will rejoice in the Lord, I will joy in the

God of my salvation.—Hdb. 3:17,18.

The world-wide depression affects Jehovah’s witnesses somewhat, in this, that they are compelled to practice the strictest economy to provide the things decent for themselves, but they are not so much concerned about temporal blessings. They are seeking first the kingdom of God, and according to his precious promise the things needful for them he supplies. Here at the temple the Lord has enlightened his people and made them strong and bold to go forth as his witnesses. The call for workers has not fallen off. On the contrary, the response has been greater; the witness has continued to increase. Continuous forward movement of Jehovah’s witnesses, and their feeding upon precious food which he has provided, cause them to shout and jump for joy. W 7/1/35

November 26            (40)

Thou mayest say to the prisoners, Go forth; to them that are in darkness, Shew yourselves.—Isa. 49: 9.

The prisoners here are, first, the original ones made into the “faithful and wise servant’’ class; and, second, those of the Ruth and Esther class, who are brought out of prison and made part of the remnant; and, third, the people of good will, the great multitude. Each class in their turn are addressed by God’s Elect Servant, who says to them, “Go forth,” not merely out of literal prison houses, but out from Satan’s organization; and this is done shortly preceding the time of Armageddon. These three classes were in darkness. They must ‘show themselves’ by making a public appearance and public declaration that they are out of harmony with Satan’s organization, that they are out of his prisoner organization and are on Jehovah’s side, and that they are living testimonials to the name of Jehovah; and thus they must let their light shine.—Eph. 5:8. W 9/15/35

November 27            (86)

Therefore are they before the throne of God, and serve him day and night in his temple: and he that sitteth on the throne shall dwell among them.-Eev. 7:15.

Their continuous service shows that the great multitude do not compromise with Satan’s organization at any time, and completely negatives the claim that they do compromise. With Jehovah, and not with Satan, is the place of habitation of all who love and Serve God. Christ now begins his rule even amid his enemies. By this rule all of Jehovah’s organization dwell under His protection; he “will tabernacle over them”. (T>iag.) Thus the Jonadabs or “great multitude” are hid in the day of God’s wrath. The Christ stands in the tabernacle of God. Through Christ Jehovah dwells with and overshadows the great multitude for their protection and relief. Jehovah thus dwells with them representatively through Christ because they have fled there. W 8/15/35

November 28            (28)

I lay in Zion for a foundation a stone, a tried stone, a precious comer stone, a sure foundation: he that believeth shall not make haste.—Isa. 28: Id.

The faithful anointed ones, who fully trust in and serve Jehovah, are here told that if they are devoted to God they need .not "make haste”, not be unduly excited and disposed to run ahead of the Lord, but to wait upon him that in due time he will act, and his action in this behalf will take place after he has laid in Zion his Stone, Christ Jesus the King enthroned; then He will take positive and unequivocal action against the liars. In 1918 Jehovah laid in his royal organization the Chief Corner Stone. It becomes the ‘stumbling stone’ to all those hypocritical pretenders, the religionists. Chief among these who claim to serve God and in fact serve the Devil is the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. The laying of this Corner Stone fixes the time when Jehovah would begin to take account with that wicked organization. W 2/1/36

November 29             (11)

Offer unto God thanksgivingy and, pay thy vows unto the Most High.—Ps. 50:14.

The remnant must now perform their covenant. There can be no dividing of service and devotion, nor any compromise with the world. If the servant class now give their full devotion to Jehovah God he will not bring down the wrath of Satan’s crowd upon them. Therefore he says: “Call upon me in the day of trouble; I will deliver thee, and thou shalt glorify me.” (Vs. 15) Clearly this implies a fight while the faithful servant class continue to declare the vengeance of our God. All of the servant class now vigorously proclaim the day of his vengeance, whereupon all those of good will, hearing the message, flee from Satan’s organization and take refuge in God’s organization. The “other sheep”-, who escape from prison and find that refuge, hear the message and retell it to others. It is a war to the end. W 10/1/35

November 30           (121)

Thou seest many things, hut thou observest not; his ears are open, but he heareth not. It pleased Jehovah, for his righteousness’ sake, to magnify the law, and make it honorable.—Isa. 42:20,21, A.R.V.

God’s remnant are now the objects of all manner of abuse, but, like Samson, the world is not worthy of them, and continuing faithful unto the end they will receive and obtain a good report and an everlasting approval of Jehovah. (Heb. 11:38,39) For their encouragement God caused the apostle to write to those continually devoted to him and faithful in his service: “If ye do these things, ye shall never fall; for so an entrance shall be ministered unto you abundantly into the everlasting kingdom of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ.” (2 Pet. 1: 10,11) Jehovah’s servant class, blind to everything of this world, now has a clear vision of the glorious kingdom under Christ, which will vindicate God’s holy name. W1/1 /36

December 1            (330)

He will make my feet like hinds’ feet, and he will make me to walk upon mine high places. To the chief singer on my stringed instruments.—Hab. 3:19.

David uttered a like song when Jehovah delivered him from the enemy’s hand. (Ps. 18; 31-46) In this prayer-song of the remnant the chief singer would represent Christ Jesus, Jehovah’s Messenger at the temple, who oversees and directs the temple singers, Jehovah inspired Habakkuk to dedicate the prayersong to the great Vindicator of Jehovah’s name; which fact implies that the remnant, the feet members of the Vindicator, must take their signals from him and sing. They are now singing a stanza of the “new song”. (Rev. 14: 1-3) The time is near when earth’s peoples, who have heard the sound of the voice of Jehovah’s witnesses proclaiming his name and kingdom, will know that Jehovah sent these singers among them, “that a prophet hath been among them.”— Ezek. 33; 32, 33. W 7/1/35

December 2            (139)

Now rejoice . . ., end fill up that which is behind of the afflictions of Christ.—Col. 1:24,

Each one who enters into the kingdom must he changed from human to spirit organism. What difference does it make how such die, just so they are faithful to God and his kingdom? Satan persecuted Jesus and his apostles for declaring the kingdom of God, which kingdom will destroy Satan and his organization. Likewise Satan and his earthly agents now persecute Jehovah’s witnesses because they deliver the testimony of Jesus Christ which is committed to the remnant. The remnant must deliver this testimony or declaration of war against Satan. It is a glorious fight, and will end in a glorious victory for Jehovah and his Christ. The faithful followers of Christ Jesus now rejoice to fill up the sufferings left over and to be received by the faithful ones at the present time. W 4/15/35

December 3            (204)

Consider mine enemies; for they are many; and they hate me . . . Let integrity and uprightness preserve me; for I wait on thee.—Ps. 25:19-21.

How would it have been possible for the remnant to maintain their integrity toward the Lord God if Satan had been bound prior to now and there had been no assaults upon Godh people? Job maintained his integrity under great stress, and that foreshadows that the remnant must do the same thing. They must withstand the enemy; therefore says the scripture: “We must through much tribulation enter into the kingdom of God.” (Acts 14: 22) The cries unto God because of the violence heaped upon them have not been displeasing to him. God caused his prophets aforetime to record the words that apply to the consecrated at the end of the world, a knowledge and understanding of which now gives to the remnant courage, strength and hope, to maintain integrity. W 5/1/35

December 4            (292)

For the vision is yet for the appointed, time, and it hasteth toward the end, and shall not lie: though it tarry, wait for it; .because it will surely come, it will not delay.—Hdb. 2: 3, A.R.V.

The vision does not fail of fulfillment, nor prove to have been merely an imagination of false prophets. It is not of peace, but of war, that is, the final war. There is much evidence that the final end is near. There was a tarrying or hesitation at 1918, when the World War was stopped, but there will be no tarrying concerning the final combat. It will not be at all behind time, but will be exactly on schedule and will arrive when the worldly-wise say: ‘Now we have peace and safety.’ There is no delay in the vision’s fulfillment; but it is Jehovah’s expressed will “that the witness work must be done before Armageddon, and, while doing that work, his faithful remnant must have patience. W 5/15/35

December 5            (312)

And the vine said unto them, -Should I leave my new wine, which cheereth God and man, and go to wave to and fro over the trees?—Judg. 9:13, A.R.V.

Jehovah’s witnesses are now privileged to participate in gathering the "vine of the earth” preparatory for its destruction. Should these, who have received the anointing of the Lord, "go [and touch the unclean thing of ‘Christendom’] to be promoted over the trees” of Satan’s organization, it would mean their unfaithfulness to God, and they would lose all opportunity of joyfully participating in vindicating Jehovah’s name, also all the precious things promised by the Lord. They must be complete overcomers in order to enjoy the promises. Christ Jesus has flatly rejected "Christendom’s” terms, and his faithful.fol-lowers, the remnant, must do likewise.. In obedience to God’s commandment they must continue to deliver testimony, without apology to anyone, nor asking permission of any creature to do so. W d/1/35.

But Jehovah is in his holy temple: let all the earth keep silence before him.—Hdb. 2:20, A.R.V.

This implies a time of tumult, clamor, speechifying and propaganda among the nations. Today the clamor and tumult increases and every effort is made by the worldly crowd to silence Jehovah’s witnesses; but Jehovah says to those who oppose him and his message: “Hold thy peace at the presence of the Lord God; for the day of the Lord is at hand. ” (Zeph. 1:7) The command is to all the earth to “keep silence”; but that does not mean Jehovah’s witnesses, because they are specifically commanded to carry Jehovah’s message to the people. “The earth” means the official element that controls the nations and refuses to hear the truth, but that, on the contrary, puts forth strenuous efforts to stop Jehovah’s witnesses from publishing the truth. The testimony to the name of Jehovah must proceed with zeal and vigor. W 6/1/35

December 7            (227)

And all the angels were standing round about the throne, and about the elders and the four living creatures; and they fell before the throne on their faces, and worshipped God.—Bev. 7:11, A.R.V.

All of Jehovah’s organization are here giving praise and worship to God. This they do regardless of all opposition. They do not ask any creature or any part of Satan’s organization as to how they shall worship God and when, but all these of Jehovah’s organization do worship God according to his commandments. Thus it is seen that it would be entirely contrary to God’s will for Jehovah’s witnesses to ask permission of any of the worldly organization or for a license to engage in preaching the gospel. All of these faithful ones of Jehovah have decisively settled it as to whom they will worship, and therefore they worship Jehovah God in spirit and in truth. They now bear testimony before the people. W 8/1/35

Was Jehovah displeased with the rivers? Was thine anger against the rivers, or thy wrath against the sea, that thou didst ride upon thy horses, upon thy chariots of salvation?—Hdb. 3: 8, A.R.V.

The “sea” symbolically is that which gives support to and bears up Satan^Js oppressive organization on earth. Its ruling factors, acting by Satan’s will and power, hold the sea in control and use it. God’s hottest anger or wrath is against such ruling factors, that exploit the people and carry on their merchandise on the sea. Supporters of Satan’s wicked rule must feel Jehovah’s strong hand. After Armageddon there shall be “no more sea”. Horses and chariots are symbols of war equipment, and this shows that it is in the time of ‘the war of the great day of God Almighty’ that salvation comes, and that it is to those people on God’s side, and that the victory in that great battle is with Jehovah God. W 6/15/35

December 9             (23)

That will I seek after; that I may dwell in the house of the Lord all the days of my life.—Ps. 27' 4.

What more could we ask or desire than to be in the fight on Jehovah’s side? We know he is going to win and to deliver those faithful to him. The Lord is in his holy temple; the remnant are gathered unto him at Armageddon; the war is at hand, and persecution will continue upon Jehovah’s witnesses; but they will fear neither man nor devil, regardless of all the vicious laws now existing or being enacted and enforced against the Lord’s anointed. Regardless of all the cruel persecution and reproaches that come upon them, none of the remnant will quake or fear now, nor will they slack their hand in the work to announce the kingdom. This is a most blessed fight, and blessed is he that hath a part therein and remains true and faithful to the Most High. Since first we knew the Lord we have had a desire to dwell in his house for ever. W 7/1/35

December 10            (156)

There shall come a Star out of Jacob, and a Sceptre shall rise out of Israel.—Num. 24:17.

The word “star” means prince, one of the titles given to the beloved Son of God. “The day star [shall] arise in your hearts.” (2 Pet. 1: 19) This would mean Christ Jesus, the Morning Star, coming to the temple in power and in glory. It was to that time the apostle Paul manifestly referred, when he wrote: “Henceforth there is laid up for me a crown of righteousness, which the Lord, the righteous judge, shall give me at that day; and not to me only, but unto all them also that love his appearing.” (2 Tim, 4: 8) When Christ Jesus appeared at the temple and those who love his appearing were watching and waiting for his coming, the hearts of such would be devoted to him and his kingdom. Then, greater light would come to them, and that is when the crowns are assigned to the faithful who enter the temple, W 7/15/35

December 11            (216)

He sent his word and healed them, and delivered them from their destructions.—Ps. 107: 20.

Some who have been turned aside by reason of looking to foolish, human leaders for counsel and advice, when seeing their error, repent and cry unto the Lord, and he hears them. Satan placed snares and pitfalls. Into such the foolish fell. There they remain unless they repent and cry unto the Lord. Those who do sincerely seek him receive his mercy. Those who turn from creature worship and turn wholly to the Lord and become diligent in doing his will receive his blessings, and then they truly sing: “Bless the Lord, 0 my soul, and forget not all his benefits: who forgiveth all thine iniquities; who heal-eth all thy diseases.” The privilege and duty of such recovered ones is to become active in proclaiming Jehovah's message to others. “Oh that men would praise the Lord for his goodness.”—Vs. 21. W 9/1/35

December 12            (266)

He that hath my commandments, and keepeth them, he it is that loveth me. (John 14: 21) This is the love of God, that we keep his commandments.—1 John 5: 3.

Love for God means an unstinted, undivided, wholehearted and complete devotion to Jehovah. A creature cannot be faithful to God part of the time, and devote himself to the Devil and his organization the other part of the time, and expect to receive or receive Jehovah’s approval. There is not a scripture to warrant the conclusion that the “great multitude” may show a halfhearted devotion to Jehovah and then receive the blessings of life. There is no reason to conclude that God has a back door into heaven and that a creature can show some devotion to Jehovah and then at the last moment on earth seek the Lord and enter the back door into heaven. Such a position is a reproach upon Jehovah’s name. If one loves God he proves it by keeping the commands the Lord gives. W 8/15/35

December 13            (304)

But he answered and said, Verily I say unto you, I know you not. Watch therefore, for ye know neither the day nor the hour.—Hiatt. 25:12,13. These last words refer undoubtedly to the appearing of the Lord Jesus at the temple. After this great event has taken place those claiming to be children of God but who are not approved by the Lord at his judgment not only fail to see that the Lord has come to his temple, but scoff at the announcement of that great truth and refuse the prophecies which God is unfolding to those that love him. They decline to participate in the work of declaring his kingdom and his vengeance. To all such the door is shut, and this condition of shutting the door does not wait until Armageddon. Not being permitted to enter the Lord’s house or temple, these foolish virgins must depart to their own place. They and the “evil servant” are one and the same class. W 10/15/35

December 14            (274)

They shall feed in the ways, and their pastures shall be in all high places. They shall not hunger nor thirst; neither shall the heat nor sun smite them —Isa 49: 9,10.

They no longer sit in darkness, neither are they hungry, but they are led and fed by Jehovah and his good Shepherd. The “high places” are the kingdom heights. Those of God’s organization shall be led, comforted and blessed by him and his elect servant. The “great multitude” is included in this prophecy, and not only they, but all those once in Babylon’s prisons and who are brought forth and made a part of God’s organization. Jehovah shows mercy toward those in Babylon who seek to find his provided way for their escape. Now, since he has built up Zion and those on his side recognize and appreciate that Jehovah and Christ Jesus are their Teachers and Shepherds, no more are “elective elders” or clergy permitted to act as teachers W 9/15/35

December 15            (186)

And the spirit of the Lord came upon him, and he went down to Ashkelon, and slew thirty men of them, and took their spoil, and gave change of garments unto them which expounded the riddle—Judg 14:19.

Samson paid his wager, but neither he nor others of God’s chosen people were impoverished or put to loss by so doing; but the Philistines, God’s enemies, did suffer loss for their deception practiced upon God’s people This shows God will duly recompense those who do violence to his people and despitefully use them, and this he will do in his own due time. Immediately after paying his wager Samson went away from “his wife” and “went up to his father’s house”, being righteously indignant at the treatment received at the hands of her and her people. Likewise the faithful of the Elijah period separated themselves from the false and unfaithful who had been induced into wrongdoing by “Philistine” influence. W 11/15/35

December 16            (58)

The LORD shall fight for you, . . . Speak unto the children of Israel, that they go forward.-Ex. 14:14,15.

Jesus’ instruction: "When they persecute you in this city, flee ye into another,” applied in the days of the apostles, because the day of vengeance of our God was not then due to be declared. Now "the Son of man [is] come”, and the day of vengeance must be declared, and now there is no backing down of God’s people. Jehovah’s organization must be aggressive and militant and never hesitate to go forward, but remain firm always for the Lord, declaring the message of the kingdom, that they may continue to serve notice on the people that Satan’s organization will be completely wrecked at Armageddon. No longer are God’s people put in bondage and fear of what the Devil might do to them. Jehovah has sent them as his witnesses, and says to them: Obey, and "I will deliver thee and thou shalt glorify me”. W 10/1/35

December 17             (41)

Samson lay till midnight, and arose at midnight, and took the doors of the gate of the city . . . and put them upon his shoulders, and carried them up to the top of an hill that is before Hebron. — Judg. 16: 3.

Samson’s carrying the gates out of Philistia into the land of Judah magnified God’s power bestowed upon his faithful servant and dealt a stunning and humiliating blow to the Philistines’ pride. InA.D. 1914 the modern Philistines were the ones who were put to shame and had to crawl into their holes, when the World War broke. They had been saying another war could never be. Now it had come exactly as God’s faithful servants had declared it would. In 1914 they continued by His grace to present the Kingdom message, showing that the World War was evidence that the world had ended. Those who had faith in God and in his Word should have taken this evidence as conclusive proof that God was with the Watch Tower Society. The faithful ones stood firm. W 12/1/35

December 18            (196)

Thou art of purer eyes than to behold evil . . . Shall they therefore empty their net, and not spare con-' tvnually to slay the nations?—Hab. 1: 13,17.

By assuming and exercising their power the wicked for a time prosper even against those devoted to Jehovah; but let none of God’s anointed be discouraged. How would it be possible now to maintain one’s integrity toward God if one did not suffer persecution at the hands of the unrighteous? Satan’s dupes under' Gog’s leadership continue to oppress the righteous. The dictators of the nations have given heed to the conspiracy of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy and other religious leaders, because they wanted to believe that they, the leaders, had the privilege to punish those Who declare Jehovah’s righteousness and kingdom. The truth of God’s Word now being declared spoils the religionists’ pastures, and sounding this message is annoying to the clergy. W 5/1/35

December 19            (252)

The virgins her companions that follow her shall be brought unto thee. With gladness and rejoicing shall they be brought: they shall enter in

to the King’s palace.—Ps. 45:14,15.

These virgins picture the Jonadabs, the ones who are the companions or helpers of the bride class on the earth, represented in the remnant on earth today. These rejoicing ones are the same ones as have received the mark in their forehead, and no more do they sigh and cry, but rejoice in the Lord. (Ezek. 9- 4) With rejoicing they are brought to the Lord Jesus as his “other sheep”. (John 10: 16) With joy they serve the Lord “day and night”, or continuously, and not only five hours a week. (Rev. 7:15) They do not enter heaven, but while the bride class, represented in the faithful remnant, is still on earth, these companions are privileged to work with and assist the bride class in the palace or temple service. W 10/15/35

I have been a Nazarite unto God from my mother’s womb: if I be shaven, then my strength will go from me, and I shall become weak. — Judg. 16:17. Samson told Delilah how he might become weak, like any other man. This foretold what the Samson class did say: “We are fully devoted to Jehovah; but if it can be made to appear we are against earthly governments and hence disloyal or seditious, and if, in order to clear ourselves of such charge and reproach, we can be forced to cease preaching the Kingdom gospel whenever the governments demand that we do so, then we shall show our fear of reproach from men and shall become weak, like any other man.” The Samson class are plainly distinguishable from other human creatures by their uncompromising devotion to God and by their willingness to bear the reproaches that come upon Christ’s true followers. If they should avoid such reproaches, then in the world’s eyes they would be like other men. W 12/15/35

December 21            (242)

Thy bow was made quite bare; the oaths to the tribes were a sure word [(margin) sworn were the chastisements (rods') of thy word]. Selah. Thou didst cleave the earth with rivers.—Hab. 3: 9, A.R.V.

Jehovah has given “oaths of chastisements” (Roth.) in giving his Word on oath into the hand of Christ Jesus, whom he has commissioned to bring punishment upon all of Satan’s organization. Not only are his oaths a double assurance to the true followers of Christ Jesus, but they are also “the judgment written” against the enemy organization, which Jehovah’s remnant sing forth at the fulfillment of these oaths or judgments. To the twelve tribes of spiritual Israel, which is “the Israel of God”, Jehovah has declared his Word and has bound it with his oath, by which it is impossible for him to lie. Therefore the hope of his remnant is made strong, and this causes them to sing forth with joy, W 6/15/35

December 22            (116)

He maketh the storm a calm, so that the waves thereof are still. Then are they glad because they be quiet; so he bringeth them unto their desired haven. — Ps. 107: 29,30.

These have desired a haven of rest. Jehovah will guide them to it. Before the Armageddon storm breaks forth in all of its fury the Jonadab multitude must set out on the way to the haven God has for them. This they must do by taking their stand unequivocally on Jehovah’s side. Their journey begins on a troubled sea of ungodly people. In the face of opposition they push forward that they might be found in a plaee of safety. Only Jehovah, by Christ Jesus, can guide them and bring them alive through the storm to their desired haven. “For the elect’s sake” Jehovah shortens the trouble, which began in 1914, to enable the witness to be given that the people of good will, the great multitude, may he gathered and brought into “their desired haven”. W 9/15/35

December 23            (301)

To open the blind eyes, to bring out the prisoners from the prison, and them that sit in darkness out of the prison house. — Isa. 42:7.

The first prisoner company brought out of restraint to Satan’s organization were made the Lord’s "faithful and wise servant”, to whom he committed the kingdom interests on earth, and who were made Jehovah’s witnesses. These were prisoners until 1919, when they were loosened by the Greater Cyrus, Christ Jesus, Jehovah’s elect servant. Then these loosened ones became of The Servant. This Mordecai and Naomi class are not all the prisoners; there are others, since it is written that the entire world lies under the wicked one. Next there must be brought forth a class pictured by Ruth and Esther. Then these also must be used by the Greater Cyrus in bringing others out of the prison house of Babylon. All of this work must be done before Armageddon. W 9/1/35

December 24             (47)

Five lords of the Philistines . . . they were to prove Israel by them, to know whether they would hearken unto the commandments of the Lord.—Judg. 3:3,4.

The Philistines had been brought out of Egypt and into Palestine; thus they pictured a people who outwardly appeared to have come out of the world* as Egypt pictured the world, and which people professed to worship God but in fact are children and worshipers of the Devil. They are the ones hypocritically pretending to serve God and who bitterly oppose and persecute God’s true people. Indisputable historical evidence proves beyond all doubt that the Philistines pictured particularly the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. As God permitted the Devil to remain and continue to exercise power over man, so God left the Philistines in Palestine as a test to the Israelites and thereby afforded opportunity for them to prove their integrity toward Jehovah, and this by steadfastly resisting the Philistines. W 11/1/35

December 25             (64)

Upon this rock I will build my church; and the gates of hell shall not prevail against it.—Matt. 16: 18.

Jehovah God is the Great Rock. (Deut. 32:4) Daniel 2: 44, 45 discloses that out of Jehovah’s organization he takes a “stone” or “rock”, his anointed King, Christ Jesus, and this Stone grows to a mountain, and fills the earth and rules the whole world. The rock that Jesus mentioned is The Christ, whom Jehovah had selected and anointed and to whom he has delegated the work of building His royal house, the church of God. Jehovah, the Father of the Lord Jesus Christ, has exalted him above all and “hath put all things under his feet, and gave him to be the head over all things to the church, which is his body”. (Eph. 1: 22, 23) It is Christ Jesus who builds up the church and who is its foundation: “in whom all the building, fitly framed together, groweth unto an holy temple in the Lord.” W 2/1/36

December 26            (278)

Instead of thy fathers shall he thy children, whom thou mayest make princes in all the earth.—Ps. 45:16.

Instead of the earthly fathers of Christ Jesus these faithful men become the children of Christ Jesus, because he, by the will and commandment of Jehovah God, becomes the Father or Life-giver of men and therefore is called “The everlasting Father”. Jesus had no heavenly ancestors, no fathers in heaven, because Jehovah is his sole Father there. Jehovah raised him from the dead and exalted him to highest place in his organization, and makes Jesus “The everlasting Father” to those onee his earthly fathers, and to all those who on earth ever receive life everlasting. These fathers the Lord in due time raises out of death, and makes them visible rulers or princes of his kingdom on earth, and all of Jehovah’s organization is one grand harmonious organization, giving service and praise for ever to Jehovah’s name. W 10/15/35

December 27            (276)

For the Lamb, which is in the midst of the throne, shall feed them, and shall lead them unto living fountains of waters: and God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes.—Rev. 7:17.

Tears were shed because of reproaches brought upon Jehovah’s holy name, and which were brought there by the false persons who claimed to be God’s servants. The honest ones shed tears because they could not understand why men who profess to serve God reproach his holy name at the same time. Upon receiving the message of truth and learning that Satan has ever reproached Jehovah’s name and that all his servants have, by fraud, deceit and false pretenses, brought reproach upon that holy name, and that soon Jehovah will vindicate his name by and through his kingdom under Christ, the tears of these honest ones have ceased to flow; in the place thereof joy has filled their hearts, their faces have appeared glad, and they have fully turned to the Lord. W 8/15/35

December 28            (200)

Mine ei/e also shall see my desire on mine enemies; and mine ears shall hear my desire of the wicked that rise up against me.—Ps. 92:11.

Modern Philistines ‘deal by revenge and with a despiteful heart’, and the Lord’s faithful people continue to suffer. Many have wondered why God permits this. Let hone of the faithful be disturbed. Let all who love God and Christ Jesus now fully rest in faith and with greater determination than ever go on with the Lord’s service, knowing this, that God’s announced purpose to rise up and smash the enemy will soon take place and every one who continues faithful to the Lord amid all these trials shall receive the everlasting blessing of Jehovah. Surely Jesus had in mind just such times when he said: “He that shall endure unto the end, the same shall be saved.” Our God, whom we serve, will save and deliver his people to the honor and glory of his name. W 2/1/36

December 29            (215)

The time would fail me to tell of . . . Samson, and . . . the prophets; who through faith . . . out of weakness were made strong, waxed valiant in fight.—Heb. 11: 32-34.

Samson received Jehovah’s approval because of his faithfulness. Likewise the Samson class, continuing faithful unto death, receive Jehovah’s final approval. Some of the remnant will survive Armageddon. Therefore the Samson picture necessarily shows and emphasizes faithfulness of Jehovah’s witnesses unto death, and not the particular time or manner in which they shall die. No one can properly reproach Samson and the record made by him. His record could only picture a class faithfid and true to God even unto death; and that is exactly what the remnant must and will be. No reproach can properly be placed against them for the course they are taking in Jehovah’s service, because they are his servants, doing his will, though now objects of abuse. W 1/1/36

December 30            (285)

For as in Mount Perazim will Jehovah arise, as in the vale of Gibeon will he be stirred, to do his work

—foreign is his work, and to perform his task— strange is his task. — Isa. 28:21, Rotherham.

Armageddon is the work of Jehovah. He will do his work at Armageddon by the hand of Christ Jesus. The fact, however, that he speaks of "his work, his strange work”, "his act, his strange act," indicates two distinctive parts of Armageddon: (1) That which accomplishes the destruction of hypocritical religionists; and (2) that which accomplishes complete destruction of all of Satan’s organization. As a whole Armageddon is the work and act of Jehovah, .but that part thereof which he says is "his strange work”, "his strange act,” refers to something very strange to many creatures. The final conflict would not -appear strange, for all professed Christians have been informed by the Scriptures and otherwise of Armageddon as one great time of trouble. W 2/1/36

December 31            (119)

The Lord is on my side; I will not fear: what can man do unto me?—Ps. 118: 6.

Now the faithful, obedient ones have come to appreciate the great truth that all the things in the prophecies were written by holy men of old who were moved upon by God‘s holy spirit and that these things "were written aforetime . . . for our learning, that we through patience and comfort of the scriptures might have hope”. There is now no occasion for any of God’s remnant to have any doubt as to the fact that they are in the right way or to be in fear of what man or devil may do unto them. The faithful ones know that they are on the right side; and abiding in the secret place of the Most High they know that all things God will cause to work together for their own good. Jehovah is feeding them upon the food convenient for them, and they are boldly singing the praises of Jehovah and his King. W 7/15/35

The Headquarters of the

WATCH TOWER BIBLE & TRACT SOCIETY and the International Bible Students Association are located at

117 Adams Street, Brooklyn, N. Y_s

Address of the Society's branches In other countries:

Argentina, Calle Cramer 4555, Buenos Aires Australia, 7 Beresford Rd., Strathfield, N.S.W. Belgium, 66 Rue de 1’Intendant, Brussels Brazil,        Av. Celso Garcia 951,        Sao Paulo

British Guiana, Box 107, Georgetown, Demerara Canada,        40 IrwmAve.,        Toronto 5, Ont.

Chile, Avda. Buenos Aires 80, (Blanqueado) Santiago China,              Box 1903,              Shanghai

Czechoslovakia, Tylova ul. 16, Praha-Smlchov Denmark, Sondre Fasanvej 54, Copenhagen-Valby England, 34 Craven Terrace, London, W. 2 Estonia, Suur Tartu - Maantee 72-3, Tallinn Finland,        Vainamolsenkatu 27,        Helsinki

France,. 129 Faubourg Poissonniere, Paris IX Germany,        Fuchsberg 4/5,        Magdeburg

Greece.           Lombardou 44,           Athens

Hawaii          1228 Pensacola St.,          Honolulu

India,           40 Colaba Rd,           Bombay 5

Jamaica,               151 King St.,        Kingston

Japan, 58 Ogikubo, 4-Chome, Suglnamlku, Tokyo Java,         Post Box 59,         Batavia Centrum

Latvia,           Cesu lela 11 Dz. 25,           Riga

Lithuania,     AukStaiSiu g-ve 8, b. 1, Kaunas

Luxemburg,       37 Eicherberg,        Luxemburg

Mexico, Calzada de Melchor Ocampo 71, Mexico, D.F. Netherlands, Camplaan 28,          Heemstede

New Zealand,          Box 252,          Wellington

Norway,          Inkognitogaten 28, b.,          Oslo

Philippine Islands, 1132 Rizal Ave., Santa Cruz, Manila Poland,           Rzgowska ul 24,           Lodz 7

Rumania, Str Crisana No 33, Bucurestl 2 South Africa, Boston House. Cape Town Spain,          Calle de Cadarso 11,          Madrid

Straits Settlements, Post Box 566, Singapore Sweden, Luntmakaregatan 94, Stockholm Switzerland,        Allmendstrasse 39,        Berne

Trinidad, B.WJ^       Box 194.       Port of Spain

West Africa, 71 Broad St, Box 695, Lagos, Nigeria Yugoslavia,       Visegradska ul. 15,        Beograd

Please write direct to the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society at the above addresses for terms on our literature in those countries Some of our publications are printed in 73 languages.